Hfe^2^Si«fc..IS^ ';'»fe ^ / f \ ;®^^ ^> A /*\ T13 WITH A COPIOUS ^pnta)c ano f^rajcis. BY MOSES STUART PROF. OF SACRED LITERATURE IN THEOL. SEM. AT ANDOVER. 1821. ANDOVER : FLAGG AND GOTJLD PaiNTRRS, BISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : District Clerk'' s Office. Be it remembered, that on the third day of March, A. d. 1821, and in the forty fifth year of the independence of the United States of America, Flagg Si Gould of the said district, have deposited in this office the title of a book, the ris;ht whereof they claim as proprietors, in the words followins;, viz. — " A Hebrew Grammar with a copious Syntax and Praxis. By Moses Stuarti, Prof, of Sacred Literature in the Theol. Seminary, at Andover." In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States of America, entitled " An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mention- ed :" and also to an Act entitled, " An act supplementary to an Act, entitled, An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times there- in mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, en- graving and etching historical, and other prints." Jno W Davis S Clerk of the District J NO. w. UAVis, ^ ^j. Massachusetts. W'^'' PREFACE. The science of Hebrew Grammar has, within a few years, been greatly improved by the labours of several distinguished Oriental scholars, on the continent of Europe. The first Hebrew Grammars, published by Christians, were modeled after those of the Jewish Rabbins, from whoni the knowledge of the Hebrew language was received. Among these, the most distinguished was Reuchlin's Rudi- menta Linguce Hebraeae, a. d. 1506, which was used by most learners of the Hebrew, until the publication of Mun- ster's Grammar, a. d. 1556. The latter continued in general use, until Buxtorf published his Thesaurus, (a. d. 1609), Avhich so far excelled all other works of the kind, then extant, that it came into almost universal use. A most important addition was made to the Syntax of the Hebrew language, by the noble work of Glass, styled Philologia sa- cra, and published at Leipsick in a. d. 1623. In 1679, Alting, at Grbningen, published his Fundamenta punctationis lingum sandce; and in 1696, Danz, at Jena, his Literator Ebraeo-Chaldaeus. Both works were constructed upon the principles of Buxtorf ; and for more than half a century, they guided the Hebrew studies of Holland and Germany. In 1737, appeared the great work of Albert Schultens, Professor at Ijcyden, entitled Institutiones ad fandammta linguae Hebraeae, in which the kindred languages, but spe- cially the Arabic, were made to contribute to the illustra- tion of the Hebrew. In the steps of Schultens followed IV PREFACE. Schroeder, at Groningen, a. d. 1766, in his Instituiiones ad Jundanienta linguae Hebracae. Storr, Vater, Weckherlin, and Jahn have, more recently, distinguished themselves in the department of Hebrew Grammar.* But the most important work, which has ever appeared on this subject, is the larger Hebrew Grammar of Gesenius, Professor of Theology at Halle, published in 1817, and containing about 900 pages. In tliis work, the whole in- terior of Hebrew Grammar has received a new arrange- ment, and a multitude of dark places been illuminated. The publication of it has made a new era in this department; and it leaves but little to expect from further improvement, except ip some of the details Avhich minute observation may correct, and some arrangements of matter which may be rendered more conspicuous. Something in both of these respects has been attempted in the following pages. The present work originated from the wants of the Seminary, with w^hich the Compiler is connected. His duty led him to write Lectures on Hebrew Grammar; and his wishes to render the young men, who are placed under his instruction, all the assistance in his power in learning the Hebrew language, led him to make use of all the helps in the department of Hebrew Grammar, which w^ere within his reach. The repeated requests of his pu- pils, that he would publish a Grammar ; united with his own desire that the Hebrew students, in general, of his na- tive country might enjoy an opportunity of access to what has been lately accomplished, in order to facilitate the study of the Hebrew, and with the hope that his work may contribute somewhat to lighten the labours of Oriental * More than six hundred Hebrew Grammars have been published, most of which are either imitations or abridgments of the authors above noted. PREFACE. study, and remove some of the difficulties, which are the subject of common complaint, were the motives which led him to publish the following sheets. He has spared no pains to render the work as complete as was in his power. He owes it to himself!, however, to say, that as he could not remit the usual duties of his office, and has had to struggle with imperfect health, he has not been able to make it so complete in all respects, as he hopes to do at some future day, should Providence permit. He flatters himself, still, that nothing very important will be found wanting; as the substance of Gesenius' great work is in- corporated in it. In regard to the plan of the work, he does not profess to be a mere translator of Gesenius, whose Grammar is too large for common use ; but he has adopted the general method of this writer, as his model. He has made a dili- gent use of him, for the purpose of information. In some cases he has seen reason, as he believes, to differ from him, specially in regard to arrangement ; but not in any impor- tant matter. Whoever will take the trouble to compare, will find much fuller Paradigms of Nouns, and somewhat fuller of Verbs, in the present work. The Hebrew Accents are treated here with much more particularity, and in a different manner from that of Gesenius. The rules that respect the regulation of the tone-syllable, and which lie scattered over the whole work of Gesenius, and are so very vague in most Hebrew Grammars, he has embodied in one Section, for the convenience of the learner, and en- deavoured to render them more complete, than any to which he has had access. The tables of Suffix-pronouns are more complete, and as he trusts, more conspicuously arranged, than will be found in most Hebrew Grammars. Section 129, which exhibits the forms of Hebrew nouns, VI PREFACE. will be found to depart, in respect to arrangement, in a very considerable degree from that of Gesenius, by which the labour of the student will be much facilitated, and the diiferent kinds of forms and their respective Roots, render- ed very easy and obvious. Other lesser changes in regard to method, and in not a few cases in regard to the com- pleteness of rules, may be found, if any one will take the pains to make the comparison. He makes this statement merely to show, that he has not spared any pains in his power, to render the work as complete as he could ; but by no means to detract from the distinguished merit of Gesenius' Avork, which is above all praise, and which has left all that have preceded it, in this department, at a very great distance behind. Occasional errors in the printing of the work, (as in all works of this nature,) were unavoidable. What could be done, has been done to prevent them. After all, to pre- vent them wholly was impossible. The types, many of which are necessarily very slender, break off occasionally in striking off the sheets, and occasionally draw out. In most cases, where a vowel or letter is found wanting it was caused in this Avay. All the errors which have been detected, are noted at the end of the book ; and Avhich, though they may seem numerous, will not be found very important. A few Addenda, which the use of the Gram- mar by a Class, before it was completed, has suggested, and specially, which the composition of the Praxis has sug- gested to the writer, are also printed ; as he had rather confess any defects in the work, and make all the amends for them in his power, than by neglecting both Errata and Addenda^ to assume the appearance of believing that his work is perfect, or of desiring that others should believe it to be so. PREFACE. VII It may be proper to state here, that in the first part of the work, where the tone-syllable is marked, the per- pendicular accent (-!-) is used for this purpose; but when the Paradigms of the Verbs were set up, it was found that this Accent would interfere with the Vowels in the line above, in such a way as to perplex the learner. It was therefore abandoned, and instead of it, (— ) or (-^) was used, in the rest of the work. The method of other Grammarians is followed, in the printing of the Syntax, who usually omit the Accents, because the examples are all taken from the Bible, where the accentuation may be found. In the, first part of the work, the euphonic accent Me- thegh is commonly inserted, between a composite Sheva and the preceding vowel. The object of this was, to en- able the beginner to separate more readily the vowel from the Sheva. As the work advances, the Methegh is com- monly omitted. In correcting the proof-sheets of the work, the author received important assistance from his friend, Mr. J. W. GiBBS, who in a very obliging manner revised most of them with great care. He earnestly wishes the same gentleman might be induced to undertake a translation and republication of Gesenius' Manual Hebrew Lexicon, which is a new and abridged edition of his original work, first published in tAvo volumes octavo. The abridgment is made by Gesenius himself, for the use of Schools and Colleges, and is adapted, in a peculiar manner, to the wants and wishes of learners. The writer cannot refrain from the pleasure of adding, that the translation and republication of such a work, is an un- dertaking for which Mr. Gibes is peculiarly qualified, both from his habits of assiduous study, and from his fundamental knowledge of the German in which the work is written, and of the Hebrew with its cognate Dialects. Vm PREFACE. The delay of Gesenius' Hebrew Thesaurus in Latin, to be published at some future time not yet ascertained, in two large volumes octavo, renders a work of the kind just mentioned the more desirable for Hebrew students in the United States. The Thesaurus will be better adapted to those, who have made progress in the study of the He- brew, than to those who are beginners. Besides, a Lexi- con of a foreign language in our vernacular tongue, is al- ways most useful and acceptable to those, who are learning that language. To the present Grammar is appended a Praxis^ which is constructed upon a peculiar plan ; and Avhlch, it is be- lieved, will save teachers and learners of the Hebrew, much time and perplexity. Such persons as wish to learn the Hebrew language, and cannot procure any instructer, will derive peculiar assistance from the use of the Praxis, as it Avlll give them, in substance, what a teacher would orally communicate. At the request of his pupils, the writer has published, in a separate pamphlet, (but in a uniform style so that it may be bound with the Grammar,) Dissertations by Jahn, Michaells, Gesenius, and Wyttenbach, those consummate masters of Hebrew and Greek, on the usefulness and best method of studying these languages ; which he hopes may serve to excite among our young men a desire to pursue these studies, and direct the efforts of both teachers and learners in our country. THE AUTHOR. Andover, Theological Seminary, March 1, 1821. CONTENTS. Sect. page. INTRODUCTION. 1 Of the Oriental, or Shemitish languages ... 1 2 Name and origin of the He- brew language ... 5 3 Historic sketch of the Hebrew language .... 6 4 Shemitish letters, or written characters .... 15 5 Hebrew Characters . . 16 6 Manner of Writing . . 17 7 Hebrew Vowels ... 18 8 Hebrew Accents ... 22 9 Writers on the Hebrew lan- guage, or who illustrate it . 24 ORTHOGRAPHY. 10 Alphabets ... 26 11 Alphabet; ancient number and order of letters . . 29 12 Present number of Heb. letters 30 13 Names of the letters . .31 14 .Alphabet; final letters . ib. 15 dilated letters . 32 16 unusual letters . ib. 17 ■ distinction of simi- lar letters . . 33 18 sounds of the letters 34 19 division of the letters 38 20 Vowels ; preliminary obser- vations . . 39 21 — names, classification, sound, quantity . 41 22 orthography . . 45 23 relation to the Quiescents 46 24 orthography in connex- ion with Vowel letters Qamets Hhateph 26 Sheva 27 Pattahh furtive 28 Daghesh forte 29 lene Sect. pf^g^' 30 Mappiq and Raphe . . 60 31 Methegh .... 61 32 33 Maqqeph Accents . 63 64 34 35 36 Tonic power as signs of Interpunction as signs of Cantillation ib. 65 68 37 Critical marks and Masoretic notes . 69 38 Rules for reading Hebrew ib. Forms and Inflexions. Changes of Consonants. 39 Commutations of the Conso- nants with each other . 75 40 Grammatical commutations of several Consonants . 76 41 Assimilation of Consonants . 77 42 Consonants dropped . . 78 43 added to words . 79 44 Transposition of Consonants . 80 45 Consonants which reject Da- ghesh . . , . .81 46 Gutturals .... 82 47 Quiescent letters ; laws of quiescence ... 83 48 — laws in regard to the preceding Vowel • 85 49 commutation and omission . . 86 50 Apocope & Paragoge 87 T'owel changes. 51 Vowels immutable 88 52 mutable . 90 53 — general laws of muta. tion , ib. 54 Long V^owels shortened . 91 55. Short Vowels lengthened . 92 56 Vowels dropped . 93 57 transposed . . 94 X CONTENTS. Sect. page. | Seel. page. 58 Vowels ; change of Class in 100 on Hithpael 150 Comniutation . 95 59 rise of new ones . 95 101 Verbs Guttural . 150 60 changes from Euphony 98 102 C Guttural 151 61 Punctuation of the Aiticle, of Notes on Paradigm Prefix Conjunctions, Pre- 103 152 positions, and Hk interro- 104 2? Guttural 153 gative 99 105 ^ Guttural 154 62 Accentuation of words 103 63 Radical words in Hebrew. 108 106 Irregular Verbs . 155 64 Grammatical construction of 107 Verbs J^o . . . . 156 the Hebrew language 111 108 Notes on Paradigm ib. 65 Kindred dialects, mixed with 109 13 ... . 157 the Hebrew . ib. ' 1 /-ii 66 Of the Article . 112 110 111 •'S, I. Class -IS, II. Class 158 159 67 Personal Pronouns 113 112 12, III. Class 160 68 Pronouns ; verbal Suffixes 114 69 Possessive Pron. or noun Suff. 117 113 ■ID, • . 161 70 Pronouns, suffixes to Particles 120 114 Notes on Paradigm 162 71 demonstrative 122 72 relative • ib. 115 j,-y, Ayin doubled . ib. 73 interrogative ib. 116 117 Notes on Paradigm -iS) • • • . 164 . 167 Verbs. 118 Notes on Paradigm . 17C 74 Verbs ; general Classification 123 t tift 75 Conjugations ib. 119 -':)... . 171 76 Kal . . . . 126 120 Nb . . . . ib. 77 Niphal ib. 121 Notes on Paradigm 17S 78 Pieland Pual 128 122 . i7f: 79 Hiphil and Hophal 80 Hithpael 129 ib. 123 1 »» • • • Notes on Paradigm 175 81 Unfrequent Conjugations 132 124 doubly anomalous . 17-; 82 Pluriliteral Verbs 134 125 Relation of Irregular Verb 83 Denominative Verbs ib. to each other . . 17£ 84 Verbs; Flexion . 134 126 Verba! Suffixes . . 18( 85 Ground-forms 86 Flexion of the Praeter 135 ib. Paradigms. 87 Forms of the Infinitive , 136 127 Par. I. Reg. Verb . 18^ II Verb e? Guttural . 18f the Future Tense 137 t 89 of the Imperative . 139 — III. Verb 2? Guttural 18' 90 of Participles ib. _ IV. Verb '4 Guttural . 181 91 parag. k. apoco. Futures 140 C\cy T „ 142 — V. Verb j: eye 70 f Pe fi^S mouth 80 ts Tsade ^i:s fish-hook 90 k Qoph qip ear 100 r Resh ■^TJn head 200 sh Shin I^P tooth 300 s Sin r'? th Tav in T cross, mark 400 §10. iDriental Zip^ahtts* Heb. Samar. Hebrew , Heb. Syriac Arabic alphabet. Coin-letter. Alphabet. 1 Alphabet. ^f A FV< r n S .9 ^ '2 2 ^ 5 1 y <^ Cs- n ^ 3" 1 7 O O 1 i: >(-A A n 01 & T ^ 1 O -? n ^ B<5> T 1 ^ D ^ n .M 2fc. a. •1 5 rrr -v^s D 1^ Lii 12 Z ±1 ^i) •1 3 « 3 D ^* a i ^ ^. 5 D ^ ^ /O 5? V 3 J 3 S ^ 14^ V*^ D O) P p PP 5? :;:^ c c "1 ^ <\(\ D Si i j23 S A3 ^ il^ MJ>. W CO ^ 5 ,, «J p c 3 n A X "1 ^ MA • t; Ji MA n z *3 S* 28 § 10. ALPHABETS. 1. In the first column of the Alphabet, on page 26, the final let- ters, which are unlike the medial or initial ones, are placed on the right hand of them. The student needs simpl}!- to be told here, that the letters Kaph, Mem, &c. are written in two ways. Comp. § 14. 2. In the second column, the representatives of the Hebrew let- ters there given, are, in general, the rnost common ; for which reason they are retained, rather than to introduce new ones. Departure, however, from the common custom, is sometimes necessary, on the plan adopted for representatives of Hebrew letters in this Grammar ; viz. that every different letter, as far as our alphabet admits, should have a distinct representative. The object of this is, to enable the reader of any represented word, (as extensively as is practicable,) to trace the original Hebrew letters. On this account, q is put for p, though it sounds like a hard k. So bh is made to represent Beth^ al- though it sounds as v. The Greek Spiritus, (. ' ) is used to denote Ayin, in order to distinguish it from Aleph, which has no representative. But D and z>. sounding alike, can be represented in our alphabet only by s. The same is the case with t3 and n =<• For a particular ac- count of the sound of each letter, see § 18. 3. The names of the letters, in the fourth column, are not to be pronounced according to English analogy, but agreeably to the sounds attached to the representatives of the Hebrew consonants, in the third column, and in § 12; and to those of the vowel-points, as given in § 21: i. e. Aleph is sounded as if written aw-lef ; Beth, as baith, &:c. The plan of preserving a uniform mode of representation, has occa- sioned some slight changes, from the more usual mode of writing some of these letters. When the student becomes able to compare the Hebrew column of the names of letters, with the names as writ- ten in the Roman letters, he will see the ground of all the ortho- graphical changes, which have been made. 4. The sixth column contains the most probable meaning of the names. About some of them there is not certainty ; and some are left untranslated, because no particular signification has, as yet, been rendered very probable. (See § 13.) 5. The seventh column contains the value of the Hebrew letters, used as the signs of numbers. For a more complete account of this subject, see Appendix A. 6. The alphabet on p. 27, presents the reader with a compari- son of the Hebrew, first with the Samaritan and old Hebrew Coin- § 11. ANCIENT NUMBER AND ORDER OP LETTERS. 29 letter J then, with the modern Syriac and Arabic letters. Compare §12. Id the Syriac, most letters of the alphabet have a slight variation from the form here presented, when they stand in the middle, or at the end of a word. This is also the case in the Arabic alphabet; but the variation is, in many cases, considerably greater than in Syriac. 7. In Syriac, there are only five written vowels, commonly ex- pressed thus; viz. Pethocho ('') = §.; Rebhotso ("")=: e ; Hhevot- so (^ ) = i ; Zeqopho (" ) = o ; Etsotso (* ) = u. The first three may stand above or below the line ; the last two above only. For the same vowels, there are also more ancient marks, of a diiferent form, used in some MSS. and printed books, either exclusively, or in conjunction with the above. There is no Sheva in Syriac ; and no Daghesh. 8. In Arabic there are only three written vowels ; viz. Fatah ( ' ) = a, e ; Kesre ( / ) = e, i ; and Dhamma ( ^ ) = o, u. There is no Sheva vocal ; Sheva silent is written thus, ( <=- ) and called Jesm. Daghesh is written over the letter thus, ( *" ) and called Teshdid. §11. Alphabet ; ancient number and order of letters. 1. The number of letters in the ancient Hebrew alphabet is clearly ascertained, from several poetic pieces in the Old Testament, the verses and distichs of which are arranged, in alphabetic order. (Ps. XXV, xxxiv, xxxvii, cxi, cxii, cxix, cxlv. Pro v. xxxi. 10, &c. Lam. i, ii, iii, iv.) This number was twenty-two;* no distinction being then made in writing between U3 Hpd uj.t The same was the ancient number in the Arabic alphabet, before the JVishi character was introduced, in the tenth century, by Eben Mokla. The same also is the number in the Syriac, Chaldee, and Samaritan alphabets; and very probably was, in the old Greek alphabet also, which came by Cadmus, from Phenicia. (See Appendix B.) * In Ps. XXV, xxxiv, and cxlv, one letter is omitted ; in Ps. xxxvii, ^ is re- peated and ^ omitted. t See alphabetic pieces, Ps. cxix. 161 — 168. Lam. ii. 21. iii. 61. iv. 21, and all the alphabetic Psalms. 30 § 12. PRESENT NUMBER OP HEBREW LETTERS. 2. The testimony respecting the original order of the letters is not uniform. In Lam. li, iii, iv, Ayin stands after Pe. The predom- inant testimony favours the common arrangement. (See Ps. cxix, cxi, cxii, cxlv. Prov, xxxi. 10, &ic. Lam. i.) § 12. Present number of Hebrew letters. 1. Before the Nishi character was introduced, (Cent. 10th,) into Arabic writing, the Arabians wrote only twenty-one or twenty-two letters, but sounded twenty eight ; i. e. they occasionally aspirated, sibilated, and hardened six or seven of their letters. Afterwards, the distinction was marked by a dot over or under these letters, and the alphabet was increased to twen- ty-eight letters. (Vide Alph. p. 27.) In the Hebrew alphabet, there is commonly reck- oned only one letter which is thus distinguished, viz. td and TO. Actually, however, the Hebrew alphabet, by means of the present diacritical signs, consists of twenty-nine letters ; which are as follows ; Let. Repr. Sound. Let. Repr. Sound. Let. Repr. Sound. ^ n hh hh & ph f n bh V D t t s P P s b b h y y s ts ts y g^ g D kh •h ? q k 5 g g 3 k k 1 r r km dh dh b 1 1 ID sh sh "S d d 12 m m to s s n h h 3 n n n th th 1 V V D s s n t t T z z :5>, ' cc §§ 13, 14. ALPHABET, NAMES, ETC. 31 2. There are no distinct alphabetic names for any of the letters, distinguished by the dot in them called Daghesh, § 28. The diacrit- ical sign over tD Sin, seems to be older than the Dughesh in the oth- er letters. (See Jerom on Gen. ii. 23. Amos vii.) 3. In the same manner, (by points above or below,) seven letters in the Arabic alphabet are distinguished, and differently sounded. But the letters thus affected, do not correspond throughout with the Hebrew. Vid. p. 27. In Hebrew and Arabic, 1, T2j and n are double, i. e. have two sounds. In Hebrew, but not in Arabic, ^3, y,, 3, © are double. In Arabic, but not in Hebrew, r, D. s? and 12 are double. The same number of letters is doubled in each language ; but a difference o( dialect led to a different selection. The Arabic wants Sainekh, and has only twenty eight letters. This illustration of the Hebrew, from a kindred language now extensively spoken, may tend to silence objections, raised against the above representation of the present Hebrew alphabet. § 13. JVames of the letters. 1. The names of the letters were for the most part, (probably throughout,) designations of sensible objects. But the resemblance must not be sought for in the present forms of the Hebrew letters, except in a few instances. Obviously, the old Hebrew character and the Samaritan are the best sources of comparison ; and here you may generally find satisfaction. 2. The fact, that the names of the Hebrew letters originally designated sensible objects, and that these names, apocopated, or slightly changed, have passed into all the cognate languages, and plainly into the Greek itself, satisfactorily demonstrates the great an- tiquity of Hebrew literature, and renders it highly probable, that the invention of letters must have taken place among those, who spoke the Hebrew language. § 14. Alphabet : final letters. 1. Originally, and when the Septuagint Version was made, there were no final letters, which differed from the common form. (§ 6. 3.) 32 §§ 15, 16. DILATED AND UNUSUAL LETTERS. After the scriptio continua was dropped, they appear to have been in- troduced, and are now found in all Hebrew MSS. and printed books. They are five ; viz. Common form 5 » h s it Final form 1 D 5] y These final forms stand also for 500 600 700 800 900 2. A final letter stands in the middle of a word, Is. ix. 6 ; common letters at the end, Neh. ii. 13. Job xxxviii. 1. §15. Alphabet : dilated letters. The Hebrews do not separate a word at the end of a line, as we do, when there is not space enough for it. To fill out this space, in printed books, several dilated letters are commonly used ; as Aleph >*, He J-j, Lamedh ^, A/e?ri tZ5, Tav n; and sometimes other letters. In MSS, the same expedient was often adopted ; but sometimes the space at the end was filled up with a part of the next word, left unpointed ; and sometimes with unmeaning letters, some appropriate sign being added to give the reader notice. (Eich. Einl. Th. II. s. 57. Ges. Heb. Lehrgeb, s. 10.) §16. Alphabet : unusual letters. These are the eflFectofRabbinic conceit and mysticism. They are (a) Literae majusculae ; as Til'j'] Ps. Ixxx. 16. (6) minusculae ; as Qji^'^l^^^ Gen. ii. 4. (c) suspensae ; as ^_^ia Ps. Ixxx. 14. id) inversae ; as 5JDC2 Numb. x. 35. According to the Rabbins, the S> suspensum in (c) means Christ sus- pended ; the fi minusctdtim in (6) means D!T^iN, Abraham, by trans- position of the letters, &c. Few of these are found in our Hebrew Bibles ; it is high time they were entirely omitted. § 17. DISTINCTION OF SIMILAR LETTERS. 33 § 17. Jlphabct : distinction of similar letters. Several letters bear a great resemblance to each other. These should be carefully compared, and the difference noted by the student, that in reading the one may not be taken for the other. SIMILARS. 1. Beth 2 DKaph 8. Zayin T ) Nun 2. Gimel ^ D Nun 9. Heth n n He 3. Daleth T Kaph 10. Heth nn Tav 4. Daleth 1 "1 Resh 11. Mem 12 D Tet 5. Vav 1 '> Yodh 12. Mem D D Samekh 6. Vav 1 ) Nun 13. Tsade Y^j? Ayin 7. Zayin la 1 Vav To aid the learner, it may be proper briefly to describe the dif- ference between these Similars. 1. i is distinguished from "d by the right angle, which its per- pendicular side makes with the strokes at the top and bottom of the letter: i is round at its corners instead of being angular. In some printed copies, 3 is distinguished from n only by the roundness of the corner at the bottom. 2. a is distinguished from D by having the stroke at the bottom united to the perpendicular, only by a small point ; in D the bottom stroke is united, without any variation of its magnitude. 3. "^ final descends below the line ; "l does not. 4. T is distinguished from "^ by making a right angle at the top, at Avhich part '^ is round, or obtuse. 5. 1 descends to the bottom of the line ; "^ does not. 6. "J final falls below the line ; 1 does not. 7. The top of t is continued a little farther to the right of the perpendicular thaa that of 1, the perpendicular line is small at the 5 34 § 18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 1 ' — top, inclines to the left, and afterwards becomes gibbous, which is not the case with i. 8 T dascends only to the line ; ^ final falls below it. 9. n has no space between its left side and the top ; Tl exhibits a small chasm. 10. n has a small dotted circle at the bottom of the perpendic- ular stroke on the left hand ; n has not this mark. 11. D opens at the top ; 72 at the bottom. 12. is almost round ; 'Q final is a square, or paralellogram. 13. i: is turned first to the right and then to the left, with the bottom parallel with the line; 5? turns to the left only. Final y either turns a little to the right, or falls perpendicularly. Note. The student will find it altogether the easiest method of making himself familiar with the distinctions between the Hebrew letters, and with the respective sounds of the letters, (as also of the Vovvels, § 21,) to practise writing them down, calling each by its name, aloud, and uttering the sound of it, as often as he writes it. Let this practice be persisted in, until all the vowels and consonants can be recognized with facility, and pronounced readily ; their dis- tinctions definitely described, and drawn with the pen, at pleasure, and their names familiarly called. In this way, the student learns to write Hebrew letters and vowels, (which he should by all means do,) and he fixes the names, forms, and sounds of all the written signs in- delibly upon his memory. § 18. Alphabet : sounds of the letters. 1. Preliminary Remarks. (a) All reasoning a jiriori, or from the analogy of the western languages, to deterraifie what were the sounds of the Hebrew letters, must be fallacious and inconclusive. How can we decide, from the difficul- ties which we find in uttering sounds attributed to Hebrew letters, that those sounds never existed; or that they never ought to have existed.'* § 18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. (6) The deep guttural sounds, and the many de- grees of distinction between gutturals, in the Hebrew, as attested by Jewish tradition, are by no means im- possible. For every gradation of gutturals in Hebrew, the Arabic, noio spoken, has nearly two. (See Arabic alphabet, in De Sacy or Vater's Arabic Grammar.) The number of guttural gradations, in any language, is simply a question of fact, to be settled by testimony, not by reasoning from analogy, or a priori, (c) The sources of testimony, in regard to the sounds of the Hebrew letters, are (l)The ancient Greek Trans- lations of the LXX, Aquila, Symmachus, &c, and also the version of Jerom ; the authors of which have endeavoured to express the Hebrew proper names, as they pronounced them. But here, let it be cautiously remembered, that the Greek and Latin alphabets were quite incompetent to convey all the sounds of the Hebrew, even supposing the authors themselves of these versions could pronounce them rightly. (2) The best source of testimony is the tra- ditionary pronunciation of the Jewish Literati. Cui- que in sua arte credendum est. But, (3) The analo- gy of the kindred languages, some of which are still living, is another source : and (4) The approximation of certain letters to each other, and the exchange of certain ones for each other, casts mutual light up- on both. 2. Remarks on those letters, the sound of which is doubtful, or attended with special difficulty, Aleph, ft, is generally represented by the spiritus lenis of the Greeks. It had a feeble sound; and at the beginning of a word, it seems to have been scarcely audible, like h in herbs, homme, &c. It resem- bles He, rj, but is lighter. We cannot make the nice distinction that 36 § 18. SOUNDS or the letters. is necessary to separate these gradations. N therefore is g-enerally treated, in practice^ as destitute of any sound. In theory, it is frequently to be considered as a vocal letter. The Hebrews doubtless sounded it. (§ 23.) Beth, i = bh, a sound somewhat uncertain ; at least very diffi- cult. In general, bh is sounded as our v. So the modern Greek sounds /3, at the present time. 2 =^ b, i. e. the Daghesh removes the aspirate. Gimel, ^ = gh, a sound generally considered uncertain, and unat- tainable. But the Arabians, in general, sound it as our j, (and this seems to be the genuine sound of o soft or aspirated ;) but some sound it as our^ hard. (De Sacy, Gram Ar. § 31.) -T ^=g" hard, as in 0^0. Both of these letters, by the common usage of Europe, are sounded as g hard, Daleth, n = dh, a sound very difficult for most Europeans, but very easy for the modern Greek and the English ; being exactly that of our th in that. "^ ::= d. Common usage sounds both as d. ife, 1^ = a feeble A, as in had. Vav, 1 = 7;, was a feeble letter, as it often coalesced with the vowel which preceded it, (§ 23 ;) or was dropped, (§ 24.) Our v, as commonly pronounced, seems to be rather too strong to represent it. In Arabic it sounds as our w ; probably its Hebrew sound was near to this, and so, like our w in low, sow, &.c, it often quiesced, when preceded by a vowel. (§ 23.) Zayin, T = 2^ or ds. In Arabic, Dsal and Ze correspond to it. Hheth, n = hh, in general a strong aspirate ; but at the begin- ning and end of words, the Seventy have sometimes represented it simply by a vowel, or a mere spiritus lenis. That usage in Hebrew assigned two gradations of sound to this letter, is probable ; as very different meanings are sometimes attach- ed to the words, in which n stands, which are the same, in respect to orthography. E.g. 'ncn to dig, and 'isn to blush ; p5n to destroy^ and b^n to take a pledge. Usage probably distinguished these words, in pronunciation. The LXX commonly represent it by y. The Arabians sound it in two different ways. (Vid. § 12. 3.) Tet. 13 = f, emphatic or hard, as in turn, n = <, soft. Yodh, ^ = y^ when a consonant ; but it was a feeble letter, being often lost in the sound of the vowel which preceded it. (§ 23.) Kaph, ':i = kh, the sound of which, we cannot certainly ascertain. § 18. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 37 Common usage sounds it as an aspirate, like the h in the French word heros. In the Septuagint, it is commonl}' ;f, seldom k. 3 = h. Samekh, o = s ; but whether it most resembled the s in say^ or that in pleasure^ it is difficult to decide. In the orthography of many words in Hebrew, D and t) are carefully distinguished ; in others they are confounded. In the Syriac and Arabic, there is but one letter for both these. The confounding of D and to is peculiar to the later Hebrew orthography. From these consideralions, it appears probable, that originally there was a nice distinction in the Hebrew, between these two letters, which afterwards disappeared, or was commonly disregarded, and never was carried into the cognate Syrian and Arabian dialects, which were of later origui. Originally, it is probable, XD was an intermediate sibilant between to and o ; as the Shemitish languages make nearly as many degrees of sibilants, as of aspirates. By common usage, at present, to and o are both sounded as our s in say. Aijin., y vve do not sound : not because we suppose the He- brews did not; but because we think the sound was probably such, that we cannot well imitate it. Grammarians have represented this letter by «■, gh^ ng, ngn., gn^ hh., hhh., hgh.^ Sic. The Arabians have two gradations of sound for it, viz. Mn, and Ghain. Probably the Hebrews may have occasionally had the same ; as the LXX have translated Inna?; rof.ioQQa, SiTy Fa^a., &c, while in other words they have given it no sound, as 'i^2> Eli, p^.^O^ y^f^iaXfic, &,c. It is more probable, that ihe ^yin of the Hebrews was in general a feeble letter, like the Arabic J.in, than that it resembled the Ghahi., or guttural gh of Arabia ; (a) Because it suffers contraction ; as ^2 tor ^ys, which no strongly sounding letter could do. (6) It is not unfrequently ex- changed for Jlleph : (See Ges. Lex. 4<.) (c) In the Syriac it is often quiescent, contracted, or dropped, id) Among the Persians, who have received the Arabic, it is passed over in silence. The sound of ng or ^?7, which many give to it, is palpably erroneous, as it makes a nasal of it, instead of a guttural. It is safest, perhaps, to pass it over, without sounding it ; as it seems to have had a feeble sound, not easily distinguished. Such is the practice of the best oriental scholars, of the present time. If however, the student would give an impetus to the vowel of y, (like that which he would give to the second a in A«-«-o?, if he should accent the second syllable.) he would probably approximate as near § 19. DIVISIONS OF THE LETTERS. to the proper sound of y, in general, as can be done, at the present day. (Vid. de Sacy Gram. Arab. § 43.) Jerom calJs 5> a vowel; which contradicts the notion of its being a strong guttural sound, among the Hebrews, (de Nomin. Heb.) Pe, a = ph, or/. In Arabic, it has only this sound. The LXX. generally represent it by g:. ; but sometimes by n, as nD2, naGy^a^ &c. 3 =/3. The old Greeks appear to have given this sound only to the letter. Tsade^ !22 = tD sibilated, i. e. ts ; as Zayin properly = i sibilated, i. e. ds. The Arabian gives two sounds to this letter. (§ 12. 3.) (^oph^ p = q. The difference between this letter and s = A;, is, that p is deeper, harder, and more guttural. iies/j, ^ r, not the common English r, but the rolling or French r. Hence it is often ranked, in Hebrew, among the Gutturals. 5/tin, 'ih = sh^ or s aspirated. For t3, see under o. Tav, n = th in think, n = ^, and is sounded like ta, but softer. §19. Mphabet: divisions of (he letters, 1. They are divided according to the organs used in pronouncing them, into (a) Gutturals, a n n V (b) Labials, S 1 12 3 (c) Dentals, r If ■a CO) ((Z) Linguals, -I D s 3 n (c) Palatals, :i ^ 'D ? "n approaches nearest to the guttural class. (§ 18. Resh.) 2. Six are called Aspirates ; viz, D, ^> "7? 5, D> D, (technically called nSS^^S, Bfghadh-Kephath,) because without a dot in them, or Daghesh, they are aspirated. Without the Daghesh, these are sometimes called mol- les, or raphatae ; with it, durae, or dagessatae. (§ 29.) § 20. VOWELS. 39 3. Four are called Qiiiescents ; viz. H, n, \ *>, (techni- callj, ^^T}}^^ Ehe-vl,) because, having a feeble sound, they sometimes coalesce with the vowel that precedes them, cfr lose their sound, in that of the vowel. (§ 23.) 4. To these may be added a division of four Liquids, viz. 7, D, J, 1, (as in Greek,) such divison being useful in a grammatical treatise. §20. Vowels : preliminary observations. 1. In the Greek, Latin, and present European lan- guages, the vowels are written in a line with the conso- nants. To each of these vowels, however, belong sev- eral sounds, although there arc no distinct marks to de- signate them. Intimate acquaintance with any language, enables the reader readily to distinguish these sounds, without the danger of erring. In the Shemitish lan- guages, the vowels are written, generally, above and be- low the consonants, some of them having only three vow- el marks, as the Arabic and the Sabaean ; the Syriac, five ; the Ethlopic, seven, (united with the consonants ;) and the Hebrew, ten ; or, if you number the Sheva's, fourteen. 2. No language possesses so many distinct vowel signs, as the Hebrew now exhibits. The reason of this may be traced to the anxiety of the Hebrew gramma- rians or Rabbins, to perpetuate the nice distinctions of the ancient pronunciation, which had been traditionally handed down to them. No living language needs so many vowel signs ; and none probably ever had so many. 40 § 20. VOWELS. 3. In Hebrew, as in Arabic, there are still only three classes of vowels, which have a near relation to each otiier, and are often commuted for each other. Before the present vowel marks were added to the Hebrew text, three of the quiescent letters, (vid. § 23.) viz, N, 1, and , were used, in many cases, as the signs of vowels ; because these letters, being; feeble, easily coalesced with the preceding vowels, and could not be distinguished from them. In the unpointed MSS. of the Hebrew, and in the dialects where no vowels are written, these three letters are frequently inserted in the text, for the sake of designating a vowel. The fact, that only three letters are thus used, serves to conlirm the statement made above, that there are only three classes of vowels. The letters it, 1, ^, in reference to this use, are sometimes called Quiescents, someiimes^Fowel-letters, (in distinction from Fowel-points,') and commonly, by the older grammarians, Matres lectionis, which means, that they produce or direct the right reading of the text. Note. "'inN, Aleph, He, Vav, and Yodh are all called Quiescents^ (§ 23,) because they frequently quiesce in the preceding vowel. But only ft, *), and ^ are Vowel-letters^ or Matres Lectionis. The technical words Ehevi and Q^uiescents are synonymous, and either comprehends N, tl, 1, '^, or ^TriJt. So the words Vowel-letters and Matres Lectionis are synonymous,^ and either means N, "), r (Vid. § 19. 3. § 20. 3. § 23.) In the following pages sometimes the one designation is used, and sometimes the other, as is most convenient. jtvvv 4. A great part of all the Arabic and Persian books, and nearly all the Syriac and modern Hebrew ones, are written without any vowel-points ; yet the habit of read- ing them makes it easy to read them with rapidity, as every day's experience demonstrates. §21. vowels: names, etc. 41 § 21. Vowels: names^ classification^ sound^ quantity. 1. The following table exhibits these in a connected view. /. Class : A sound; corresponding vowel letter, (n) Name. Form. Rep. by n n "on («) Y'^?. Qamets (b) nns Pattahh (c) Pattahh, short (d) bVjO Seghol w - ' Seghol, short "on = a in all. a = a in father. a = a in man. a — a in hate. e = a in climate. e //. Class : E sound ; corresponding vowel letter^ ('^) (f) '^'^IS Tseri ig) Sfghol (/i) Sfghol, short (i) ^yn Hhireq (j ) Hhireq, short 5 t:n "on m in gain, ai in ^«ew. c in 7nen. I in magazine I m pew. ///. C/a5s : U sound ; corresponding vowel letter, (l) (k)^ aVin Hholem (/) VpT\ Y^p Qamets Hhateph (m) p'1'^^ Shureq (n) Y^^R Qibbuts (o) Qibbuts 5/ior^ 6 in, Dn = m ^0. "^.^.'^. = in not. 6 ^n = 00 in moo??. u "2 = 00 in moo?i. u "on = u mfall. u 42 § 21. vowels: names, etc. In the second column, which exhibits the forms of the vowels, The letters i U, 1, '^, that appear there, are employed merely for the sake of shewing the leai'ner, how the vowels are placed in re- spect to the consonants ; whether above^ below, or in them. Shu- req, however, is never written without the Vav, in the bosom of which it is placed ; so that Vav is essential to the exhibition of it. The other vowel marks must be regarded, as designed to be em- ployed beneath or above any other letters of the alphabet, (agreea- bly to their position here,) as well as the letters employed in this column. In learning the sounds of the vowels, the student must divest him- self, at the outset, of the habit of giving English sounds to the repre- sentatives of the Hebrew vowels. The sound of Seghol, both long and short, in the first class of vowels, differs little from that of Seghol in the second class. There is nothing strange in the fact, that vowels of different classes should approximate to each other in sound. Seghol appears to be a kind of connecting link, between the first and second class of He- brew vowels. The common division of the vowels, in most Hebrew grammars, is into long and short. Long are Q,amets, Tseri, Hhireq with Yodh, Hholem, and Shureq : corresponding short ones, Pattahh, Seghol, Hhireq without Yodh, Qamets Hhateph, Qibbuts. This division is very incorrect in itself, (inasmuch as some of the short vowels are often long,) and embarasses the student exceedingly, in learning the fundamental principles of the vowel changes. The facts, that the commutations of the vowels are confined to those of the same classes ; that in analogy with three classes, there are three composite Shevas corresponding to them ; that there are three Vow el- letters, (§ 20 ;) and especially, that the Arabic, even at the present time, contains but three vowels, seem to establish the propriety of the division made here, beyond reasonable controversy. The older Jewish Grammarians made a triplex division : more modern ones, (and with them. Christian grammarians,) have divided them into long and short. Gesenius has revived the old division, and has brought forward such evidence of its propriety, and met with such general approbation, that it will, in all probability, be universally adopted. §21. VOWELS, NAMES, ETC. 43 2. Explanations. I. Class. (a) Qamets is always long. (6) Pattahh is long, only when in a pure syllable ;t as *\T}^ ba-hhen, put for 1lri3 ; or before a homogeneous qui- escent, as rii^'y^b liq-rath * Vid. § 23. (c) Pattahh is short in a miKed syllable ; as 1^ yadh; iS'^tJ mal-ko; t)'^^:^ 'am-mim.* (d) Seghol is long, only when it stands in a pure syl- lable ; as lD'^"inn he-ha-rira, instead of tD'^inn : so be- fore a quiescent, as nj^5!2t]r] titn-tse-na ; Ji'^5 ge.* (e) Seghol is short, in a mixed syllable; as iCp.'l.'^. yedh-khem ; "^V^H hebh-li.* //. Class. (y*) Tseri is always long. ( 0-, h) Seghol, as above, in respect to quantity. (Vid. Appendix D. 5.) {i,j) Hhireq, with Yodh expressed or understood after it, is long :J it is short, only in a mixed syllable, without such Yodh. t A pure syllable is one which ends with a vowel or quiescent letter, as a 6a, N^ ra ; a mixed syllable is one which ends in a conso- nant, as Vd kol ; or two consonants, as isiljp qesht. * Probably shorty in a pure syllable, before a composite Sheva ; as iHTpy"^ yd-O'se ; ?iTl;5J2 ne-^se ; perhaps short in Segholate-nouns, as •ny'a na-dr ; ^!:53 me-lekh. This is, however, doubtful. (App. D. 4.) I In a very few cases of the later Hebrew, the Yodh appears in short syllables ; as sibjP'^T ziq-ldgh. 44 § 21. VOWELS, NAMES, ETC. ///. Class. ih) Hholem is always long. (0 Qamets Hhateph is always short. [See § 25.] (??i) Shureq is long.* (n, 0) Qibbiits, or the figure (•., ), is long in a pure syl- lable ; and short, only when in a mixed syllabic, to which 1 does not belong. Vid. App. D. 3. In regard to the first class of vowels ; though Seghol is put among them, it can hardly be considered as originally and properly belonging there. Perhaps, in every case, in which it belongs to this class, it ought to be considered merely as vicarious ; or a euphonic expedient to give a peculiar tone to the (t) or (-) sound. Thus D'^'nlnr: is put for n"'-ir!in; na for rMz; ri:xi:^n for in:Nj:7Dn; Y?:a for ^^r^o ; D!D"P for DID"!;;;, &c. As usage, however, has put Seghol both into the first and second Classes of vowels, it is most con- venient to consider it as belonging to both. 4. The vowels in each of these classes are very fre- quently commuted for each other, and have a mutual correspondence as longer and shorter vowels : but this commutation and correspondence is confined, nearly with- out exception, to the respective classes. This shows, that the vowels of each class resemble, or approximate to- wards each other, i. e. belong to the same genus. The classification appears to be grounded, therefore, upon the laws of the vowel-system. (See § 53.) ■5. The names of the vowels are probably significant. [See App. C] It is impossible, however, to conclude with certainty, that we have attained the right pronun- * In a few words of the later Hebrew, ^ is written for short v. after the Aramaean manner ; as "Jitirj hhvq-qe ; '•nsa ma-'uz-zl §§ 21. 22. VOWELS, NAMES, ETC. 45 ciation of them, from investigating the significancy of these names, or in any other manner. The pronuncia- tion of any one of the ancient Greek and Latin transla- tors, as exhibited by the proper names of Scripture, is so much at variance with itself and with others, as to elude all effort to educe from it a uniform system. The tra- ditionary pronunciation of the Jewish literati, the gene- ral analogy of the European and Oriental languages, and the vowels of the Arabic, a living cognate language, are the principal guides in the assignment of the sounds in the table. JVote. The agreement is pretty general, among Hebrew scholar's, in regard to the sound of all the vowels, excepting Qamets, The Germans and others sound this as a in father. But against this is (a) the Syriac analogy ; Qamets being sounded there as o long. (6) The general voice of the Rabbins, and the testimony of the Masor- ites, which is in favour of the sound, as a in all. (c) This is an in- termediate sound, between the Syriac Qamets, or o, and the Arabic Fatah, or a as in ma7i.f father ; and the Hebrew is an intermediate language between these, (rf) The figure (t) stands also for short o: does not this indicate an approximation in the Qamets sound to the ? And this approximation is manifest, when we sound Qamets as a in all. §22. Vowels : orthography. 1. By the table in § 21, it may be seen that the vowels are all written under the line, except Hho- lem (i or j_ ) and Shureq {^). But Qamets is written in the bosom of a Kaph final, as 'rr. (See § 26. 2. a.) 2. In writing the vowels, the Matres Icctionis, (§ 20. 3.) are often inserted, or omitted, without altering the 46 § 23. VOWELS AND QUIESCENTS. nature of the syllable or word ; much as we spell honour, in Enghsh, with or without the w. See more fully, in respect to this part of orthography, § 24. §23. VoTaels : relation to the letters '''lirtM or Quiescents. (Comp. § 47.) 1. These letters, having a feeble sound, often lose themselves, or coalesce in the preceding vowel; (§ 19. 3.) E. g. in i^S ba, we say Aleph is quiescent, because the sound of it cannot be heard, as distinct from the vow- el {■') Qamets. 2. The Quiescents commonly, not always, coalesce with the preceding homogeneous vowel. When the vowels are adapted to produce this coalescence, they are said to be homogeneous ; when they are not adapted to produce it, they are said to be heterogeneous. In general, H, \ and *», when preceded by any of the class of vowels, respectively, of which they are the cor- responding vowel-letter, (§ 21.1.) quiesce, as follows; viz. Vav(T) in Hholem (j_ ) ']:^p . qol - Shureq ( ;i ) Dip qum. Class III. Yodh("«) - Hhireq (— ) 'j'''^ din. - Tseri ( .. ) '}i2 ben. - Seghol ( V ) N"*^ ge. Class. II. Aleph ( N ) in Qamets ( ^ ) N2 ha. - Pattahh ( - ) riN'liPb liq-rdth. - Seghol ( ... ) JiDN^C^ri tim-tse-na. Class I. But Meph (Ji) is so feeble a sound that it is lost in all § 23. VOWELS AND QUIESCENTS. 47 the other vowels, (except Shureq and Qamets HJiateph) and quiesces, when preceded by Tseri ( • •) S)2N:b le-mor. Hhireq (- -) -puJN-i ri-shon. Hholem (- -) 'I Mb bor. Qibbuts (., .) !n^N3 pu-ra. He, (n) never quiesces, except at the end of a word; and then in vowels of different classes ; as in Qamets Pattahh ( "^ ) rrr.n ga-la. } md. > Class I. Seghol t^'^l go-le. Class I, & II Tseri J^ba gde. Class II. Hholem (-) riba ga-lo. Class III. In English, we have a multitude of cases, similar to these. E. g. soa;, mow, with w quiescent ; say, day, with y quiescent, &c. Almost every letter in our alphabet, is, in some situations, quiescent before or after some other letter. 3. The sound of Ehevi, when quiescent, is not lost, but, assimilating to the homogeneous vowel, lengthens that vowel; i. e. the vowel in which the Ehevi quiesce becomes, of course, long ; or, long vowels become more protracted, and short ones become long. 4. One simple rule enables the learner to distinguish all the cases, in which the Ehevi quiesce ; viz. When- ever a Vowel or a Sheva belongs to them they are move- able ;* otherwise, quiescent. Of course, they are always moveable, or retain their consonant power, * A moveable letter is one, which is pronounced or sounded. The term moveable is used as the opposite of quiescent. 48 § 23. VOWELS AND QUIESCENTS. % (a) When they begin a syllable ; whether they have a s, vowel belonging to them, as "1/2^ * a-mar ; fin hem: iP*^ ja-la{3h ; 171 ve-ledh ; or a Sheva, as l/Sb'^yflam- ; medh, "l^i^ emar. (b) When they end a syllable, if they have a Sheva im- ' - derthem; as "lb5<;| ja-sor, (§18. 2.) 'T]£n] neh-pakh; * "'iHl;!^ sha-lav-ti ; "Ipii^l vaj-jo-mer, the same as "1!Q5^'^']1. In the case (,b) then, although the vowel preceding may be ho- mogeneous, the Vowel letters do not quiesce ; in fact, the Sheva., in such cases, is put under them, to show that they are exempted from the general rule of quiescence. 5. The Quiescents, preceded by heterogeneous vow- els, remmn moveable consonants ; as in tav ; Ij? qav ; iVd sha-lev ; IT ziv; ^lhhay; ^^1^^ ado-nay; "^l^goy; ''l^^ ga-luy, '^^^ the same. Note. The Ehevi, sometimes, do not contribute at all to modify the sound of a word ; i. e, they are neither employed as consonants, nor used as Quiescents to lengthen the preceding vowel ; (supra 3) but are employed simply for the sake of orthography. They are then said to be in otio. This happens, (a) When a Sheva precedes them ; as a'qn hhet. T\ii at. (b) Or a quiescent letter, ^i<''?.T he-bhe-tha. (c) Or Daghesh forte (§. 28.) follows, InfiTi!? indzze = 'riXJi Or (d) Yodh is in otio, when preceded by (t) and followed by the suffix pronoun (l) at the end of a word ; as I'^n^T debha-ravj his words. Compare, in English, u in honour, a in hear, &c. * We do not sound ^leph, (See } 18. 2) but the Hebrews did, in such casei- § 24. VOWELS : ORTHOGRAPHY, ETC. 49 > ■ ■ §24. / « . Vovoels : orthography in cormexion with vowel-letters. 1. As the vowel letters, when quiescent, do not alter the sound of words or syllables, but merely prolong the preceding vowel, (§ 23. 3), great variety of orthogra- phy in respect to them has arisen in the Hebrew lan- guage, i. e. they are sometimes inserted, and sometimes omitted, in cases where they regularly belong to a word ; and in some other cases, they are inserted as Matres lectionis, (§ 20. 3) where they do not belong. 2. When they are inserted, the vowel in which they quiesce is said to he fully written ; as ^ulip qo-tel, where the Hholem xsjully written. When they are omitted, the vowel is said to be t?e- Jectively written ; as ^Dp qo-tel, 3. Words to which the Ehevi essentially belong, are often written both Jully and defectively ; as Fully. Defectively. "'nN^a •^rih-D male-tliL ^^3 ^l nir. !:ip Vp qol. 0n»3 D:a3 ka-mus ; the pronuncia^ tion remaining the same, in both cases, 4. Words to which the Vowel-letters do not esseU" tially belong, are sometimes written with them ;* as Tittb'^ more properly Ht2\'\ yll-modh. n^iab Sab so-bhebh. * In all these cases, the Vav or Yodh may be named, (and is often called, by late grammarians,) fulcrum, being merely an orthographic support of the vowel. so § 25. VOWELS : qamets hhateph. 5. Vav and Yodh make almost all the irregularities, spoken of in this sectioa. Aleph is seldom omitted, where it is regularly requir- ed ; and more seldom still inserted, where it does not belong. He is exempted, in general, from this usage, 6. The Matres lectionis are less frequent, in the earlier Hebrew Scriptures, and more so in the later ones. In Sam. we have Ti'^ ; in Chron. T^"]"!, Da-vldh. In all parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, however, there reigns a variety of orthography, in regard to the Matres lectio- nis, which seems to have depended mostly on the fancy of the wri- ter or transcriber. Thus we have ■'nTa"'p;n, '^r)73''p,ri, ^nn72pn, TiTZpTt^ all pronounced, h"'qi-mo-thi, and differing only orthographi- cally, in respect to the insertion or omission of 1 and ''. §25. Vowels : Qamets Hhateph. The figure ( ^ ) is employed to designate short o, and the long vowel Qamets = «. (§21). It is important, that the student of Hebrew should be directed how to distinguish, when it is to be read as o or a. 1. The figure Qamets ( t ) z s short o, in a mixed syl- lable, unaccented. The cases, where this happens, are (a) When a simple Sheva follows Qamets, without a Methes: between them ; as t\^'2T\ hhbkh-ma. Note 1. But with a Metheg (§. 31.) thus, ina^n hha-khema. There are a few cases, however, where the Metheg after (garnets (■') does not make this vowel long; viz, when it is in the antepenult syllable of a word ; as ni3Ti"l" ddr-bho-notk, not da-rtbho-noth. The reason of this is, that Metheg, in such cases, is not placed after Qa- rnets as a sign of its being a long vowel, but with another design, and by another rule. (See § 31. 3. b.) Note 2. In a very few instances, the Metheg stands after Qamets in the pentdt syllable, without making it long ; as 'JS'ip^ qor-ban, not qa-nbhan ; Irf^^su: shom-ra not sha-^mera. But here MSS. and editions differ; and it is plainly a violation of the common principle. Note 3. The rule is, that the syllable, in which the Qatnets is § 25. VOWELS : QAMETS HHATEPH. /xj followed by Sheva, must be unaccented^ in order to make short o : for if it be accented^ the long sound of ( » ) remains. Thus ; mriT'O mavtha ; MTi* sAa^j ; i^b^V lay -la ; not mov-tha^ shov,, Iby-la. (b) When Qamets is followed by Daghesh forte (§ 28.) it is short o ; as '^DSH hhon-ne-ni; DnS bot-tim. This is the same as the case (a) ; for the words written out would stand thus, iDIDtl hhon-ne-ni ; Dnna bot-tim. Note 1. A Metheg on the antepenult here does not, of course, make Qamets long: e. g. DS"'n2 bbt-te-khem^ (See above, a. Note 1.) Note 2. Qamets remains long in a tone syllable ; as iiJa"^ yam-ma^ injab' lam-ma. (See above a. note 3.) (c) Qamets in a final mixed syllable, unaccented, is short ; as Dp ''I vay-ya-qom. The same a? case (a); for written out full, it stands thus, Dp'1. Note. All the cases above, resolve themselves into the simple rule, in No. 1 ;* and they all respect (garnets in a mixed syllable. But, 2. The figure Qamets (^t) is read as 6, sometimes in a pure syllable. (a) When another Qamets Hhateph follows ; as '^bptl p6-6l-kha ; tjn'Jf^ qo-tobh-kha. Analogy with cases of this nature requires the (x) here to be read as 6 ; but Metheg being universally added here, seems to indicate that the o sound is somewhat protracted. ( See App. D. 4. c. ) In a very few cases, a ( t) thus situated is to be read as a; e. g. ""iD)? qa-ton-ni. Etymology only can determine these cases. (b) When Hhateph Qamets (§ 26. 3) follows ; as i^^'D p6-olo ; 'innn bo-hori. The Metheg always appears here after (t) but it plainly serves in a different office, in all the cases of No. 2, from that in which * Qamets Hhateph, when in a mixed syllable, is, in fact, a compound figure, i. e. consisting of Qamets under one letter, and Sheva under another, which is always read as short o, when unaccented. 52 § 26. SHETA. it serve!=, when (t) is followed by Sheva simple, in No. 1. (Vid, supra No. I. a. note 1. Vide eliam § 31. 2. b. d.) Note 1. As exceptions to the rule in (6), there are cases where ( ) stands under the article before nouns ; as JT"!:n?i ha-°my-ya, the figure Qnmets designating long a. It is the same, where the article is elided, and the prepositions Sj 3 b, com? into its plnce ; (§.61. 6.) as tn^3N3 ba-only-ya^ &c. But the prepositions^ not coming into the place nor taking the vow- el of the article^ are read according to the rule ; as "^^nb Ib-hh^li. Note 2. D'"il;iu3 shb-ra shim, O'^'iL'lp qo-dha-shi/n, have o in the first syllable, because of their etymology. A few cases of this nature occur in the language, where nothing but a knowledge of etymolo- gy can determine. Nor is it cf much consequence to determine. It were indeed a very desireable thing to the student, to have a distinct sign for short n ; but we roust learn the language as it is, and not construct another. In daily usage, there could have been no more difficulty to a Hebrew, to distinguish when to read a, or o, than there is among us, when to read the letter o as o, or as u-^, e. g. in not, son. §28. Shiva, TlVii. 1. The Hebrews appear but very rarely to have combined or amalgamated two or more consonants to- gether, without any intervening vowel sound, as we often do in English; e.g. hand, hands, stripe, shrink. This was practised only at the end of a word; and even here, it was the usual method, where two consonants occurred, without an intervening vowel, as lED, to sup- ply Id. furtive vowel, in the pronunciation, e.g. "ISD sepher. The usage which inhibited, so commonly, the com- bination of two consonants after a vowel in the same syllable, did not operate so generally, nor in exactly the same manner, in respect to the admission of two conso- nants before a vowel. Two often appear ; but they are § 26. SHEVA. 53 modified, in regard to their pronunciation. The He- brews do not appear ever to have pronounced, as we do, im, bre-f amalgamating the br into one compound sound; but between the b and the r, in such a case, they uttered a kind of half vowel, (usually a very short a or e,) as feera, b^re ; much like our e in the words begone, begins &c. This custom of pronunciation gave rise to the sign of Sheva ; and the whole object effected by all the She- vas, simple and composite, is merely to aid in the pro- nunciation of syllables, that begin with two consonants. J\lore than two moveable letters can never begin any sylla- ble ; more than two can never end one ; nor even this num- ber, except at the end of a word. Syllables like street, sprain, &LC. in Hebrew, are impossible; equally so are such as works, thinks, &c. 2. Instead of limiting Sheva to the simple office of denoting a half-vowel, between two consonants that be- gin a syllable, and writing it only in this case, the authors of the punctuation-system consider it as belonging to ev- . ery letter, (the Quiescents excepted,) which has no vow- el of its own. Under the final letters of words, however, it is not written, but implied, in case these letters be des- titute of a vowel : i. e. Dp qam, is the same as "Dp* Orthography omits Sheva under all final letters, except, (a) Final '7; as ^^y me-lekh. {b) la a final syllable, ending with two moveable letters ; as rj'iQb la-mddht. When one of these final letters is a quiescent, usage is va- riable : as we have both n^{2 bath, and nN3 bath. (c) Or, when Pattahh furtive (§. 27.) stands in the room of the penult Sheva ; as nyT^iii sha-ma^^t, instead of ny^ilj sha-mat. Note. It is easy to distinguish such a Pattahh furtive by the or- thography. If it were a real vowel, the Sheva final would be omitted; as in ny73\a sha-mordth. 54 § 26. SHEVA. 3. There are two kinds of Shevas, viz. simple, and composite. Representatives. Sheva (simple) ( : ) == e in begin. e J ^ Hhateph Pattahh ( - ) = a in Germany. ±. p^ < Hhateph Seghol ( ■■-■ ) = c in begin. ±. ^ \ Hhateph Qamets ( t: ) := o in ivory. _£_ The student will perceive, that the composite Shevas are consti- tuted, by merely adding the short vowels to the simple Sheva. 4. In the quantity of all these, there is no difference. All of them are excluded from the rank of vowels ; *7p£ peqodh DH T znhabh, '^^^i e/g, i^n hholi, being mono- sjUables ; and none of them are ever sounded, except be- tween two moveable consonants, that begin a syllable. 5. The composite Shevas stand, for the most part, only under the Gutturals ; (§ 46. 2) and here they occur, only when those Gutturals begin a syllable. They are merely substitutes for simple Sheva. The only differ- ence between them is, that they give a variety of tones to the Sheva sound, which renders it easier to be pro- nounced, or more euphonic, when connected with those difficult letters. When a guttural ends a syllable, it takes a simple Sheva, like the other consonants ; as ^sn: neh-pdkh. Two of the composite She- vas are found under other letters, occasionally, besides the Gutturals; as arrT also, aiiT; Jl^")?, also 173^2, &.c. So Q'^'^i'ipqodha-shim. But Hhateph Segkol is never found, except under Gutturals. 6. In consequence of Sheva being considered as be- longing to all moveable letters, destitute of a vowel, (supra 2) it often occurs at the end of a syllable. But here, it must not be sounded.' This has given occasion § 26. SHEVA. 5b to the distinction, between Sheva vocal, and silent. As both have the same figure (:), it becomes necessary to give a rule, by which the student may distinguish them. The universal rule is, jill Shevas at the beginning of a syllable are vocal : and all at the end, {or after the vowel,) are silent. Of course, (a) All composite Shevas are vocal. (No. 5.) So, (6) Simple Sheva, after a pure syllable ; as M'l^b la-nudha. (c) in the middle of a word, after another Sheva ; ^llJob'J yil-midhiu (o?) under a letter with Dughesh forte ; as ^n/sb, llm-msdhu : e • (e) at the beginning of a word ; as 'il2'b lemodh. (p under a letter repeated ; as ^"b'b'n hdl-lelu ; not ^l^irt hal-lu. On the contrary, simple Sheva is silent, (a) After a short vowel in a mixed syllable ; as 'itai?'^ yil-modh. (6) After a long vowel, in a mixed tone-syllable ; injliobn Cd- modh-na. (c) At the end of a word, if two Shevas occur, both are silent ; as Pi'lTob la-mddht. Much eaiser would it have been, for reader and writer, if the punctators had written Sheva, only when it was vocal. But we must study the language as it is, rather than attempt to devise a better orthography. Note 1. Hhateph Q,atnets { -r-. ) the composite Sheva, is easily distinguished from (garnets Hhateph, the vowel. (§. 25.) The former, (t: ) is never a proper vowel, (supra 4,) and is always written under one letter, with i^heva at the right hand of the figure Qamets, as n ; Q^amets Hhateph on the contrary is always a proper vowel, (§. 21.) and has the Sheva, on the left of the figure Qametx and under the following letter, when in a mixed syllable, as inapn hhdkh-ma. Note 2. Hhateph Pattahh (-; ) is by far the most frequent of the composite Shevas, because the a tone is more congenial with the Gut- turals than the other tones. Hhaleph Qamets (^0 i'? the most unfre- quent of them. 56 § 27. PATTAHH FURTIVE. ■ " t,^ §27. Pattahh furtive. 1. The words which end with a guttural being dif- ficult to pronounce, euphony and facility of utterance have introduced into the Hebrew language, the custom of pronouncing all their syllables, (which close with a moveable guttural, at the end of a word,) with the a sound, as best adapted to this purpose. (See note above.) Very generally, the proper vowel Pattahh is written here, instead of other vowels. (§. 46. 3.) But in case other vowels remain, a Jurtive Pattahh is thrown in after them, to ease the pronunciation. This is written under the Guttural, but sounded before it, as TV'll ru^hh, being in respect to quantity, merely as Hhateph Pattahh (-=). To pronounce H/ll, lay the stress of the voice on ru, and merely touch the «M ; as in English, in'a/, vial, &;c. tV\1, in theory, is a monosyllable. 2. Pattahh furtive is put under JUappiq He, (§. 30.) n, and 5' at the end of words, when the final vowel has not an a sound. Aleph does not receive Pattahh furtive, be- cause at the end of words it is quiescent. Thus, rliD5 ga-hoO'h ; n'^'tli^ ma-shi^'hh ; V^^ rea : but, fi^IS'D mits-tse. §28. Daghesh forte. 1. Daghesh (lli^'l) signifies strengthening, hardened. It is a point in the middle of a letter, which has two meanings. (a) It means the doubling, or repetition of a letter, as 1^7 Um-medh ; and is then called Dagheshforte. § 28. DAOHESH FORTE. 57 (6) It removes the h in the aspirated letters, nSD'lliS Begad h-kephath, (see § 12. alphabet, and § 19. 2) ; as 2 == p/i, S = p, &c, (§ 12. 1) ; and is then called Daghesh lenc. 2. Where a letter is to be doubled, the Hebrews seldom write both down ; they write one, and insert Da- ghesh forte in the bosom of it ; thus'^J^H hhiq-qe ''523^'am- me ; but sometimes, (though seldom,) both letters are written out, as "^"p^j^T^ hhiq-qe, *^^pV_ 'am-me. But both letters are writtea down, (a) After a long vowel ; as D^bb^. (6) When Daghesh is fallen out of one letter ; as ^bbn fornVVn. (c) In derived words, where in the ground-form a long vowel ex- isted between the two letters : as plur. constr. ''bbn, ground form bbn. 3. Daghesh forte is sometimes essential, i. e. stands for a letter which really belongs to a word; and some- times euphonic, i. e. merely subserves the purposes of euphony. 4. Daghesh forte is essential, (a) When the same letter must be repeated ; as "^DriD na-than-nu, instead of "IDDnD. (b) When it stands for a letter assimilated ; as ^35'] yig-gash, instead of 'ci^D/^^ yin-gash. (§ 113. 3.) (c) When it distinguishes a special conjugation of a verb, as I'D*? iTm-medh Conj. Piel, in Kal ^^7, the Root; or special declension of a noun, as Q''V^5 gf mal-lim. Root or ground-form "P/^-l ; or the essential form of a pronoun, as rTDn hem-ma. 5. Daghesh forte is euphonic. (o) When it appears in the first letter of a word, (i. e. in case Daghesh be really forte ;) for this indicates, that in reading, the last syllable of the preceding word is to be connected with the DaghtsWd letter ; as t7.T"na, read mdz-ze ; :ii<5Z:ia:ip, read qu-muts-tssu. 58 § 29. DAGHESH LENE. Such a method of reading' is the common one in Arabic ; but un- frequent in Hebrew. (b) A tone-syllable, with a Pause-Accent (§ 35. 4) in a few in- stances, receives euphonic Da^hesh. as ^tlT: hha-dhel-lu. for ^b"n 1 o ' A ■■ T ' : IT hha-dhiliu or sibnn hha-dhe-lu. ' A •• -f (c-) After a short vowel in a mixed syllable, Daghesh euphonic appears, not unfrequently, in the second letter of that syllable ; as JTlS^t ek-kerc-ha for JTION ikh-ri-ha. Note 1. Daghesh euphonic is of no importance in regard to the real forms of the language. It is merely orthoepic, or orthographic. It is explained here, to prevent embarassmenl to the student, when he meets with it. Note 2. Daghesh forte can never appear in the final letter of any word, because it implies that another syllable follows, with which the latter letter of the doubled (Daghesh'd) consonant is united. But this is contrary to the supposition of being at the end of a word. §29. Daghesh lenc. 1. The Aspirates, (Beghadh-kepliath, § 28. 1. 6.) re- ceive Daghesh. forte, as well as other consonants ; and then, they both lose their aspiration, and are doubled ; as '^Ei^ ^p-pi) ttot a-pi, nor aph-pi. 2. When the point in them is Doghesh lene, they are not doubled, but only lose the aspiration ; as Vj'i"}'] yir- doph, not yir-dhoph. 3. General rule. Daghesh lene is inserted in the Aspirates, after a silent Sheva ; in all other cases omit- ted. Or this rule may be thus expressed ; The Aspirates remain so, (1) After a syllable end- ing with a vowel, as 'IT'lD'^ ; (2) After a short vowel in a mixed syllable, as iinl/2'7 ; (3) After a long vowel in a mixed syllable, as ^/3y ; (4) After a letter with vocal § 29. DAGHESH LENE. 59 Shevk in the beginning of a syllable, as "jniH^iJ. But Daghesh lene is inserted, after a letter which has a silent Sheva, as "^"IS *p^ with Daghesh lene in Pe ; Ctn^^tlr; with Daghesh lene in Tav, but omitted, as above, in Da- leth, by the preceding rule. Note. But special rules require many modifications of this prin- ciple ; e. g. Daghesh lene is inserted, I. In the beginning of a word ; (a) At the beginning of a seniencc, clause, or section; (vid. App E. 11.) let the preceding syllable end as it may. (6) When two Aspirates stand at the beginning of a word, and the first has a Sheva under it ; as "^sa nn:^73N. II. In the middle of a word. The general rule applies here, but with many exceptions ; e. g. Daghesh lene is omitted^ when according to the general rule, it would seem necessary to insert it, (rt) In the middle of a word, (which is derived by inflection from another word, its ground form,) when, in the ground form, the aspi- rate letter was preceded by a vowel. Thus, riSTn ridh-phu, (the general rule would make ns'n*^ ridh-pu,) because in the ground form, ^1~\ ridhoph, the aspirate j:] is preceded by a vowel. So '''dbio indl- khe^ (instead of "'SbQ mdl-ke,) because derived by inflection from D"^isb)p mila-khini ; ^nfy^ yAdz-bhu, (instead of ''\Z]S>2. yd-dz-bu,) ground form 172?^. i. e. Hkoletn precedes the Aspirate i. (6) In forms of words, whose initial letter has a Sheva vocal, an As- pirate following ihis, omits (commonly, not always,) the Daghesh lene, when by accession this Sheva becomes silent : Thus, Nouns. ^1135, ^^^^b hgh-bhul (by general rule, rns^v) Infin. 1:33, bS33 kln-phol ( -2^3-) Part. S^n^'n^a, STiynQD klm-tha-te' ( ^'fJl^'l'^^O But not a lew words of this character follow the general rule ; as (1) Future tenses; e. g. 'isp'' yls-podh. (2) Many Infinitives; as ds'iJb llsh-pot. Besides, (3) The suffixes % DP., 'Jp- never admit Daghesh lene. (4) A considerable number of words, by custom, retain the Aspi- rate, contrary to the general rule ; as, mSr!^, i'lia, &c. On the other hand, a few insert it contrary to the exception in (a), as '''^as, instead of ^n^ay, ground-form in plur. D'^'ia?. 60 § 30. MAPPIQ AND RAPHE, III. A the end of a word. After another letter with Sheva, or Pattahh furtive, an Aspirate takes Da^hesh Jene ; as nipQ. ny?^"*!}, so written instead of n5>X3lU. N. B. Daghesh forte ixiwiiys tollows a vowel, (mostly a short one,) as T73V llm-rnedk ; but Daghesh lene always follows a silent Sheva, (as Dri'nTgb lemddh-lem, where the Daghesh lene in n follows a Sheva,) except it occur at the beginning of a verse or clause, (supra 3. a.) A very little attention will enable the student to distinguish Daghesh forte and /tne, without any difBculty, §30. Mappiq and Raphe. 1. The letter He (n) Is commonly quiescent at the end of a word, (§ 23. 2) ; sometimes, however, it is moveable, and to indicate this, a point is placed in the bosom of it, called pS^ JWappiq ; as tT^ yah. 2. The point JVIappiq is of use in distinguishing some words ; as in the final fem. pronoun iH, to distinguish it from the mere fem. ending of a noun : e. ff. HS^^ mal- kah, means her king ; but T\j7ll mal-ka, means a queen. In verbs ending with two //e's, when the future is apocopated, (§. 123. Kal. d.) the middle radical (M) is marked with a Mappiq to show that it is not quiescent; as n^ni vdt-te-khdh instead of !nin!2riT vdt-fikh-hc^ Root lnln3. Note. Mappiq is found only in He, in the present editions of Hebrew books; but in MSS. it is sometimes appended to all the Qwi- escents, when they are moveable at the end of a word. Raphe (nS'n) means soft, and is the opposite of Daghesh and JVIappiq. It is now scarcely ever used, in any printed edition. But Hebrew MSS. have it over the Aspirates, as a sign that they retain the aspiration ; as iTilnlD kha-bhedha. In some cases in MSS, it stands T ; It where Daghesh forte would be written according to §31. METHEGH. 61 analogy, to show that it is omitted : also, over K and n at the end of words, when they quieSce. In some printed editions, Raphe is sometimes put where a Daghesh forte is omitted, Judg. xvi. 16 ; or Daghesh lene, Judg. xvi. 28; or Mappiq, Num. xxxii. 42. In all such cases, it is noted in the margin. § 31. Methegh. 1. Methegh, (jtri'Q) signifies check, restraint. Such is the name of the perpendicular mark (-[-)> which is call- ed also the EupJionic Accent, because it denotes, that the preceding vowel sound is to be somewhat delayed, or distinguished in the pronunciation. Hence the name Methegh. It compares well, with what we call the half- accent, in English; as in undertake, underwrite, &,c. 2. MSS, editions, and grammarians differ very much about the rules for the insertion or omission of this eu- phonic accent. The following cases are those, in which there is, however, a general agreement, that it ought to be written; viz, (a) In the second syllable, ij'a pure one, before the tone-syllable ; as DlJ^H ha-a-dham ; or if the second syl- lable be a mixed one, then on the third, if pure, as IDIJ^I. 1 "T 'It But :i, signifying and, i. e. merely copulative, does not obtain it ; as 2>i2:a1, u-hho-tseah. Two words, with Maqqepk between, C§, 32.) are considered as one, in reference to Methegh; as p"''i^-'^3 ki-tsdd-diq, (b) After a long vowel, next before the tone sylla- ble, followed by a Sheva ; as Hri'^n, ha-y«tha : the same •' « . -r ! IT •' with Maqqeph; as ""pTlID, sha-theli. But in the observance of this canon, there is not entire uniform- ity, the short vowels sometimes taking it, as inl'.n'] yihh-ye. 62 § 31. METHEGH. (c) When Daghesh forte is fallen out, but the pre- ceding short vowel-mark is still retained ; as C^l^riil ba-hhu-rim, instead of D'^l'^nS. The usage here is not uaiversal ; e. g. ^linn ha-hho-shekh^ with- out Methegh after li. (rf) Always before the composite Shsvas; as '^'I'i.^ sa-h^dhi ; v]< H!^. ye-hh^loph. 3. Cases in ivhich Methegh is more or less often, but not uniformly found. (a) On the third syllable before the tone-syllable, although it be a mixed one ; as niDTiZ bbt-te-khem ; D"'i~*n73 mith-ndd-debhim. (6) On the fourth syllable before the tone-syllable, the third be- ing a mixed one ; as D'liofTiJ'^T vdy-y'ish-hha-tum ; niDD^OHT vihdm- mds-se-khoth. (c) On the derivatives from the verbs Ti^ri ha-yn. to be, and ST^m hha-ya, to live, which receive a formative prefix ; as fut. Tl'^y^'^^ yih-ye, irtf.rt'^ yihh-ye, Jn^.Hn tihh-ye, &c. (d) After a Sheva vocal under the first letter of a word : as nNI * . ... "'• vfeth., ;iNiZ) stu, ""nl" dibhdr. The design of this is said, by some grammarians, to be, to qualify the Sheva sound, and make it analo- gous to the succeeding vowel ; i. e. we must read, v6eth, s'^'U, d^'bhdr, &c. Note 1. Methegh is of the same form as the accent Silluq ; (§, 35. 4.) but is easily distinguished from it, as Silluq never appears, except on the ultimate or penultimate syllable in a verse. Note 2. Instead of Methegh, the Conjunctive accents (§ 35. 4.) not unfrequently, are placed j specially when the word has a great- er distinctive Accent, (§. 35. 4.) as D"^'i3>i?2bn Vrlemo-i^dhim, instead of D^n^Ta'::!!. Note 3. The use of Methegh as a diacritical sign, in cases 2. a, h, c, is of real value. It is to be regretted that all the rest had not been spared ; at least, to the learner they are of no real importance, but rather serve to perplex him. They have been detailed here to prevent confusion, or mistake, iu the reader. § 32. MAQQEPH. BS §32. Maqqeph : Pljptt. 1. In form, Maqqeph is like our hyphen, (as 7!D"'n>?) serving to connect two words together, not as compos^ite Avords, but in respect to interpunction and accent. 2. Words connected by Maqqeph are closely con- nected in sense ; so that its office, in respect to inter- punction, is like that of a conjunctive Accent. (§ 35. 4.) 3. The word which precedes Maqqeph loses its tonic Accent; so that, according to the theory, two or more words, connected by a Maqqeph, are to be pronounced as one word ; the tone-syllable being only on the last. Thus, iD^Tt'^l va-vfhi-khen, r^i'-^O-nii eth-kol-e- sebli. The rationale of this case may be easily explained. The He- brews gejierally avoid having two tone-syllables in immediate succes- sion. Where these would occur, they either insert a Maqqeph, which is the sign that the tone is removed from the first ; or they throw back the accent of the former word one syllable, where the length of such word admits it. Hence, Maqqeph rarely appears, ex- cept after monosyllabic, or dissyllabic words, which precede others of a similar character, so as naturally to occasion the crowding of the accented syllables together. 4. If the syllable, which precedes J^aqqeph, is a mixed syllable with a long vowel, that vowel is usually (not always) shortened, on account of the Maqqeph, which removes the accent : for a long vowel cannot stand in a mixed sellable, that is unaccented. To save this rule, when the long vowel is retained, Methegh is placed after it, and it is read in a pure syllable ; thus, "^bTTilJ sha- theli, instead of shath-li. Note. As Maqqeph influences the euphony of words, by prevent- ing the concurrence of two accented syllables, it is called, (as well as Methegh,) a Eujjhonio'^cent. G4 § 33. ACCENTS. § 33. Accents. 1. Besides the two Euphonic Accents, J\Iethegh and Jllaqqeph, there are a large number of tonic Jlccents, as they are called, which are appended to the Hebrew text ; are inseparably connected with the present vowel system ; and serve, if we may credit Hebrew gramma- rians, a variety of purposes. These are 1. To mark the tone-syllable. H. As signs of interpunction. HI. As notes to direct the recitation, or cantillation, of the Hebrew text. 2. Of these Accents, some are written above, and some below the line, (like the vowels •,) only one, viz. Pesiq (I) in the line. (See the Table, § 35. 4.) The manner of writing the accents, needs to be explained. If no vowel interfere, they are placed over or under the middle of the consonant, that begins a syllable; as ^iay, ^"i-'J]: but if a vowel is connected with the same letter, they are placed at the left hand of it, as Y""\Nn. If syllables begin with a Sheva^ the letter which has the Sheva is disregarded, in locating the accent ; as Dinn ; HiVn. (See also §. 34. 2.) A . - .. # §34. Tonic power of the Accents. 1. So far as this power is concerned, they all stand upon the footing of equality, (when they actually sub- serve this end;) all of them merely acuting the ultimate or penult syllable, on which they stand. Every word, unless before a Maqqeph, (§ 32) has one or more of the accents upon it. But, 2. There are no less than seij/gi accents, which do Tl'phcha(initlale)( , ) § 35. ACCENTS. 65 not mark the tone-syllable, but only coincide with it, incidentally; viz, Sfgolta (jl) rCalled postpositive accents^ be- Pashta (jl) I cause they are invariably Zarqa (_r_) ] placed only over the last let- Tflisha minus (_^) i^ ter of a word. ' Called praeposilive Accents, be- cause they are placed only Yethibh (~) __f °' ble of a verse. y * rt~" Athnahh, = t ■— Sfgolta, (post-positive) = ^-^ Merka Mahpakh Greater Distinctives. Rfbhia , = ; , * Ll Rfbhi* Geresh f ? § 35. ACCENTS. 67 t t : Zaqeph (minus) j_ Zaqeph (majus) Lesser Distinctives. > ? * t — Tiphha, ~ Tiphha (inltlale, praepos.) — Tfbhir, _. J ... . J 5 t — Geresh, t "— Garshayim — . t — Qarne Phara, — Pazer, t t t ~ Yfthibh, (praepos.) — Pashta, (postpos.) 1- Zarqa, (postpos.) _°- TeHsha (majus, praepos.) Conjunctives. ■ — ~ Munahh, written both above and be ow the 1 ne. in poetry. ^~ Mahpakh, written, in poetry, as JUunahh. T' Merka. t ~ Merka, (duplex.) ~ Yerah. _: Qadma. t t T" Darga. 1. Tflisha (minus, postpos.) -^ Zarqa, (when not postpositive. Conjunctive.) _i Shalsheleth. vid. supra, it is a 68 § 35. ACCENTS. 5. The reader must not suppose, that the Disjunc- tives always correspond exactly to the interpuiiction- points with Avhich they are compared. The Pause Ac- cents often indicate a less quantity of suspension, than is assigned to them in the Table; and sometimes appear, -where we make no pause in English. The Greater Dislinctives too, sometimes officiate as Pause Accents, and sometimes appear where we should not make even a comma. The Lesser Di^stinctives mark not only com- ma-pauses, but half-commas, and sometimes appear, even where the words seem to require a Conjunctive, rather than a Disjunctive Accent. For the explanation of the names of the Accents; the detail re- specting their power of Interpunclion ; their Consecution, or the manner in which they follow each other, in prose and poetry, &c, &c, see App. E. §36. Accents as signs of Cantillation. 1. The Jews, from time immemorial, in the public reading of the Scriptures, have cantillated them, i. e. read in a kind of half singing, recitativo way ; much like what is called chanting, in some of our churches. In this manner Mussulmen read the Koran ; and the people of the East, generally, deliver public discourses in this way. The mode of cantillating Hebrew, in dif- ferent countries, is at present various ; but guided, in all, by the Accents : i. e. the accents are used as musical notes, though various powers are assigned them. For an exhibition of these musical powers, see Jablonskii Praef ad Bib. Heb. § 24. and Bartoloccii Biblioth. Rab- bin. Tom iv. p. 431 ; where may be found the Sargas^ or Accent-songs, written out in musical notes. §§ 37. 38. CRITICAL MARKS. RULES FOR READING. 69 Whether this was the original design of the accents, see discussetl in App. E. §37. Critical marks and Masoretic notes. 1. In the common editions of the Bible, with Masoretic notes, &,c, a little circle over any word, (as Ntiin) shews that the margin is to be consulted, either for a different reading (as Gen. viii. 17. ti^CTl, in the case above ;) or for Liierae tnaj. vel 7nin.., Piska, or Ptmcta ex- traordinaria, &.C. The mark ( ) over words in Van der Hooghl, &c, refers to a marginal note. 2. Qeri and Keihibh. There are a considerable number of marginal readings, (about 1000,) in our common Masoretic Bibles, most of which are quite ancient. Some of them correct granmiatical anom- alies, some are euphemisms, and some propose a different word. They are probal)ly the result of an ancient recension of Hebrew MSS. The marginal word is called Qfcj, C^njp) which means read ; i. e. this word is read, instead of the word in the text to which it re- lates, and which is called Keihibh (i"n3i written., or text. The points under the Keihibh belong to the Q*a, which is printed with- out any. If a word is omitted in the text, the points are placed there, and a little circle over them, while the letters are in the margin. (See Judg. 20. 13.) This is called, iTiS n!:'] •'-ij? read but not -written. If a word is superfluous in the text, it is left unpointed ; as Ezek. xlviii. 16. This called, ""ip S^'b") iTlS written but not read. Literae maj. et min. distmguish themselves. Piska i^'p'O's) means separation — i. e. a small space left in the text. See Gen. iv. 8. Puncta extraordinaria are marked thus, Viripu;'",!* ^^^ Gen. xix. 33. xvi. 5. Note. For a full account of all the marginal and other notes, in the Masoretic editions of the Hebrew Bible, see Preface to Van der Hooght's Hebrew Bible. §§ 23—45. § 38. Rules for reading Hebrew. Having become acquainted with the nature and 70 § 38. RULES FOR READING HEBREW". design of all the letters, vowels, accents, diacritical points, &c, &;c, which appear on the pages of the He- brew Bible, the student is prepared to commence the reading, or pronunciation of the language. After fa- miliarizing himself with the signs of the sounds, viz. the vowel points and consonants, his principal difficulty will consist in the want of skill, in making the proper division of syllables. To assist him in this, the follow- ing Rules should be observed. 1. Every syllable must begin with a Consonant ; i.e. one of the alphabetic letters. 2. Vav Cl) prejix conjunction, with Shureq is excepted, beinof sounded ii = oo in moon. o 3. Meph as in '^I2j^ a-mar, and Ayin^ as in 1'Q5? a-madh, i. e. i< and p when they begin syllables, we do not sound, because we know not how to sound them : but the Hebrews, doubtless, made them mouea6/e letters, in such oases ; so that the rule No. 1, has only the ex- ception noted in No. 2. 4. No syllable can have more than two consonants before its vowel ; and only one after it, except at the end of a word, where two may stand. (Compare § 26. 1.) 5. Every long vowel makes a pure syllable ; as ii"l!3 ba-ra. This is a general rule ; but 6. A long vowel may stand in a mixed syllable, if it be a tone-syllable^ followed by a simple Sheva, ex- pressed or implied; as Dp qam with Sheva implied; SnDlbpr] til-modh-na, with Sheva expressed. (Compare, respecting the sign (t), § 25.) Note. In a few instances of the later Hebrew, Shureq and Hhireq are sometimes used as short vowels. (Vide § 21. 2.) § 38. RULES FOR READING HEBREW. 71 7. Every short vowel makes a mixed syllable ; as Ij^S pa-qadh ; H}"! rabh. This rule is a general one ; but, 8. Short vowels before simple Sheva vocal ; compo- site Sheva ; a quiescent letter ; or another vowel, make a pure syllable. E. g. ^n*]! va-yehi ; n'^S?.^ ya-^se, TpT}^, ye-h^loph ; HS pe, t]12 ma; ^T}^ ba-hen, '!]^'D me-lekh, Sin£ pa-hath, D']Q ma-ytm. 9. Every syllable, beginning with a Sheva either simple or composite, moves the Sheva, and has two con- sonants before the vowel. 10. The points over the 'iD and tD often serve the purposes of vowels, as well as diacritical points, at the same time. E. g. Hup'D mo-she (Moses), iip^D so-ne, where the necessity of a vowel-point, to unite with the first letters in the word, is apparent. So Avhen these letters have two points, one of them is read as HhQlem, and the other as a diacritical sign, according to the exigency of the case , E. g. 1M sho-mer, t)£")'] yir-pos. In both these cases, the nature of the syllable shows which point over the ^ is a Hholem. Note 1. The Vowels (-) ( ■ •• ) ( •, ) when in a pure syllable, often stand for long vowels ; as '^T\^ for '^t^z compensative for 'jna, D-|nlrJ for n''*^lrj!l; inuiaa for H^ims; (compare § 21. 2. and App. D ;) and of course make pure syllables, agreeably to No. 5. Note 2. In the above rules, the terms long and sJiort vovoels are used, in a sense, incorrectly, inasmuch as most of the vowels called short are sometimes long^ and some of the vowels called long are sometimes sliort. (Vide § 21.) No mistake, however, will take place, if the student remembers that b}^ long Vo-dsels here, are meant Q,a- mets, Tseri, Hhireq with Yodh, Hholem, and Shureq ; by the shori Vowels^ Pattahh, Seghol, Hhireq breve, Qamets Hhateph, and Qib- buts. 72 § 38. RULES FOR READING HEBREW. Exeinplijication of the manner in which the Hebrew is read., with refer' ence to rules for explanation of the mode of forming syllables, and the right understanding of the various written signs, employed in the Hebrew text* Genesis. Chap. i. 1. rr^UiN^a bere-shiih ; Beth has Daghesh lene, § 29. I. a ; She- va under Beth is vocal, § 26. 6, and § 38. 9 ; in N"^2 here, n quiesces in the preceding Tseri, § 23. 2, and makes a pure syllable, p. 43, note. — n"":; shith, Yodh quiescent in Hhireq, § 23, 2 ; a mixed syllable, although the vowel is long, because it is a tone-syllable, § 38. 6 ; Tav final written without Sheva § 26. 2 ; Tav without Daghesh lene, i.e. aspirated,! § 29. 3. 3. 2. N"l2 ba-ra ; 2 ha, Beth with Daghesh lene, i.e. unaspirated, § 29. 3 ; a pure syllable, p. 43, note. — N"i m, i« quiescent in Qamets § 23. 2. 3. n''^ Vn elo-him ; Vn ^lo, composite Sheva under N, § 26. 5 ; which is vocal § 26. 6. a, and § 38. 9 ; e/o a monosyllable in theory, § 26. 4. — D"'rt him, Yodh quiescent in Hhireq § 23. 2 ; long vowel ia a mixed syllable, because it is a tone-syllable, § 38. 6 ; D without She- va written under it, § 26. 2. 4. DN eth, § 38. 6 ;, Tav with Daghesh lene omitted, § 29. 3. 3. .5. D"^73 2Jn hdsh-sha-md-yhn ; hash, by virtue of the Daghesh for- te in the Shin, § 28. I. a; the syllable is mixed, i. e. ends with a con- sonant, § 38. 7. — 'ci sha, § 38. 9. — J3 md, a pure syllable, though the vowel, perhaps, is short, § 38. 8. — c^ y'lm, Yodh moveable, like any other consonant, § 23. 4. a ; syllable short, § 38. 7, as the accent is on the preceding syllable. * The explanation of th^ accents is here omitted, as it may be found in the Appendix, letter E. t When any of (he letters DPS'l^a are written without Daghesh lene, they are said to be aspirated; e. g n = th, or has the aspirate h united with it. When they are written with a Daghesh lene in them, they are sai(] to be unas- pirated ; e. g. n^= /, or is written without the aspirate h. So that, in regard to the letters in question, to say of them, that ' thei/ are aspirated,'' and to say that ' ihei/ are written ivilhoat Daghesh lene,'' means the same thing ; and on the otlier hand, to say that *■ theij are unaspirated,'' and that ' they are written ivilh a Daghesh lene in them,"* means the same thing. Both of these respective methods of description are occasionally used. The student will not be liable to mistake, if he attend to the meaning of the terms. § 38. RULES FOR READING HEBREW. 73 6. tMi) veeth, Vav moveable, § 23. 4. a; Sheva vocal, § 38. 9. — nij, long vowel in a mixed syllable, § 38. 6 ; Tav without Daghesh, i.e. aspirated, §29. 3. (3.) 7. V""i>\rT ha-a-rets / ha-a- § 38. 5 ; reis, § 38. 7 ; y is a Tsade final, § 14. "^ " Verse 2. 8. y"?Nni veha-a-rets, vid. Nos. 6, 7. 9. Tir^ln ha-utha ; Methegh after rt, § 31. 2. b — ytlha, Yodh moveable, § 23. 4. a ; Sheva vocal, § 38. 9 ; Tav aspirated, § 29. 3 ; !l quiescent, § 23. 2. 10. ^Tin iho-hu ; tho-, Tav aspirated, § 29. 3, because the last syl- lable of the preceding word is pure, and has a Conjunctive accent — Ai/., Vav with Shureq, in which it quiesces, § 23. 2. 11. ^lln'aT va-hho-hu ; T § 23. 4. a ; bho^ 1 aspirated, § 29. 3 — /m, vid. No. 10. " 12. ^"^ri vehho-shckh ; I, vid. No. 6 ; veho, § 38. 10 — shekh, § 38. 7; fr final Kaph with Sheva, § 26. 2. a. 13. -b? 'ci/ § 38. 7 ; Maqqeph after it, § 32. 14. ■'33 pane; Pe with Daghesh lene, § 29. 3, because if follows the mixed syllable ^y, on which is no Distinctive accent, § 35; Sheva vocal, § 38. 9 — ip lie, Yodh quiescent, § 23. 2. 15. ainn ihthoin ; monosyllable, § 26. 4 ; Tav aspirated, § 29. 3. 1 ; hoin, Vav quiescent in Hholem, § 23. 2 ; mixed syllable, § 38. 6. 16. ni"i1 rtruahh, monosyllable, § 26. 4 ; Vav quiescent in Shu- req, § 23. 2 ; Patlfahh furtive under the final ft, i 27. 17. n^nbJ< ^lo-him, vid. No. 3. I* 18. n^.n/^a merd-hhe-pheth ; merd, Sheva vocal, i 38. 9 ; '^, apure syllable, 4 38. 8, because the Pattahh is in fact long, } 46. I.— n khe- Se- ghol in a pure syllable, i 38. 8 — ns pheth, Pe aspirated, i 29. 3 ; mix- ed syllable, ^ 38. 7 : Tav aspirated, } 29. 3. (2.) 19. D';''3n '':3"b? 'dl-psae hdm-md-yiia ; "^ps-^ry, vid. Nos. 13, 14 ; DV3vJ, vid. JNo. 5. Verse 3. 20. "^^Ji^iT vdy-yo-mir ; vdy-, Vav moveable, { 23. 4. a ; Yodh moveable after the Pattahh under Vav, § 23. 5. § 38. 7 ; Yodh with Daghesh forte, } 28. 1. a. — j/o-, Yodh moveable, } 23. 4. a; N quiescent in Hholem, 5 23. 2.—mer, 5 38. 7. 21. ''l-i'] Crib^ elo-hitn yehi ; 2/f^ Yodh moveable, §23. 4. a; •>1H, Yodh Quiescent in Hhireq, } 23. 2. 10 74 § 38. nuLES for reading Hebrew. 22. ^1N or ; N moveable here, i 48. 4. a with note, § 38 1. 3 ; Vav quiescent in Hholem, § 23. 2 ; mixed syllable with a long vowel, § 38. 6. 23. 'n'wX— '^?T vd-yehi-or; ud, § 38. 8 ; •'ii';, No. 21 ; Maqqeph af- ter rt]1, § 32. ' Verse 4. 24. !!i'~\i1vdy-ydr ; vdy, No. 20. — j/dr, i 38. 7. — N in otiohere, § 23. 5. a. 25. elo-hiin, eth-ha-or. Nos. 3. 22. 26. mb—'S ki-tobh ; ki^ Kaph with Daghesh lene, § 29. 3, (the preceding syllable a mixed one, here ;) Yodh quiescent, § 23. 2 ; Maq- qeph, § 32 — mb, Vav quiescent in Hholem, § 23. 2 ; mixed syllable, § 38. 6. 27. ht'212 vdy-ydbh-del ; No. 20. § 38. 7. § 38. 6. Beth aspirated, § 29. 3 ; Daieth unaspirated, § 29. 3. 28. elo-kim ben {i 23. 2. { 29. 3.) ha-or (No. 22.) u-bhen (4 38. 2. § 29. 3. i 23. 2. 38. 6.) hd-ho-shekh 38. 8. No. 12.) 29. vdy-yiq-ra (No. 20. 38. 7. } 23. 2.) elo-him la-or yom (5 23. 4. a. { 2-3. 2. « 38. 6.) veld-hho-shekh (5 23. 4. a. 5 38. 8. No. 12. o 38. 7. J 26. 2. a.) ga-ra (o 23. 2.) /a^-/a (0 25. 1. a. note 3. } 23. 2.) va-yehi (No. 23.) 'e-re6;i (j 38. 3. { 38. 7. } 29. 3.) T;d-2/eAi (No. 23.) bho-qer {i 29. 3.) yom (supra) e-/mc?/j (0 38. 8. } 29. 3. i 38. 6.) Verse 6. Vdy-yo-mSr elo-him yihi ra-qi"-" (Pattahh furtive under y, § 27.) bethokh (} 29. 3. } 26. 2. a.) hdm-md-yim vi-hi tndbh-dil 29. 3.) fcen. md-yim n 38. 8.) la-ma-yim. > Verse 7. Vdy-yd-ds (J 38. 8.) elo-him eth-ha-ra-qi"-" vdy-ydbh-del hen hdm-md-yim ^sher mit-td-hdth la-ra'qio-' u-bhen hdm-md-yim tosher me-dl la-ra-qi"'' vd-yihi-khen. Verse 8. Vdy-yiq-ra ^lo-him la-ra-qi"' sha-ma-ylm vd-yihi 'e-rebh vd-yehi bho-qer yom she-ni. Verse 9. Vdy-yo-mer elo-him ytq-qa-vu hdm-md-ytm mit-td-hdth hdsh-sha-md-yim el ma-qom e-hadh vethe-ra-e hdy-ydb-ba-sha vd-yihi- khen. Verse 10. Vdy-yiq-ra elo-him Idy-ydb-ba-sha e-rets u-lstmq-ve ham- mdryim qa-ra ydm-mim vdy-ydr elo-him ki-tobh. § 39. COMMUTATIONS OP THE CONSONANTS. 7y §39. Commutations of the Consonants, with each other. That consonants of a similar sound, or which are pronounced with the same organs, should occasionally be exchanged for each other, both in writing and speak- ing, is an occurrence which is common in all languages. In Hebrew this occasionally happens, in the following- manner, viz ; 1. Letters of the same organ are interchanged. (a) Labials. As 15, aj\, fja the back ; N""n72 and ^"'-12 fat ; tib^O and tj^D to escape ; Sept. Xofii/a for Heb. Iiy^^. 2 Chron. xxi. 10. (6) Palatals. ^aD and ""iio to shut up ; ^^^i and ^5~\ to travel about ; 2>ai3 and S'STP a handle. (c) Linguals. Of these, only n, D, and T are interchanged; as pjUn and f|nrT to rob. {d) Dentals, tlb^, gH' and y]:S to exult ; p^T and p:yi£ to cry out; pnilj and pni£ to laugh. (e"* Gutturals. ?1N3 and iTTtlS to be pusillanimous ; D5M and uyj to ^ XT TT * — T — T he mournful. 2. Letters of a different organ, are commuted. (a) Sibilants are commuted for Linguals ; i. e. the sibilation is dropped, and the letter is lisped. As ^i'T and ^^^ to quench ; 'n^ D and "1U3 lT':j,name of a man, Doeg ; ^^n and ^b^ { truth. (b) Daleth before Tav ; as STip for n'7.7 to hear chil- dren; n^^i for rnn^5 one* fem. from '7^^^. — V IV- : - - (c) Taz; before another Tav ; as rinil)^ for nnHM corrupted, fem ; riTklit) for nri"1^53 serving ; fem. Note 1. These cases in No. 2. are very unfrequent, excepting the case (a) ; but the principle which is concerned in them needs to be explained, or exhibited, so that when they do occur, the student may be able to obtain a satisfactory explanation of them. Note 2. In all the cases under No. 2, on account of the Daghesh being omitted in the letter to which the one dropped is assimilated, the tyro can find no certain index of assimilation. Acquaintance with the language, specially with the principle of assimilation, or a good Lexicon, only, will develope all these apparent anomalies to him. Note 3. As those letters only which have a Seghol furtive, are dropped in this way, the conclusion is, that Seghol was not very dis- tinctly pronounced ; otherwise no cacophony would have required the omission of a consonant. § 42. Consonants dropped. Consonants with feeble sounds, e. g. the Quiescents and Liquids are sometimes dropped ; (1) At the beginning of words, {A'phaeresis,'^ when they have a Sheva under them : as (a) Aleph :i2n3 for ^sn'sN we ; U^m for n''ttJ3N -women ', It! fo»" iriN one. § 43. CONSONANTS ADDED. 79 (6) Yodh. nb for nb"^ Imp. from l}:"^ ; and so in verbs Pe Yodh. b?i2 for ^13"^ provender. (c) JVun. in for -jn: Imp. from ^na ; and so in verbs Pe JVun. (c?) Lamedli, (very seldom.) nj? Imp- for Hj^V. (e) jlfe?n. In Participles of Piel and Puai ; as njvV for Hpba taken. (2) In the middle of words, (Contraction,) when pre- ceded by a Sheva ; in which case, the vowel of the let- ter dropped is always transferred to the letter that pre- cedes : as (a) Aleph. ;]V75 for PX^J2 Part. Piel, from p]bN ; nV'>b for InbN'JD request. (6) He, (very nnfrequently.) Fut. Niph. n^aV"^ for iJoVn'^ ; Fut. Hiph. 'T'a!:^ for T'^abn") ; Fut. Hith. ITsbn"; for Tajbnrt';' . So when an article comes after the prefix prepositions ; as ^b.''2b for ^V?^^- 1^^^ ^^^ ^^•f.^!^• ^^.T?.? for ^V?.^!^* In ail such cases of verbs and nouns, the syncope of the Si is the com7non usage ; and the retaining of it is classed among the anoma- lies. But it is sometimes retained. (c) Yodh. riba for ^"'ba ; and so often in verbs Lamedh He. * ' T -. IT ' (t/) Vav^ (very seldom.) "Si for "^"ly ruins. (e) Jlyin, (very seldom.) bi; for b?2 =: b^a. (3) At the end, {.Apocope,) are dropped ; (a) ^Ifem, in the regimen of all Masc. plurals. (0 135. 2.) (6) Nun, as a plur. ending, when in regimen, (^ 135. 2.) ; also at the end of some proper names in 'jn — as i"J73 for p'^aa ; perhaps jrib"i2j for 'jib'^uj. (c) n ~, as a Quiescent, is frequently dropped from the end j (t 50. 1.) §43. Consonants added to words. I. Prosthetic, i. e. added to the beginning of words. 1. For the sake of euphony, some words beginning with two moveable consonants receive, 80 § 44. TRANSPOSITION OF CONSONANTS. (a) Ale^jh prosthetic ; as V^iari, bianN yesterday; ^inT, ^'TntN arm; "ITS, 1TDN cr»e/, &,c, (6) He prosthetic; as in Hithpael ^UjPnin, the He is merely prosthetic, as the corresponding Arabic shows. II. Epenthetic^ i. e. inserted in the middle of a word. E. g. (a) He, in some words ; as njjt a mother, plur. ni!n73i<. (b) J\~un, between the future tenses of Verbs, and their suffixes; as '^i^riwNt for '^^riN. 68. 3. No. iv.) This epenthesis is common. (c) In later Hebrew ; "^iflp for "^ilp, {Daghesh resolvitur in JVun.) pijuam for p'J;372"1, {Daghesh resolvitur in Resh.) Such epentheses are common in Chaldee ; but, except (6), they are unfrequent in Hebrew. Compare d in the Latin prodeo j |S, in the Greek ^if^t§XeTut, kc. III. Paragogic, i. e. added to the end of words* JVun is added, frequently, to the forms of the Future ending with ^ and ' -r-, without any change of their meaning. §44. Transposition of consonants. A considerable number of words exhibit a transposi- tion of letters, without a change of signification ; viz, in particular, (a) The Sibilants and Resh are transposed ; E. g. VD2> and bDO to be foolish; i-i)3 and t5i3 a lamb ; 5]1L'l and \liB2 to breathe; ^xs and yns to break; Dtn, Syr. and Arab. T»"1 to ■wink, &c. (b) The Quiescents, '^ 1 tl Ji, with ^, 3, and each other. E. g. iniby and J-b"iy wickedness ; DilnV? and Dibna terror ; p3N and pN3 '^. But we have also, "^ri^n^, ^3t|;i, &c, i. e. Gutturals with regular punctuation. Resh does not require a composite Sheva. 3. The Gutturals and Resh very generally take a Pattahh, in the syllable where they occur, instead of any other vowel ; probably because they are uttered more easily with this vowel ; E. g. Fut. Kal. SJ2p1 instead of S>73'i3"; Piel. y^3 _ 3>>2 &c. * Pattahh must either be considered as long here, or a Daghesh must be implied in the Guttural, though not uriKen. Grammarians, in general, affirm the latter; the former seems to be more analogical. § 47. QUIESCENT LETTERS. 83 But if the vowel be immutable, in the syllable where they occur, then they take a Pattahh furtive, to aid the ut- terance ; as y^nd, &c. (Vide § 27.) But Resh never takes Pattahh furtive. §47. Quiescent letters ; — Imvs of quiescence, Comp. § 23. The f\\ct that these letters quiesce, and in what vowels, has been considered in § 23. The design of this Section is, to show in what position, or when, quiescence happens to them ; and according to what laws, their consonant power ceases. They lose this power, after a homogeneous vowel ; 1. When, analogically, they would stand at the end of a mixed syllable, or have a silent Sheva, (expressed or im- plied,) under them ; E. g. nn^iT^a instead of nil^fT^a "iJ^nb — '^*'3^i.^. or "imh For Vav and Yodh, this rule is universal ; and for Aleph, at the end of words ; but N in the middle of words, frequently retains its character as a Guttural, (§ 46. 2) : e. g. SlON"' ; as a Quiscent, it reads thus, ;]DN'^. He quiesces only in the final syllable. (§ 23. 2.) In the cases above, the vowel preceding the Quies- cent is homogeneous : but if it be heterogeneous, the Ehevi retain their consonant power; as H'piy, D'^D"'^'^^, &c. (§23. 5.) ^'" * "'"" The rule already given, shows that the Vowel-letters quiesce, when regularly, (i. e. according to the analogy of other consonants,) they would have a silent Sheva under them : But, 2. It is common also, (not universal,) for ^t, 1, "^ to qui- 84 § 47. QUIESCENT LETTERS. esce, when a Sfieim would immediately precede them, ac- cording to regular analogy. Thus, r\^'\D instead of rifi^'iT. In such cases the preceding Sheva is dropped, and the vowel, be- longing to the Quiescent, comes into its place ; as D"'-rN'n instead of D"';L;ij'i iNa — SNa n^p — mp> 3. Vav and Yodh, at the end of Avords, (when a She- va, or a iurtive Vowel precedes them,) uniformly go into quiescence ; which is effected in different ways. E. g. (a) By moving the vowel forward ; thus, \Ti instead of ''JT^ ■i^jD — "?"!3j merely so as to accomo- date euphony ; or, (6) By supplying a vowel ; as in'a instead of llriia or i^a ninn'^j'^l ■ — nHn\p'}, the apoc. fut. of wnn'iJ'^ . Note 1. The principle of No. 3, is the same as that of No. 2, only the mode of supplying the requisite vowels is somewhat differ- ent. Note 2. The principle in Nos. 2, and 3, in a few instances, ex- lends to the removing of a previous syllable ; as rt:3Nb73 instead of tiSNb^ The cases of quiescence, thus far, are when Sheva is under a Vowel-letter, or precedes it. But, besides these two cases, there are some, in which 4ly, The Vowel-letters, (>5 1 ^) quiesce, though pre- ceded and folloAved by a Vowel ; E. g. 72Tp instead of ^flj? qa-vom. •j^i — "t'^s. ba-yen. 'X)iX^ — iZiNll ro-esh. § 48. QUIESCENTS. 85 5. Peculiarity of Aleph. In the beginning of a word, when a Sheva belongs to it, not unfrequently it takes a long- vowel : E. g. Instead of ( -. ) is put ( .. ) as Dttili* for atti^Jt — { ) — (••) - ^2"^. — ^°^. ■— (■"=) — (— ) - n^i^^^N — n"^^riij' This is a Syriasm ; as the Syrians always pronounce ALeph and Yodh^ at the beginning of a word, with a Vowel instead of a Sheva, viz. as e and i. 6. When two Quiescents come together, and the vow- el between is moved back, (supra No. 2.) one of them is put in otto ; (§ 23. 5, note.) E. g. "jislfi instead of "jiNi^i Vav in otio. rrtiSib'o — nii{ — n-'ba : or, (6) The Quiescent conforms to the Vowel ; i. e. is changed so as to be homogeneous with it ; E. g. DNp instead of Dip Vav into Aleph. n''?^ — nia Vav into Yodh. inb'iD — "^b'ii Vav into He. nj/^ — *br Yodh into He. The case (a) is the more common. In (6), the Vowel is retained, because it is essential to the characteristic form of the words. Note. The Vowel-letters, (n i i), sometimes conform to the preceding vowel points, in cases where they are moveable : as, D"^i.p instead of Djip ; i^n instead of aW, i. e. Yodh is put for Vav, be- cause of the preceding Hhireq. This is very common in the Arabic. § 49. Q^uiescents ; commutation and omission. 1. As the same vowels are homogeneous to several of the Quiescents, (§ 23. 2,) a variety of orthography has arisen, in regard to the Quiescents, without occasioning, however, any difference in the pronunciation ; e. g. (N — ) is put for (n — ) as my^ for snHnp Vice versa, (n-) ■— (&<— ) - H^j"?^ — ^'Opp^ (j^ -^) _- (n -^) - vS1p,X3 ~ ni)?X3 (fti -) — (n -) - ixrjj'' — nptd'^ § 50. QUIESCENTS. 87 Vice versa, (Ti ■■■ ] 1 is put for(*i— )as nnS for ivns (^-; (fi^ -) - a^n _ G.sn (^-; 1 — (i^^) - ]i^^1 — "jitrji*") («•-; (n-) - jiD — n'D (i ; (5^ _) - '^-^^ _ tHiin Vice versa, (i ] (ri-) - i\!3? — tim 2. The Quiescents are often wholly omitted, the pro- nunciation remaining the same. (See § 24.) 3. Daghesh euphonic sometimes occasions the omission of a Quiescent ; as T]'^'"T\12 maz-ze is written also il^'D. On the exchange of the Quiescents for each other, when conso- nants^ see § 39. 2. c. § 50. (Quiescents ; Apocope and Paragoge. I. apocope. In the Fut. of Verbs Lamedh He, and in the Imper., when apocopated, T\~ and H^r fall away; as Fut. fhy], apocopated b^l or ^5^, (§ 123. I. d.) Im- per. tlbs , fem. ^^^5 , &c. It is the same, in nouns derived from these Verbs, when they receive increase. (§ 137. Par. ix.) Compare § 42. 3. c. II. Paragoge. 1. Paragogic letters either serve to lengthen out the word, or are merely orthographic. 2. Orthographic is Meph, after '^— , *1 and 1 ; E. g. N-p: the same as '^2 ; Ni^'i the same as is'i ; N^ib the same as :ib. The Arabians always write an orthographic Aleph,, after a Vav quiescent at the end of a word. V 88 § 51. VOWELS IMMUTABLE. 3. Several Paragogics serve to lengthen out words ; viz, (a) Tt—; as ]n, parag. nssri ; "^-iN, parag. !i;;-]i<. {b) rtT; as Vjj, — irilrN; tti^, — nfN. (c) i without accent ; as D^^; parag. ia^. ^!'!!; — T'T^'n. (ci) !t^, without accent ; as la Nouns, § 62. 2. A ; and in Verbs, § 62. 2. i. (e) •>—, which takes the accent; as &"^p.lO; parag. "^Jo'^jpa. v-i£u;g; — ■^b."'5u3a,&c. A paragoglc letter is most frequently added to the Construct State, (§ 135.) It also appears, often, in com- pound words, i. e. proper names ; as bi^'iTD^, i.e. 7^i"in5i man of God, the first noun here being in the Construct state. § 51. Vowels immutable. The changes of the Hebrew vowels, which are nu- merous, are fundamentally connected with the whole gram- matical construction of the language, and result from the lengthening and shortening of words ; the position of the tone-syllable, the relation of nouns to each other, euphony, and dialect. If the student has become well acquainted with the theory of the vowels, as exhibited in §§ 20, 21, he may, without much difficulty, enter upon this subject, so perplexing and confused in most of the older Hebrew grammars. The first step is to see what Vowels are incapable of change, in every condition ; which narrows the field of ii> quiry. The immutable vowels, then, are, 1. The long vowels, which are followed by their ho- mogeneous Vowel-letter ; either. § 51. VOWELS IMMUTABLE. - 89 I. Expressed ; D'^^^{'^ constr. state *'^^^'^ Immut. ( - ) ^ip with' Suffix i^ip — (i) n^&fij Plural 12'^^^'0^^ — ( 1 ) or, II. Implied ; Q'ltDn constr. state ^tdS — ( O V^n — '^^n — (-o&c. The simple point which determines the immutability of the vow- el, is, that the Quiescents really belong to the syllable. Whether they are written, or not, is of no importance in regard to the vowels. (See § 23. 3.) There are many words, where orthography never writes the Qi«e5cen<5, which still essentially belong to them ; as inS = ^atrz ; iNS := n'^xs , &c. A good Lexicon gives the necessary in- formation. (See note 1, below.) 2. Short vovv^els, followed by Daghesh forte ; as S33, Or in a mixed syllable ; as H^^!?^, p^^.^!^.? l^")!^' ^^' 3. Vowels, which stand as a compensation for Da- ghesh forte omitted; (§46. 1.) as dlH for d"nn or tDJ^'^n; X:^m for D^niVl, &c. Euphony sometimes changes Qamets and Pattahh into Seghol, in these cases. (Vide § 60.) Note 1. An exception of No. 1. is, when Qamets is accidentally connected with an Aleph^ in the course of conjugation, declension, &.C. In such cases, the Vowel is not commonly immutable ; as NSTO, fern. JnNiSa ; isfnj^, with suffix '^i^'nj?. But, in conformity to the gen- eral principle, we have '^i5"ip73, i. e. Qamets is retained, unchanged. Note 2. In Hebrew, (-r-) is rather shorter than ( .. ); and (!i) than (i). An exchange of these vowels for each other, is, in a few cases, admitted, where the larger vowel gives place to a somewhat shorter tone : as, Niphal. Bnps second pers. ni?3ip3 Inf. ab.s. nia constr. n^j3 ts^D^rs regim. "'D'^bD 12 90 §§ 52. 53. VOWELS mutable. § 52. Vowels mutable. The mutable vowels, then, to which all the changes are confined, are, 1. Long vowels, capable of being contracted or short- ened, when they are pure, i. e. (-) ( •• ) (— ). Note. A pure vowel is one ia which no consonant sound mixes ; i. e. one which has no essential Quiescent after it, nor is compensative for Daghesh forte omitted. Compare § 51. 1. 3. A pure syllable is not to be confounded with a pure vowel. (Pag. 43. j.) 2. Short Vowels, capable of being lengthened, are Pattahh, Seghol, short Hhireq, Qamets Hhateph, and Qib- buts ; i. e. when they are properly short vowels. (§ 21.) Note. When any of the Vowels in No. 2. stand in the place of long Vowels, they are mutable in the same manner as the long ones for which they stand would be. §53. Vowels : general laws of mutation. 1. The exchange of the Vowels for each other, is limited, (almost exclusively, but see § 60.) to the bounda- ries of the respective classes to which they belong. (See § 21.) 2. The changes, (almost without exception, but see § 140. note 3. «.) respect the Vowels in the last and penult syllables of words, as they exist in the ground-form* 3. All the vowels, long and short, that are mutable, are also capable of being dropped, when the construction of syllables, to constitute particular forms, requires it. * The ground-form of words is that, on which the other or derived forms are built. In regard to the oblique cases of a noua Sing, and the Nom. plural, the ground-form is the Nom. sing. — in regard to the oblique cases of the plural, it is the Nona, plur.; in the Praeter. of Verbs, it is the 3d pers. sing. &c. § 54, LONG VOWELS SHORTENED. 91 Thus n^^'^ , ''"labn, the Hholem belonging to the » in the ground- form is dropped, because of the accession in the derived form. Sheva^ expressed or implied, always comes, of course, (§ 26.2.) into the place of a vowel that is dropped. §54. Long Vowels shortened. This happens only in mixed syllables, when the accent is removed.* As long vowels can stand in mixed syllables, only when they have the accent ; so, that accent being re- moved, it is evident the long vowels must be shortened, when the syllable continues to be a mixed one. The accent or tone, in such cases is removed, 1. Forward, i. e. towards the left ; (a) When the word receives any accession, beginning with a consonant ; as Dbl^'l, ground-form '^«'^. Here the ( T ^ in '^'2 goes into Pattahh, and the first Qamets falls away. (See ^ 53.) So, SSi'l^ , ground-form "T^ , (but some- times as Tp*^ ;) DD4D*'_ from tU)', (sometimes as ^TjDlIl from )1l ;) ^bt^p yiq-tol-kha from Vl^p, (rarely as i^lS from {b) When a long tone-syllable precedes Maqqeph; as -lir)>i-^3 kol, from VS- (Comp. § 32.) (c) As a general rule, a noun in regimen, i. e. before another noun in the Genitive, (§ 135.) shortens its long vow- el, which is in a mixed, final syllable ; as 11'^ word, but niJT] lyi the word of Jehovah. (Vid. § 137.y For the ground of this, see § 135. The tonic accent, indeed, is written over such contracted nouns, when in regimen j but this only * To shorten a vowel, is different from dropping it. Thus, in *ll5'l, from t^iT the first vowel is dropped^ the second shortened. 92 § 55. SHORT VOWELS LENGTHENED. shows, that the primary design of the accents is not to mark the tone-syllable. At least, analogical reasoning, in respect to the short- ening of the vowel, in the case before us, would lead us to believe, that two nouns in regimen, are, in Hebrew, treated as a composite noun, and so the real tone is removed to the ultimate or penult sylla- ble of the compound word, (Comp. § 32 ;) for the same change gen- erally takes place in the mixed long syllable, of the noun in regimen, as takes place, in other cases, from removing the accent or tone. Cy 2. Backwards^ i. e. towards the right ; as "TI? '^ 1 , ground- form Tj^pV ^p^l vay-ya-q6m, ground-form iDp ya-qom. anipi'Pln instead of tDntJps . In all these cases, viz. under Nos. 1, and 2, Qamets goes into Pattahh. Tseri — Seghol, (rarely, short Hhireq.) Hholem — Qamets Hhateph, (rarely, Qibbuts.) Compare the examples above. 3. But when a long tone-syllable receives an accession at the end, becomes short, and receives a Daghesh forte in its final letter, then Qamets goes into Pattahh. Tseri — short Hhireq. Hholem — QihhiitSj (rarely, Qamefs Hhateph.^ E.g. t::^,^'!^^; iDwNt, "^m; pn, npfi; i^, ^^^^i, ozzi. ^• Note. If the tone remains, the vowel is not shortened, as !i7a'^, § 55. Short Vowels lengthened. " 1. When a mixed syllable with a short vowel is chang- ed into a pure one ; e. g. '^Thp'p he killed him, ground- form 7pj? ; T\2T\ , ground-form DH ; fi'^'ltl), ground-form Id. So DT for nT; ir}7}\ for i^nni. § 56. VOWELS DROPPED. 93 Note. This case, so far as accession of syllables constitxites it, ig exactly the reverse of the last Section, No. 1. a; the accession here beginning with a vovsel, & so requiring the last letter of the ground- form to be united with that vowel, and thus taking it away from the previously mixed syllable. 2. When Daghesh forte is omitted, Avhere analogy re- quires it, i. e. in a Guttural, or at the end of a word ; as 'n-lS instead of ^HD ; '^jnS for '^'l^ln ; TiniD for ^"^3 , (the short vowel sometimes remains here ;) 7^"^ for yy^ = nV5\ Dfiji^ for m == "^2^, &c. Pattahh, however, frequently remains before ii and H; as )tV2'*_ , (See § 46. 1.) But it is probably long. (§ 23.) 3. By the concurrence of a homogeneous, quiescent letter ; as itS^, instead of i«2^. 4. In general, (there are some exceptions,) when a Pause-accent*' falls on a short vowel ; as D"*/!!) instead of D'^'D. But in the fut. Niphal and Hiphal, and occasionally of other Con- jugations, the Pause-accent falling on the final Tseri, commonly short- ens it into Pattahh. (§ 97. 2.-99. i. e.) 5. When vowels are contracted ; as "ii2ii7 for "i'DJ^i^. Peculiarities. (a) Some words, (very few,) prolong their vowel when they take the article ; as Dy , Byrt ; 'nJn , 'n^in. (6) Segliol at the end of words, when these words are placed in regimen, goes into Tseri ; as ln5>h, in regimen Sni'h. § 56. Vowels dropped. 1. When from any cause, (regimen, Maqqeph, or ac- cession,) the accent is moved forward from the syllable, which had it in the ground-form^ an omission of mutable vowels takes place, to correspond with it. This omission is regulated by the following principles ; viz. * Occasionally^ other Accents produce the same effect. 94 § 57. TRANSPOSITION OF VOWELS. («) When the tone is moved forward only one syllable, OL the penultimate vowel falls away, if mutable; as Ij'^? But when the tone remains on the original syllable, where it was in the ground-form, the first vowel remains unchanged ; as riin'ij'^ , ground-form '2W'^ . Note. The above rule applies principally to nouns and adjectives; only in a few cases to verbs, in which the Suffix begins with a conso- nant, and has the accent ; as Dnn^b, ground-form la^i. But, (6) In Verbs and Participles, the second voivel falls away, (if mutable,) when the tone is removed one place forward by a Suffix beginning with a vowel, and the Jlrst vowel of the Verb remains ; as H^^ a ground-form TDp : '^llD^n , ground-form i'Q?'] ; D'^'Tt^^, ground-form 153"^ ; So Nouns, of the same form as the present Participle, follow the same rule ; as a;'iN an eneimj, plur. D'^i'^'iN. (c) When the tone goes forward two places, both the (V vowels of the ground-form, (if mutable,) are dropped ; as But here the siiffix must begin with a vowel ; or the word must be plural, and in regimen. For the manner in which those vowels that fall away are suppli- \ ed, see § 59, on the rise of new vowels. ; §57. Transposition of Vowels. 1. This happens mostly in Verbs, with suffix Pronouns, which suffixes have not the accent ; as ""S^^ty, ground-form §§ 58. 59, NEW VOWELS. 95 2. In Verbs Lamedh Guttural^ there is a new Vowel inserted, instead of a transposition; as '^D'^iXS^'], ground- form Mi2 for which ^S'^l is used. Fut. Hiph. fibil — 'b^_i'> — ):^,il — Imp. Hiph. rrs-iri — ?|Sri — ):i'^.!7. — M^.^in — 'ri^l — '?vl — (Vide § 123.) (fe) In all Segholated Nouns, viz. all those which end in Seghol, Pattahh, or short Hhireq ; as ^Ira instead of "rp/n or ^b» orig. form. rT'/a — n"] 2 Fern. Nouns and Fart, m^ii) — r'1^."'"> (c) In 2d pers. fern, of Verbs Lamedh Guttural ; as ri^^UJ for Note. In Arabic, nouns of the class (6) have no furtive vowel written. They write '^h'D a king ; but pronounce, according to the Hebrew, with a furtive Seghol. 13 98 § 60. VOWELS, §60. Vo'joels : changes from Euphony. 1. A Guttural with Qamets, seldom admits the ji sound before it, i. e. either Pattahh or Qamets ; but substitutes the kindred vowel, Seghol. E. g. a"^"!"?! instead of &'''in?i rm — i^m X ." 'XT But sometimes Qamets remains ; as V^'^^ ■> '^^^^ •> &c. Note 1. The second Qamets sometimes, (very seldom,) goes inte Seghol, instead of the first; as nyi instead of n^i , for "nyi. Note 2. Seghol sometimes, (very rarely,) stands for Qamets, when a Guttural does not follow; as ^"^3 2 instead of ^"^ss. Note 3. So before Hhateph Qamets, (very seldom,) ; as C^'^inninf instead of a''^::ninin. • X t; If 2. Pattahh in a mixed syllable, in the middle or end of a word, not unfrequently is changed into Seghol ; and vice versa. So, SSn;*. instead of tllsn;^ Vice versa ■jj^'r — "jpt Constr. state of ^jiT. (§142.2.) 3. The furtive Seghol, (§ 59. 4.) at the end of words, sometimes changes the preceding vowels Qamets, Pattahh, or Tseri, of the original forms, into Seghol. Thus, 'T\'p)2 m- stead of '^'^pi] ; ritinin for npniH; Fut. Hiph. nVy.S apoc. ^5*1 J but also bj^'^l. But in Gutturals, it is changed into Pattahh; as ^'Tl'D, Seghol-form n::?/7l^, (§59.4.); ground-form bti^'p, fern. ri^DIp instead of riVpip. 4. The Segholate forms are sometimes contracted, and the vowel thrown upon the penult letter of them ; as nJ«'^ instead of r\m ; nvVSb instead of nfiisb. § 61. OP THE ARTICLE. 99 5. In a similar way, are sometimes contracted com- posite Slievas, with their preceding vowel ; when they as- sume a Segholate form, in the course of inflection ; E. g. ^liirjNn instead of ^ilHNn, which stands for :innNn 6. On the other hand, long vowels, sometimes, are put for the short ones, which usually precede the composite Shevas ; E. g. rjbiin for ^^!nn ■r-: it; it Vice versa, — also ; short for long ; as ^nrtNi for :i-\nN!_ Note. But the cases 4, 5, 6, are quite unfrequent, and excep- tions to the general rule. No. 4. is a Syriasm, § 61. /^ Punctuation of the Article, of Prefix Conjunctions, Prepositions, and I He interrogative. I. Of the Article, Si or brt. 1. The appropriate punctuation of the Article is Pat- tahh followed by Daghesh forte ; as in tl) PI 3 In : i. e. when the Hebrew article pH, (Arab. 7i^,) is prefixed to a noun, the Lamedh assimilates itself to the first letter of the noun, and is expressed by a Daghesh forte. (Vide § 41. 1. 6.) 2. The Daghesh not being admissible in Gutturals, the article before them, commonly, (not always,) lengthens its vowel into Qamets ; e.g. tlj^'i^in the man ; I'^^H the eye; tdi^nrj the head. (§ 46. 1.) But before n and n, the Pattahh of the Article, very generally-^ (not always,) remains unchanged; as ^T2:nin the darkness ; ^bnn who -joalks, (§ 46. 1.) But Pattahh in such cases is long. 100 § 61. VOWELS UNDER CONJUNCTION'S. (A 3. But if the Guttural have a Qamets under it, the gL Article, commo7ilifj (not always,) takes Seghol instead of Qa- mets ; e.g. Q''")!r;»l the mountains ; 133?n the cloud. (§ 60. 1.), But we have, also, V'^^ni^^ , D^ln , la^n , anxn , "ninn , &c. agreea- bly to the common rule in No. 2. 4. The Daghesh, commonly, (not aWajs,) is omitted, before a word beginnmg with Mem or Yodh, having a simple Sheva : as nODtJlTI the coverinu', instead of nODuri ; 1iX']in ^/le river ^ instead of "l^^'^n. * 5. In a few instances, iDefore Hhateph Qamets^ the Article takes Sediol : as C^ai^nn the months ; T\^'2^T^T\ the waste places. 6. When S, S, ^ (Prepositions) are prefixed to a noun, which has the Article, the Article generally, (not always,) falls away, but its vowel and Daghesh are at- tached to the Prepositions ; e. g. 0"]^ iDS for iD']Mni2 ; ays for i2vro; onn^ for annn!?. The cases, where the Article and Preposition are both retained, are somewhat numerous, specially in respect to 3 ; as dl'inS, iD^J^b , T?."^2, &c, the article being retained. II. Conjunction 1. 1. The original and appropriate point is Sheva (l) : but, 2. Before words having simple Sheva under the first letter Vav takes Shureq ; as pS^/l. But when a word begins with '^, in, or n, i. e. these letters with simple Sheva under them, Vav may take Hhircq ; as ''!^''^, Dr!?'5''^5 ""Tl ?''?.■'"!; Qn-lJll? ^T!"]' Gen. xlii. 18. Sometimes Seghol ; as iT'rtl. Gen. xii. 2. 3. In like manner, before its cognate letters, i. e. the § 61. VOWELS UNDER PREPOSITIONS. lOt Ijabials, D, 53, S, Vav Conj. commonly, (not ahvays,) takes Shureq; e.g. "Tj^ill, T\^y^, tlT^p^. (Vid. No. 4. infra.) 4. Before a tone-syllable, Vav frequently^ (not always,) takes Qamets ; even in cases like No. 3 ; e. g. (a) When the word with which it is joined, has a Distinctive Ac- cent ; as i\r\J2'i Gen. xxxiii. 13. A word with a Conjunctive accent, does not admit Vav with Qamets. (b) Specially, (but not uniformly,) when words are closely con- nected, in a kind of couplet, or triplet ; "im '^'^'^ generation and gen- eration ; 2>'nT iiU good and evil; tlb"bl Qi'' day and night ; DhDT Tins nc fear and a pit and a snare ; Is. xxiv. 1 7. But here the regular punctuation is sometimes found also ; as '.a'^Jtl TU''i< Ps. Ixxxvii, 5. ttJi'T'n'i )']Z'] ri^'i'l fornication^ and wine, and new wine, Hos. iv. 11. Ecc. ii. 26. 5. Before a Guttural-letter with a composite Sheva, Vav takes the corresponding short vowel ; as iT^Jll , 1135^1. But if letters, not Gutturals, have a composite Sheva, Vav before them takes Shureq ; as laWn, ''p.^if^/l- Note 1 . In words beginning with N, the contraction which this letter admits, occasions, in some cases, an anomalous punctuation un- der Vav prefixed ; as d^Hb^l instead of Q'^ribNl ; 3li^bl^ Milra, (from below,) = o^vtovov ; and a word penacuted is called b'^^ba Milel, {from above^) i. e. with the tone on the penult syllable. It is often convenient to use these tech- nical terms ; and the student should therefore understand them. II. Exceptions to the general Rule. 2. Milel, or penacuted, are several classes of words, \\z, (a) All Segholate forms, having a furtive vowel in their final syllable. This vowel is, almost without exception, Seghol, Pattahh, or IlJii' req breve. In a few cases Shureq appears to be furtive ; as in ^iHn, llrfa, which stand for Tiin and iria (§ 47. 3. b.) In proper names, ending with !in'' , the penult syllable is accented, as nn'^^''^ ; also in !inri"2:'T , as the ;i is furtive. (§ 47. 3. b.) (h) In the same manner. Duals are penacuted ; as ID'] ^5") ; and Plurals of the same form, as C^M , I2']!a ; i. e. these have Hhireq breve in the final syllable. * Words accented on the ult. are not marked here with the accent, except for special purposes. 104 § 62. ACCENTUATION OF WORDS. (c) Apocopated Futures, in Verbs TT?y which take a furtive vowel, are penacuted ; as 75 "^ . (§ 123.) (d) All the forms of regular Verbs, which receive Al- formatives beginning with a Consonant ; excepting those with nn and "jn. (See Parad. § 127.) (e) In Hiphil of regular Verbs, all the persons are penacuted, which have Yodh characteristic between the two last radicals. The other persons folloAv the rule in (/) In Verbs by, in Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal, the tone rests on the penult, m all the persons, which have formative Affixes beginning with a voAvel ; i. e. in all the persons, where 51 ^^, % or "^ -r- is added to the Root. But sometimes the accent is Milra ; as iis'i, Imp. "'j'n. Such ex- ceptions are limited chiefly to Kal. In all the persons, whose formative Affixes begin with a consonant, (excepting the Aff. Dn and '}?!,) the tone rests on the epenthetic i or "^T", (§ 115. 3.) which is insert- ed between the Verb and the Afformative. To this rule, there are a few exceptions ; as ''ni?'^, &c, accent- ed on the ultimate. Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel are regularly accented, i. e. as the cor- responding Conjugations, in a regular verb, are accented. (g) In Verbs ly, the tone in Kal, Niphal, and Hiphil, rests on the penult, in those persons which ]mve formative Affixes beginning with a vowel, i. e. with ITI^^, "1 or ''— . In a few cases, the accent here is on the last syllable ; as ^;oT2J , Imp. ilTIJ . This is very rare, except in Kal. (Comp. under/.) Those persons, which have epenthetic 1 or '^— , (§ 117. 6.) before Afformatives beginning with a Consonant, (ex- cepting the Aff. Dn and iri,) are accented on the epen- thetic syllable, i. e. the penult. § 62. ACCENTUATION OP WORDS. 105 All the other parts of Verbs Ayiu Favf are regularly accented ; i. e. llophal, Pilel, Pulal, Hithpalel, and those persons in Kal, which have Afformatives beginning' with consonants, that are not preceded b}' the epenthetic syllable ; as nioj?, &c; also the Participles in the Fetn. and Plural. (h) Nouns, Pronouns, Participles, and Adverbs, which take J1 _- or Jl — paragogic^ or local, are penacuted ; as T T T •• T -r A few words of these classes are Mib-a, with rj paragogic ; and Yodh paragogic always draws down the accent upon it. (i) Verbs, which take Si ^r~ paragogic, are accented In the same manner, as when thej take the Afformatives In — , '1, and ^ — , 1. e. on the ultimate, in all cases, except those noted in e,yj and g above. E. g. Milra J11/2T for "I'ST , Piel of npT; n^" for IP'!, Imp. of ^'-[\ ^/^7e/^nab^; for nDfiJ, 1st pers. fut." of DD ; nS'lD for tin3 , from Dttl ; ntt^pS for D1p3 , from iD'^p. Note. Ji ,^ paragogic is scarcely ever added to any persons, but those which end with a radical of the Verb ; and here the sanne laws of accentuation operate, as in adding In :;— Afformative. (i) Verbs, Nouns, &c, are Milel with the following Suffixes ; viz, *^D-^, ^\-^, ''D^, 1^-, IH-^, ^Htt, H", H-T, 13^, 13-^, "^377, 1^—, and some others. Vid. § 68. 2. § 69. 2. 6, where the penacuted Suffixes are marked. Also with T]— ? D=~^, 1=-^, shortened from *?]— , D— , and 1—, which latter Suffixes are Milra. (Vid. ut supra.) The Suffix !?I is JtfzVra, with Sheva before it, as!n"lD1; but Milel with a vowel preceding, as vj'^Dj^. Epenthetic Nun, inserted between a Verb and its Suffixes, always takes the tone, and of course makes the viovAMikl] as ''S'^jO') Ac chastised me ; irtsHp take it. 14 106 § €2. ACCENTUATION OP WORDS. {k) Milel are many words, with a Pause accent ; as these accents can stand, (even in case they alter the regu- lar tone-syllable, as they often do,) upon the ijenult as well as the ultimate syllable; as 'IDDD, penacuted, (the regular accent Avould be on the ultimate ;) li^Q^'l Milra, (the usual accent would be Milel) III. Shifting of the Accent. 3. The place of the tone-syllable of a simple word, in itself considered, (viz. without Prefixes, or Suffixes, and in- dependently of Pause-accent, or of preceding or following words,) is often shifted by Prefixes, and Suffixes, or by re- lation to Pause-accent, or by preceding or following words. Of this nature are (a) More or less of the cases, stated in No. 2. h, i,j, k. {b) Nun Paragogic, (added to any persons of Verbs ending with "1 or ^—) always draws down the accent up on the ultimate syllable. Consequently, in cases 2. e,/, and g, it changes the tone from the penult to the ultimate. Besides the changes, which this shifting of the tone may occasion, in the Praeformatives that have a long vowel, (as ■j^n^Jsn instead of nn^73n,) the Nun paragogic sometimes, but not generally, lengthens, or restores and lengthens the vowel of the preceding syllable, (as 'JITa'T^ instead of ^Ta"n%) although it does not stand upon the penult syllable. But here, usage varies, and is inconsistent with itself. See Ps. civ. 28, vvhere both usages stand in the same verse. (c) Vav prefixed to the Praeter, commonly, (not uni- formly) makes those persons Milra, which without it are Mikl ; as ''nnp/dl , but without Vav ''T\'y2r^ ; Hiphil, rib'^^nm , without Vav, nb^^nn. a- • • — • ^ » • Thus also Verbs in T2> and yy (sup. 2. /. ^,) which are Milel, commonly, (not always,) become Milra, by taking Vav prefix. § 62. ACCENTUATION OP WORDS. 107 The exceptions to this general rule, are (1) The first per. plur. of Verbs ; as ^•j^73i<'i. Generally, but not always, an exception to the rule, are (2) Verbs quiescent Laniedh ; as nN'}_"'T, rT^'jll, also, nN2T • (3) Verbs with a Pause Accent on the penult, (sup. 2. k.) (4) When a tone syllable immediately follows, the Accent is then cmmnonly:, not always, thrown back ; as 'nln "^nn^'lil . (5) In some cases, the accent remains on the penult, even when Vav is prefixed ; for which no reason can be given, unless it be, the fault of the transcribers or printers, or the inconsistency of the ac- centuation itself. (d) Vav Conversive, prefixed to the Future, common- ly, (not always,) makes the word Mild ; as "lM^?^l, but ^illJi'', Avithout Vav prefixed. But here two conditions must always be understood; viz, (1) That the Verb ends with a Radical letter ; and (2) That the pe- nult syllable is pure ; otherwise Vav produces no change in the Ac- cent. Note 1. In regular Verbs, therefore, the change in question is limited to Niphil Fut. In Verbs Jiyin Guttural., it takes place in the fut. Niph., and in all the Daghesh'd Conjugations, viz. Pi., Pu., and Hithpael, because the penult syllable here is pure. (Vide § 46. 1.) In Verbs ys>, in the fut. Kal, Hiph. and Daghesh'd Conjugations, In 13;, in the same Conjug. In Verbs j«s, with N quiescent, in Kal. fut. In Verbs '■*£), in Fut. Kal. and Hiph. Note 2. But Verbs fi^ may suffer Apocope, and retraction of the accent, in all the Conjugations, with Fct; Conversive. Cornp. § 122. 5. Note 3. Exceptions to the general rule {d) are (1) The first pers. sing, of Verbs ; as 'n?3NT . (2) Verbs quiescent Lamedh Jlleph ; as N"^'''} . (3) Words in Pause ; (sup. 2. k.) (c) The negative ^i^ before the Fut. of prohibition, or warning, affects it often, (not always,) in the same manner as Vav conversive. Thus, n^irrbN do not reprove, j:]Din~bN you must not add, with accent on the penult. But the practice is not uniform here, as the accent is sometimes on the ultimate. 108 § 62. ACCENTUATION OF WORDS. Verbs rtb, coniraonly suffer both apocope and retraction of the accent, with ^N preceding, as in case of Vav. (Vid. sup.) {/) When an aciiled word is immediately followed by a tone-syllable, it coimnonJy^ (but not always,) becomes penacuted. The object, in throwing back the accent, in this case, is to avoid the concurrence of two tone-syllables. But since the final syllables of many words acuted. cannot be changed without a confusion of forms or sense, (e. g. if the final syllable be long, and the accent should be removed back, it must be shortened, § 54,) and the penult syllable of many others is mixed, and therefore not adapted to have the accent thrown back, (sup. No. 3. d. a. 6.), the usage in question is not unfrequently neglected. (^) The Imperative and Future apocopated, with an imperative, optative, hortative, &;c, sense, (§ 92.) commonly throws back the accent, like the Future with Vav Con- versive. Thus h;^U:5i^ keep thyself ; N'n'^_ let him see, (for SliSt'^'; ;) TNn"] for S^?l.i? (in pause TiTiiA) fern. 2. Di^, '^Di^ (in pause n^^) mas. 3. ii'in (the j^ is paragogic.) fern. 3. fi^'^n , J^lln (pronounced hi,) l^ is paragogic. * In pause means, when there is a pause-accent upon the word, or an ac- cent which prolongs the preceding vowel. 15 114 §68. pronouns: verbal suffixes. PLURAL. 1,1 com. 1. IDH D^5 (13n 3 only 6 times ; 13S! but once, in kstJiibh.) mas. 2. Qrii^. fern. 2. 'jrii* (tl3rii^, very seldom.) mas. 3. GJl, n'Sn. fem. 3. "in, iisn. 3. In the second persons, sing, and plur., the Daghesh in Tav is an assimilated Nun ; the original words being lnn3^ or n2N , DnaiJ , as in Arabic and Syriac they now are. 4. In the plural, the forms which end in M— , probably take SItt- as paragogic, inasmuch as the accent remains in its original place. (See § 62. 2. h,) Note. There are a few cases, of peculiar construction, where the ground-forms of the Pronouns, as here exhibited, stand for oblique cases. (See Syntax, § 184.) §68. Pronouns : verbal Suffixes. 1. The verbal Suffixes, or Accus. of Pronouns placed after Verbs, are parts of primitive Pronouns, united v^ith the Verb, i. e. appended to it, instead of being written sep- arately, as in our language. Thus, Cr^Dp thou hast killed them, instead of CJl ri7l2p. In this manner, the Hebrews commonly constructed their Accusa- tives, instead of speaking the whole of the Pronoun separately ; abridging it, as in Greek naxriQ fiov for narriQ ifiov ; in Latin, eccum for ecce eum, &c. 2. The verbal Suffixes, or fragments of the primitive pronouns, have, most of them, at least three different forms, adapted to the different ending, or tense of the Verb, to which they are suffixed ; as the following table shews. § 68. PRONOUNS : VERBAL SUFFIXES. IfS Sing. Com, I. Praeter. II. 1. ^D-L •^34- m.2. ^"-? *T f. 2. %^?- ^TT^^ in.3. ^n^i i, ^n r f. 3. n-L n.-, n^ Plur. 1. ^]^ ^2-^ m.2. c5 * f. 2. 1? m.3. n Qt-,C1— f. 3. ♦ 1-0--" Future. III. Future. IV. '«34-for'^D34-;'^DTfor''33T ^4-, n^^ for "p.T'&c. •^3- for ins— i3- n3'- for ro'- 13-^ n-, i2-~ t 3. No. I. contains the Suffixes to Verbs, which, after the change preparatory to suffixing, (§ 126. 1. b. § 95.) end with a Vowel. (Vide exceptions § 126. note 2,6.) The Suffixes D?. and 'jS are the same every where, when united with Verbs, and so are not repeated in the Table : "r^, (and so the paragogic form inD,) is every where the same, except in No. I. the accent precedes it. No. II. contains the Suffixes to the Praeter tense, when it ends with a consonant. No. III. Suffixes to the Future and Imperative, end- ing with a consonant. Note, In a very few instances, the Future has the suffix form of the Praeter; viz. "^a-:!^, D^t"! and vice versa^ ''?"^? stands (though rarely,) in the Praeter. No. IV. exhibits the Suffix, when it receives an epen- * In pause ^— , and more commonly, ^4 . t Poetic in I. i» j in II. iXJ^-j in HI. 173-77. 116 §68. pronouns: verbal suffixes. thetic A^n (§ 43. II. h.) before it, instead of the common Union-vowel This class of Suffixes is hmited principally to the Sing. num. of the Pronouns, and mostly to the Fut. tense. The Imperative occasionally admits them ; and the Praeter has '^SJ- a few times. In Chaldee, an epenthetic AW always comes, in this manner, be- fore the Suffixes of the Future, Imper. and Infinitive. 4. In all cases, where the Verb ends with a consonant, it will be seen, that the Suffix in order to be united Avith it, has a Union-vowel, i. e. begins with a vowel ; and in No. IV, a Union-vowel with JYun added. The Union-vowel, of the Praeter is (- or -); that of the Future, ( •• or-.-) (See above. Note.) The Suffixes under No. I. have no Union-vowel, because, as they are used only when the verb ends with a vowel, (and this in any Mood, or Tense,) the final vowel of the verb serves instead of a Union-vowel. 5. Generally, (not Avithout a few exceptions,) the Pronouns suffixed to Verbs are in the Accusative case. A few are in other oblique cases. (§ 185.) 6. Verbal Suffixes are also united, in all their forms, with certain adverbs, and interjections, in which condition, they are in the JVominative case. 7. The Infinitive and Participles may take either Verbal Suffixes, or those of Nouns. For the manner in which Suffixes are appended to Verbs, with the changes occasioned in the punctuation of the Verbs thereby, see § 126. 8. In all the cases, where a Union-vowel exists, the accent falls upon it regularly. Note. The Verbal suffixes CD, "J^. 2d Plur. always draw down the tone upon them ; on which account, they are called Grave Suffixes ; the others, Liglit Suffixes. § 69. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 117 § 69. Possessive Pronouns ; or JVoun-svffixes. 1. Many of these Suffixes, in respect to form, agree with the verbal Suffixes ; but all noun Suffixes are in the Genitive case after the noun to which they are united. 2. Pronouns, or Noun-suffixes joined to a noun in the Singular number, are as follows : my m.thy f. thy his her PLURAL our m.your f. your m.their f. their !rj, pause ir|— 05 1= II. III. Unusual forms. T T 8{— (for n-) I 13 — tsn^ tJn D- 053 -f poetic) 3. As in Verbs, No. I. is joined to nouns ending with a vowel ; No. II. to those, which end with a consonant. In some of the Suffixes, however, there is only one form, common to both cases. This form stands in No. I. 4. The Suffix *^-r- my, when joined to a noun ending with Yodh, expels it ; as '^l-J a people, ii3 my people. 5. The accent is, as usual, on the Union- vowel. 6. When Suffixes are to be joined to a dual or plural 1_ 118 §69. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, noun, they assume a somcA'V'hat different form from those ex- hibited above, as appropriate to tlie Sing, of nouns. E. g. Siifflxes to plural JVouns. my m. thy f. thy -., _ , his V—, 1—, poet. ir^^'Tr? *^*V\ her iT^^ PLURAL. our "^3*^77 m. your CD''— f. your *P^~^ m. their D!~P— poet. I'D'^tt, flSH''— f. ^/laV in^-rr "DH^-rr 7. The Yodh, after the union-vowel in these Suffixes, .... ' . is sometimes omitted, m writuig ; as 'J^iij.Tn instead of ^)''w"T^ thy ways. 8. The Singular-suffixes, in No. 2, are sometimes used after plural nouns, specially feminine forms, as 'Dr\')2i^ their JatherSf instead of CH'^riilZiJ^; and vice versa, the Plural- suffixes, in No. 6. are sometimes appended to Nouns singu- lar, as ^pri^iD'JD thy hatred, instead of ^)ni«{D\!3 w^ith singu- lar Suffix. 9. The plural of Nouns, in receiving these Suffixes, drops its appropriate ending, and final vowel, and receives the Suffix in their room ; as plur. 1D'^"1D'1 words, Cn'^'lD'l their words, DrT^TT being the Suffix in the room of Q'^t-. 10. As an exhibition of the manner, in which these Suffixes are appended to masculine and feminine nouns, § 69. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 119 ending with a consonant, and also to a noun ending with a vowel, the following Paradigms may serve. PARADIGM OF PRONOUNS, suffixed to JVouns, singular and plural^ masculine and feminine^ ending with a mixed and a pure syllable. I. JVoun masculine^ ending with a mixed syllable. Suffixes. Noun Sing. Noun Plur. Sing. t^O a. horse. (D'^p'^D horses. my ■^DID my horse, &c. *^p1& my horses, &ic. thy m. r)&^0 in Pause, ^g.^& irj^o^D thyt 'n^.^D •^^p^D his ^D'^D I'^tD^D her T Plural. 1 1 our IDD'^D ^D'^DlD your m. CSD^ID CDip'lD yottr f. )r^^^ p;&iD their m. tZD-lD cri^p^D their f. p\d, )\ riD^D in^p^D II. JVown masculine, ending with a pure syllable. Sing. Suff. Noun Sing. Plur. Suff. Noun Sing. Di( father. "2^ father my ^"2,^ my father, &c. our ID'^pi^ ourfather,Sic. thy m. '^'^'2i^ your m. t3p'^p^5 thy f. Tj-^DftJ your f. p-^Di^ /i2S ^n'^ijj their m. "QtJ^nVi her n-'ifij . 'm )m Conj. as, &c. nii33 ■iDii:3 Accus. inj5 The Conjunction 3 as, which, united with pronouns, assumes the forms ias , i:23 ; and the sign of the Accusative case DN , are added * ^b , in Pause. t ntt^, Poet. (a) ^s , in Pause. (6) "j^ia, also. (c) -273 , ■•273 , Poet. {d) "j/iia , in Pause. (e) :iri3a , rinaa. Poet. (/) art^a , Poet. {g) '^7ay , in Pause, (/t) n?3y , also. (i) DD"i:Q3, seldom. {j) D?7.1733, seldom. {k) "TiiN, also. (0 ^?3^ » 'f* Pause. 122 §§ 71. 72. 73. PRONOUNS. to the above table, as united with Pronouns, to assist the student, in regard to their anomalous appearances. There are, also, a few anomalous forms, not comprised in the Table, but which will occasion no difficulty to the student. §71. . Demonstrative Pronouns. 1. There are but few of these ; viz, SING. PLURAL. Masc. This HT Common. riTVn Fem. Unusual forms. n'T §72. Relative Pronouns. Common. rhk These *^t!!j^{ who, which, what ; of all genders ' and numbers. iI3 (contracted form of niDNl) ; Also tp, ID, the same. n.T and '^T? singular and plural; (unusual as Relatives.) §73. Interrogative Pronouns, *^)2 who. n'Q , rii3 , np_ what. , Before Maqqeph, !T?3 is commonly shortened, (§ 32. 3.) and joined by Daghesh euphonic, with the following word ; as 'TjV'-n;? mdl-hkha ; and before Gutturals with Qamets, na becomes na by § 60. 1. §§ 74. 75. VERBS t CLASSIF. C0NJU6. 123 § 74. Verbs : general Classification. 1. In respect to Origin. Verbs are (a) Primitive^ i. e. underived from any other words ; as 'TJ^'Q to reign ;* y^"* to sit ; and most of the Hebrew verbs. (6) Derivative ; i. e. such as come from Primitives, by the accession of formative letters. Such are all the conju- gations of Verbs (§ 75.) excepting the first, or Kal. (c) Denominative ; viz. those which are formed from nouns, i. e. names or denominations ; as ^^^{ ^o live in a tent, from p!ni^ « tent. These divisions concern the origin, but not the mode of inflexion. There are only a small number of the class (c), but a large number of (6), in the Hebrew Bible. (2) In respect to derivation and inflexion, Verbs are regular and irregular. Regular Verbs are those which pre- serve, unijormly, i. e. through all their changes, their orig- inal triliteral root. Irregular, those which drop, contract, or assimilate (§ 41,) one or more of the radical letters ; i. e. change it. Those which change or lose two of their radical letters, are called doubly irregular, or anomalous. §75. Verhs : Conjugations. 1. The word conjugation, in Latin and Greek, is used to express the different methods of inflecting diverse verbs, *■ Literally, he reigned. The fnfinitive in English is used here, and in the sequel, in preference to the Praeter, which would exactly correspond to the He- brew root, merely for the sake of brevity. 124 § 75. VERBS : conjugations. that are not connected. But in Heb., it is used to express the different phases of the primitive and derivative forms of the same Verb, as they are inflected. The most con- venient method, therefore, is to make as many Conjugations as there are classes of Verbs, original and derivative ; which would then be as follows ; viz, Usual Conjugations. Active. Passive. 1. Kal ^'^-Z (§ 76.) 2. Niphal ^^pp. (§ 77.) 3,4. Piel b'^?. Pual ^W.., (§ 78.) 5, 6. Hiphil ^^■jpn Hophal Vap.n (§ 79.) 7. Hithpael !:cpp_nn (§80.) Unusual Conjugations. 8. Hothpaal btiypm (§ 81.) 9, 10. Poel '!:t:ip Foal Voip (§81.) 11. Hithpoei yoipnn — — (§ 81.) 12,13. Pilel bbp}>^ Pulal bbp}!^ (§ 81.) 14. Hithpalel V!?Dp_nn — — (§ 81.) 15,16. Pealal V^V^K P^^^l VoVt^P (§ 81.) 2. All these, and perhaps some more, are actual forms of Verbs found in the Hebrew ; but only the first seven are of usual occurrence. As in Greek, no Verb ever ac- tually exhibits all the persons and tenses of the three Voi- ces : so in HebrcAv, no Verb ever exhibits all these Conju- gations ; rarely can one be found, which actually exhibits all of the usual Conjugations. §75. VERBS : CONJUGATIONS. 125 3. The Passive forms are arranged opposite those ac- tive ones, to which they are specially related. Niphal is commonly represented as the Passive of Kal ; and so it sometimes is ; but it is so frequently the Passive of other Conjugations, that I have placed it as a general Passive, Vi^ithout special relation. 4. The names of all these Conjugations, are borrowed from the various forms of the Verb 7i^S, which the old Grammarians used as a Paradigm ; and are merely the modes of pronouncing those several forms ; thus 7^DD Ni- phal, 7;pS Piel, "Ti^S Pual, &c. The first Conjugation is called Kal^ i. e. light,, because it is not, like the derived forms, increased by the addition of any letter to the Root. 5. The third person singular of the Praeter in Kal, is regarded as the ground-form, or Root of nearly all Verbs, because it exhibits the most simple form of the Radicals. In one Class of Verbs irregular, (called Verbs J^yin Vav, § 117.) the Infinitive is regarded as the ground-form, mere- ly because it exhibits three Radicals, while the Praeter has but two. 6. By means of the derivative Conjugations, (all are such, except Kal,) the HebreAvs expressed the various mod- ifications and relations of Verbs, which, in other languages, as the Greek, Latin, &c, are expressed, either by compos- ite Verbs, or by several words. Composite Verbs belong not to the Hebrew. (§ 64. 2.) 126 §§ 76. 77. VERBS : kal, niphal. §76. Verbs : Conjugation Kal. 1. This Conjugation is active ; but either transitive or intransitive. These two classes of Verbs are very com- monly distinguished, by the vowels in the ground-form. E. g. Transitive IjPS to visits with final Pattahh, Intransitive 1p T to grow old, - - Tseri. Intransitive "^^"^ to be afraid, - - Hholem. Here are three forms, then, distinguished by their last vowel, (as there are three clases of vowels,) the two lat- ter of which are usually intransitive. To distinguish these Verbs, they may be named, " Verbs final Pattahh, Tseri, and Hholem.''''* Verbs final Pattahh are sometimes intransitive ; as 'p'15 and 7'1!\ to be great. But Verbs final Tseri, and Hholem, are not transitive. In Arabic, the above distinction by the vowels, as to the Classes of Verbs, prevails more extensively than in Hebrew. 2. Inasmuch as all intransitive Verbs approach to a passive sense, so Verbs that are intransitive in Kal, some- times are rendered pass/ye/i/ ; as Th^ to ascend, also to be elevated. 3. The same verb, in Kal, is, not unfrequently, both transitive and intransitive, or passive ; as VSS to scatter, and j to be scattered. § 77. Verhs ; Conjugation JViphal. 1. JYun prefixed constitutes the mark of tliis conjuga- tion ; as Kal 7Dp , JYiphal 7pp3. * Commonly, " Middle Pattahh, &c. ;" i. e. the middle letter having Pat- tahh, &c. But the student is more liable to mistake in this way, than if the de- DominatioD is taken from the final vowel, as above. §77. verbs; niphal. 127 In Arabic, the corresponding conjugation has a prefixed 3N ; and this appears, in Hebrew, in the Infinitive of Niphal ; thus bl2|J!n = ^BpDM; so that 3ri prefixed, is the original characteristic of Niphal. It appears, however, at present, only in the Infinitive. 2. The meaning of Niphal is, (a) Commonly the passive of Kal, vv^hen Kal is transi- tive. When Kal is intransitive, or not used, then Niphal is the passive of either Piel, or Hiphil, or of both, v^^hen they are transitive. (6) JViphal is not unfrequently intransitive, and then may agree with Kal intransitive ; as Kal, 117 H to be sick ; Niph. n^'HS the same. (c) It is often a reflexive of Kal ; as 1'^ll3 to watch ; 'n'QiISD to watch one's self. Also a reflexive of other active Conjugations. It is also used, (^d) To show one's self as performing an action ; as 1S!D3 to show one's self honorable ; to appear to do a thing, as y^D to appear to be smitten ; to permit an action, as 1111^3 to permit one to entreaty i. e. to hearken to him. (e) To express reciprocal action, which implies two parties, as DS^D to contend ; Dn ^ 3 to fight, &c. So, ^T^ to decide ; Niph. 'T^iD to decide by conjerring with another. (y*) In some cases, it implies a Dative of personal ad- vantage, like the middle voice in Greek ; as /S^ID to ask, Niph. 7fi^l!IJ3 to ask for one's self: as aiT(o/A.ai. ig) It often expresses affections, and passion, as TITI^^ to sigh ; being used as Deponent Verbs are, in Latin. (Ji) Sometimes it requires to be translated, by prefix- ing can, must, may, ought, Sic. (See Gen. vi. 21. xvi. 10. XX. 9.) 128 § 78. verbs: piel, pual. §78. Verbs : Conjugations Piel and Pual. 1. The characteristic of these Conjugations is, the doubling of the middle radical ; as Kal ^I3p , Piel '^tDp , Pual 7^1? . In Aramaean and Arabic are corresponding conjugations. 2. The meaning of Piel is, («) Generally, causative of Kal ; thus 1DJ< to perish^ Piel 'ISii to cause to perish, i. e. to destroy. (6) To let, help, hold, or show a thing to be thus and so; as iT^n to live, T\yi to let one live ; 'p'TI, to be just, p'lIS to shew to be just, i. e. to justify ; ^l^p to be unclean, &t5ilD to pronounce unclean. (c) It is an intensitive of Kal ; as rJ^tO to ask, ^1X115 to beg; IDtD to break, IStD to dash in pieces. {d) It has, in some Verbs, a privative sense, or denotes action, in opposition to that indicated by Kal ; as ")53 to know, 13D to misapprehend ; tKUTi to sin, ^*QT\ to make ex- piationjbr sin. (e) Often the same as Kal, or only with a slight shade of difference, when Kal is transitive. Very seldom is the intransitive meaning of Kal transferred to Piel. When the sense of a Verb in Kal is figurative, the literal one of- ten appears in Piel ; as N'ns to create, Piel i^na to hew out. 3. Pual is simply the Passive of Piel. §§ 79. 80. VERBS : hiphil, hophal, etc. 129 . §79. Verbs : Conjugations Hiphil and Hophal. 1. The characteristic of these conjugations is a prefix n. Thus, Kal ^Jp, Hiph. b'^'^pp^, Hoph-Vo pn, (also b'D'pTi). In Arabic and Aramaean, the characteristic is &5 instead of Tl. 2. The meaning- of Hiphil has a special resemblance to that of Piel ; and is, (a) Causative of Kal ; as *d'lp to be holy, Hiph. 'JS'^'^pn to make holy ; ^T^ to possess, kD'^liJl to make to possess. Note. Commonly but one conjugation is used in a causative ^ense. If Piel have such a meaning', then Hiphil^ commonly, is not used, or else is used in a somewhat different sense. The latter case nol un- frequently occurs, in which Hiphil has a slight shade of difference from Piel ; as ins to be hidden, Piel nji3 to conceal, Hiph. "iTllStl to extirpate ; comp. Greek uquvi^nv. (h) Intransitive, as Kal; e.g. yip and 'j'^S^n to he white; d'Htl and "jj'^nnn to he silent. 3. Hophal is the passive of Hiphil ; but as Hiphil sometimes imitates Kal in sense, so Hophal imitates Niphal ; and Niphal, we have seen, has sometimes an intransitive meaning. (§ 77. 2. h.) So Hophal ; e. g. V^IJ , Hoph. Fut. ^i1i to he ahle. § 80. Vei'bs : Conjugation Hithpael. 1. The characteristic of Hithpael is niTl, prefixed to the Infinitive-form of the Conj. Piel. Thus, Piel Inf ^Cpjp , Hith. b^;pm. 17 130 §80. VERBS: HITHPAEL. In Aramaean, nN ; in Arabic n, i.e. same as the Hebrew and Aramaean, save that prosthetic ^s or N is omitted. 2. The characteristic m undergoes several changes, in order to unite with Verbs. The Hebrews appear to have had a difficulty in pronouncing n (//i) before a sibilant letter. Hence, (a) When a Verb begun Avith a Sibilant, they trans- posed it, and put the n of the characteristic after it. (Comp. § 44.) With ID Kal ^DD Hith. ^SnDri instead of ^SDnn In the latter case, (it first radical) the n is not only transposed, but changed into its cognate 13. But this case is very unfrequent in Hebrew, though common in the cognate languages. {h) The n characteristic in Hithpael is assimilated, when a Verb begins with a cognate letter ; i. e. either % D, or n. E. g. IS/in instead of 'llll'^riiri from IDI This practice appears to have arisen from the difficulty of pro- nouncing n (c/i) before its cognate letters. It is general, but not with- out a few exceptions. (Comp. § 41. l.d.) (c) In some cases, (but few,) the principle of assimila- tion is applied, when Verbs begin with D, as 5 §80. VERBS; HITHPAEL. 131 In all the cognate languages, the same principle of assimilation exists, in like cases. 3. The meaning of the Conj. Hithpael is, (a) Passive of Piel^ from which it borrows its form, (sup. 1.); as Piel 1j!>S to number, Hith. 'IJi^Snn to he num- bered. This sense is unfrequent. (6) Reflexive of Piel ; (the usual sense.) As iCJ'sJ^ to sanctify, dlpflH he sanctified himself. So the middle voice in Greek is both passive and reflexive. (c) The general idea conveyed by Hithpael is, to make or shew one's scH', to be or do that, which the ground-form of the Verb indicates ; as m D3rtn"I to show one's self cunning ; from nsH to be wise. ):'^^^n'rt to behave one''s self proudly ; from Vnj to be great. inVnnri to represent one^s self as sick; from In^n to be sick. And so, with little variation from such senses, DSnnrt to think one''s selfi^ise ; from Q^n to be wise. tocnnil to make one''s self to be sought, i. e. to conceal one''s self; from tosn fo seek. IsririirT to ask favour for one''s se^ properly, to make one gracious ; from 'jsn to be gracious. ;- {d) The same with neuter Kal ; as pllli^nn to mourn, !C|3l>{nn to be angry. (/) Like Niphal (§ 77. 2. /) it indicates after it a Dative of advantage ; nrSnn to get rid of. ig) Active, and * transitive, as Kal; e. g. 'n!2inffin to keep, or observe, i. e. laws, statutes, &;c. 132 § 81. UNFREQUENT CONJUGATIONS. §81. Unfrequent Conjugations. 1. Hothpaal, ('pDjPnn or /DjPnin) is the passive of Hithpael, as to form ; but cannot be distinguished from it in sig-nification. So the passive forms of some of the Arabic Conjugations, (e. g. Conj. vii.) have an active, passive, and reciprocal meaning. 2. Poel and Poal In regular Verbs, these Conj. are rarelj found. In Verbs j^yin doubled (§ 115.) these Conj. are the usual forms, in the room of Piel and Pual ; though the latter sometimes co-exist with the former. (a) The Hhokm in '^Dlp and Voip (Poel, and Poal,) is impure, and immutable. These forms correspond Avith the active and passive of the third Conjugation in Arabic, which reads Vj&, and iy only the two permanent Radicals are re- peated, to form this Conj. ; as b^bs, , from bb^ ; ^sV3 , from b^3; which also have Reflexives, as b.^bann , &c. 7. Psoel, (7u)iDp.) Very uncommon. It appeai-s to be active, and like Kal. It resembles, in form, the twelfth Conjugation in Arabic, which reads pDltip^} , with Aleph prosthetic. 8 Ti|>/ie/, (^tppri ) active; unfrequent. More com- mon in Syriac and Arabic. 9. Forms, like pDptDp, i. e. where the two first radi- cals are repeated, are found, though scarcely ever ; as Ps. 45. 3. So OEDH from tpr\ , with the second radical re- peated at the end ; Exod. xvi. 14. 134 §§ 82. 83. 84. pluriliteral verbs, etc. § 82. Pluriliteral Verbs. 1. These, which are but very few, are all derived irom triliteral ones, by the addition of another letter ; as ■jlblS from ID IS . They are declined like Pilel and Pulal. (§81:4.) § 83. Denominative Verbs. These differ not as to form, flexion, and meaning, in the several Conjugations, from the original Verbs, unless it be, that in Piel the privative meaning is more frequent ; as dlil!) a, root, ^1'jj to root up, to tear up by the roots; 'jD'^ ashes, Vklj'l to take away ashes ; DH? the heart, nS? to wound the heart, &c. § 84. Verbs : Flexion. In respect to Moods and Tenses, the Hebrew is -very limited. Only two Tenses, the Praeter and Future, are distinguished by definite and appropriate forms ; and there are only the Indicative, Imperative, and Infinitive Moods, with a Participle present and past. All the other tenses '..^5/api moods are indicated, by the forms of those already mentioned used in some peculiar syntactical connexion, or with some small change of vowel points. In respect to designating number, person, and even gender, the Hebrew Verbs are sufficiently copious, in their inflexions. § 85. verbs: ground-form. 135 § 85. Verbs : Ground-forms. In all the Conjugations, the principal ground-forms of all the inflexions may be reduced to two, viz, the third person singular Praeter, and the Infinitive Mood. Thus in Kal, ^up is the ground-form of all the persons in the Praeter ; and also of the present Participle. The Infin VtOp is the ground-form of the Fut. and Imper. In all the derived Conjugations, also, the Infin. is the ground-form of the Fut., Imper., and (excepting Kiphai.) of tne Participle also. The third person singular Praeter, is the ground-form of all the persons in the Praeter of the derived Conjugations; and iu JNiphal, of the Participle also. §86. Verbs: Flexion of the Praeter. (^Vid. Farad. § 127.) The gender and persons of the Praeter are designated by fragments of the Primitive Pronouns, sufiixed to a ground-form. 3 pers. fern, by adding t\— (H— ) frag, of jJi'^n she. rj (nrj) snrii^ thou, m. n ( ^n ) n&i ('^rivx) thou, f. •^ri ( tl ) probably fr. obs. ^Tli^ /. plur. 1 ('j'1, fiil) derivation unknown. Dn frag, of Qrii* ^/e, m. 1^. (^jr*.) ir^>^ y^^ fern. •^3 1D>i we. The forms in parentheses are variations from the common forms, and of very unfrequent occurrence. He paragogic, sometimes, (though very rarely) is added to the forms of the Praeter, but does not take the accent : as mnkbea instead of n^VsJ • 2. mas. 2. fern. 1. com. 3. pers. 2. mas. 2. fern. 1. com. 136 § 87. VERBS : forms of infinitive. §87. Verbs : Forms of the Infinitive. 1. The Infinitive, or second ground-form, is a kind of Verbal Noun, and like nouns has two states, the absolute and construct^ (§ 135.) with forms, in general, adapted to designate them. See the various uses of Inf. Abs. and Cons, in Syntax, §§ 212, 213. (a) The Inf. construct is regarded as the ground-form, being the most simple. Its characteristics in Kal are, She- va under the first Radical, and Hbolem, Pattahh, or Tseri between the last Radicals; as "Pt^p, SIDIl), yr\). In the same manner as the Praeter, it has final Pattahh, Tseri, andHhoIem. (Vid. § 76. 1.) (6) In the derivative Conjugations, its final vowel is Tseri, Hhireq, and Pattahh. (See Farad. § 127. Infin. of Piel, Hithpael, Hiphil, Pual, and Hophal.) The irregular Verbs exhibit some variations from the general rules in a and b. (c) The Infinitive, (being a verbal noun,) sometimes has a feminine ending jn T\ or n. In regular verbs this is unfrequent, as Ini'^p instead of i'-^n ; but in \ erhs' Lamedh He, (§ 122.) it is the common form, as nii'^ for ni^a instead of the masc. form i^5 ; also in verbs Pe JYun (§ 113.) as n:iUJ from UJa, which is for \i:a3 ; in verbs Pe Yodh, (§ 109.) as ni'ilj from i'ij, which is for i"^"* ; and sometimes, in verbs Lamedh Aleph, (§ 121.) as SlN^tt instead of i<73iq. 2. The Infinitive absolute has Qamets under the first Radical, and Hholem impure between the two last, as ^it3p. It is regularly of this form in Kal, and trlllteral in nearly all the kinds of Verbs. In verbs Ayin Vav, however, Dip stands, by contraction, for Dip. § 88. VERBS : FUTURE TENSE. 137 (a) This Hholem, ultimate and impure, the derivative Conjugations take, also, in the Infinitive absolute, as Niph. Inf. Cons. Voj^n, Abs. V^p^n ; Piel Inf. Cons. ^t:p_, Abs. Vap_; Hophal Inf. Cons, b^j^^ , Abs. VtDp. But Hiphil has 0—) or (— ) as Inf Abs., e. g. ^'^tpptl or 7tppri , the Tseri be- ing a prolongation of its usual '^t- ; the absolute form requir- ing a longer vowel, than the construct one. (§ 51. 3. note 2.) (6) To separate the absolute from the construct form of the Infinitive, in cases where the construct form ends w^ith Hholem, the absolute is frequently made by Tseri ; as in Piel, HD? or DID^ is the common form, but the ab- solute, in33?. The fem. form of the Inf. is never used in the absolute Inf. For the various phases and uses of the Infinitive, see §§ 212, 213, in the Syntax. § 88. Verbs : Formation and^ Flexion of the Future Tense. 1. We have seen, (§ 86,) that the Praeter is formed, by suffixing the fragments of Pronouns. As the opposite of this, the Future is formed by prefixing to the Infinitive similar fragments, and suffixing them, in some cases, in or- der to mark a difference of gender. E. g. Suff. Pref. Sing. 3. mas. 1 3. fem. — n 2. mas. — n 2. fem. (n -)" — n 1. com. 10 probably from JJ'in, i. e. the 1 be- ing changed to Yodh in order to begin a syllable. derivation uncertain. from nn^i thou. same ; and with Yodh Suff from ft^'^n to mark the feminine. from ''Dii /. 138 VERBS : FUTURE TENSE. Plural. 3. mas. ( 1'^ ) Suff,Pref. ^ _ 1 3. fern. ( 1 ) nD — n 2. mas. i]^) ^ — r\ 2. fem. ( ] ) T 1. com. derivation of "1 uncertain. Tav uncertain; JIS from nSH, they fem. '^ — n Tau from Q^l^{ ?/e masculine. r»3 — n ri from "jn^i ; no — as before. — 3 from "^D^t i^e. The endings in parentheses are occasional^ not usual. 2. The fragments prefixed are called Praeformatives. The appropriate vowel point under these is Sheva, which appears in Piel, Pual, and their substitute conjugations, Po- el, Pilel, &c ; but in Kal, Niphal, &c, the Sheva undergoes various modifications, according to the laws of vowel chan- ges, as exhibited above, §§ 49 — 60. These changes will be noticed in the Notes, upon the respective Paradigms of Verbs. 3. The Praeformatives, in Conjugations whose charac- teristic in the Infinitive is H, expel it, and receive its punc- tuation in the room of that, which regularly would belong to them. E.g. Vjp'' instead of ^DpH^ from Inf. b^^Ti Fut. Niphal — m Verbs 15' Hiphil •\y Hophal Hithpael ^DjPn'; Dip-) — Dipn ' • T iDp_iin ^iDpnn 4. Inasmuch as the Future is formed from the Infin- itive, it exhibits the same vowels that are found in the In- finitive, (§ 87. a.) i. e. final Hholem, Pattahh, and Tseri, called Future O, Fut. J. Fut. E. §89. verbs: imperative. 139 (a) The Fut. O, is the common one. (6) The Fut. A is found, (1) In Verbs intransitive, whose Prae- ter ha? final Tseri, (2) In Verbs with a Guttural in the final sylla- ble, 5rau3, Fut. y73TZ:'^ . (3) In Verbs Pe Yodh, Lamedh Jlleph^ and many of Pe JVun ;' ^ 110. 2. fc. § 120. § 113. (c) Fut. JCis found in Verbs Pe Alepli, Pe Vav^ (when N is quies- cent,) and some of Pe Nun, (§ 108, § 110. § 113.) Note. Verbs Lamedh He have Seghol in Fut., as Ji!?^'; . See § 122. § 89. Verbs : Formation and Flexion of the Imperative. 1. The Imperative is formed from the Infinitive ; and like this and the Future, may have final Hholem, Pattahh, or Tseri. The usual vowel is Hholem. 2. The Imperative has no Praeformatives like the Fu- ture, but only Afformatives^ or Suffix-formatives. c,. (2. mas. 7il2p same as Inf. Const, of the mas. form, ^'"g- \ 2. fem. ^~ r»i ( 2. mas. 1 3. The Imperative has no first or third persons. The Fut. is used for these, when they need to be expressed. The Imperative, like the Future, is subject to Apocope and Par- agoge. (§ 92.) §90. Verbs : Formation and Flexion of Participles. 1. The present Participle in Kal, and the past in Ni- phal, come from the Praeter ; and 140 §§ 90. 91. VERBS : participles and futures. («) In Verbs final Tseri and Hholem, commonly, are the same with the Praeter; as iibp Praet. and Part. So in Verbs 13? Dp — — Reg. Verb in Niphal ^jp: Praet. ^"JpD Part. The form of the Verbal noun or adjective, i^ap , now used only as a Verbal, was probably the old form of the Pres. Part. (6) The active Participle in Kal, of Verbs final O, in- serts i or ^- impure, after the first radical ; as /Dip or 7ipp, Hholem immutable. 2. The Participles of all the other Conjugations are formed from the Infinitive Mood, by prefixing 12 , which expels the characteristic fl, in the same manner as the Praeformatives, § 88. 3. In Verbs ^yin doubled, the Part, in Hiphil is formed from the Praeter ; and in a few other cases. (§ 115.) 3. Only Kal has two Participles ; and the past Parti- ciple here, is probably a form of the Passive voice of Kal. §91. Verbs : paragogic and apocopated Futures. 1. We have seen, (§ 84. ) that the Hebrew has but two tenses, and two definite Moods. This defect is sup- plied, in some measure, by varying the form of the Fu- ture, so as to use it for the Subjunctive, or Optative Moods, &c. Some of the forms are lengthened, and some apoco- pated, in order to accomplish this. In Hebrew, the power of expressing different Moods, by varying the form of the Future, seems to be in an imperfect, or kind of in- cipient state. In Syriac or Chaldee there is nothing of it. But in Arabic, it is carried to such perfection, that all the various Moods can § 91. VERBS : FUTURE. 141 be expressed. Thus, there is a common Future ; a Fut. Subjunc- tive ; a Fut. Conditional ; a Fut. energetic, i. e. strengthening the ex- pression, and used for commands, wishes, assurances, oaths, Hac ; all of which are distinctly marked, by their various forms. 2. The lengthened or paragogic Future, is that which receives V\— (seldom H ~) paragogic, at the end. Common- ly, only the first Persons, sing, and jjlural, receive this. E. g. '^i^pii, paragogic form H^ulpX let me kill It occurs in the active conjugations of all the different classes of Verbs ; but not in the passive conjugations, and very seldom in Verbs HP; and never in any Verb, when it has Suffixes. The very few instances, where the second and third persons re- ceive in-^ paragogic, exhibit it in the same sense that it has, when attached to the first persons. 3. The apocopated Future is made by shortening or dropping the final syllable of the Future, in the second and thii-d persons, which ends with the final radical of the Verb.* It occurs, Usual form. Apocopated. (a) In reg. Verbs, in Hiphil ; asp'^DJP^ ^^p!! (6)Kal of Verbs 13? ; as n^t!'' n't)'' Hiphil of the same Verbs, as fl'^tl'^ r\l2^ (c) In all Conj. of verbs h!?; Kal riV;5'] b}^) C^;**] § 123.) Piei r\\y^^ by^^ Hiph. rh};^_ !?5;_ C^;;.:^ § 123.) In a, the Tseri of the apocopate form is pure, and therefore shorter than the Hhireq of the common form, which unites a Quies- cent with it, and is therefore prolonged. (§ 23. 3.) So in b, the * The first person sing. Fut., though ending with a Radical, is not apocopat- ed, except when Vav conversive is prefixed ; but in this case, generally, Vav merely changes the vowel, but does not add to the word the meaning which is described in No. 4. infra. 142 §92. verbs: imperatives. Hholem is pure, and for the same reason, shorter than the (i) of the common form. In c, the final consonant with its vowel falls away, and the apocopate form is read with a mere furtive Seghol, or Pat- tahh, at the close ; in Piel, however, V^") stands for ^jn ^ (^ 55. 2.) Daghesh being necessarily omitted at the close. (§ 28. note 2.) 4. In the meaning of the paragogic and apocopated Futures, there is nearly an entire agreement. Both stand, when the idea of commanding, exciting, permitting, wishing, urging, &c, is meant to be conveyed ; as nD^D let us go, com. form ':]'73 ; ft^Sin let (the earth) produce, com. form J^'^Sin, it will produce. Both stand in the latter clause of a conditional sen- tence, which clause begins with the Conjunction 1 that ; as " Bring us food, SIT 31^53'] that we may eat^'' com. form i?5fi<3 ; *' Bring him out and stone him, r.lZ'^'^that he die^'' com. form n'^ittV&c. Both have frequently, but not always, a special mean- ing, after Vav conversive prefixed to the Verb. (§ 93. comp. § 62. 3. d.) The paragogic and apocopated forms, though generally signifi- cant, are not always so ; at least, they are used, especially in poetry, in a somewhat greater latitude, than the explanations abore would seem to imply. The apocopated form after Vav conversive, is a matter of course, in many cases, (§ 62. 3. d.) ; and is not, therefore, always of particular significance. §92. Verhs : paragogic and apocopated Imperatives. I. The Imperative imitates the future here, as in other respects, (§ 89.) The Imperative paragogic occurs in Kal ; but seldom, however, in any other Conj. ; as §93. verbs: vav before future. 143 com. form. Paragogic. Imp. Kal itt© STlX;^ Piel n£o n"jDD 2. The Apocopated Imperative predominates, in some of the Conjugations, in Verbs T\b and 12?; as Piel 75 instead of ^1^5 Kal % — b^n 3. In Hiphil, the par. and apoc. forms are common ; as apoc. parag. regular. The regular form here is almost entirely extruded by the others. Note. Only the second person sing, masc, i. e. the ground-form ia the Imper. is susceptible of the paragoge or apocope in question. 4. The meaning of the Imperative is, generally, ren- dered energetic, by the paragogic and apocopated forms. But it is difficult to point out a definite meaning, distinct from that of the common Imperative, in some cases where these forms occur. General Remark. On the whole, the paragogic and apocopated Future and Imper. are to be regarded, in Hebrew, as rather in an incipient than a. completed state ; and are not so definitively marked as in Arabic. § 93- Verbs ; Vav conversive of the Future. 1. To express the Imperfect, (the past of narration,) the Hebrews used the Future Tense, with Vav prefixed, having a Pattahh, and a Daghesh after it ; as 7t2p'^|l. But when the Praeformative has a Sheva under it, the Daghesh is omitted, as bta.|?,5. Before the formative Prefix N, the Pattahh is lengthened, as b't3j?NV (§ 46. 1.) 144 §^4. verbs: vav before praeter. 2. Vav conversive commonly, not always, causes the Future to take an apoc. form. 3. Vav conversive, commonly, not always, draws back the tone or accent, from the last to the penult syllable, when the penult is a pure syllable. (§ 62. 3. d.) But this drawing back of the accent cannot happen, of course, ia the cases where the verfis have formative Suffixes, inasmuch as the accent can never be drawn farther back than the penult syllable. 4. Vav conversive is probably a fragment of the Verb Slin to be. The first letter is dropped, as it commonly is inSyriac; then the !11 assimilates the !n by a Daghesh, that follows it, like mT'D for }lT"n'D. We have, then, in 7Dp^1, a word equivalent to, or the same as ^Dp"^ Jnn, i. e. it was (that) he killed, = he killed. - So the Arabians constantly make their Imperfect, writing out, in full, the verb of existence; and so the Syrians make it, by joining the present Part, to the Verb of existence. § 94. Verbs : Vav before the Praeter. 1. Vav, prefixed to the Praeter, is merely a conjunc- tion. It gives to the Praeter the sense of the Future, because it connects it either with some antecedent Future or Imperative, expressed or implied. As in other languag- es, the Conj. and connects like cases and moods ; so here it connects or indicates like tenses. The solution of the diffi- culty lies in this, that the Hebrew tenses are, in themselves, real Jiorists, capable of being modified by circumstances. 2. As Vav conversive of the Future draws hack the Accent, on the contrary Vav before the Praeter, throws it forward ; as ^Tilb^, but with Vav ''ri1!3I2J'] • But this effect, though usual, is not uniform. (Comp. § 62. 3. d.) § 95. VERBS : CHANGED BY SUFFIXES. 145 § 95. Fei-bs : changed by Pronoun-suffixes. 1. The vowel changes, in consequence of suffixing pro- nouns, are numerous, and can be learned only from the Table. (Vide § 126. and Paradigm.) But the changes, by which the Consonants of the usual forms are affected, are, Praet. 3 pers. sing. fem. n=— stands for n~ final. 2. sing. fem. "■V] — — n — 2. plur. masc. "^ri — — CH — Future and Imper. "^ — — TO — 2. Participles and the Infinitive Mood can take Suffix- es, either as verbs or nouns. But in the Infinitive, the noun Suffix is the subject, and the verbal Suffix the object, of the action expressed by the Verb ; as ^"Ipp my punish- ment, i. e. that which I inflict ; '^D1pS7 to punish me. 3. Passive and Reflexive Conjugations and Neuter Verbs, from their nature, cannot receive Suffixes ; for these Suffixes are in the Accusative case, and therefore require a transitive Verb before them. Where Suffixes are join- ed with these Conjugations, it indicates that they are tak- en in an active sense ; or else, that the Suffix is in Dative commodi. For an illustration of all the changes occasioned in Verbs by Suffixes, see § 126. and Paradigm. §96. Verbs : Paradigm of the regrdar Verb. Thus far, the observations on Verbs have been of a general nature, applicable, with very little exception, to all the various kinds of verbs, regular and irregular. We 19 146 §96. VERBS: PARAD. OP REGULAR VERB. come now, to particulars respecting the several classes of Verbs, so as to show wherein they differ from each other, in the mode of Inflexion. The Paradigm of the Regular Verb, (§ 127.) is to be studied, in connexion with the following Notes. ICAL : NOTES. /. Praeter Tense. 1. Verbs yinai Hholem, (§ 76. 1.), with the common form, hare also another, which retains the Hliolem in the inflexion; as Ss"'. ri'i:*'', '^nSji''; which, when the accent is thrown off, becomes short, as n'^a"'"] veya-gbr-ta. 2. Verbs ^/m/ Tseri, § 76. 1, (a) Commonly drop the Tseri, in flexion, as yen , rii^sn , i.e. they are declined as common regular verbs. (6) But in Pause, they retain it, as ipiT . Several verbs have (-) when not in Pause, and ( .. ) when in it ; as 'j^ia , in Pause •j^ui . (c) When the accent is thrown forward, beyond the Radicals, by Suffixes, &c, the Tseri of the ground-form is changed into its cor- responding short vowels, i. e. short Hhireq^ or Seghol; e. g. •«2:"l'' , tin-ij*!^ ; nr.;| , ^^r\ib_l , }:ii;2i , DnbN'iJ . (Comp. § 54.) N.B. The tone is always on the ultimate syllable of the Verb, when the penulr, in the Paradigm, is not marked with the accent. For the universal laws of accentuation, see § 62, where it may be seen, how many causes operate to change the common accentuation, which is exhibited in the Paradigm of the Verb, 11. Infinitire. 1. Infinitive Absolute, with Hholem impure, either fully or de- fectively vs^ritten, is invariable ; as jft2p or bit^p • 2, The Infinitive Construct exhibits various forms; as ^'op , Jricp (Hholem pure, very generally, there are a few exceptions ;) !:t3p ; fern. J^ba;? or iribup,. , "^t:p , ^P^p. > "'"^PP. (Chaldaism.) The feminine forms are rather unfrequent. §96. verbs: fut. imper. part. 147 ///. Future Tense. 1. Forms of the Future, '^'op'] , bitDp"; , (Hholetn pure) ; Vt^p.") (§ 88. 4. b.) Several Verbs have Fut. O and A, with a diiference of meaning; and others, both forms without any difference of mean- ing. Uncommon forms occur, like fibllDJ?^ 3d pers. plur. ; "^^^tajpri 2d sing, fem.; dV^Upn , 2d sing. masc. with Suffix-pronoun, instead of Also, inV^pi* , iTiUp'^Nt . Both these result from retaining, in some degree, the Hholem sound in the last syllable of the ground- form, and are imitations of Chald. and Syriac futures, which have U. 2 For the changes in the vowels of the Future, occasioned by Pause accents, Suffixes, &c, see § 54, and § 62. 2. 3. IV. Imperative. Forms; Hlop , ^itip (Hholem pure) ; ^tap ; with rt^^^- paragog., n^aj?, n^up; seldom fl Vtop , inb'op. . 2d pers. fem. •»i:Bp, ""Ira)?; 2 plur. masc. ^i>r:p , ^b'Op^ (seldom) ; in Pause, ^^r^p . ^btp . Note. The final Hholem of the Infin. cons., Fut., and Imper. is commonly written without Vav ; but sometimes with one. It is pure, and therefore mutable ; and goes into Q.amets Hhateph, when the accent is removed by Maqqeph, &ic. (Vid. § 54.) V. Participles. 1. Active Participle, (a) ^Dip, Vpp (Hholem impure); seldom 5''l3ip, baip. With Yodh parag., "^^pp fem. in^rpp from nbpp, (very uofrequent.) (6) In verbs ^?iaZ Tseri and Hholem^ as b^J? , bUj? . Note. The final vowels, ( .. , _:_) are mutable, and when the ac- cent is thrown off are shortened into ( .. or .^), or dropped. For an account of the fem. Part, see § 148; and for Plur. forms, see Par. vii. of Nouns. 2. Passive Part.; b^l3p , which not unfrequently in neuter verbs, and a few times in transitive ones, is used in an active, as well as passive sense ; which is very common in Syriac. 148 §§97.98. REG. VERB : niphal. etc. §97. Regular Verb : Paradigm ; A''iphal. 1. The Praeter has no variety. Infin. absolute is, in a very few cases, used for the Infin. const. ; and vice versa. 2. The final Tseri of the Infin., Fiit,, and Imper. is shortened into Seg-hol, when the accent is retracted, by Vav conversive, &c. (§ 62. 3. d. e.f.) In some cases without this retraction ; as 173,alr| . Instead of Seghol, however, Pattahh sometimes appears ; as iT^n. And in cases where the accent is not retracted, but Ihe final syllable is in Pause, Pattahh often appears; as V'^^'.T : especially in the 2d and 3d pers. fern., as M:bJJ."i^n . So under a syllable with a Guttural, asin^nsDn; or a Resh, as n3")nnn ; and sometimes in other cases; so that second and third persons seldom appear, except with Pattahh in the accented syllable. (§ 65. 4., § 99. 1. e.) (3) First pers. sing. ^t3J?N , sometimes ^tppN . (4) The prepositions a , s , b , prefixed to the Infin. of Niphal, (sometimes, not always,) expel the !n, and stand in its place; as ^ttjp^a , instead of bt^jP^^ • (Comp. § 88. 3.) § 98. Regular Verbs : Paradigm ; Piel and Pual. I. Piel. (1) Praet. btp.j? ; bup , (Pattahh often before Maqqeph, and sometimes elsewhere) ; bl2p . (2) Inf. abs. buj? , rarely btsj? . Const, fem. ilbtajP , nV.tajJ. Note. The Tseri in Infin., Fut, and Imper. is shortened into Seghol, when the accent is removed from it. (§ 34. 2.) //. Pual. bt2p. , baj? (with Qamets Hhateph.) bl^^p (Shureq abort ; merely orthographic mode of the later Hebrew, in imitation of the Syriac.) Part. btap.'O, bap., with Resh, a^b instead of •ayz'q . The Mem is, n«t unfrequently, omitted in the Participle. ///. In Piel and Pual., in the forms which have a Sheva under the middle Radical, the Daghesh characteristic of the Conjugations, not unfrequently, is omitted ; as Jinb'^ instead of nrjbil) ; nnbilj for !|nb\y, &c. Sometimes the omission of Daghesh is compensated by lengthenr § 99. verbs: hiphil and hophal. 149 ing the preceding vowel, as ^pbr';' for ^p^H'^ (§ 46.) ; or by a com^ posite Sheva under the DageshM letter, a;* t^Hpr ^or Jinpb . The verb 3:nin in Piel has either ^nlri or bnn , § 99. ,11 Verbs : Paradigm ; Hiphil^ and Hophal. I. Hiphil., Praeter. (a) The 3d person sing, and plural have ■>-— immutctble in the ultimate, without any variety of form ; out of the 3d person, Pattahh appears as in Kal. (6) Various forms ; b"'t:pri , b'^tspirt , ^"^ippN (Chaldaism.) In 2d and 1st persons, sometimes, short hhireq instead of Pattahh, i. e. when the verb has a Suffix ; as nin''nbt:prt , instead of nlT'nbuprt . (c) Inf abs. b'^ttpH , it?.pil? '""^p^ (Chaldaism.) The form with Tseri destitute of Yodh, appears to be sometimes shortened, when the accent is removed ; as Q'^iB-'^sln , instead of 'nSTJ • Some- times, but rarely, the abs. Infin. has the same form as the Intin. con- struct. Inf Const, with prefix preposition, commonly as b'^iapiib , but also h'^Xipb , expelling the He. (Vide §§ 97. 4., 88. 3.) Inf. Cons, b'^ap^ , sometimes ^'^Up?i like the Perfect ; rarely as the Infin. absolute. (rf) Imper. buprt (Tseri mutable,) Snb'^iDp^ . The regular form b'^Opln is not in use j the apoc. or parag. forms only are to be found in 2d pers. masc. sing. (e) In the Future, the apocopate form is VCjp^ , (Vid. § 91. 3.) with Tseri pure, and mutable. In Pause, this Tseri becomes Pat- tahh ; as bt5p:l . (§ 97. 2., 55. 4.) In the 3d pers. plur., the (*-;-) of the common Future, sometimes, though very rarely, is omitted ; as ^bap^ for ^b'^Bp^ . {d) Part. b'^Up'g ^ !:t2.p73 , fem. n!:D"p'a . (e) For accentuation, see § 62. 2. e. //. Hophal, bupin , often boprt . The same verb sometimes ha^ both forms. Inf. abs. !bt2p!^ , !:Cip!n ; Const. bBpSl , &c. 150 §§ 100. 101. VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. § 100. Verbs : Paradigm ; Hithpael. 1. Praeter. bajin^i , ^taj^nr:. So the Imp. and Fiit., sometimes ;J3j:nr| , in Pause i:::j:nri ; "Xtijin') , &c. 2. Ttie Persons la the Praeter. with Pattahh, sometimes hare short Hhireq instead of it, when the accent is moved forward; as 3. The Tseri of this Conj. is pure and mutable. 4. As in Piel and Pual, (§ 98. III.) the Daghesh sometimes falls out, and is compensated by a long- vowel ; as mj^snrr for ^npcnfl . §101. Verbs with GiiUvrals. 1. Triliteral Verbs, with Gutturals in the ground-form, are regular in respect to retaining all their Radicals, throughout their flexion. But in regard to their Vowel- points, they diifer in several respects from the regular Paradigm 7pp. 2. Aleph, as the first letter of Verbs, is sometimes quiescent, (and then, of course, does not belong here,) and sometimes is treated as a Guttural. As the second Radi- cal, it is always Guttural ; as the third, always quiescent. To the class of Verbs, then, to be treated of under this Section, belong («) A part of Verbs j^5* (Vide supra.) * It is proper to advertise the student, here, that as the verb VSC, used by the older Grammarians as a Paradigm of verbal inflexions, gave name to the Conjugations, (§ 75.) so the several letters of this same Verb, have been used in a technical way, by Heb, Grammari- ans. Thus, D being the first letter of ^>B, to say that a verb is es Guttural is the same as to say, that the first letter of the Root is a Guttural letter. So N5 Pe Jlleph, means a word whose first letter is N; inS) iPe He, a word whose first Radical is Ji j 'rtif >fitjin He. a word §103. V6RBS : PE GUTTURAL. 151 (b) All of Verbs 'ky (but none of verbs ii^) ^ but almost none ol" rTp, (c) All of — nS or n3? < because H quiesces f at the end. (d) All that have H or y, as one of their Radicals. §102. Verbs : Pe Guttural. 1. Where the regular Verb has simple Sheva under the first radical, these Verbs take a composite Sheva instead of it. (§ 46. 2.) Vide Paradigm. Where Praeformatives are added, they take the short vowel that is found in the composite Sheva, which follows, instead of the usual vowels in the regular forms ; as '1525''^ instead of ^■^IP'' ; dO&i^ instead of DDvS^ . Note. The Composite Sheva under the Guttural, here, is com- monly, (not always,) homogeneous with the vowel that stands under the Praeform. in regular Verbs. Thus, for nay; we have 'i^'oyD . ^- For T^^oyh T'^?^- — "t'n'jin -■ n?3yrt,&.c. - ; T -t: IT ' 3. Sometimes^ a simple Sheva stands under Gutturals, Here, instead of a Composite one ; but it is then always preceded by the same vowel, Avhich would precede it if the Sheva were Composite. E. g. "llQuI^ instead of 'I'Dm'^^; ianrji instead of mt]\ whose second Radical is In; Mb Lamedh He, or n? Lamedh Alcph, one whose 3d Radical is iri or N; &.c. This is an abridged mode of expres- sion, derived from the fact, that a is the first, y the second, and Jr the third or last Radical of b?s • The reader will observe that when two strokes are put over a single letter, or the final letter where there is two or more together, (as s,N3, !^b,) the strokes are de- signed to indicate that the letters are used technically, and that they are always to be read, by calling the alphabetic names of each letter. 152 § 103. VERBS : pe guttural. 4. When, in the course of flexion, the letter that fol- lows the Guttural with composite Sheya, obtains a simple Sheva, the composite Sheva of the Guttural goes into its corresponding short vowel ; as l^^;p|| instead of ']^il2'^^_; for the latter would make an impossible syllable in Hebrew, as it would require three consonants to be placed before a vowel. (§ 38. 4. § 59. 3.) 5. In cases where the first Radical is required to be doubled in flexion, (as in the Inf , Imp., Fut. Niphal,) instead of the Daghesh usually written, the preceding vowel is eommonly prolonged, (§ 48. 1.) ; as 'I'^.il'n instead of ^iUpTl) Niph. Infinitive. Note. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael of this class of Verbs, are alto- gether Regular. § 103. Verbs Pe Guttural : Paradigm^ Notes. I. Kal. 1 . Inf. Const., H^N , na?.; with a Preposition, !:DN^ nw?;!: ^ also, 5iiNb . Feminine forms, ri^'tpN , lrr)?Tn . 2. Imperative. In verbs nb, ;JDN! , TlnN . With m parag. JicDN . So 2d pers. fem. ■'SUin ; 2d masc. plur. nnnN . 3. Fut. O, as 'ii^^l . Fut. j3, as ptn;; ;' and sometimes Fut. as jnDN^ . Some verbs have both forms. Fut. O, with Sheva simple, Satl^; Fut- v3, b'^tiv Sometimes sing, as Han and plur. as ^Jrsn]^ • A peculiar form is ^'j^n for !]^S^n. (Vid.'§ 60. 6.) 4. The Pattahh sound is somewhat shorter than the Seghol sound. When a Verb Pe Guttural has the Seghol vowels in its ground-form, and afterwards receives accession at the end, the Pat- tahh vowels, as being shorter, are sometimes substituted for the Se- ghol ones. E. g. Sing. JIJDN';' , but Plur. ^spNV 'iDN'' , with Suff. :i;T70ia3 for ;i2yi3 . 2. All the forms, that end with a Guttural letter, end with Pattahh also; and § 106. IRREGULAR VERBS. 155 (a) With Pattahhjurtive, when the vowel of the ul- timate syllable is '^_, i, or 1, impure. (§ 27. 2.) Thus, The Inf. const. Kal. has Hholem impure here, contrary to all analogy ; therefore, ^'np, and not ya'ij. (6) The final vowel is Pattahh, without exception, in the Future and Imperative of Kal. (See Parad.) So, also in the Segholate Part. ; as D'S'jQiD, instead of Ti^tip. 3. All the forms in these Verbs, which would regto- larly have Tseri, either retain it with a Pattahh furtive after it, as S'tlklj, or drop it, and substitute the vowel Pat- tahh, as :?^b. The first is common, where the pause accent falls on the case absolute of Participles, in the Inf. abs. &.c, i.e. wherever a lengthened form is required : the second form, in the regiraen of Part., in words with Conjunctive Accents, in the Cons. Infin.. &c. 4. Verbs '17 commonly take Pattahh, in their final syl- lable ; as "^m^ but also ntlwN[\ (§ 46. 3.) §106. Irregular Verbs. 1. These have commonly been divided into imperfect and quiescent, and that order followed in treating of them, which this division required. As all divisions of this na- ture are merely technical, I shall follow that order, in treating of Irregular Verbs, which seems to be most sim- ple ; and shall therefore make three Classes of them ; viz. I. Verbs irregular Pe, i. e. as to the first Radical (a) "iHB, Pe Jleph. {b) '^£) and 12, Pe Yodh and Pe Vav. (c) ^'S, Pe Mm. 156 §§ 107. 108. verbs: pe aleph. II. Verbs irregular jiyin, i. e. as to their second Radical. (a) yy, i.e. t/^yin doubled. (6) iy, Jyin Vav. (c) "^V, Jyin Yodh. III. Verbs irregular Lamedh^ i. e. as to their third Radical. («) Ji7, Lamedh Meph. (b) tT?, Lamedh He, which properly are ''V, or 17. § 107. Verbs NC. 1. Verbs iiB, for the most part, are inflected simply as Verbs £ Guttural, (§§ 102, 103.) j^ being treated as a Guttural. But in a few instances, in several of the Con- jugations and Moods, Ji appears, occasionally, as a Quies- cent, and assumes the forms presented in the Paradigm and Notes. The latter only, or Verbs &{ for I'ai^Ji ; (to avoid the concurrence of two Alephs.) § 108. Verbs NS • Parxtdigm, Notes. I. Fat. Kal. Forms; 'itti(% '^ttN"', t^nN;; , nn;; (Aleph dropped.) So ii'n^h for tilttiin, &c. (For accentuation, see § 62.) The common form of Verbs b Guttural co-exists, also, with the quiescent one, as TnN'', jriij;;.; ariN'', ^riNV //. Inf. and Imper. Inf. Quiescent, only in 'iaNb. for 'n^Nb . Imper. S|CN (Syriasm) for 51BN. § 109. VERBS PE YODH. 157 ///. Mphil. The only example of quiescence is TnN'3 . IF. Hiphil. Inf. b'^^tn for b'^axn . Imper. r\^r\'n (Syr.) for ^i^nNirr from Tina . Ful. ^i^iN for Jr-iDNM ; i;2Ci<'';T for ^22X^2 (Fi"'*l Tseri shorten- Part. 'J"'T72 for 'J''TN73.. [ed : §54. V. Hophal. Fut. !i^5i- for ibSN"* . : Ti-r VI. Piel. Fut. ""^^yn for '^:'7.TNn . Part. ^:dV? for l-?.'^^!^ • § 109. Verbs "^ Q. 1. Under this general appellation three classes of Verbs are comprised, which differ from each other in their flexion, although the ground-forms exhibit the same letters. I. Most Verbs "^D appear to have been originally IS ; the Vav being changed to Yodh, because the Hebrews generally avoided beginning a syllable with Vav. Thus 1^*' appears to have been ^7l , as it is in Arabic ; and so, in respect to most Verbs of this ground-form, in the He- brew ; the original Vav often appearing, in the course of inflexion. II. A small Class appear to be originally ''S, as VJ?*' , (the same in Arabic) ; and these retain the Yodh through their flexion. III. A few assimilate their Yodh, as Verbs Pe Nun do their Nun. (§ 113. 3.) 158 § 110. VERBS PE YODH. § 110. Verbs '> S, properly IS;/. Class of "^t), 1. These verbs in Piel, Pual, and Hithpael are, almost without exception, regular. 2. In Kal, the Praeter is regular, and also the Parti- ciples. But there exists two modes of flexion, in the Fu- ture, Imperative, and Infinitive ; (a) Fut. Tseri. When this Future is used, it requires the Praeformative to be pointed in the same manner, and the Yodh of the Root then falls out. E. g. DD'', instead of n^D^V which is for n^']'] or DirJ.I']. (The short Hhireq under the Praeformative meeting with a Yodh, quiesces in it, and lengthens into Tseri.) In like manner the Yodh falls away, in Imper. and Infinitive. (See Parad., and § 42. When the last syllable has a Guttural in it, it may have Pattahh, as Fut. S'5^ , Imper. art ; but otherwise, it retains the Tseri. (6) Fut. Pattahh and Hholem (except Fut. Pattahh, merely on account of a Guttural, supra,) do not lose their Yodh by inflexion, like the Future Tseri, but imitate regu- lar Verbs. (Vide Parad.) The same distinction in regard to retaining or dropping the Yodh in the Fut. and Imper. prevails in Arabic and Syriac. 3. The original Vav, in this class of Verbs, appears in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal, (sometimes in Hithpael;) but for the most part as Quiescent. E.g. Niphal nWiD quiescent in 1, instead of 3^13 ; § 48. 3. — Fut. ntOin (Vav moveable.) Hiphil n^irjin quiescent in 1 instead of n'^ttJIJl ; § 48. 3. Hophal D^^n — 1 — ni2']"n;§48. 3. (Sometimes) Hithpael y^inn, Vav moveable. §§ 110. 11 1. VERBS PE YODH. 159 A few Douns, derivatives of Verbs is, exhibit the original root; as ni;i from -\]^1 ; "JniTa from 'T;\'j ; rTiin from 'ny^ , &c. 4. Verbs i^M/. T5er^, and those Fut. Pattahh and Hho- lem, (sup. no. 2.) except in Kal, agree in flexion; being both declined as in the Paradigm DtD''. a —.J. Several Verbs have both kinds of Futures, and other forms agree- ably to them ; as -^"y-^ , Imp. UJ'i"^ and TU'n . § HO. Verbs "^^^ properly IS: Paradigm^ notes. 1. Fut. j3 or O written as la'n'^ , (Yodh omitted.) !iN'n"'_ for ^iN'n*'"^ . 2. Infinitive of Fut. E seldom mascuhne, as yn ; but generally fern., as rrib., Tiy\ . With Suffix, as ''rp.'^ , '^nin , !i of the fern, form going into n, as usual. Inf. of Fut. O fern., n'l^il';' , nV^^, &c. 3. Imper. (of Fut. E.) commonly has parag. rt; as JTT^ for T^ ; nsb or "^i? , for ^b , &c. //. Mphal 1. Vav here rarely quiesces in Shureq, as ''J^ii part. plur. reg. from in^^; Part. UJpiD for u;j5i3, but once. 2. Fut. n^''' for nil"' ; ^n'l'T for ^nS'l . The first person Fut. always T>2^1J< , not (as a regular verb,) S'JfnN . ///. Hiphii 1. Future sometimes retains the Ti after the Praeformative ; as 5"«U5in'J for 3>''-C3T'«; mnirj"^ for innS*^, &c. (Chaldaism.) 2. The Vav of the Fut. is sometimes omitted ; as ^V '1 ^or ^c.^'l- IV. Piel, and Hithpael. 1. Piel, Fut., :n^2 , an abridged method of writing fl'H^^I • 2. In Hithpael ; iianri for SSi^nn . § in. Verbs originally "'S." //. Class ^s. 1. They are regular, like IS, in Piel, Pual, Hithpael, and also in Kal Praet. and Participles. 160 § 112. VERBS PE YODH. 2. The common Fut. in Kal retains the Yodh, hke the Future Jl and 0,in verbs 15, (vid. Parad. and § 110. 2.6.); but differs from that Future in this respect ; viz, that it is susceptible of Tseri final also, without losing the Radical YodJi; e.g. ZD^'V or ni:\ but also as Y|-;^, or Vp.'^'l. 3. The characteristic difference, however, of this spe- cies of Verbs, lies principally in the Conj. Hiph., which re- tains the Radical Yodh; as S'^t2'^n, (not as IS, S^din.) See Paradigm. The Yodh here sometimes retains its consonant power, instead of quiescin^; as D"'3"'?3';73 for D"';"':q*'73 ; ^"^""Xl for "Tiiiirt- The Yodh also remains in Derivatives of "'3; as Tt:J"*73 from "Tiij"' ; :3ia''» from SD^ , &c. 4. In other respects the II. Class of "^S agree with the I, or ID. 5. Very iew verbs in Hebrew, belong to the class of original ""d. They are 5U^ , b^"* , p:^ , ^:i^ , ^jS;; , and I'lJIj ; seven in all ; and of these, "^^^^ has forms, which correspond with Class I, II and III. (See Ges. Lex. *^^'^ .) 6. Fut. Kal yo"^"^ and iD^ fully and defectively written. 7. Hiphil, S"'D''?7. and S"'Di7 , &c. In the Future, some verbs have a very peculiar form, b"'^*^ for b'*?'';'. ; ^"'u;!!'? for a''D'^'\, . Some also retain the characteristic M; as 5lb'^)^■'l^";' for ^i'"^''^. . 8. There are a {evf forms from Verbs is, which seem to be de- rived from ■'s; as N2i:''ln for N22in; but they are so few, that they are probably to be regarded as the result of error in transcribing. §112. Verbs ■'Q, imitating "jD; ///. Class of ''Q. The peculiarity of these Verbs is, that throughout where 3 is assimilated, in Verbs ]D, (§ 113. 3,) Yodh is assimilated here. (Vid. Paradigm, § 127.) 2. Only a few Verbs belong to this Class ; and of these, some have, in common with the assimilated form. §113. VERBS PE NUN. 161 that also of either Class I, or II. of Verbs Pe Yodh ; as p2\ Fut. p^'] and pS"^; -jpV Fut. -I'^D-] and n^^^ The Fut. O is limited to this class of Verbs ■'d. § 113. Verbs Jd. 1. These Verbs are always regular in Piel, Pual, and Hithpael ; also in Kal Praet., Inf. abs. and Participles ; in Niphil Inf., Imp., and Future. 2. In the remaining Conjugations and Tenses, where they are commonly irregular, they are, not unfrequently, regular also ; specially if the middle Radical be a Guttural, as Y^D , Fut. Y^^**. The regular and irregular forms not unfrequently appear in the same Verb ; as "IpD , Fut. "itiJ*] and it2\ 3. The irregularity consists in this, that when the radical Niui would regularly have a Sheva under it, in the course of flexion or conjugaticn, it either assimilates it- self to the following letter, or is dropped. E.g. "11^3? fut. ir^i) for -i"Jr ; imp. ^5 for tD53 , &c. 4. The Inf. Cons, only is irregular ; and this common- ly appears only in the Feminine form; as rtd5 instead of ffl^, (Vide § 60. 3.) ; with a Guttural, n5?a instead of ^5, (§59.4.) (Comp. §110.2.) 5. Future O is the common one in Verbs "iS, as "ItD'^ , although the Parad. has Jl ; but Future Jl often occurs, and sometimes Fut. E occurs ; as "JJ5'] , ]T\*'. If a Future tense occur with only two radicals in it, the first of which has a Daghesh, the root of the Verb may be either *'js, or that Class of ■'s which adopts the same Flexion, (§ 112,) or future Niphal of Verbs yy. Practice only can enable one to determine to which it belongs. 21 162 § 114. 115. VERBS PE NUxNT. § 114. Verbs 'js : Paradigm^ JVotes. I. Kal. (a) Inf. Const, has both the regular and irregular form ; as s;t33 and nyu ; -jn3 , nn for n?.n (§ 41. 2. a.) The fem. Inf., as D'^'a , with Suffix, is imi3a . (fc) Imper. as uja , IJi?. , ^:t , '^i -E, and O. With n parag. nTDij , ?i3n , &c. Also with regular form, as u;U2 . Fut. as •vT.^"' , Ha"; , ■jR') , (£ in this latter verb only.) Also reg- ular. //. jYiphal. (a) As the radical is frequently dropped in the Praeter, and com- pensated by the Daghesh in the middle Radical of the Verb, Niphal assumes the same form as Piel with Pattahh. E. g. Niphal and Piel Bjit ; Niph. and Pi. Nil53 . Of a peculiar form is bT733 •, in Niphal, from btti . (b) Inf. abs., sometimes as 5)133. ///. Hiphil and Hophal. (a) The Nun Radical is seldom retained here ; as "'nVnsn; it is generally assimilated, as in the Paradigm. (6) In Hophal. (^ibbuts is a common vowel of the first sj^llable, (Vid. Parad.) But Qamets Hhateph sometimes appears j as !ipri3?i. IV. Peculiar Verbs., imitating jQ. (a) rtj^b imitates Pe JVun ; as Fut. jniv"; , Imper. nj^, Intlp , &c. (6) ']n3 assimilates the final '^ before a suffixed n; as nr3 for r)3n3,&c. Infin. nn the fem. Inf. for n3n, &c. (§ 41. 2. a.) With Suffix '^rn , &c ; the Tseri of nn going into short Hhireq. §115. Verbs yy, Ayin doubled. 1. The irregularities of these Verbs arise from con- traction. But the student must note, that with the contract- ed forn^s, in many cases, the regular forms also exist, which § tl5. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. 163 diifer in nothing, as it respects Jorm, from Pt^jP. I^et it also be noted, (a) That when the ultimate syllable of the Verb has an impure, i. e. an immutable vowel in it, or is immediately preceded by such a voAvel, contraction never takes place ; as Inf abs. niDD ; Part. act. n^iD ; Part. pass. n^::D. (h) When the middle Radical has a Daghesh in it, characteristic of Conjugation, contraction is excluded. Of course, Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, (Vid. 6. infra,) never con- tract. 2. The general law of contraction is, to drop the first vowel in the Verb, and utter the word by the aid of only the last vowel ; as DO instead of DDD. But here note, that properly the two consonants ii still remain, although only one of them is written, because only one is pronoun- ced ; and the second is not represented by a Daghesh forte, because Daghesh cannot be written in a letter, (e. g. 1 here,) which stands at the end of a word. (§ 28. note 2.) As soon, however, as the Verb receives any accession, the Daghesh'd S, i. e. the double a, disclos- es itself; as rn^D , ^20 , QnisD , &.c, = JianD , kc. 3. When the Suffix begins with a consonant, and makes a syllable by itself, (as D , DD , "jD , '^D, HH ,) instead of writing nSD, DFlSD, &c. i or ''— is inserted after the Root, in order to make the second D of the same more audible; so that it reads, ni!Jp, DniSD, STirSD, &c. The ilholem epenthetic is not unfrequently written without the Vav fulcrum ; but is impure. 4. The Praeformatives and characteristic letters, (which regularly would have a short vowel,) in the con- tracted forms here, obtain a long one; which, however. (Shureq excepted,) are pure ; as 164 §116. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. Future iC*^ instead of DSD'^ (See 5. infra.) Hiphii nDn — nsDri Hophai ntin — n3Dn,&c. 5. The original forms in this class of Verbs, from which are derived many of the contracted forms, are umi- sual ones in regular Verbs ; e. g. Future DD'^ from "2'2'0'\ instead of !li!llb'] Praet. Niph. HOD — 33D3 — nSD3 Fut. — no^ — nno^ — nnD"] Hiph. ncn — nscu — n-^sDn These uncommon Ibrms are found also in other classes of Verbs, or in the kindred dialects. Sometimes the contracted forms here, are derived from regular grruiid-fjrms ; e. g. '^73;; , as if from 'I'^ia'^ ; Niph. ^n3 as if from b^H: , &c. 6. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael sometimes occur regular- ly ; but, for the most part, instead of them appear the Conjugations Poel, Poal, Hithpoel, or their equivalents Pil- pel, Pilpal and Hithpalpal. (Vide Paradigm.) For the pecuhar accentuation of the contracted forms, see 62. 2./. §116. Verbs y5>: Paradigm^ Notes. I. Kal. (a) Praet. Verbs final Hholem retain it, in the contraction of the 3d persons, as S|7i^ (for laa'^), ^2% &c. When the doubled letter is a Guttural, Daghesh is omitted ; as nirrij, (Vid. § 46. l.) With ^, as ini'-iij; the Pattahh under i< is lengthened into Qamets, (§ 46. 1.) as a compensation for Daghesh omitted in the Resh which follows. (6) The Hholem of the Inf., Fut., and Imper. is pure and mutable, and ought to be written, (as it generally is,) without the Vav fulcrum. Infinitive with Suffix, as ij?ri, (Hholem into Qibbuts.) Before Maq- qepb, as -no sobh. §116. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. 165 The Infinitive also has, sometimes, final Pnttahh, as in regular Verhs; e.g. ^\y for !ir>UJ, &c; with Suffix, as Dna , from ^2 Infini- tive of 'nna. Infinitive fern. MSn; sometimes, as a kind of plural ending, ni72"4J, from DXJ'iJ ; Disn from 'j:n. Infinitive, sometimes, like that of verbs IS?; e.g. ^^2. (c) Future. Hholem shortens, (in consequence of removing the accent,) either into Q.amets Hhateph, as ^'iiX}". i o^" Qil^ljuts, as ^Itni. Future Pattahh takes Tseri under the Fraeformative ; 'n'5^. , Vj^Ni ah;*., (once DH";); also once TH"'. Future, sometimes, like that of Verbs ly ; e. g. p'-i'^ for 'jT'i'' from 'j2'n ; ym"^ fat. from Y^"^ ^^- ^^^^ ^'^o iv. 3, 4, infra, for other va- riations.) {d) Imper. ./9, as ba from ^ba; with in parag. nta from '553; with Resh, as rriij from "n'^ij. //. JViphil. (See also iv. 3, 4, infra.) (a) Praeter. With the usual ultimate (-), coexist also ( •• ) and (-^), as ultimate vowels. E. g. final E, bjp: , fiso: ; final O, n'^a: , ntipa ; i. e. all the endings of the regular Praeter, are found here. Other vowels, different from the usual Qamets, under the first sylla- ble ; btlD , in?. , (probably Chaldaism. Comp. iv. 3. a, 6, infra.) (6) Infinitive in A, E; as 2DJ1 , D7afl, abs. Inf. parr, final Hholem ; with Guttural, as bnn from bbn , i. e. Int. with Tseri, like the regu- lar Verb. (c) Fut. A and O ; as iB" , DT* , from iiD and Q;o'7. (d) Imp. with Hholem, as n"3'nt^ from QiD'n. (e) Part, as 2D: , Oa3 from Praet. with Tseri. ///. Hiphil. (Vide etiara iv. 3, 4, infra.) (a) The Tseri in this Conjugation is pure throughout, contrary to the usage in regular verbs, in respect to the "'__ here. Hence this Tseri is not only mutable, but not unfrequently is exchanged for Pattahh ; as ^•q'n, , pnrt , bpjn, , ^aqii , Inf. p^^t , Part. ^^'a. A Guttural or Resh in the last syllable may take Pattahh, of course ; as Fut. "^^r With Suffix ''3201 •) (Tseri into short Hhireq.) In the Praeter and Infinitive, these Verbs imitate 13? ; as b'^Tln for bjrrt from bbt ; "^^"^nJi Inf. const, for "^Tanln , from QJ2D. Such imitations of Verbs is> are fre- quent in Chaldee. I6G § 116. VERBS AYIN DOUBLED. Future, in the manner of Verbs 15- ; as p'"]N for pnij , y^nn for ynn: ^n'^n^ for 'jno^, &c. IV. Peculiarities of Verbs 3?y. 1. From an inspection of the Paradigms of Verbs yy and 15?, it is evident that there are many points of resemblance between them, and some entire coincidences. In Hophal, for instance, they are in many cases the same ; and so in Fut. apoc. of Kal and Hiphil. In the preceding Notes, several forms have been designated, also, in which verbs yy borrow the livery of verbs li", in the corresponding Conju- gation and tenses. These cases, however, are not very frequent. 2. With the irregular forms or contracted ones, it has already been noted, (§ 1 15.1.) that the regular full forms, also, occasionally appear •, generally, for the sake of emphasis or Pause. 3. Chaldaisms. (a) Instead of the long vowel under the Praeformatives, (as in the Paradigm,) the Chaldee has a short vowel followed by Daghesh for- te ; as pi""'_ instead of p*ir This method, a great number of Verbs i'S imitate in the Hebrew ; some following, together with this meth- od, that of the Paradigm ; and some following exclusively the Chaldee method. E. g. Kal. Fut. i^l for SD^ ^?3P"; — n7an^ (Fut. A.) Dnn — Dnnn (Fut. n.) Niph. Praet. brs — bn: (Hhireq with Dagh. implied in ti.) Plur. Part. D'^-lW — I3''"!N3 (Tseri for Daghesh in N omitted.) Hiph. Fut. SD* — nCi^ (bn^ , Daghesh implied in n.) Hoph. Fut. ni^ — riDn"^ tJ-iarj — tJ'tain (Qamets Hhateph for Hholem.) (Vide Paradigm, Fut. Kal, with a Chaldee form annexed.) {b) The Chaldee does not insert i or "— , before the Afformatives of Verbs i^y, as does the Hebrew in the Paradigm. In imitation of this Chaldee usage, the Hebrew sometimes reads, Kal. Praet. ;i373n for tisi^an Niph. Praet. nbm — f^'^'t'n^ (2 sing, fem.) r!:n3 — niSMD idem. § 117. VERBS AYIN VAV. 167 4. Syriasnis. Id Syriac, the Part. Act. of Verbs yj?, instead of being regular as in Hebrew, inserts Aleph in the place of the middle radical ; as pijti in- stead of ppT- in Hebrew, there are a few Verbs which imitate this, in various moods and tenses. E. g. Fut. Niph. Oiip"] instead of DD?a"' Fut. Hiph. sin'^NDn — ^^""s^ri (prob.) Part. "^''v^'^^a — '^"'1^^ (prob.) 5. A peculiar anomaly is the omission of Daghesh in the final Radical, where the Verb receives accession, and dropping the vowel that precedes the letter ; e. g. Kal Fut. nb:32 for j-i'fn: (ti paragogic.) Inf. I3'3n=l — ^^^T!r. ^''°'^ C'^rji b prefix, n Suff. pron. Niph. innD3 — inaba Fut. i^73■^3 — i^'Sl^ (rt paragogic.) §117. Verbs iy. 1. Verbs 15?, in the Conjug. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, scarcely ever adopt the regular forms, but, instead of them, use the Conjugations Pilel, Pilal, Hithpalel ; seldom Pilpel, &:c. (§ 81. 4. 5. 6.) See Paradigm. n:i2? in Piel is regular ; e. g. T^2> ; so 2'^'n — Piel 'zi^Tl ', and D^p sometimes reads D^p in Piel. 2. In the remaining Conjugations, the Vav, (middle Radical,) is quiescent throughout ; and assumes, in older to effect quiescence, and in consequence of its relative situa- tion in different Conjugations and Tenses, a great variety of forms ; as the Paradigm shews. The student must consider, in accounting for the anomalies of this species of Verbs, that the vowel, with which the contracted form of the Verb is uttered, is often heterogeneous with Vav, the middle Radical of the Verb, (§ 23. 2.) and therefore the 168 § 117. VERBS AYIN VAV. Vav itself must either chana^e, to become homogeneous Avlth the vowel ; or the vowel change, in order to become homogeneous with the Vav. (See § 48.) Both the me- thods, here adverted to, are used in Verbs 13?; Praet. Dp = DNp instead of U2p i (Vav into N,) i. e. the conso- nant changed so as io agree with the vowel Qamets. Niph. Dip2 in- stead ofanp3, Pattahh is changed to Hholem, as being homogene- ous with the V^av ; i. e. the vowel is changed so as to accommodate the consonant, or Quiescent. 3. The Vowel in which the Vav quiesces, i. e. of the contracted Verb, when long, is nearly always Impure, and of course immutable ; as Dp = C>ip , Dip, D'^p. But the Imperative and Future apocopated, Kal and Hiphil, have a pure vowel; e.g. Dp, Dp"*, '0'l?\ with mutable Hholem and Tseri : but, 4. Altogether peculiar are those forms, in the Praeter and Future, whose Alformatives begin with a consonant, that is not preceded by the epenthetic i or ''^; as Ti)2p_, Tl/Op , &c. with a short vowel, in the contracted Verb ; and so, sometimes, Fut. T\2)2'pT\ , Imp. Jlj'Qp, with Hholem pure. In like manner, sometimes, in Hiphil ; as Praeter nSjn, Avith short vowel ; Fut. Tl2l2'^T) , with Tseri pure. The Arabic inflection corresponds with this. 5. The Praeformatives have a long vowel through- out, (pure for the most part,) where regularly they would take a short one. The reason is, that the first radical of the Verb, on account of the contraction of two syllables into one, is taken away from the first syllable, and thrown Into the second ; which of course lengthens the vowel under the Praeformative. (§ 55.) E. g. ntip^ instead of nip^ ; &''p?7. instead of C^ipn ; Dj5!|ln instead of ta^p^: , where the Vav appears to be transposed, as it would seem from the Paradigm ; as in Titb^ and Tib"]^ wickedness. § 117. VERBS AYIN VAV. 169 6. As in Verbs 5? 5?, 1 and ''-tt- are inserted after the Verb, and before the Afformatives, (probably to faciHtate the pronunciation of the word ;) so here, we jfind the same insertions, in a part of the forms. E. g. Niph. Praet. ni)3ip2 , nDi^^p5 c i before Afformatives begin- Hiph. Praet. ni'a"'p.Si, ^3T7:"'p.in ^ ning with n and a. Kal Fut. In2"<'!3;ipn ''— before Afformative !n2 • But in Kal and Hiph. the epenthetic i and "^-rr- are sometimes omit- ted, and short vowels, or pure ones adopted, in the verb. (Vide su- pra, No. 4.) The Imp. Kal fem. plur., and Fut. fern, in Hiphil, never exhibit the epenthetic syllables, but always take Hholem and Tseri pure ; as Imp. Snjap, Fut. Hiph. iis^'pn. 7. As in Verbs ^3?, so here, many of the contracted forms appear to be derived from fuller forms, that are un- usual in regular Verbs ; e. g. Kal. Inf. d^p for Dip which is for usual form nip Fut. nip; — Dip2 — n^P": Part. dp — nVp — niip (§ 90. 1.) Hiph. D-'pr; — Q''"!pn 1 &c. Note a. It will be seen from slight inspection, that where the vowel of the contracted Verb is Hholem or Shureq, the Vav of the Root remains, though quiescent ; and this, because it is homogeneous with these vowels. But where the Verb must be spoken with a het- erogeneous Vowel, the Vav falls out, or is transposed, for otherwise it would make a kind of diphthong with such Vowel. (§ 23. 5.) So np , nap , npin (transposed), D'^p'Tt , &c ; also with Hholem pure, as Dp; , Vav is omitted. Note b. The contraction of this class of Verbs cannot well be accounted for, on the supposition that the Hebrews pronounced the Vav hard, like v^ as we do. But if, like the Arabians, they pronoun- ced it as w, then most of the contractions can easily be accounted for; Dip qa-wam goes very easily into DJ? qam ; D^p^ yaq-wiim into Dip,, &c. For Accentuation, see § 62. 2. g. 22 170 § 118. VERBS AVIN VAV. § H8. Verbs 12> ; Paradigm^ Notes. I. Kal. 1. Praet. DNJ? (scriptio plena). Verbs final Tseri ; J^n7a (fem.) inS) ; Dri">132 2 plur. masc. from *^s. Verbs final O ; ^312J2, n'^iN, ^St, riu:2, (from ^12.) As Verbs i"" ; fa, Praet. from ina : HD from Jn^a. '2. Part. t:N">IJ (scrip, pien.) Verbs final £ ,• ntt , 1?> plur. b"':^, D''-5''.n (script, plen.) Verbs final O; D"^J2Tp; d-lJia, &c. 3. /n/. const. O. 'n'lN, 'ijia, &c. This is the common form in Inf. absolute, where Verbs have Shureq in the Const. Inf. ; as Inf. const, 'n^a, abs. ^ia. 4. Fut. O. ivo;; , *iiN;j , &c. Fut. U and O, ain^ and Din^ , '»ijin;i with ( •• ) under Praeform. as if from reg. form ^1i^ Fut. Apoc. Dp^, (seldom Dp^or tjiip^ where this Fut. is required;) sometimes apoc. form plene^ as DiJT^- But h'^re the Vav is only ful- crum, as in regular Fut. Kal ; for the Hholem here is mutable, as ap'T (Qamets Hhateph in the ultimate.) NS-iUJn , the same. With a Guttural, *lD^T , P|3)'»1 , &c. 5. Imp. ^a (apoc), na , 'niN, Jia^p (parag.) //. JViphal. 1. Praet. Once "nni"?.- The student will observe, that out of the third persons, the vowel in the contracted form of the verb isn, and not (as in the 8d pers.) n. Shureq is adopted instead of Hholem, be- cause it is rather shorter, (§ 51. n. 2.) and the increase at the end of the verb, seems to require this. But sometimes the Hholem re- mains; as DnijiSj. 2. Inf. const, sometimes with Shureq, as "lUI"!!. 3. Part. plur. also, as a'"313 instead of D''Sin3. ///. Hiphil. 1. Praet. sometimes as neD_t7. , "'nNain, t]^!aJ^ (from na.) Also nin'ilrj, riT 3112^7. As verbs 3?^, "^ein , ^"i.rt . Chaldee form D'^QIj for n-'Dri.' (Conip. § 116. iv. 3.) 2. Inf. fern. nS3^J , masc. JCl'^avJ- 3. Fut. insman for riaTi^an, from nMi. § 119. VERBS AYIN YODH. 171 I ___________^ . Fut. apoc. 'nO>, "nD^I, 1st pers. a-'UiijI. With Guttural, "iD'] , nil"). Fut. (Chaldaic) .13''>2 fornr^r (Comp. § 116. iv. 3.) Part. Chaldaic form, rT^Da for n'^DW. IV. Hithpalel. Praet. "j^iantl ; ia Pause "JDianin. Part. fern, in pause, 'r^'n^a^pD^2. V. Regular Forms. 1. There are a few verbs :i2>, whose Vav is moveable, and is treated as the middle Radical in regular Verbs ; e.g. '^in , yia » &c. 2. Verbs ?i^, whose middle Radical is Vav, arc regular as to the Vav ; as rtlSt, Piel nj2£ , &c. § 119. 1. The Ybd/i of these Verbs assumes, in all the Con- jugations except Kal, the same forms as the Vav in Verbs 15?, as may be seen by the Paradigm. This arises from the quiescence of the Yodh, and from its being commuted for the Vav, w^herever the vowels render it requisite. 2. There are but few Verbs, which, in Kal, are ex- clusively ■'3? ; most Verbs that are ''5' have also another form in 15?, as p^ and ]''h ; Dlia and tl^^'lH^, &c. The Par- adigm presents both the forms in Kal. 3. JYotes. The two forms in Kal are presented to the eye. The Fut. apoc. is as ai'' from n^^ , h'^^ from h'^iD, kc. Vv^ith Guttural, n^** from tr^'^ , kc. In Pause 'jb* , (§ 55. 4.) from '^^'b. The common Future Kal in •'y, viz. 'j'^l'^, and Fut. Hiphil have the same form. § 120. Verbs «i>, 1. Aleph, at the end of a word, is always quiescent. Hence, when a Verb j«7 ends with a Radical, its Aleph 172 § 120. VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH. always quiesces : and if the final vowel be Pattahh, it lengthens it into Qamets, as ^'^12 instead of i^'l'D ; (§ 23. 2. 3.) but other vowels remain unchanged, and are regular, as Inf. ^^12 , Part, i^^b, &c. (See Paradigm.) The final vowels, in Verbs of this class are not immutable, in con- sequence of quiescence in N, because flexion requires their change, and the quiescence, moreover, is merely accidental. 2. When formative Suffixes (beginning with Conso- nants) are appended, Aleph still quiesces; but (a) In Praet. Kal of Verbs final ^, it quiesces in Qamets ; as HS^k'D. (6) In the Praeter of all the other Conjugations, in Tseri ; as T\Jiap}^ , n&ir/q , &c. (c) In the Fut. and Imper. of all the Conjugations, in Seghol; as iHDi^i;^., rt^Nittn,&c. 3. When the Aiformative begins with a vowel, then i< is moveable and regrilar ; as iTii^S^, '^>{I2'D , &;c. o T : IT ' ; • Note 1. When Aleph follows an impure vowel, quiescing in ij, or •», it may be said to be in otio ; as Nii:a , N-'it^in , &c. (§ 23. 5. note.) Note 2. Aleph quiescent is sometimes omitted, m writing ; as «n5£73 for 'nNlEJJ. (6 24. 3.) § 121. Verbs Kb' Paradigm, notes. I. Kal. 1. Praeter. Verbs final Tseri retain it, out of the third person ; as riNI^ from N'T'. T ..T "T The third person fem. sometimes as riN'nj? ; and so in Niph. riNbB3 , Hoph. riNa?!. (Syriasm.) 2. Inf. fem. inij^"; , SlNen , tiijttta , nN'n)?b (prep, b) Inf. const. for n^^jPb. § 122. VERBS LAMEDH HE. 173 With fern, n ; as n^V^a for nN^a ; rixir)?? for nNtoa. Also nan for Nian , (Aleph omitted.) 3. Imp. ^N'^'^ yeru for ^N'^'» ; h^'^Nir for J^3^«^; , from N^r 4. Part. DNib for nNi:72 ; n2iT^ for riNkv. Plur. Q-^i^or! for £l\vrDn ; with Suiff. DN^s for tliilz. //. Mphal (a) Praet. firiajDi for DriN?3p3 ; nilr5 ; Piel ^\'^\ (c) Assimilation both in vowels and consonants ; as n?312 2d person, from J<'25£; :i]:73 for siNb^a. Fut. !n3''e*^n from NS'i. Part. N2i"' for !nN2£'' ; Plur.iHrith Suff. fT'liT from inn}) JVo. 1 , orig. form. 3d pers. Hb^"] 1st and 2d pers., as Jnb':»n With Guttural in ult. ns^n'^ With Resh '^^.'\1 Verbs s Guttural Tt'^y'' n;?1 to be, n;)n to live, as n^.tn"; {:^M) -| — ^ -?,■'-■' "'^'^1 commonly "Ji'^") But sometimes the Future is full, with Vav; as !rT23>'^'» . (e) Imper. n'^2'2. (See h infra.) (/) Part. fem. irr^bia with Yodh moveable ; Plur. m'l^ia. (g) Part. pass. Vav moveable at the end, nT^as (plur.) :iba for ^a):u ; :jsJ2 for ''tisiE. XT •» (/i) Yodh Radical restored. In all the forms of Kal, (which usu- ally drop the Yodh,) where a Pause-accent falls on the last syllable of the Radicals, or Nun Parag. is added, the Yodh is restored, and its preceding vowel prolonged ; as Praet. vba , Fut. '^'^h'^1 , 'jr'nUJ'; ; original forms '^s, , "iilbuj, Sic. 176 § 123. VERBS LAMEDH HE. //. Niphil. (a) Praet. Sometimes rf^'^z , (Hhireq for Tseri) ; and so in oth- er cases. In Pause, ^'^^33. (h) Inf. abs. also sometimes as ni^5D. (c) The Fut. Apoc. here, merelv drops the He final with its vow- el 5 but suflfers no other change, as ba'.2 for Jl^.a'.}. ///. Piel. (a) Praet. '^n'^^p. for '^n''|)p (See II. a, supra) ; and so in other cases, where Tseri would regularly stand. J<3U5 (jt for in.) So Pual K3^. (See V. infra.) (6) Inf. lns:£ ( •• for •.• ) Syriasm. (c) Fut. tnV^n ( •• for ■.- ) Syriasm. In Fut. Apoc. not only the n with its vowel falls away, but the Daghesh of the middle letter also ; because by the apocope, the middle letter becomes ultimate., and Da- ghesh cannot therefore remain j as ^^""i for ^5^1 , &,c. Sometimes, the Pattahhis prolonged here, as a kind of compensation for the Da- ghesh omitted, as b:3,']l , ir\''} , &c. (d) Imper. apoc. Oil for !^£>J^• (e) Yodh Radical retained ; Imper, !i''bT ; Fut. ^"^ttn^f? > ^^"^5"? 5 the Daghesh in the middle Radical omitted. IF. Hiphil. (a) Praet. n"^^iii ("^-r- for 'i-rr). See II. a, supra. 3d per. fem. nb^'ri , nbin , (Syriasm) for innba?!. So also Hophal, nVan. Hiph. Praet. "^briin (Syriasm) for tl^tiri.^ (6) Inf. Instead of the regular Inf. abs. only the Syriac form of (he Inf. occurs for it : as inbS'.Ji , JiSln , iia^.?! , &c. unfreq. apoc. com. apoc. The last form coincides with the form of the same Verb in Kal, and is to be distinguished from Kal, only by the sense. id) Fut. (Syr.) N^-)©:; for JT^D^; ''aTni (from Jiat) for ns.Tm; Tittn forntinn. (c) Fut. Apoc Full form. in'."!: W: ith Guttural in ult. in?f?- Pe Guttural Tib^'' § 124. VERBS DOUBLV ANOMALOUS. 177 (e) Imper. Apoc. nnn for anri ; ?l~in for J:]-!?!; ^ryrt for Inbyin. Vide supra c. V. Remarks. Iq Aramaean, the Futures and Participles of Verbs Nb and rtb end in N-rr or "^-rr. The cases where the Hebrew Verbs Mb, as seen above, end in this manner, are Aramaeisms. So also, those that end in ■'-r-, instead of in^^ or !i— • The confounding of final j< with Ji, as in many of the precedii% examples, is Syriasm j for in Syriac, both species of Verbs flow into one. Note. For an account of the manner in which Suffix Pronouns affect Verbs ftb, see § 126. VIII. FI. Conj. Piel. A few Verbs Jnb have a Pilel Conj formed by changing' the final Yodh into Vav, and then adding He; as r;^53 Filel niN^.; Sltin Pil. The Verb ?irj'^, used principally in Hithp., is apocopated there, (as Tl'^rt i^, sup. I. d.) in a peculiar manner, because of its Fav in the Pilel form ; thus inr"^, Pilel riinii:, Hith. ri:)nn'vyn. Apoc. rirtnT^"^ for 'inny'^, as ^■T^ for "^n") ; (supra I. d.) §124. Ferbs doubly anomalous. 1. Verbs whose first and third Radical consist of those letters which occasion anomalies when thej occur, have this appellation ; such as j^'iD] , nflX , t'u'* , &;c. When the first and third Radical are irregular, the middle letter is, of course, regular; two irregular letters scarcely ever coming together. 2. All the irregularities occasioned by anomalous Rad- icals, concur in these verbs, wherever they can. But, in cases where the anomaly occasioned by one letter would interfere with that occasioned by the other, practice can only determine for the student which is to be followed. 23 178 § 124. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. Thu=! ms as a verb 5>5> would be, in the Future, n;"' ; but the Fut. as -j's would be S""^ , which is the real one ; but in Hiphil, it is *i3rt as a verb ys, instead of T^'^Ji as a verb "js; so in Hoph., the Praet. is ii'Ti as 5>i?, but Fut. T;).'^ as "je. 3. Examples ofjbrms, in doubly anomalous Verbs. (a) Fer65 "jd, and Jtb- Nto2, Imp. Nto , Inf. n{P!! i (N omitted.) (6) Kerts ID and h'b. ^itD3 , fut. apoc. t:;; , (full form mti)';). Hiph. Imp. apoc. tz'^ , (full form nt:2V Fut. U;;} (plene np.^i). 1st pers. tJi^ (lnt?N). rjlD: , Hiph. iisrt ; Inf nisrn ; Imp. inS^r , apoc. ^n ; Fut. HSU, apoc. '^i; , plur. ^2^ j-iT j , Fut. apoc. V , T'^,1 ; Fut. Hiph. t^l. ^^c) Verbs ^D awrf J^b- riDkH , Praet. ^:n4< ; Imp. ii-^DN (Syriasm for mN = inN without pause accent.) Fut. HT)'^^ for nni<'^ ; Fut. ni<:;i = nn^?"! • Hiph. Imper. ^"^nln = n'^ni^ti (N omitted.) » AT" AX •.• I/ ^SN , Imp. ^DN (Syr.) for ^si* ; ntlSh^ (N omitted) = ^iiCi^ni. (f/) Verbs ''Q awfZ Mb. Ni£^ , riN^ for nN^:, Inf. fem. ; Imp. N^; Hiph. N"'5£'iln. (e) Verbs '^D awe/ Inb. JT11«, Piel Fut. ri-]*;; for ^lyill Fut. Hiph. Ji'ir, 1st pers. with Suff. '^'I'ii*. Sometimes Fut. retains the Praeformative Ji, astm'nr !n3^ , 1st pers. plur. with Suff. bDij = n— |r!3"'2. Hiph. in:ilrr. 'n^li Imp. :i-\"; ; Inf. rin;; , ni-i^- 1st pers. plur. Fut. with Suf- fix &-J-: ; Hiph. n^irt ; Inf. ni'lin ; Fut. JTnr, apoc. ni'l- (y) Verbs of peculiar irregularity. (1.) Nia, Praet. N2 , 1st plur. r|3i<2 for ^53 ; Fut. J<'in\ ii^ 3d pers.; Hiph. N"^lin, 2d pers. nj from '^2'^ ? ^^ the form appears in Arabic. It has but one form in use. Note. The student has only to consider the anomaly at the be- ginning', as belonging to the class of verbs defectine S; and the one at the close, as belonging to those defective b) and unite both of § 125. RELATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 179 these, in the inflection of a doubly anomalous Verb, in order to find all its forms. § 125. Relation of Irregular Verbs to each other. 1. From the union of forms and signification, in many cases, it is probable that Verbs defective t) were origin- ally duoliteral, i. e. consisted of the second and third Rad- icals ; that Verbs defective IP, consisted of the first and third Radical ; and that those defective 7, consisted of the tAvo first Radicals. These three Classes are not only re- lated, respectively among themselves, but also to each of the other classes, occasionally, either in form or meaning. (See Gesen. Lehrgebaude § 112, 113.) 2. From this fact it follows, that many anomalous forms, in any one class, are to be accounted for by deriv- ing them from a Root of another Class, which had the same meaning. Thus "j^t] to go, Fut. ^b^ as from y7_^ ; so Imp. ^b , Inf. DIdV ; but Part, ']h^tl , Niph. ']^mD , &c. as if from "J^Jl. Much is yet to be done, in arranging apparent- ly anomalous and peculiar forms under their proper Roots. When two irregular Verbs, of the same signification and of kindred forms, occur, the one is used only in par- ticular modes or tenses, and the other in the modes and tenses where the first is wanting ; both forms thus making out a complete Verb. Thus in respect to the Verb T|^!. Niphal, Piel. Praet. 3. m. ^Pl-? (tin lai .. ) in3 ^PH^ ^■^.R 3. f. T • It nVqps nVjp 2. m. ^yp-z nbbpq jn^bp 2. f. nVojp n^ins ri'ropD nb/iop 1. ^n"i3D ^^'^_bpD ''inVop Plural 3. "^iVop^ ''^=^.? ''"^"^R3 ^Vjp 2. m. ti^.V^'p. amns ariyop3 an^Dp 2. f. I^^^P ■jP-IDS irj.<''^-F*^ l^.^.'^-R 1. ^D^iS •^D^.bpD 13bbp Inf. abs. 'prjp YmsVc: 'H^,V"opn V-jp. const. V"ojP inD ^"^^.EH ^1^.P- Fut. 3. m. -'^F.' ^^^^.1 -■^.Ft' ^^P-l 3. f. V-opn nsDn '<4^.F.n -4^.F-^. 2. m. V'jpn I2in i'^.En <45.F-^; 2. f. ^V^F.^. '^'isrrn '^yjp^n ^ptDpn 1. ^'"^K^"?. "-^.^'?. ^tipi^ ^'^.F-^; Plural 3. m. 'iVlDP"; ^^SD^ ^yj^j?-] •iVjp_^ 3. f. nDVopn n3"[S5n riD^bp^n ^?^.^.p_ri 2. m. •iVopn i^spn. •^Vo pn ^Vl^iPH 2. £ nDVbpn . n3"i35ri n3^b_pn nD^.bpn 1. ^'■^p,3 "^-.3 ^h^.E^ ^^.F-?' Fut. apoc. Imp. m. Vi:p nns ^■^.EH ^^.P- f. ^;ri nn/n 2. m. ins^n pTnn n5:yn l^53>'n n^qi'n 2. f. ''"i5q3?n '^pmn '^l^q^n '^I'^b^ri """itiyn 1. iii^ii^ ptrix lti_^i^^ 'I'^^qyw^ n^D^ij Plur.S.m. '11^_":P'^ "^pTm '^"153^;'^ ^"I''!]j?:i '^153"^; 3. f. riDi&n nDj-pVnn n5"ib3?n HDibyn riDi^Dyn 2. m. ^4t;3?ri "ipmn ^l^q^n ^l"^b?n ^I52:^n 2. f. n5"i55>;ri riDp mn Jij"it),:;n tnDitjyn njibjpn 1. 452>'3 pTHD i52y: ''n'>tli?3 ^12V2 Fut. apoc. iny;i Imp. 2. m. "'^_^. F?n 1523?n "^.?J1 2.f. ^1533? ''ptn 'i1523?n ''l''r:3?n Plur. 2. m. ^1523? ^pm ^153 3?n "^i^mn 2.f. riD"i5f3? riDprn t]phpx\ n:ib_3?n Part. act. 15213? 1523?: 1"'523?52 1523?52 pass. 1^523? T § 127. Par. III. Verb hGuUural. (§ 104.) 187 Kal. Niphal. Piel. Fual. Hithpael. Praet.3. m. P-l P^t: 'ni^. 'rina "i^nn 3.f. ^E?i up^yT3 nsnn r-i^ip ns'isnn 2. m. np>:T r;p^t3 nrjis nDnsnn 2.f. ^.P.^! ?ip?n ns-is nsnin nsnsnn 1. TlpjT ''np^TD ^^nsn^ •TiDi^ •^riDisnri Plur. 3. ^^f npjf? ^Dns ^iDni ^i-i3rin 2.m. •^ripiT DripyT3 Dn:3-in cripSlD ariD-i3nn 2.f. l^P.^t •jnpyTD ]n5n3 1^.^13 insnsnn 1. ^]jp>:t 1Dp>:T3 ^3in3 ^3:D~13 •^D^nsinn Inf. abs. pi^T const. p>T p5;tn V^. ^12 'rjnsnri Fut. 3. m. P-".^ p?.n V^] ^in: Tj"]3n^ 3.f. pytri P?.!^ V.rP. •Tjinn '^j-iann 2. ra. py.Tn 1 ''T " vk^. 'rj-inn 'ijnisnn 2.f. ^py?n ^p5?ijn • • It • ''i-ibn • J (T • • 1. P^-Vf. f ••t V "li^^i '^1=i^'( Plur. 3. m. ■^p?.!^. 1p5?-T^ : IT ; ^Dnn^ ; IT J • 3. f. nDpytn riDp^Tn : njinnsn riDSnbn njiDisnn 2. m. '^p^.in ^py-jn r IT ; i:i-)pri ? It ? * 2. f. riDp^Tn nspriH nsrj^^fi nssinn nDSisnn 1. pl^TD p5?^T3 V^^, ^^123 'Tj-isnq Fut. apoc. has 3 no distinct form here. Imp. 2. m. P-\ pPTH ^la *T|n2nr; 2. f. ''hli ^py-tn • • It ''5-isnr; Plur. 2. m. "ipn ^p5?>n : IT is-isrin 2.f. T\yph ropSin ri3in3 njinSrin Part. act. P?''^ py73 ^y^. v^^p. pass. p^yj 188 § 127. Par. IV. Verb b' Guttural (§ 105.) Kal. Niphal. Piel. Praet. 3. m. 3. f. 2. m. 2.f. 1. Plur. 3. 2. m. 2.f. ]. ~ T yM3 ;pap T : It nya^iJD n5?^m nj'tDmD npb"^' nybpj n:5?ap • " ~ -r *^!n5?b_p3 ^ns^ld "^ym •1 5^53^3 ij'ap ans'^-j) £3n:P52lD3 nny^ta 1^.^^'^ 'jn::?^:^: •jnynd- "IDi^^tD ^D:?'5Dir)3 ^35?^U3 Inf. abs. const. :?i2-m ysis Fut. 3. m. ^^?? yi2'C-i^ 5?52tr)'^ 3.f. :p53pn y)2m 5?Mn 2. m. yM'n 3552 tiin ^Mn 2.f. ^;?^pn • ; IT • ^5>53tin 1. :?t3tr)i« 1^52 tlDi^ 3?52;rii< PI. 3. m. ^iptjp') : It • ^ym^ 3.f. n35??3I23n n35'Mn 2. m. ^j^Mn : IT • iya;ijn 2.f. nsyb^'n riDybtsn n3::?^tDn 1. yM3 ymi: ^53'ip3 Fm<. apoc. Imp. 2. m. ya^d yi2'm 5?Bp 2.f. ■•y 53 125 '':?i2tri lyXJ'd Plur. 2. m. ^5?niD "lymr^ ^5?ad 2.1 n3:Pt)"j3 n35;53ip Part. act. 3?53_i23 y53U33 y53 12353 pass. y^'Dl^ ' § 127. Par. IV. Verb h Guttural (§ 105 .) 189 Pual. Hiphil. Hophal. Hithpael. ^mt i^^tjpn r T :paridn ny53p r^T'tm t]yQm T • • • T\y%'6 n3?r)pn n3?rjdn n>;^ni2:n T\p%ti np^_pn TiyiZDm iny^p ■^ny^pn ^n>;^n^n ^5?52p ^:?^bdn '^:^i2m ly^snuin ^^^!^V Dn.3?^;dri Gri>;^pn any^ndn ' % in^M ; in:?^dn in:?^dn iny52_rdn 13::'^^ ^ iD::'a"dn "^OTdn iD:^^_ni23n •1 ■•• • : : -^ z r * 1 ; rtj^'n — • T y^ndn 5?/2;iri r^pn :pran y^sn'dn ^mQT\^ T^;«2n ''S'tDdn ^;p52n'j:'n ys;23>5 y^^dfii yrrm >'52npj< ^y^;i^ •^i^^iM^i vj'q-^l "^^^isnd^ n]>;Mn nj^Mn nD3?bdn roi^^ndn •^ii^isdn 'i5''^Mn ^^^.P^ i::?anu:r> n33;^dn nD:?^_pn riD5?bpn ri5>;|n_;pn ^'^ii ^m: '^lipi i:?5Dnd3 y73U32 '^rim :i?s_npri ^:pfam '^j^^nin "^i^j^bin ^:'sr,iri ns^Mn riDrSnin 3?r)U3^ ^•'^^nuj^ 5?52M :?53FTJ353 25 190 § 127. Par. V. Verbs nb. (§§ 107, 108.) Kal. Kal. Niphal. Praet. 3. m. b^^ n^w^i ^r)vN3 3. f. ^ (regular) (regular) (as c Gutt.) Inf. abs. b^:^i< '^1^^5 const. ^^i -i^vx ^?wNn Fut. 3. m. b^^'^ ■ ns^s"^ ^DwS^-' 3. f. ^^.sn -)^iin n^>Hn ^^.sn 2.f. "h^^n ^n^4 are declined in the same manner as those of s Guttural ; N being treated, (out of Kal,) as a Guttural^ and not as a Quiescent. (See Niphal in the Par.) In like manner, Piel ^3J< , Pual >3^{ , Hiph. ^''SNtn , Hoph. ^SNln , Hithp. ?3Nrirn ; compare Verbs © Guttural, na^ and pm , for the mode of inflexion. § 127. Par". VI. Verbs originally ^Zi. I. Class of 'q. (§§ 109, 110.) 191 Kal. Kal. INiphal. Hiphii. Hophal. Praet. nd; iij-i; ndi3 ^''ipin D-d 'in 3.f. (regular) (regular) nnpi3 nn-d^n 2.m. nnbiD raiiiin nnfei^n 2. f. 'Fiim nn-kpin nn;d^n 1. •innpiD '^nniijin '^nn/d'in Plur.3. ^ntrji3 ^n'^Ia^in "iD-d'in 2. m. amnriiD Qnnpin Qnnd^n 2. f. ■jrindia "jnnipin inniii'in 1. iDnuJiD iDii/din "iDDip^n Inf. abs. nid; 123=1-11 const. ^^.P. ^^.1 n^-qin nd'in Fut. ^''^?. ^Tl -^.51 n^trir ndv .3. f. ntrin ^Tn ntrj.w n-'tain nid^n 2. m. ntri.n t2:T?l -^.5^ n'^din n^'in 2. f. ^nian '^^.I'i^ ^n'^qin inti3>n 1. 2m t3Ti« n'q^x n^dvs n^vs PI. 3. m. ^^^!J. ^^n;'] • It • ■ '^:i^m^ ^ndi^ .3.f. \ n3D"dn nDpTn riDn^cJ^n riDntpin riDnp'in 2. m. •inmn •^uiTri ^n^^n 'in'^pin ^nrj^n 3. £ \ njiljn ; -DtaTn »^?r^.l^ riDntd.in np/d^n 1. n'td] iT3 ^^.1^ n'^-iTiis. b^^D Fut. apoc. a^v • - , « Imp. m. ntrj. "^T. n^,in • • ' ' f. ^ntd ^'^T. ''n^bin • Pl.ra. ^nd^ VkliT ^n^^in • f. nani nntiin^ npS^^ri . Part, ad t. D^_i^ UDni*^ nmi] . :i^mi2 T pass. T 192 § 127. Par. VII. Verhs originally '^'d. H. Class of^Z. (§ HI.) Kal. Hiphil. Praet. 3. m. ^■^! D^'D'TI. 3. f. (regular) nn^b'^n 2. m. jnnp'^n 2. f. nnp'^n 1. "Tinb'^n Plur. 3. ^n-^b-^n 2. m. ■ trip;j^n 2.f. inn-j^'n 1. ^inb'^n Inf. abs. nro; const. n'D^^ n-^D^n Fut. 3. m. np^*; ^^D'^'^ 3. f. na'^n n-^D^n 2. m. •np-^r) n^'D'^n 2. f. ''DD^n h:ivj^n 1. ni:\^{ n^p\N{_ Plur. 3. m. ^dd;'] '^^^b'.'^. 3. f. ronb^n 2. m. ^nq-^n -^n^b^n 2. f. n^nDTi n3^b;n 1. "^ bD'^3 '^n^m Fut. apoc. ^^^^! ^'^."'?. Imp- m. -PI 3t:;n f. iS-jh ^n'^b^n Plur. m. •inb^ ^n'^b^n i: nana'] ^?.^^^!'^. Part. act. 2D*li n^t:^5 pass. T Niphal, in Verbs of this species, does not oc- cur. The Daghesh'd conjugations are regular throughout; e. g. Piel nt?-', Pual aa.i , Hith- pael lati^n'n- Hophal conforms to the model in Par. VI; e.g. nDr,&c. Only Hiphil, therefore, distinguishes the Il.Class of Verbs ^e from those of the I. Class, which have Fut. Pattahh. ^rl § 127. Par. VIII. Ferhs *Q. III. Class, with assimil. Yodh. (§ 112.) 193 Kal. Niphal. Hiphii. Hophal. Praet. 3. m. r\Ti ns: n^sn nsn 3.f. (regular) nnSD T • • nn^Ji 2. m. nsD n|n nkn 2.f. (n^3) !nn23 (n2£?i)nn2n (nin^nnsn 1. -ijnSD '^nsn ^rsn Plur.3. ^nsD ^n-^kn •^n!2n 2. m. Dni3 ^rj.^^n s^.2s!\} 2.f. 1. ^3nsn Inf. abs. T const. nsn Fut. 3. m. T^V. ^''V- ns^^ 3.f, nsn rr^sn n^ri 2. m. nsn n^2n n2sn 2.f. •^n^n ''n'^2n •^nsri I. nswx n^^ssji ni^ Plur. 3. m. •ins^ , in^s*: ^ns^' 3.f. riDn^n riDri^n riDnsn 2. m. nnsn in^^ri in'sn 2.f. njnsn HDnlri nsnsn 1. ^n23 n^23 Ti^i Imp. m. f. Plur. m. irT'^n f. nDnsn Fut. apoc. Part. act. T\:iv T]^1p_ pass. 194 §127. Ferbs with asnmil. Yodh. III. Class of "Si . The following are the actual forms of the few Verbs, which belong to the III. Class of ''D. /. Verbs iiiflected only as Verbs "jB. (1) mv Hiph. n^DH, Inf. n^Dn, Fut. m\ apoc. nD.n, Imp. nan , Part. n'^Dis. Hoph. n'^an , Part. n3^. (2) :»S;, Hiph. ^^2Sri, inf. .nsn, Fut. :\^2S^ C^ri) Part. 5^2S^. Hoph. Fut. iJS"^ . (3) 3?:|% iF//j9/i. :P''2n, Fut. y^\ Hoph. ^^S;" , Deriva- tive ysa. (4) nS*^, some of the forms in the Paradigm are not ac- tual ones, but made analogically, so as to represent actual ones. //. Verbs injlected as I. or II. Class "9, and also as ID. (5) pSV Fut. p2^ and psH Hoph. Part. ^^^[12 and (6) n2\ Fut. -IS'^ and IS^^^^i. (7) 'nD\ Fut. 1st pers. with Suff. DnO>{ (as fs); but Mph. iDia ; jF%/i. 1st pers. fut. with Suff. QTiD\^ as II. Class of '^D. (8) ntrJV Fut. -Its'] and 1^''^']. (9) Ip*^, i/op^. Inf. fem. nlVtl? in other respects as I. Class of ''D. (10) 1(D\ HopL Part. IDI^D, Derivative 1D^, in other respects as I. Class of ''S , § 157. Par. IX. Verb fo. (§ 113,114.) 195 K^il. Ni(..;i;il, Hiphil. Hophal. Praet. 3. m. a53 d^5ri d^n 3.f. npsD riLD^Bn X » • f^mri 2. m. ntl3_53 n;i3Bn T J '% 2.f: nirjs: rttj^D rim5n nti3.in 1. TimD ■^n^^D •^ntiJBn ''ntiB_n Plur. 3. ^u:53 r»r;^5n ^fflsn 2. m. Gnt3^3 cnffiw anuDsiri c™?n 2.f. 1™^-^. ]™)3 inujsn ]T)p}n 1. IDiIj^D •iD^iiB: "iDdBn iDd_Bn Inl". abs. 123155 ^?.?n "m^n const. nm in-^iri •»25n Fut. 3. m. ^^1 ^^.T. tri'^s^ tD^^ 3. f. ;rj5n t2:\nn d^n 2. m. tiir^ri wn d'^rjri a:5ri 2.f. i^5n ^mm ^ta^^n ''^.?5 1. ri^vj. tli^Di^. ':3^5i^_ rjaiK Plur. 3. m. ■^•^lirj^ i^ ntipjin cntjp^'^in intip_^n csp'in Fut. 3. m. 3. f. 2. m. 2. f. 1. Plur. 3. m. 3. f. 2. m. 2.f. 1. Qip: cs'^pn aipn ^52ipn q^Pn; '1^'ip;; riD'^ri.'ipn ^^^pn aip3 aip-] ciipn Qipn ''^ipn oipfi^_ i^Dip"] riD^/pn ^XDipn riD'apn aip3 D'^p;; D'lpn ■ • •r a'^pv^^ n3^pn t • T DV3 t)p_^'' tDp_^n t3p_'^n Qp.1wX n^p,'^'» n3np'^n ^5Qpin n353|^in ap^:: i'M<. apoc. Dp: Dp. 1^.; Imp. m. f. Plur. m. f. Part. act. pass. D^p ^53^p n3l3p ap t3^P ■'52'ipn "itiipn n3iqpn Dip3 C3pn ''Xi^prj ^^"^pn in3apn D-ipa Dpitt § 127. Par. XL Par. XII. Verb ^$. ($ 119.) 199 Pilel. Fulfil. Kal. JNiphal. ni2i^ a^_ip P. r^ P'2? n^^^ip n^^^^ip n:^ riD^s T T mhi^ rj^b_ip nql nirn niDi33 ^PP^? nti^ip riD3 niD'^a n Id 133 •^n^bip "Tltl^sip ^n3| •< ni3^3 ^^13133 ^^riip "^^n^ip ^dI ^D"^!; 13133^ Dn^_^ip Dnt:53ip cnDS aniD^s ani3in3 ]^,PP^? ]T'PP^^ •jnis iniD-'a ini3i33 ^:my "^D^_^ip 132 iDi3^n 1313133 %v P a^^ip a^_ip r^ ]i3ri ^^.Y: aaip'] r^: v^: Dtijpri a^ipn r^n (as anp*:) a^Spri a^ipn ■j^nn ^^^n^ipn ^^t;ipn ■^rnn nti^ipsi a^ip^v r^'"? '^^t2ip'] ^titjip'] n:^.i:ipn ri3t;i]ipn riD^rnn ^53t;ipn •in^^ipn irin n3^i3ipn na^bipn riD-^rnn Drips' MipD 'v^i ]^.: Dtl.ip r? ]i3ri ''^^.'ip ■^r^. (as dip-) ^ntiip ^^3 na^b^ip D^ipq- n:a,ipt! p. ]i33 .^3 200 § 127. Par. XIII. Verb a'-. (§§ 120, 121.) Kal. Niphal Fiel. Praet. 3. m. 3.f. 2. m. 2. f. 1. Plur. 3. 2. m. 2. f. 1. vV2^ ft<2t!] J521D riis^^ti nws:^^: nvs^sti n^is^ nw^sas ni«^^ nN^^ n.N:2,^D nwvs^ ^ni«^^ ^riwvs^a] ^^wsk» "^N^25: VN:S52D ^^2^ anix^^ t:ni<:2^D (CnN^^n In>s2i5q inwV^^^D in.Nsri ^DN^ktl ^Dw^2tt3 ^D5<2t) Inf. abs. const. *i2/2n iA-112 Fut. 3. m. 3. f. 2. m. 2. f. 1. Plur. 3.m. 3.f. 2. m. 2.f. 1. : IT* Fut. apoc. Imp. m. f. Plur. m. f. Part. act. pass. ^1^%P § 127. Par. XIII. Verb tlb. (§^ 120, 121.) 201 Fual. Hiphil. Hophal. Hithpael. 5(25 ii^^^n_ 5<^pn vv-j;pnn T • t * njis^nn n**^.? riwxs^n n5(kpn nw\*2;,pnn riwss^' riwssrin nw^^irin nx!2:,pnn Tli^Stl' '^riNS^n •^n^s^n' ''nvss'arin IvNlSp •li^^stin "^i^sdn •^ii-^prir; Dn>^^,p anj«2;_rin ani^-i^n anwsipnri ]^.^'4P ]AnwNStin •jn^v^s^'n' invsss^srin ^:ia)2 ^Dvsspn iDwSS^n "=i3i<2;prin ti^pyi ^^? ^''V^yi ^iiipri ^?^nn fi^^g-i i^^'^P.'l *^S^.^ ^i^prT'^ ^^^^. jt'^spn ii'^2^^n \>t:spnr| iwS'^s^^n \x2pnn nDiiStin nsi^lipnri t^'J,)2)2 i^^:i12)2 &<2^^ i«sx:n^ 202 § 127. Par. XIV. Ferbrtb. (§§122,133.) Kal. Niphal Piel. Praet. 3. m. n!?5 nb^D nVs 3. f. r!n!:5 nnbi3 nnV's 2. m. n'^Va n\?5D n^!f? 2. f. n-^^ rr^b: rr^^a 1. ''n'''':^ '^n'^V^^D Ti^^^a Plur. 3. \hi ^br^D ■^V5 2. m. tn^hl Dri;b53 on;^^ 2.f. iri;b" iri.^r.^.3 in;V.a 1. ir^^s ^D^^D iD'^Jpa Inf. abs. ni:5 !n^^3 riba const. ni^5 ri^ri riV^ Fut. 3. ra. 5^V;.1 nbs') nV;.*; 3. f. nV^n ^^.?^. snV^n 2. m. n$in in^5n n^sri 2. f. "•^-i^ '^l^.nn •^V^rj 1. n^ii^ T]bli^ nV;_ii Plur. 3. m. ^Hi ^^ "i^^^ 3. f. 5^r??n ^T%^. T •.' ~ J 2. m. ^'!?5n ^bsri ^V^n 2. f. "r?^.^. ^r.r'?^ ns-'^pjiri 1. ^n^53 nbs: nV53 Fut. apoc. -r. -r. '5"! Imp. m. n!?a n!:5n nV5 f. ^h^ '^^.-ri ^V5 Plur. m. ^^5 ^V"5n ^V5_ f. riy^^i "r.??n T \' ~ Part. act. nbia ^k^?. rkyq pass. §127. Pak. XIV. Fer& fib. (§§ 122, 123. ) 203 Pual. Hiphil. Hophal. Hithpael. r\h}^ nb^n r\hyTi nV^nn nrf} nn^in nnb^n nn^nn ^'?? • ^^"^V^. n'^V^:\n n'^Vsnn T\^\^ n'^^in rr^^^'n n^Virirs ^-1^?5 ''n'^^^^rin ^rr^^'^i} ^n^Jp^nn '^ ^hyn "^byfi ^Vsrin Dn;W ^^^'k^P. £!n;^.in cn^bnn tn^jpa ■jn^b^n •jn^^^ri in'^V.^rin ^3^?!l "ir^^^^n ^D^f:jr; ^rV^^nn rib5 ? •"'r.^.^ nbn rib5inn nVa ri!:in ri^:5"n riV-inn nVj"] 5^^.^! nb^; J^V.^n? njpj.^ ^^.^.^1 n!:.i|n nVi^nn ^^^^. n^.^!ri '■''^•-i^'3 nb^nn M^. ^^"in ^^}P^ '^'?3nn *'^ii n!?i&^ ^^M nV^riwX •=\Vj^ ^^l ^V^n': riD/V^^n riD-^'fan ^r?^^. nj^'p.nnn ^Vjn VVsn V^^n '^V^nn riD^.^n t^T^^T) "r?'!^ riD^^srin nV;5 ^\ 2. f. ^rn^Dp ~ - ^T-,V^P: ^ 1. c. — ^^riV^p. T^.'^.^P. "^^^V^P. Plur. 3. c. '^^^Vjp^ "I'l^^'^P 'T^V^P Vt^^^-Ojp I.e. — '^^^^V^P ^^^VopiniD^Dp Inf. Kal. -^Vop v^'-> 'nVop iVop • ='^ !r]Vop i ' •• ••'- :'- Imp. Kal. '^Ji'Op — — ^nVop Fut. Kal. 3. m. '^3'fDjp'; ^^bjp*] '^Vop^'] IJ^.r^p^ 3. ni.r^l^. t^^ _ ^^^^ with JNun epen. ) -.• :':• -r-- :':• v :':• Plur. 3. m. ^D^^'Jp^ ^^^^^p"! '^'^^'^p'! '>5riii?c:p') Praet. Piel. '^2%;^^ "^_t3.p "^^Dj? iVtiD)? § 127. Par. XV. Reg. Verb with Suffixes. (§ 126.) 205 3 feni. 1 Plur. t Plur. m. 2 Piur. f. 3 Plur. m. 3 Plur.f. r\Vo2 i3^'"op Q^.V^-P. P.^.Pp. c^^p. iV^P. r;rnV^"jp, ^^nV^'jp, npn^op l?nV^P. ^nj^p. IH-^'^P n-^nVpp — ^^mV^P P.'^V^P ^ '^^^P r^^."-P ri^^^-jp '^^'^^^'^p ^^."^^'^.P l^.'^^'^p ^^^'^p ("'^^P n^iDVap — ^^."i^V^P i-.^^Vup u^^V^p p3!:pp r^Vop 'iD^'^-jp csVjp liV^P c^jp iVjp n?Dp ^]V-op — — t3Vop rjV^-of.^ "^^.T^'^P? ^^.V^p'. p.V^P^ 'c^'^P^ K.^PI nD^'op'] ^3^^"^p^ _—__— — n'lbDp.': ^3iVop^ ^^^^'^P*! P.^-'^.P? ^^-'^P'! T^^^p^ nVop ^DpDp Cp.^.pp 1P>ap fiirCDp ]^^t3J? 27 206 § 127. Par. XVI. Participles. (§ 90.) ^"^ -J^ F n C £ ?^ C 1= "^ r ^ on £1 p r« i » t; " " J- JJ o J3 rv i:. ^^ r: £ P 1^ ^ JJ JJ c iX!' f\;" O f^ i^.iVfi.M^'^'S:," 3. Jt; (^ .^;r^^ ^cs-f^x^ n h J- '* J- J- p\ 5-- g; n «' r- '- i5 J- n 2 t:^i\':-fj JJ n O -♦-I o ^ < < 03 <1 03 <1 03 DP JJ JJ ifl ^53• in jr JJ JJ «-•• r-«:- nv f-|^ CJ* o 53 n ^-p J J o o o fe fo ^JjJ ^Pk txv ^ Pv 3 =jai -F\ =.«- I- §127. Par. XVI. Participles. (§90.) 207 i3- fl' P!' 53' .M~ .r- u n ^v n h *^ ~ n,"'2 "S"B' •^Jx^n j: n n •J - -- fid n; ':j. o 13 ;n' 53 '.'fl' i^* .n «- J- JJ JJ P •fi- .a ,r J- n 13 n' 13* r»' r r • t- -/^ J^ c j:; iz. E n 13' 13'13' fi^ ^\: /J- fi^ n 13 n 5^. r r r yX .S\- J— JJ J. J- r^ *-■ U JJ JJ 13' 13' .aM3- ^ 13' 13' 13*13* 3"n 13 n ^, n j:: P' •13- P P P- p= t\i n li^ •i\; • u- r^ iv t ■' . n M n «- ^v J— .XV J- JJ 3 ^ ^ ^ ^a -Pk ^1^ P P' n P^ E E p^p"^ iXL' i\ - .Q ^ P ' ,Jv J^ »- «- IJ JJ P^P*^ ,n\p ^a pr ^ J- J- P'^P' n P' .JV J^ 3 o P" P" •jr- 'iT" p* p a r- JJ JJ p* P' L, r," lil ri' ,:j .f~- .jv i\ t. U 1^ P' P* i c r;" 5 ixL nt M •'•' f* i ,rv^ n^ n J- p- p- i:; u" /\i n"^ JV r~: -iJO. J^ 0) 208 § 127. REMARKS ON PARTICIPLES. The foregoing Paradigm contains an example of all the various methods of inflecting Participles, sufficiently copious to guide the learner. It should be observed, that the inflexions above merel_y con- cern the formation of the fem. Participles, and the plur. forms. The mode of declining these, so as to designate the relation of Case, must be sought among the Nouns : as Participles conform to these, in all their modes of inflexion. The accented or tone-syllable, here, fol- lows the laws of JVojms, and not of Verhs^ in the same manner as the Participles follow nouns in their mode of inflexion. It should be observed, that when the ultimate syllable in the ground-form of the Participle has an impure vowel, there is no fem. Segholate form of that Participle; e.g. b^llip. In like manner, most of the contracted and irregular forms do not admit a fem. Segholate. All the cases in which a Segholate is found, are those whose final vowel is (garnets or Tseri pure, in the ground-form. The cases in Hiphil are not an ex- ception to this ; for the Segholate forms are derived immediately from the apocopated ground-form of the Part., although this species of ground form is not of common occurrence in the Hebrew Scrip- tures ; e.g. b^WplD , apoc. form bupjin , Segholate r^tpp;? . In all the cases of Segholates, the final Qamets and Tseri of the ground- form is changed to Seghol, by the euphonic power of the furtive Se- ghol. (§ 60. 3.) It is easy to see, therefore, why the Segholate form is excluded from other Participles ; e. g. Qp=DNj? with (t ) immuta- ble ; in anp the Shureq of course is immutable ; in !n!:.3, the !^— is dropped in the fem. Sibil, and there remains only the immutable Hholem of the ground-form, which cannot be altered to form a Seg- holate ; in :aD2 , the fem. In2t53 cannot be changed into a Segholate, (as nip.; ,) because the Daghesh must then be omitted from the a, which is contrary to the rule, by which the inflexion of these verbs is regulated ; in Bip3 the Hholem is immutable j in Inbaa , the T\— is dropped in the fem. lnb^3 , and there is no vowel to form a Seg- holate under the second radical ; and so in other cases. — The fem. Segholate forms occur pretty frequently, especially in regimen. §128. nouns: division. 209 § 128. JVouns : General Remarks, and Divisions. I. General Remarks. ( 1. Most Nouns are derived from Verbs; and, almost without exception, have for their ground-lbrms the Infin. mood, or Participles. Even those Nouns which are not derivative but original, conform in their flexions or chang- es to the usual laws, that regulate those which are deriv- ed from Verbs. 2. The declension of Heb. Nouns differs much from declension in Greek and Latin. The plural and Dual are, indeed, distinguished by appropriate endings, added to the ground-forms; Case, however, properly considered, is not marked by any peculiarity of inflexion, but for the most part by Prepositions. From this observation must be excepted the Construct state of a noun, i. e. a noun that is followed by another in the Genitive ; as the preceding Noun, in this case, assumes for the most part a peculiar form, in order to indicate its relation. In the mean Avhile, however, it must be observed, that the plur. and dual endings. Suffixes, &:c ; (in short, whatever increases the original Ground-form of the noun, and shifts the place of its accent;) occasion a variety of changes in the vowel points of nouns, which may not un- aptly be called Declensions. II. Division of Nouns. Nouns, like Verbs, (§ 74.) are either Primitive i. e. underived, or Derivative. The latter class are divided into Verbals i. e. derivatives from verbs, and Denominatives i. e. derivatives from nouns. Three classes of Nouns may therefore be reckoned. 210 §128. nouns: primitive. .B. JVouns Primitive. 1. Nouns primitive are, principally, those which de- signate animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the human and animal body, and some of the great objects of the natural world. But among the names of all these, are some of verbal derivation. 2. In respect to the Jbrm of primitive nouns, it is not distinguished from that of Verbals. (§ 63. 2.) They are treated, in their inflexions, in the same manner as if they were derived. Only a knowledge of etymology, therefore, can enable the student to determine whether a noun is primitive, or derivative ; and in some cases, it may be doubtful to the best etymologist, whether a noun belongs to the first, second, or third class. The following Sections on Verbals, will contain all that is neces- sary to illustrate the fo7-ms of primitive Nouns ; so that it is unneces- sary to treat of their forms, separately from those of Verbals. B. J\''ouns Derived from Verbs. 1. This is altogether the most numerous Class of Nouns. Almost all of them are derived either from Par- ticiples, or from the Infin. Mood. The former denote the subject or object of action or passion, {nomen agentis vel patientis ;) the latter denote action or passion, {no- men actionis, vel passionis.^ The first class are Concretes^ i. e. they designate some being, or thing ; the second are Abstracts., i. e. denote simply action or passion. Such is the general division of meaning in Verbal Nouns, which results from their origin, or the manner in which they are derived. But usage has made some exceptions to this gen- eral rule, so that the meaning of the two classes of Ver- bals is, in some instances, confounded ; i. e. Participials §128. nouns: derivative. 211 have the meaning of Infinitives, and vice versa. (Vide infr. 3.) 2. In a few cases, Verbals retain the usual form of the Inf. and Participles. But, commonlj, for the sake of va- riety and distinction, the forms of unusual and obsolete or antiquated Infinitives and Participles are preferred, for the forms of Nouns and Adjectives, in order that they may be distinguished hy their form. If the student keeps this in mind, he will find less difficulty in tracing the derivations that follow. 3. The derivatives of the Infinitive and of the Parti- ciple not unfrequently assume the same form, (§ 129. Nos. 1. and 12.) so that it then requires nice observation of the sense, in order to trace their proper origin. The Hebrew, also, like most other languages, not unfrequently uses Ab- stracts for Concretes ; as Ave say, in English, " the Divini- ty," instead of " God." After all, by far the greater num- ber of nouns have a signification which is connected with their derivation, as given above, in No. 1. This renders the study of forms important to the philologist. Note. It deserves special remark, here, that a noun, which is a regular derivate from the Participle, or Infinitive of a Verb in Kal, not unfrequently has a signification which compares with the sense of the same Verb in Piel, or some other of the derivative Conjug. ; e. g. '7\')2''M2 deceit^ derived, as to form, from the Inf. Kal of rttti to throw or cast ; but Piel irial means to deceive^ which sense the derivative noun in question has taken. So "jaip offerings derivate of the Inf. of l^p, in Kal to approach^ but in Hiphil to offer. 4. In the following account of Derivations, the student will find the Derivates of Kal Participles, first, from Verbs regular, then from irregular (but only the anomalous deri- vates ;) the Derivates of the Inf. follow, in the same or- der J then the Part, and Inf. of the Derivative Conjuga- 212 § 129. NOUNS : derivation, tions ; and finallj, Quadrillterals, and Derivates of the Fu- ture tense. The Arabic affords ample and complete satisfaction, that the fol- lowing arrangement of Derivates is grounded in the Shemitish Dia- lects. To the labors of Gesenius we are indebted, for the first satis- factory exhibition of it that has ever been made. The student must not regard the thorough study of this, as a matter of indifference. It gives him the only key, that will unlock the declensions of Hebrew nouns, and disclose the ground of mutable and immutable vowels, in a multitude of cases ; in a word, the whole doctrine of Hebrew forms^ as applied to nouns and adjectives. It is useful to the critic and interpreter too, inasmuch as it shows him what forms are possible and actual ones, and what are not. § 129. Paradigms of Nouns derived from Verbs. /. KAL. NOUNS DERIVED FROM PARTICIPLES IN KAL ; (cONCRETES.) 1. Nouns of the form 7l3p (both vowels pure,) or fern. n^t3p (§ 147, 2.) are Partlciplals of the obsolete form, from Verbs final Pattahh. (See § 90. 1.) They are Derivates, commonly, from Verbs of quality, and therefore usually are adjectives; as DSH wise; fem. flttDn . Ayin DOUBLED. Hi many; CD innocent; 7>bn (plene,) wounded ; *^T\ from '^"^H . Fem. nS'H , &;c. Ayin Vav. '^\strange; c3i^{l poor; seldom with ^{ plene, as DJ unhappy ; iVd peaceful, (roots I7.) (Comp. No. 12, infra.^ 2. 7u)p , (both vowels pure) fem. il'Tipp or ri*>3j? , Part, of Verbs final Tseri ; (§ 90. 1.) denotes adjectives of quality, like the original verbs ; as y&^i -,fat, &c. It is often passive ; as H^Ti plunder, literaUy, something plundered. § 129. NOUNS : DERIVATION FROM VERBS. 213 Seldom active, as bl2p labourer. Comp. No. 13, where is a fern, form like those under this No., in appearance, but differing in sense, and in the nature of the vowels. As an exception, Tseri is sometimes impure ; as "lO"* , plur. cons. ''?.^!'* ^° Q.amets is impure, in "l^f^y. Ayin doubled. 7X12 Jctt, Tl'H broken. Ayin Vav. 1!\ a foreigner ; Fern. ni5?^ testimony. Lamedh He. nS"' beautiful., (Seghol instead of Tseri,) fern. nS"" . Sometimes dropping the t\ — ; as IH for nin . 1^23 quiet, (root \h .) 3. ^IDp, ^Dp, (Hholem for the most part impure, but Qamets pure,) generally., as Part, of Verbs final O, (§ 76. 1.) Commonly as adjectives, as tSllp /io/?/, &c; some- times as abstract Nouns of quality ; as 1135 heaviness., i. e. properly, something heavy. To /?apD. Derived from transitive Verbs, they are A^'oniina agen- tis, as pliljj' an oppressor, the same as pdS? . The kin- dred dialects exhibit this interchange of forms, while the signification remains the same. Ayin Vav. DID good ; fern. finiuJ , goodness, to 7ia^,ov. 4. ^4i,1p7 ^Dp 7 (Hholem impme, Tseri pure) fern. n^Dp , n^pjP , usually fl/bp , common Participle, (no- men agentis.) Sometimes it passes into an abstract sense, as inV gaiyi, i. e. something that gains; niDH bond, i. e. something that binds, &;c. Lamedh He. I^^^'^ seer ; fern. Th\^ burnt-offering. 5. ^rjp, ^^Dp^ (Qamets pure,) fem. nbVJp, nV'^Dp, the common Part. pass. Derived from Verbs intransitive, these Ibrms have a kind of active meaning ; as D1!2y strong, "1"^^}? rich, 5<'^D3 prophet. Ayin Vav. ^^2 despised, ^{'^p vomit. Lamedh He. '''^DS cover, ^^^ (f *^*'35' ) unhappy ; fem. n'''35' , where the two Yodhs show themselves. 28 214 § 129. NOUNS : derivation fro^i verbs. 6. 7Li3|P == 75iL3j? , i.e. Qamets Impure, fern. n7l3|P, n!pIpjP, Guttural nn35, intensitives, signifying habitude of doing or being any thing ; as S^lDH a sinner, T5"l restkss. Sometimes of such a form as 1!D&4 husbandman. Femin. niZJS"^ dry land, to aridum ; nJ^uDn sin. Such intensitivcs are common in Arabic. A YIN Vav. T^^ « hunter. IjAMedh He. ^'^'^ sick. 7. ^''tqp, ^^Dp^ fern. nb'^tDj? , &c. Participial intensi- tivcs also; as "T^Ilfi^ strong, p'^'HS righteous, ~)'^'3i^ bereaved, (fcc. Lamedh He. ni^lln (plur.) pregnant, probably = Note. The Arabic has intensitive participial adjec- tives, which correspond to the forms under No. 7. 8. 7Dp , (Tseri pure, in general) fem. nVpp , used as adjectives; as OVi^ dumb, "115' blind. The Fem. as Ab- stract nouns; e, g. ni^y blindness. This form is some- times derived from Piel. It is used, almost entirely, for adjectives denoting corporeal defects. 9. pitOp , intensitive ; as "niSiJ hero. Sometimes as passive; e.g. '71?'' born. Fem. nVstl) ear of corn. Ayin Vav. 11'^ Da laver. (6) NOUNS DERIVED FROM INF. KAL ; (ABSTRACTS.) 10. Vop , (^tip ) Vqp , V'Op (pure vowels) not very common as nouns, being the usual Inf. forms. (§ 128. B. 2.) nrin terror, 'j'DT time, "1>iS ornament, pHS laughter. With fi< prosthetic, as !l^]j^ window lattice. Pe Nun. n^D planting, T\ii(p (for Hfiji'tC, ) elevation. Ayin doubled. "j5i a garden, ]n grace, pH law ; fem. n35,npn,&c. §129. nouns: derivation from verbs. 215 Pe Yodh. ^P'm knowledge^ fem. ns^'i, n^'^ idem, nd'l a net. Instead of these forms, occur usually the three Segholate forms; as 1 1. ^Op, (for b'^y , § 60. 3.) h^>, , Vpp . the final vowel of the common Inf. No. 10. being drawn back, and a fur- tive Seghol or Pattahh being supplied, at the end. The proper form of the words, then, is monosyllabic, as ^tSlp , pDj?^ , 7t3*p , as is common in Arabic. Thus 'Tj'pb a Icings ■n&D a book, "iDjp the sanctuary, 5?"1T_ seed, 'p'^'a cry, Sic. The Fem. of Nos. 10. and 11. are as ^"^12, m^fi^, ni^J}, tl^^p.i^? ri'JJSrt ; (none ending in n — ). Pe Yodh. "17^ of spring. Ayin Vav. ^iy evil, 5?1Ip a cry, Jll^ death, U^ViD van- ity. Also n'^S house ; 7>^T]_ strength, 7ip voice, !2'^D good- » , 1 .1 ness, for 7lp, '^']pi Sue- Fem. rhy_, rhy, ni^s, nupa, ntD^:, nni,&c. Ayin Yodh. ^"'I judgment, 1''^ 5o/ig-. Lamedh Aleph. m6 (for JXlip ) ; NDH (for Jitpn ) ; also regular as it^j. Lamedh He. (a) Regular ; as MS 13 weeping, JllSp cwfi ; fem. inn^ healing. (6) Dropping »1-Tr-; as IIP e^er- m7^, y^ friend, in 3 cr^/ o/'iyo ; fem. D'lpcity, flpilj , &c. (c) With Yodh quiescent ; as ''"iS (in pause '^'^B ) Jruit, '^SH (in pause ''SH) half, ''*^n 5«cA;wm ; Fem. mi_ , mb , !i;^;|I. (rf) With Fat) quiescent; as llHtQ swimming, 1i';Z3 nom. prop., '^rin c?e5o/a^io», 1'''^: niSH /ia//^ ni>"1 u'^V/. (e) With Ybc?/?/, and Fat; moveable; '^T^ sickness, ']'^p end; fem^ niVd rest, niiy shame. 216 § 129. nouns: derivation from verbs. Ayin Vav and Lamedh He. ^"D (for '^IS ) burning, ^i^ (for ''IwX ) island. Fern. ni&i (for ni>i ) sign. With Vavj 1]? (for'llp_ ) line. Ayin Vav or Yodh, and Lamedh Aleph. i^'i^ valley, JJI'd vanity. Of the form Vp.p. i there are several Concrete?, as "nsa man, kc. Seldom do two of the Segholate forms of the same Noun coexist ; though this is common in Arabic. To account for the Concrete signification of some of these forms, it should be remarked, that probably they are Participial forms, co- inciding with the Inf. Segholate forms, as Nos. 1. and 12. coincide. The Arabic has a participial word of the form in question. 12. yjf5, (Vj)?,,) fem. nVop), (rhhp) with Qamets pure, as '^'21 word ; fem. iTip'lS righteousness ; n^tlj strong drink, 15D foreigner. (Comp. No. 1.) Also, "HDJi a vow of restraint, 112^ with (connexion.) Pe Yodh. I7I offspring. Ayin Vav. Fem. HJ^IT disquiet. Lamedh He. ln?D destruction. These forms of the Inf , or nomina actionis, are found in Arabic. (De Sacy. Gram. Arab. § 541.) 13. yjp=Krt:j?, yL:jP=y"op., i:^t:|?, ^iDp, b'\'::ip,, Fem. nVop, n^^Dp, n^rop, n^rop, n^^rop, Avith an impm-e vowel in the ultimate, mere Inf. forms. E.g. DHS book, '2i^p smart, b^y^ way, Dl'^H dream, pl^T dwelling; fem. rOlIJn darkness, Jl3"'53 musical instrument, flYD?. service, JTH'^nS might. With 5< prosthetic, as HTji^ summer-brook, feminine rTII^'dw^ night-watch. Pe Nun. 5«il"l' , i^'^'ffl elevation, "'?1 (for ^T]2) voice of wo. Pe Aleph. '^\^^^^ girdle, ( •• Sjriac) ; so'in'jI^QJ* truth. § 129. nouns: derivation from verbs. 217 pE YoDH. ItD Divan, 7'^il crop. Fern. JlH"*!!) sitting, riJj2 fith. Ayin Vav. n^'^n f'em. nVZc^/e. With Ji prosthetic; -•llDwV from Tj^D; I'llfiJ from ^^1- Lamedh He. inO winter ; '^nilS drink ; Fern. iHTilIJ; riD^ (for r\i:<2l2) portion ; r\^'2_^ and rT^Dffl captivity. Pe Nun and Laiviedh He. "^JlD , ('^D contracted) and ■^n sound of wo. A few words belonging here are Concretes; asb''p3/oo/, ^T^'^Sa mistress, &c. Some of the feminine forms here, agree with those in No. 2. supra, and can be distinguished from them only by the sense. 14. ^Dp;:, ^Opt), Vu)p;q, &c. (Aramaean Inf.) yopt), !:VJp^^_, VtJp^.; Feminines, JlVop:^ , n^.Cp.p^^, nVjp^., rhbp)2^, "V^^?.^' ^"^V.^.F.'^' ^.V^"^; all like the Aramaean Inf. either common, or uncommon ; usually abstracts, but in a few Instances, concretes. Pe Nun. '^T))2 gift; 5?'1353 a spring ; ''Q'3,12 hope. Fern. HTlD^ a goal; HDS^ , nnS^ pV/ar ; Tlpn^ (contracted nni) ^if^. Ayin doubled. '^^12 strength ; '^Wl measure ; pt!D53 rwwr mwg ; Tpl2 cover. Fem. as n!Ilp5D , tlSD^^ , JlSO^ ; with Gutt. nii<^ curse. Some few Segholates ; as "iM bitter- ness ; Di^ , fem. H&S'D tribute. Pe Aleph. n^w^^ , a'^nOi^ (for ^:'^-lC>^it)) chains, Aleph dropped; so n"l05D for n"lDN^ chain-, VhZll for Pe Yodh. 1st Class. d'litJ possession; tlipi/2 snare; "It;^^ correction: Fem. as riDUJi^D, nntdi53, 11^^3153; Gutt. 218 §129. nouns: derivation from verbs. 2d Class, Pe Yodh ; as DD'^^ best part ; "IVia^^ a plain. 3cl Class ; 3iS 1'0l2jbimdation ; ^'^'2)2 flood; y^tt and 5? 11^ knowledge. Ayin Vav. As Dip5:, fern. n^QIpt: ; Qiptl^ (unfre- quent) ; tip's , fern. nSp^ (unfrequent.) Ayin Yodh. iHD'^n'D fern. Ayin Aleph. Aleph sometimes quiescent ; as HDl^^yD for inlDi^b^ ; np5i7^53 for n7>57'D tvork. Aleph sometimes dropped, as n'ptl!) for in^fi^ll). Lamedh He. (a) As M^.^^ , ^V.-^i^? fem. ubyp^. (b) He dropped ; as 75^'D height, ^^p. (c) Yodh moveable ; as Q^'^liS;'^ desire. Pe Nun and Lamedh He. JllD^ stroke. Ayin Vav and Lamedh He. "^^p^ for ''l!^^ from ni3?. 15. Nouns ending in "jl — and "J^r-, (Di — and Q"^) are Infinitives, w^ith these parag. endings. Thus Infinitives No. 12, liVop, 'Jin"j:p_; Inf. No. 11. masc. and fem. "jVop, •jVop, iVjp, )bp}>^, )lVop_, liVjp;, ]l!:t:p; Inf. No. 14. ■jipDp'D. Sometimes as QlPtJp, tpl^p , though seldom. Ayin doubled. II^D, ]Sp, DSD. Ayin Vav. li53p^, p^'^p. Lamedh He. "ji^^^, ]Vb},, p'^h., "jlj'^.^ (parag. added to the Inf. of No. 11.) ife, fp^, p'^:?., p"^!?^, 'ji'^V.^ (parag. added to Inf No. 12.) Sometimes, also, as p5, I'h^ ; D'^3'^3T from n3T. Peculiar is the luf. form with these Parag. endings, which has a Daghesh in the middle letter; as ^ilr^J? ; before ^, as'jiy'^T. These § 129. NOUNS : DERIVATION FROM VERBS. 219 seem to imply an Inf. like ^Bp = i>t3p. No. 12. Also ']ib'l2p., as if formed from No. 5. 16. Nouns ending In n*! (D"'— ) are Infinitives of No. 11, or 13 ; as ni!?Dp_, n^Vofj, n^^^'op. , n^^Dp, rT'iDwyn for n^pvN^-). The D^ is a contraction of the fern. Inf. ni -^, from the masc. ending ^ . In Syriac the Inf. out of Kal ends in i, and the regimen form in ni. n'^v- is used in the same manner as n!l. Ayin DOUBLED. fTlSp , H^ SD, fT^SD ; before Resh, as rr^lS instead of n'^'^S soap. Lamedh He. rriP.^, Qamets is impure, as if put for //. NIPHAL. 17. (a) Participial forms. <2JpD, fem. tlPtipD, with Guttural insnnj... Pe Nun. D2SD a pillar ; n>ttoD for ni^tlpD a present. Ayin doubled. M^DD mw^e or reason. 18. (6) Infinitive forms. ^^DpD. ///. P/£L T\ ; HDiStri op- portunity. n^D^n ; n^D^n ; n^sin ; riij^n ; Apoc. lyn ras'or, (for ?l"12?ri .) Pe Yodh, and Lamedh He. niin /«if. /F. HIPHIL ^ IIOPHAL. 23. (a) Participial Forms. As b^'iypp_ , ^p.p.P , fem. nbcpp.^.. Hoph. yjptf. ^ Pe Nun. Hoph.^ nS^ . Ayin Doubled. Hiph. p'Q • Lamedh He. Hoph. ntpp , HlS^ , apoc. 'p:^^ exalta- tion, for n^.yri = fkyi^ . 24. (6)'lnfin. Forms. yjpn,fem. nVopn, oVopi*. Pe Nun. Tlb'^t] , masc. 'Tj'inri melting. Ayin Vav. nn3!n , HS^Sn . F. POEL. 25. (a) Participial forms. As Voip , riV.DIp . 26. (6) Inf forms. flbVin , ri^bb^Tl . Ayin Vav. n^r!i:_l"l. 27. VlD'^p, Vo-^p,, blD^p., y^V' -"^-"^P • Lamedh He. o^'^ID *SMo/i. These forms resemble an Arab. Inf. of Conj. III. § 129. NOUNS : DERIVATION FROM VERBS. 221 FL PILEL. 28. (a) Part, forms. Vs^p (Daghesh omitted in final letter), fern. nVjp ; e. g. DiliJ , ri52>S! red. 29. ^bOjP , rttDjP , 'ID?.'!. Pass. '^\^^wV^. (Adjectives.) Ayin Vav. nniiD. Lamedh He. ni&4D yazV. (§ 123. vi.) 30. (6) Infinitive forms. nVuJP- 31. ^iVop, !?frqp_,y7i:p_, ^Vqp, m^j-'V^p., i^^V^p. Ayin Vav. Hin'^D. VII. HITHPAEL. 32. Infinitive forms. tSH'^ritl catalogue ; nilSHriu VIII. PEALAL. 33. Participial forms. 7t3^iLDp (adjectives of colours.) innniD blackish^ "TjSSStj crooked. Ayin doubled. IJ?"!!^, P^?5, fem. nb!3>?5. Ayin Vav. d^qS^D^]- Lamedh He.' ST^bnS';. 34. Infinitive forms." ^it:Vpp , Vo^Dp. Ayin Vav. u)"^?*!:?.!!:. /Z. SHAPHEL. 35. Vopp. Feminine. nnnVd. X. PEOEL. 36. Participial form. VoiDp , fem. niSiSn. Ayin doubled. ?pi^p vile ; n^ini^, naked. XL qUADRILITERAL. 37. Infinitive forms. Dy?D locust; 'dllTl chain. 99 ^ •• ^ '222 § 130. NOUNS DENOMINATIVE. AIL FUTURE TEJ\'SE. 38. A few nouns have the form of the Future ; as ' "T ; ■ '"51" Ayin Vav. n^D% nin\ Ayin Yodh. nn\ nn''. •T ••X Lamedh He. 1>"^ apoc. Fut. Hiph. n5n^ Hoph, "[tip;;, nrjs^, t:ip^.\ §130. C JVouns Denominative. 1. By these are meant Nouns derived from other Nouns, let those other be either primitive or verbal. 2. Denominatives are generally analogous to Verbals as above described, in theiryorms; and also, in regard to the significations connected with those forms. Denomina- tive forms may be found, like 7it2p No. 3. (supra); ^toip No. 4 ; ^"IDp No. 5. e. g. "d^H] brazen, from n'lpnD brass, (this form designates the materials out of which any thing is made) ; the form VuDp^ No. 6, denotes trade, occupation, as Thtl a sailor, from Pl^b the sea ; ^"^IDp No. 7, ^Dp No. 8, 7Dp , and ^lip N. 11, denote Abstracts formed from Concretes ; as ri"!^ month, from TH^ the moon ; "i;?] youth, from "13? J a young person. The form 7ltip No. 13, de- notes condition, age. The forms btDp^, ^^F.*^ '^^' ^4, re- late to place ; as ']''^ a spring, 'J''>'^ p/ace o/'a spring ; iS'aJp a cucumber, ^12!i'p)2 a garden of cucumbers. The forms li — and "j— No. 15, denote quality, origin; as 'ji^^'lp eastern, from tZ'rp //ie eas^ ; — or with Yodh inserted, as 'jiS'^p last, from ISp^ e«c?; ^ is sometimes omitted, as t]l2p^ = "j^^Vtp. § 130. NOUNS DENOMINATIVE. 223 The form m — No. 16, denotes Abstracts from Concretes ; as rr^T^pS office of an overseer^ from "T^pS overseer. So the forms ^ropn No. 22, nVop No. 29, denote Abstracts out of Concretes ; as ni^SHri guidance^ from 7 DPI steersman ; nsrO priesthood, from "(tl j a priest. 3. (a) ''— , (fem. rT^-r-) added to Verbal Nouns, com- monly forms. Ordinals ; as '^'3 six, ^'\D'd sixth. Patronymics ; as "iDJ5 Composite proper-names are commonly divided, and the Article inserted before the second ; as ''D"'?2'^!T")3 the Benjamite ; or the first noun is dropped, as "'S^IQ') a Benjamite, (^) n*^" fem. ending, is added to form a number of Denominatives; as t!!>i'1 princeps, ri'^iDi^'l principium. Defectively written, as nS"'2. Other nouns are formed, (c) By adding **—, as ^^^'D deceiver, from 7'^3 ; or *?[— , as '^T35 treasury, from ^y^ treasure. (Both very uncommon.) 4. H— , n— ; T\'^^ fire-offering, from Wfire; TP'ni^ a lion, from '''^^^!. (Rarely.) 22'i §131. nouns: composite and proper. § 131. JVoM/is Composite and Proper. 1. There are scarcely any composite words in He- brew, except in proper names. Some lew are made up, (a) Of two Nouns ; as niTD^S = np h'l death^shade. (6) Of a Noun and Particle ; as ^^v3 worthlessness., from ^b'2 not, and ^y^ profit. 2. Proper names follow the general analogy of Ver- bals in their formation, as given above. But here Com- posite names are common, and consist usually of two Nouns, as 1'^'Q'^DIil Benjamin ; or a Noun and Verb, as iD'^p'^in'' J&- hoiakijn, i. e. Jehovah will exalt.) Note. To the first word in composite names {a) A Yoclh is usually added, as Vn"^"!^-! Gabriel., from "^la man and ^4* God. {h) Or a Vav ; as bN^'OUJ Samuel, from dUJ name and ^N God. (c) The name of God, either bi< or nirT^, is prefixed or suffixed to a great multitude of Hebrew proper names. § 132. JVoiins : Gender. 1. In Hebrew, gender is distinguished by a peculiar form, only when it is feminine. Nouns that have not this form, prima facie, are masculine. In some cases, howev- er, gender is not distinguished by the form, but by the meaning of words. /. Gender distinguished by Form. 2. The Feminine is distinguished by an addition to the Masculine, of (a) n— ; as '^'l^ha king, Fem. n'ljbp^ a qtteen. (b) n-; as ni'oj? — n-iDp, (c) n=-; asy^fe — n^lia. withaGutt. § 132, NOUNS : GENDER. 225 (d) In nouns ending with a Quiescent, (it —, ^—, '^) by adding n; as vViDH, fern. n&lDn ; '^W, fern. nn^J? ; ^D^^X], fem. rr^iiW ^ 3. Uncommon forms of the Feminine, are (a) N;r— ; as N:'i23 for ln3\b. (Aramaeism.) (b) n— ; as D^121 — '!^y^.V (Poetic.) (c) n=- ; as nj2"i2 emerald, (accented on the ultimate.) //. Gender distinguished by the meaning. 4. Nouns with a feminine ending are mascuhne, when they designate (a) The names of men ; as H'l'^n'^ Judah, (a person.) (6) Offices of men ; as T'lTi^^') governor. (c) Nations ; as nT^JT^, (the nation of) Judah. {d) Rivers ; as HD^iSl, Amana. 5. On the contrary ; Nouns are feminine, though they have a masculine termination, which designate, (a) The names of women; as ^Tll Rachel. DlX^ mother. (6) Of countries; ^'^ 'y\*^)^ Assyria. (c) Of towns ; — 1'^2 Tyre. {d) Of female beasts; — liflit a she-ass. (e) Members of the animal body, by nature double ; as "jTi^ the ear. Note. The same word may be masculine with one meaning, and feminine with another ; e. g. !Tn W] Judah i. e. the Jews, masc; but lTlt)ln'^ Judaea, fem. This may be called Constructio ad sensum. 6. Besides these nouns, distinguished as feminine eith- er by their termination or their meaning, there are several which are feminine, that are destitute of any distinctive sign of gender ; as IJ^lH a well, "ISD a talent, &c. These can be learned only by practice. 226 § 133. NOUNS : formation of the plural. 7. A considerable number of nouns are of the common gender ; these are mostly of the masculine form. In some, the masculine meaning predominates; in others, the fem. ; as nii< a ivay, 'jD^{ a stone, &;c. These can be learned only from practice. The names of beasts, birds, metals, &c, are usually of the common gender. Note. The neuter gender is most commonly designated, in He- brew, by the feminine. Nouns of multitude, also, are most common- ly feminine ; as 'm:! na daughter of Tyre, i. e. Tyrians. 8. In the Plural, the appearance of Nouns is, in many instances, dubious. Thus, a considerable number of mas- culine nouns form the plural like the feminine ones, i. e. in ni — ; as D5^ a father, plur. niDii<,&;c. On the contrary, many feminine nouns adopt the same plural form as masculine ones ; e. g. tl'^Ti wheat, Plural a''an,*&c. (See§ 133.4.) Note. The gender of the plural, let the form be as it may, is generally the same as that of the singular ; but there are a few ex- ceptions. Some words have both the masculine and feminine forms, in the plural ; but the gender of both forms is the same, i. e. it is as the gender of the singular. 9. All nouns in the dual number are of the common gender. §133. Nouns : Formation of the Plural. ( I. PLURAL MASCULINE IS FORMED, SiDg. Plural. 1. Generally, by adding to the Singular, D*^— ; as D'lD Q'^D'lO. — to nouns ending in "^-r^ D ; as "^S 0*^2. or t3 V ; as '^^b Cl^l!?. The Plural ending is sometimes defectively written ; as d3''in for b-'i^sn (Vide § 24.) 2. Occasionally, (in poetry, and the later Hebrew,) by adding to the Singular, § 133. NOUNS : FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 227 (a) )^--; as ^bh ^^iDp^q. (6) ''zr-; as iftn ^DiVn. Perhaps (c) 'i- ; as 1^_ "^352 (for ^^^3^) Ps. xlv.9. II. PLURAL FEMININE. 3 (a) Instead of the sing, feminine ending in— or n— , the Plural has m— As Sing, n^in Plur. niin (6) To Feminines with masculine terminations, til is added ; as INS , ni"l5<3. (c) Fern, in n^— make HI'-; as nns::? , ni^nDIP. (d) Fem. in n^— make ni^— ; as D^lD^^^, r\nbp_. Note 1. c and d sometimes form their plural after the usual manner, as r^an tl'^r!''^rj and nin'^qJi. Note 2. Feminine plurals are sometimes defectively written j as ribj?, ri*i*N?3 , &c. 4. A considerable number of masculine nouns, (nearly always without changing the gender,) form their plural as feminines; e.g. S>5, fllDJi. Vice versa, fem. as masc. nKv,Cl^^wV. (§ 132.8.) These can be learned only from practice. (See Ges. Lehrgeb. § 124. 4.) Probably, in the early stage of the Hebrew, gender was not distinguished in many words, which were used as common, (as Nlln in the Pentateuch,) and occasioned the present dubious appear- ance of such forms. 5. A number of Nouns, (specially those of the common gender,) have the form of both masculine and feminine plurals, the gender remaining the same as that of the sin- gular ; as n3Ul) a year, plur. 0*^31!!) and rii3!2li ; &c. 6. Some nouns have only the plural form ; but a part of these have a singular meaning; as X^^^p Jace ; 'U'^ll^ days, also time, year, &c. 228 § 134. NOUNS : dual number. 7. Other nouns have a collective or plural sense, though of the Sing, number; as ^TJ Joivl^ v|p children, &c. In Arabic, a multitude of nouns are collective with a singular form ; and commonly belong to the Pluralis fractus. 8. In a few words, the masculine plural ending is su- peradded to the feminine; as h/QS high-place, plur. ni^lD and DTli^QS, const. ''Hl^n. § 134. JVouns : Dual Number. 1. The Dual is formed by adding to the Angular, (a) D"!^, as X:r^ "d^W . J^ (6) Feminines in t[~ change it into T\~, as HD")^, 1^ (c) Unusual and probably antiquated forms, are ■j*; ^ ; as yrn prop, name 'Q~- ; as Dn3*)2* ']^^; as 'jni 'D^t- ; as Qpy prop. name. t =r- ; as "^n;; for is'^V. Note. Most of these forms occur only in proper names ; and the proof that they are actually Duals, rests partly on the sense of some of the forms in common nouns, and partly on comparison with the Du- als of the kindred languages. 2. The Dual is used, in Hebrew, principally respect- ing such objects as are double either by nature or by art ; as D'^'l'^ two hands ; D^'b^D a pair of shoes. 3. In a few instances, the Dual form stands in- stead of the Plural for a greater number than two ; as a']233 'i!Dld six wings ; S'^rd tj^tlj three teeth. It hardly need to be remarked, that the Dual is, of course, essen- tially a plural, requiring a plural verb, adjective &c. In some cases, it is difficult to show the ground of Duality, as d'^^iniE mid-day, &c. \ Perhaps it is intensitire. § 135. nouns: const, state. 229 4. The names of members of the human body, which by nature ai'e double, have also a plural as well as dual form ; but the dual is generally taken in a literal, and the plural in a figurative sense; as Q'^ElD hands ; r\S^'3 handles. 5. The Dual is of the common gender ; but Adjectives have no Dual. 6. The Dual ending is sometimes added to the Plural ; as m52in tvalls, fiVSh two walls. § 135. • JVouns : Construct state. 1. The Hebrew has no Cases, in the sense in which we speak of cases in Latin and Greek. But when two Nouns come together, the second of which is to be trans- lated as a Genitive, this relation is indicated, contrary to the usual custom of other languages, by some change in the ^rst noun, (if it be susceptible of change,) inste|(d of the second. Two nouns in such a relation, are supposed to be uttered nearly as if they were but one word, and conse- quently, the hrst noun is usually contracted in the utter- ance, (if it be capable of contraction,) so that the stress of voice may be transferred to the second. The first noun, so situated, is said to be in the construct state. Any noun, not placed before a Genitive, is said to be in the absolute state. For the vowel chang-es that are occasioned by the construct state, see § 136. The changes in the Consonants here follow. 2. In the Construct state. The Plural D**— or V — becomes '^- The Dual D'^^ Fem. sing. n- n- Nouns in n- *i^ Abs. Const. 5*^-; as fihp^C ''DID '^~; as ^H! ^T: n--; as riijT n^'Ti n-=-; as T r* -r ~ r; T n^; as nftjn HK'-i n-; as m •'n 30 230 § 136. NOUNS : vowel changes in dec. For the manner in which paragogic letters are added, both to the Absolute and Construct state of nouns, see § 50. § 136. JVouns : Vowel changes in Declension. 1. It has been already remarked, that properly speak- ing, Hebrew nouns are not declined. But, inasmuch as the Plural, Dual, Const. State, and Suffixes, (for the most part,) occasion a change in the Vowels of the ground- forms, this may not inappositely be called Declension. 2. The student will understand, of course, that only the mutable voAvels are susceptible of change by declension. 3. The changes of the vowels, nearly without exception, (§ 140. note 3. a.) respect the ultimate or penult syllable. 4. The Consonants of nouns are rarely affected by de- clension. (Comp. § 135.) 5. Irf order to understand the general theory of the vowel changes in declension, it Is necessary to advert to the fact, that it Is essentially connected with the removal of the accent 1. e. the shifting of the tone syllable, in any word. This is done 6. (a) By addition; as Sing. *lDi, plur. fi'^l^'i, where the accent is shifted on account of the accession C^-r- In the same manner, the Dual ending, and the Suffixes, being an addition to the ground-form, shift the place of the accent. (6) By the construct state. Two words in such a rela- tion, are generally read as one ; at least they have all the appearance of being so. (§ 135. 1.) Hence the tone or im- petus of voice is thrown upon the second word, i. e. re- moved from Its place on the first. In both the cases, a and i, as the accent is moved forward, the long vowels, which are mutable, are shortened, in order that the. § 136. nouns: vowel changes in dec. 231 stress of voice may rest upon the accented syllable. This happens agreeably to certain laws ; e. g. 7. JVhen the Tone is moved one syllable Jbrward, the vowel of the penult only is drop-ped. In a few cases, (e. g. Declension vii,) the ultimate vowel. The Plural and Dual endings, and Suffixes which begin with vow- els and are monosyllables or dissyllables penacuted, remove the tone, of course, but one place. Such Suffixes are called light. But Suffixes beginning with a Consonant, (as 'rj, DD, p.,) although they move the tone but one syllable, occasion gtueraUy^ (there are some exceptions) the same change as the Construct state. But Tt is sometimes an exception to this general rule, as usage in respect to it is variable, for it frequently changes only the penult vowel ; as '^n , ■^■nll. These are called grave Suffixes. 8. When the Tone is removed two places forward, in most nouns, (not all) both vowels Jail away. The Plur. Const, also produces the same effect, and the grave plur. Suffixes, QD"^-^, 'j!?'^-rr-i I3!ri.'^— ' I'l'^^-r- These suffixes, however, re- move the accent two places. (See Paradigms.) Note. For the manner in which vowels that fall away are chang- ed or supplied, see §§ 54 — 60. 9. The Const. State of the singidar is not regulated by any universal rule, but varies with diiferent declensions, as may be seen by the Paradigms. For the most part, the vowels in the Const. Sing, are changed, as though the tone were removed two places. 10. In the Paradigms that follow, it will be seen, that the Dual and Plural occasion the same vowel changes. The Sixth Declension is excepted, where the Dual suffers more contraction than the Plural. 11. In the Plural, light Suffixes attach to the absolute state ; grave ones to the construct state. 12. All Feminines with a Masc. form are declined as Masculines. But when the Plural ends in fli — , it follows the laws of Plural Feminines in respect iojorm. L.»-C ^-< S!32 M- 37. PARADIGM OF NOUNS MASC. Sing. abs. CoQSt. light Suff. grave Suff. I. Dec. Sing. («) D'^D D^D ^D^D t^.O^D (4) -liria •nisa "•nisa ciDnisa (0 LJiSp Disd ''DiSlp trjiDd 'f ■' II. Dec. Sing, r/;^?-^^'^' («) Q'l iD'n ' ^ai c^.^." (i) DDiD nsis ■'3513 tJ^P.^is (^) yniD 5?Di3 ^j^ni-) t]D:?2is (d) Tip n^^ '^l? t!?.1^ III. Dec. Sing. ' '^ («) "^^"^ ''TF:^ DDTjPS (i) T'^.^. v'^p. ''^'^^X3 OpS^^tt^ (0 ^''"^P. '^IDi'? *»^.1Dp^ tSD^^VJi"? (rf) I'lnsT ■ji-iiT '^^inST aDDinST 0) irjn ]i^Tn ^3inn DpDVTn (/) D13^ D^i^, ^tiy:;a^ diD^]^, (^) D^n.x D'lni^ ^^y^^. Qp&^SvS (A) ^1*15 -^1^ IV.-' Dec. Sing. («) T T -in*^ nn"! DD-)n^ % T •• 'A DDnni? (0 T T t23n ^p.^.^n. (d) n^D n:^uj '^1^? osn^.p (^) ' T T F^?. Q?.K^?. (/) l^DD 'iDDS C5s:s (^) ^ins ft«n2 ■%^in:2 QDj^ns t^ et-r. § 137. PARADIGM OP NOUNS MASC. 233 Plural abs. light. Suff. Const. grave Suff. I. Dec. Plur: Dip^D i&^iD ^&1D iD5;&^iD nnisa '^-lilDS "^niS5 *t:D;ni35 a-'Disp ''D^Sp '^'J'lD^ t]::;Lp_^5-d II. Dec. Plui I. ^'^1 ^^^^ ^^/\ ^?.'^.'l • -r ■^nsis '^niis t:?;nDi3 D^::?ni3 ^:^niD ''ipnis Ci^ipniD ^'1? *~ T ''IP DD;VJ3 III. Dec. Plur. Q'^^^jPS ''Tp^ ■"TR^ ^p.'^TP.s; D^iS'^bt] ■12^!:^ ^V^P. t:S'«2:;!:'a^ t]^!:rjp ^!:^t:p^ ^'^:^^?. ciD^brop^ a^DinST ■'^inST '^P.i-I^DT Qp^pn^T niDi^m (as plur. Fern.) a^q^]q ^u^:)2 ^D1]^_ QS'^DIDt] D^D^DNl. ^D^n« ^D^nwv CD;D"^nwNi. IV. Dec. Plur . Dnn'^ ^121 ^nn^ ^?^1^1 n^nn!? ^nn^ ^5=1^ Di^npb G^tis^n ^^Ji6. ^5Dn t!?;?pn nni^p ^-]yp '^n^.p ^^^'I.IP ^y.^^-. J— T ~: y.p.^. ^^y:P.^. a^S3S ■'SDS ''sas 135*^^33 niJ^nS (Plur. as III. Fern.) 234 § 137. PARADIGM OF NOUNS MASC. Sing. abs. Const. light. Suff. grave Suff. (h) 1?^, ■j-^p;^ (and ItpJ? Segholate.) (0 ,y!:2:(7!52; and ^72 Segholates ; wi th Suff. 7^S) cv i- ■■ • '•^ 5. "^s-ii* tz:52nx (c) n:?! np| '^nn t=2S_-iyD (e) mb ni^ ^nii3 tzssniri E Class, (/i) inp. nn^, nn^j? s^^s-infj (0 nsB n:^3 "tisd tz:Dn23 0*) P^.n pV^. ?.^n tzjDp^ijn (/O ^!?.n n^h ^i^n tD^^bn (/) ^ns '•Ds '^^ns tsp.'ins O Class. (m) tdlp C37P '^ffl'lp CDpIlilp § 137. PARADIGM OF NOUNS MASC. 235 Plural abs. light Sulf. Const. grave Suff. tziy^v ^r^:p ^D^5? tzs^rd:!? t=i^:;b^ ''ip^S t^?'?).^. V. Dec. Plur. t=:^Df5t ■'DpT ''P.P.". ^^.'P.P.i czj^nsn "^-rin '^Tin ms'^nsn nisns (as plur. fern, of Dec. I.) fins ^IDS ■•ins t=:D^in:) m^4t!p_^^ \>nT ^5? -IT '?.1I tz:s^3?-)T tiD^nia ^ni^ •^nin tDp^nit: tzj-^nn £ Class, ■sn^T Ci5D;n;T srznsD •i-lSD nsD as'^nsD cznnp ''-inp. ''nnj? t^snnj? t=:^n23 ^n23 ''HSD ti:5%n:23 tn^p^^n ?>,r!= ''j?>n. t=5Y/tJn CD'^iVn «fec. lo'^'^ns &c. ' Class, ■ '?1B tn^^d^p^ 236 § 137. PARADIGM OF NOUNS MASC» Sing^. abs. Const. light Suff. grave Suff. («) ^?£ ^:?> ■'^?.? («) T?? T.?P '^^.P ^P.^^.P. (p) ^l^^ ip'£ nps DDnpa (?) Syriac Segholat 65. DD^^n ('■) "^^.1 "dn^ ipn'^ tjspn'n (^) J2^.^ sp.? ''^^^ ^'Dpyp (0 nwN^s -IwVS} nj^js DD1&^D («) — !:it:p ^V^a *^pV^r (»') "i^P. ^1^1?.. ^?.1^P. («) nna • T; T « ^^P ^V^P a^Voi? (2/) — ^P-l Contracted Segho lates. t2p.?.pl (-) -lid ni'j: ni'd fiDnViD (a) l^'i n^M ^^."^^ CD^^'I (^) i^^n ^^n '^^^^n a5>;n Se. gholates with shortened Plurals, (y) iV^D ^v^ («) "^'^•? Vll. Dec. Sing. (a) n\\* n\s '^n\^ 'ni^.^.l'^ C^*) VuJip ^Dip "hp^^ fi^V^'ip (c) Vippa ^tOpX3 "^^PP^i ^r.'^^P-^. (^) n?!^ nsTXD "^n^m fiDnsT^q * Also Dsbap. § 137. PARADIGM OF NOUNS MASC. 237 Fiural abs. light Suit' Co. St. Sfri've Sutf. a^b^D '^'^I^^S C22^V:?D ^^^^P. ^'^^J'. ^^PZ ^^.'^.^.R DnjP3 nj;2 n.,-s GSnpS ~ T r; Syriac Seghc i/afe5. V " ; T t:^"ki5ni &c. n^izynii &c. nnfi.E^ 0) "^^ "1^ ''"i^ ^?"13 (i) VsrJwNf. ^3pwV5_ 'i^s-jiwy QpVDu:!^. VIII. Dec. , Sing. («) T Q! 152;> t!^.^.- (i) D5^, fiwNt^ '^JSi^ G5S,n; (c) 1?. 1?. h33 13?.?^ (d) pn "HT ''jpn cspn (e) T> -T3? (f) ^^ "112 ''l^ iDD^tl (g) !^n^ ^m ^^n.s tssVns (A) pi'fi^ '5^"i^- hsj^ ai:£"fi< (0 m 1?.^. asDs^^ (i) ^n ''O. (*) TJ) nuj 1-lB *.* ; IT 0) n^' n^_ ^n>. ^^nk (m) ^1^' IX. Dec. Sing. («) nip nm ''Th fism (A) ^1? nit • T t:r)i"iB V : It * Also DST5> . § 137. PARADIGM OP NOUNS MASC. 239 Plural abs. light. Suff. Const. grave Suff. ni^'j? \-|i52UJ ni52p fiS^ni^'iD 'n^iy i^:? t::)i23? iD^:s (PI ur. as Dec. il.) nS^i'n (as fern. Plur.) D-iDT (from IT) '•aT ai"^]- ni!?3pNl. (as fem. Plur.) VIII. Dec. Plur . 1:^52^ 1521 ^?.- QS^^'' nia&{ •Tiiaii nii3i« a::^ni:a>{ D'^as &c. t25^pn 0^*1^ '''^^ 'I's^ DD'^'itl ID^BJ^ •^Sfi^ 155$ D^'^S&J ID "^35^ ''Drit) ai^D:^^ Qh^n h^n \'.n DD^^n nn'j3 •^-ito '^ntrj a^ntd u^nh ^n3_ ^n^ aD^^^ Ql^l^ IX. Dec. Plur. D'^m n'n M" a^'^tn D'^liO i^ffi ''^■^ as^Y^ 240 § 137. PARADIGM OF DUAL NOUNS. Paradigm of the Dual Number of Nouns. I. Sing:, aba. Dual abs. Dual cons, II. III. ^?? IV. V. Sing. abs. E ^-i| O Gutt. b^/:_ ^3 VI. Dual abs. • r: T VII. VIII. Dual cons. In the preceding Paradigms, nouns are exhibited in their abso- lute and construct state, in the Singular, Plural, and Dual ; and in their Suffix state, both in the sing, and plur,, as connected with the light and the grave Suffixes. These various forms exhibit all the phases of which nouns are susceptible, in any connexion or relation. The Cons, and Suflf. state of the Dual coincides with that of the plu- ral, where a plural exists with the Dual ; and where there is no plural, the Dual in the Const, and Suflf. state is formed analogically with the plural. The abs. and const, state of nouns has been explained above. The Paradigms exhibit the application of the principles, contained in §§ 135. 136. In regard to the Suffix state ; it should be noted, that all light suffixes, of whatever kind, are attached to couns in the § 138. nouns: i. dec. 241 same way as those exhibited in the Paradigm, and make the same changes in them as are there exhibited. The same is true in re- gard to the grave Suffixes. Of course, it is unnecessary to exhibit any more positions of nouns, than those which the Table contains. In regard to the Paradigm of the Dual forms, it exhibits exam- ples of all the various phases of the Dual, which actually occur in Hebrew. Dual nouns are not frequent ; and of those which occur, many have no Sing, abs., as appears from the Paradigm ; others are not found in the Const, state. It ma}'^ be proper to observe here, that all the forms of nouns exhibited in the above Paradigms are not actually found, as it re- spects the nouns there exhibited. But those forms occur in regard to other nouns, and are here exhibited only as a model. Such is the common method adopted by Grammarians, for the exhibition of in- flections. And this may be a sufficient apology, for exhibiting cases of inflection of some nouns, which cases, in regard to those particular nouns, are not found in the Hebrew Bible. The student will, of course, compare the following Sections with the Paradigms above. § 138. JVouns : I. Declensio7i. 1. To this belong all words, monosyllabic or polysylla- bic, whose vowels are immutable, (§ 51.) whatever these vowels may be ; as -1^5?, QJ?, "15, Sn3, X\'^^}<,, r{d7p_, The single circumstance that the vowels are immutable, marks this Declension ; not the kind of vowels, nor the number of syllables. 2. In many cases, it is easy to decide whether the vowels are immutable ; in others, not. /ip, kIJ'^127, &c, are obviously immutable ; but the vowels in 12JJ5S, ilJID, &;c. can be known to be immutable, only from a Lexicon, or from a knowledge of etymology. A (evf words which generally have immutable vowels, sometimes suffer changes in their vowels ; as Const, state, "tZJ^is and 'i'ns , the 242 § 139. NOUNS : ii. dec. latter with final Qamets shortened. Some few exchange Hholem for Shureq, in the last syllable ; as UiC'iJ, plur. Q'^ane^j. (Vide § 51. Note 2.) Words like UJ'nD may be said to belong, by usage of the Punc- tators, both to the 1. and 11. Declension. § 139. JVonns : II. Declension. . ,^ ft. /r-t < 1. To this belong Nouns it'z7/i,y?/i«/ Qamets pim^A.e. mutable, whether monosyllables, or polysyllables which have their preceding vowels immutable. A few Nouns with final Pattahh, are declined according to the model of this Declension. Of these, some are polysyllables with final Pattahh, the preceding vowels being immutable ; and some (but very few) are monosyllables with Pattahh. E. g. as in the Paradigm, 5>5i3 and Tii. 2. In the Singular, In the Const, form and before the grave Suffixes, final Qamets goes into Pattahh. In the Plural, it falls away before the grave Suffixes, and in the Construct state. 3. In many Nouns here, the final Qamets is of doubt- ful appearance ; and the mutability of it can be determin- ed only by the Lexicon or etymology. The final Qamets and Pattahh in monosyllables, appear like the same forms in Dec. VIII. It is only by the form of the Suffix state, by the Plural, or by etymology, that the student can separate some Nouns of one Declension from some that belong to the other. Thus, D1 plur. ^"121. Dec. II ; but d"^ plur. fi-^u", Dec. VIII, Note 1. In the case a, DD?3" would be DD'^l by analogy ; but such is the form which this noun takes. So T^ hand, takes either Seghol or Pattahh before a grave Suffix ; as fipT^ and Q5'1\ Note 2. The cases c and d occur very seldom, and are to be re- cognized as belonging to this Declension, only by their inflected forms. § 140. NOUNS : III. DEC, 243 § 140. JVouns : III. Declension. 1. This comprises all Nouns which have an impifm vowel in the last syllable, and Qamets or Tseri fmm in the penultimate. It matters not whether the word is dissyllabic as T'ps , or tri- syllabic as '!T*^^3. The characteristic of the III. Dec. is a pure i. e. mutable Qamets or Tseri, in the penult ; while the ultimate is im- mutable. 2. The mutable vowel of the penult falls away, out of the absolute state or ground-form. In such forms as "jinST, the Daghesh also falls away, so that the two first syllables are contracted into one. (Vid. Paradigm.) Here also, the Lexicon and etymology are often needed, to de- cide whether nouns apparently belonging to this Declension, do real- ly belong to it. E. g. n''"^3 appears to belong to it, but has a Qa- mets immutable, as it stands for Ii"''^3 . If the student can find the const, form, or the Plur. of any word, or the word with a Suffix, he can altvays judge whether the penult vowel is mutable or not; and these may always be found, (if contained in the Hebrew Scriptures,) by consulting Buxtorf 's Hebrew Concordance. JVotes. (1) Part. Pass, in Kal, of the form b^t3p , are all declined as c. (2) The nouns in d and e exhibit both Hhireq breve and Seghol, in the const, and Sufi", state. (3) Several nouns and adjectives, in the const, and Sufi", state, ex- change Hholem for Shureq, as in/. (Vide § 51. 3. Note 2.) (4) The case g" is a Syriac form in the Sing., OliiJ being put for 0!)li< . There being the same reason for Syriasm in the Sing. Const, and Sufi", state, as in the Sing, abs., the first vowel here suffers no change. But the Plur. is formed analogically with the III. Declen- sion. (Vid. § 47. 5.) (5) The case /t, is very unfrequent. The shortening of Hholem in the final syllable, by being placed in the const, state, or before 244 § 141. nouns: iv. dec. Maqqeph, is against the general analogy of the Declension. But as such cases of anomaly actually occur, it was judged best to present an example of them. (6) In some words y Gutt. or Resh, the punctuation is inconsist- ent with itself E. g. D''"JD, const. 0"'~ip , but Plur. d^&"'~\0, Const. p.''^& and ■^0'"iO : i.e. inis word, (and so some others) is treated sometimes as if it belonged to Dec. 1., and sometimes as if it belong- ed to Dec. III. § 141. JVouns : IV. Declension. 1. To this belong dissyllabic Nouns with Qamets fdi££ in the uhimate, and Qamets or Tseri pure in the penult. The same difficulties, as heretofore, of classing nouns from mere appearance, occur in respect to this Declension ; as many nouns, with forms which appear to belong to it, have one of their vowels (sometimes both) immutable. 2. The changes by declension are, (a) Out of the ground-form, the penult vowel always falls aAvay. (h) In the Const, state and before grave Suffixes, in the Singular, the ultimate Qamets shortens into Pattahh. (Vide Parad.) (c) In the plural, the Const, state, or grave Suffixes cause both vowels to fall away ; and then a new vowel (Hhireq or Pattahh) arises, agreeably to § 59. JVotes. (1) The forms a and b exhibit the usual ones of this Declension ; c and d show how the Gutturals initial and medial, respectively, af- fect the words in which they stand. The case e is one where the Guttural conforms to the common punctuation in the plur. Construct. (2) In the case/, Pattahh is used for Hhireq breve in the Const. § 142. NOUNS: V. DEC. 245 plural, although the word has no Guttural. This happens in but few words. 3. In Of, the final Qatnets remains immutable in the Const, and Suff. state, because of the i in which it quiesces. Derivates from N^, of this Declension, conform to this model. 4. The cases h and i, exhibit examples of nouns belonging to this declension, in respect to the Nom. abs., and in regard to most of the other forms, which still have a S'ing. Cons, state^ like that of the Se- gholates in Dec. VI. Some nouns have onl]i such a Segholate form in the Const. ; and some, the regular form of the IV. Declension, to- gether with the Segholate one. § 142. JVouns : V. Declension. 1, This consists of dissyllabic Nouns, with Tseri pure in the ultimate, and Qamets pure in the penult. 2. The vowel changes here resemble those of the IV. Declension, as the vowels are similar. (Vid. Parad.) JVotes. 1. The form h differs from a, only as influenced by the Guttural letter in it. 2. The forms in c and J, aflford examples of the Segholate forms which the const, state here sometimes exhibits, as in Dec. IV. (See Note 4, supra.) 3. Nouns from Nb roots, retain Tseri here, (see the case g, Dec IV.) because it quiesces in j<. (Vid. Dec. IV. Note 3.) 4. The plur. const, of several nouns belonging to this declension, retains the Tseri, as if it were immutable. (See 'jt2;'< in Parad.) And generally, the final Tseri here remains more frequently than is usual for pure vowels, in other Declensions. 5. The usual Const. Sing, of this Dec. exhibits a peculiarity, in respect to the final vowel. We might expect ]pT, and not tpT. Pattahh and Seghol, however, are nearly related, and are very Ire- quentiy commuted for each other. (Vide § 60. 2.) -32 246 § 143. NOUNS : vi. dec. §143. JVouns : VI, Declension. 1. This comprises all Nouiis that are Segholates in their ground-forms. These assume a variety of phases, ac- cording to their origin, or Radicals. The characteristic is a furtive short vowel in the ultimate, and a petiult accent, i. e. according to the appearance of the Noun ; for in reali- ty, these JVouns are monosyllabic. In such forms as "^"ID , •^^n (so written instead of *]")£, "l^.H) euphony shifts the vowel to accommodate the Quiescents. § 47. 3. 2. In declension, the following changes take place ; viz. (a) The ground-form remains in the Const, state ; ex- cepting in derivates from verbs hv, e. g. Hl^ , x'^H, where contraction takes place. (See Parad.) (b) Before a Suffix, the original monosyllabic form of the Noun is restored ; as TjV^, '^'^P.'> »^'^p- (See Parad.) (c) The Plural seems to be formed from a different ground-form, which is like the Aramaean Segholates. E. g. X^^'Db^ plur. abs. is formed, as if derived from a noun sing, of the form 'rk'D ; C'lSD , as from "ISD ; iD'^iIJTP , as from tb'lp , &c ; the Pattahh in the Sing, being prolonged in the Plural, because it falls into a pure syllable. Notes: A. Class. 1. The rcflZ ground-form of all nouns in this Class, is a monosyllable with Pattahh, as !7btt, which sometimes appears in the Sing. abs. pro- longed, as y^h , nvj. The ground form shows itself in the third and fourth columns, where Suffixes are taken. For the reason and method of changing the ground-form of these nouns, so that they ap- pear as in the Sing. abs. of the Paradigm, see § 59. 4. and § 60. 3. 2. Generally, nouns of the A Class i Guttural^ exhibit the Pattahh § 143. NOUNS : VI. DEC. 247 of the ground form in the Sing, abs., as ^^^ ; so derivates of Verbs I'y, as r)l?3 , h^h. But a few nouns S Guttural exhibit the usual form, as DnS, £]n^_ . 3. Nouns ^ Guttural of this Class generally take the form of J-"-!*; ; (Vide i 46. 3. J 59. 4.) 4. The flexion of «, 6, c, d^ is the same, excepting simply that the nouns with Gutturals take composite Shevas. 5. In words like n')h and n^/t, the departure from the usual in- flexion is occasioned simply by the Q^uiescents ; the vowels being changed to accomodate them. (Vide ^ 48. 3.) 6. In the place of the Tseri, in the Suflf. forms of some nouns of this class, Hhireq appears, as 'n'^^ , H'n''3> ; n^'i; , in'';i5 not in'^'^J;. The Plural of this class, moreover, is sometimes full^ and not con- tracted as in the Paradigm; e.g. 'b'[T\-, plur. D"'^''n,not D'^^'^H; "n"^!?, plur. D"^*^!;?- (Vide infra.) E. Class. 7. From an inspection of the Paradigm, it is evident that there are two classes of nouns, which exhibit the same form as 'ri'bh in the Sing, abs.; but which, in the course of inflexion, shew that they be- long, still, to the E Class ; e. g. 'lii)?., ibn in the Paradigm. Of these there are a considerable number. The vowel of the ground form is Seghol long, or more probablj'^ Tseri. (§ 60. 3.) So n"|5 is chang- ed to rrn? ; n?bp to nbb'p, &c. by the power of the furtive Seghol. 8. The different short vowels, (viz. Seghol and short Hhireq,) em- ployed when the nouns receive Sufiixes, is easily explained by the relation which both these vowels bear to the Tseri of the ground form; being the corresponding short vowels. Genera%, nouns d Gut- tural with Suffix, take Seghol in the first syllable, (Parad. p^h,) but other nouns Hhireq breve. 9. The irregular appearance of the class /, is occasioned by the quiescent Yodk. Some nouns of this class, occasionally^ take Seghol instead of short Hhireq, before a Suff". ; as ''^B , "^fl^ 5 ""^P ' T!*^^ • Before a grave plur. Suff"., the form of the Sing. abs. generally re- mains unchanged, as Dln'^'nD ; but sometimes as d^'lS . In the plur. it not unfrequently takes the place of •• ; e. g. '^\n , fi^N^n . (Vide §39. 2. c.) 248 § 143. nouns: vi. dec. O. Class. 10. But few nonns of this Class take Hhateph Qamets (-0 under the first radical, in the plural number. (Vide Paradigm.) In general, they take a Sheva. 1 1. That some nouns when joined with a Snff. take Qamets Hha- teph, and some Qibbuts, is easily explained by the simple considera- tion, that these are the corresponding short vowels of Hholem. Some nouns have both the O and the U form ; as i^na, i^na , and i^n-\ . 12. The irregular appearance of nouns like ^;n is occasioned by the Yodh quiescent. 13. By Syriasm, {—) is sometimes put for (fT^); as ibS'.s for ibS/'SS, from VsJE. 14. Before the Suff. ^ , some words of the O Class read as ^b2>s, ^Vrji* 5 1^'^P ' "^^ 5 ^^^ usual form being as 'rjilinp , &.c. 15. Peculiar Plurals of this class, are D''Uil|J qodashim from X^ht and D''"^TaJ shorushim from u;"\'ij. By Syriasm, D'^JrlriN is put for D'-rnj* , from b'rt N . 16. A very few nouns have a plur. as if derived from a form of Segholates, with final O; e.g. "jna , plur. Diana, as if from 7ln2- A and E Class. 17. A few nouns, with Sing. abs. of the form ^^s, exhibit in their inflexion the vowels of both the A and E Class; e.g. *lV.\ i plural Const. ^'}^2 and "^niri ; "Tin., ^^'^'^n and '^"^nn ; bin ) "'^.^n and '^p.n . INo Paradigm of these is needed. 18. A few Segholate nouns, both in the A Class and the E Class, exhibit, in the Sing. Const., the same form as nouns of Dec. V. These are limited, almost exclusively, to nouns ^ Guttural ; e. g. s>'n\ , Cons. 5>'^\ and 2>'nT ; S'-pn , Const, yiljn and S-'tlJr) . yice versa, we have seen that the V. Dec. sometimes exhibits a Sing. Const., like that of the Segholates in the VI. Declension. Syriac Segholates. 19. Such is the name which may be given to those forms of nouns, and of the Inf. mood, which are the same as those of the Syriac Se- gholates. The Nom. Sing. abs. and the Construct of these forms, are the same ; but with Suff. &.c, these nouns follow the analogy of common Heb. Segholates, as may be seen in the Paradigm. There are but few nouns of this form. But § 143. nouns: vi. dec. 249 20. The Infinitives of the form ifUJ? , btap. all receive Suff , &c, analogically with nouns of this class, i. e. as the Syriac Segholates do. But as these are Infinitives in the Const, state, they of course have no Sing, absolute ; nor have they, like common nouns, any plural number. The Paradigm exhibits nearly all their varieties. 21 . General remark on Syriac Segholates. The Syriac pronuncia- tion throws all the stress of voice on the final syllable, in the Sing, abs. of Segholates, and so custom in writing has transferred the vow- els there. But accession to these nouns throws back the vowel to the first syllable, as in Hebrew nouns described in Nos. 19, 20. Thus Syr. ^li^i^, Status emphat. I^^^sv. ; so ^v^^;^^? Vs^^' J >^o^ii, isioo. Contracted Segholates. 22. These come from Verbs ly and ''S; and instead of taking the usual Segholate form, the middle radical in the Sing, is commonly quiescent, and the noun therefore immutable. E. g. 'ni\y is put for *ivi3 ; '■\r\Tt for liS , ^■^n for V";n = V;;n , &c. The number of nouns, that exhibit Vav as moveable in the Plu- ral, is small. Mostly, nouns of this contracted form remain immuta- ble, and are declined as D^ID in Dec. 1. A few nouns, in the Plur. follow both methods of declension : e. g. tiin , D'^niln and D'^niJi . Contracted Plurals. 23. A few Plurals have the same contracted form, in the absolute state and before light Sufif., as in the Const, state. E.g. '^ip:?. , plur. Qi^toyfor d'^'nuj?'.; ihp , plur. Diibt: for D^'lbip. Const. Plur. with Daghesh euphonic. 24. It sometimes happens, that the const. Plural of these nouns takes a Daghesh in the middle radical, which is merely euphonic ; e. g. SilJjf , cons. plur. DTS'^Jy for nnaipT; pb.n, plur. cons. ■'j7Vn for ''pbrt. Endings attached to Segholate forms. 25. The classes of Nouns, which are formed from Segholates by suffixing "jT, I—-, ni, ■'-^, occasion the same changes in the Segho- late forms as the light Suffix Yodh, in the Paradigms. Original forms of Segholates. 26. Very few of these appear, in the absolute state, in our pres- ent Hebrew text. Some, however, still remain ; e. g. of the A Class, N-^a, tj'nN ; Of the E Class, NDn, ■^-)2, &c. 250 § 144. nouns: vii. dec. §144. Abwns ; FII. Declension. 1. This comprises Nouns with ultimate Tseri pure ; whether monosyllables with this vowel, or polysyllables with other previous vowels immutable. Here too, forms dubious as to appearance occur ; e. g. l^TTa be- longs here, having a mutable Tseri ; but "^T}^^ , na , "na , &c. be- long to Dec. I, having an immutable Tseri, as plur. Q'^ir^pjg , DTitt , &c. The requisite information must be sought in a Concordance or Lexicon. Note. All regular Participles Pres. of Kal, Piel, and Hithpael, belong to this Declension. 3. The changes by declension are, («) The Const. Sing, generally remains unchanged ; but sometimes Tseri goes into Pattahh. (See Parad.) (6) Tseri falls away in all the other cases ; except that the Plur. abs. of monosyllables retains it. (See Par.) (c) Before the grave Suffixes, where two Shevas would occur in consequence of dropping the Tseri, a new vowel (Hhireq) arises, according to § 59. Notes. 1. The forms in a, h, and c, are those of Participles in Kal and Piel. The Part, of Hith. is declined in the same manner as that of Piel. 2. The Const, state of some nouns takes Pattahh, though they have no Guttural in the ultimate syllable, as in d ; e. g. 12073 , Con- struct isoa. There are but kv; nouns of this species. 3. Monosyllables, (as e and/,) retain Tseri in the Plural abs.; and some, as/, before the Singular Suffixes also. — Before the Plur. Suflf. S'^ makes d:?''?'! , and d'^y:q , DD'^^ig , also ""Sja Construct. Some Polysyllables imitate them; e.g. UJ^UJ, 0"'^^.^ ; 13?.^^, 4. Some monosyllables, (as g,) in the Const, state, take ( •• ) in- stead of the ( .. ) in the absolute state. 5. Some words, (as in A,) take Seghol before the Suffixes, instead of Hhireq breve. §145. nouns: vim. dec. 251 6. A Cevf nouns, derivates of Roots !nb, which have Pattahh in their ground form, are declined like the monosyllabic nouns of this declension. Besides those in i of the Par., we have ti^rjQ mortals., probably from the obsolete root n^- 7. Thecascjisof a peculiar nature, and limited to very few nouns. The reason for classing it here is, the resemblance which the mode of inflexion has to that of this declension. 8. Several nouns with a Nom. abs. as VlDp^ appear in the Cods. state as ^I2p.». Most probably the latter form comes from irap^, which seems to be synonymous with the form bl?.p.^- § 145. JVouns : VIII. Declension. 1. To this belong all those various classes of Nouns, which double (Daghesh) their last radical, when they re- ceive any accession. (Vide Parad.) 2. The original, proper form of such nouns is as 'Diyi = ^"1 which must be written 12'' , (§ 28. Note 2.) WiA = m , ppn ^l^Ti, which form first developes itself w^hen it re- ceives Suffixes, like the case of Verbs ^3?. 3. The long vowel of the ultimate, (which is most common in the w^'itten ground-form,) seems to be a com- pensation for omitting the Daghesh, or double letter. The changes of the long vowels by declension, arc, as usual, Qamets into Pattahh. Tseri — Hhireq breve, or Pattahh. Hholem — Qibbuts, and Qamets Hhatepli. Pattahh (sometimes) into short Hhireq. The previous vowels, if mutable, are changed according to the laws in the preceding declensions, when the accent is removed ; as baa , plur. fi'^^ioa. But as nouns of the VIII may belong, (so far as the vowels are concerned,) to any of the preceding declensions, the vowel changes are to be sought there. 252 § 146. nouns: ix. dec. 4. As Nouns of all kinds, as to appearance, are ii> eluded in this declension, nothing but actual observation of the Suffix-form or the plural, will determine, in some cases, whether a word belongs here. Derivatives of jry are easily distinguished as belonging here ; but such words as D^N plur. D''73aN , can be recognized as belonging here, only by observing their intiection. JVotes. 1. Nouns like "js, in c, with a Pattahh in the first Syllable when the noun receives accession, are very rare. 2. In Cases like d and e, where Qamets Hhateph appears in the Construct state, the noun is generally put before a Maqqeph ; and Qamets Hhateph rarely appears before Suffixes, as in e. 3. There are but few nouns, with final Pattahh and Seghol, (as in y, »•,) which take short Hhireq before Suff. and in the Plural. Most of the nouns which end in Pattahh retain it, as in h. 4. In i, the Qamets is immutable ; and Tseri goes into short Hhireq, when the accent is removed by accession. There are but a few nouns belonging to this declension, which have a Q,amets or Tseri immut. in their first syllable. 5. In j, "^n Nom. sing, stands for li'n of which "in the Const, form is a contraction. So ^"jn =^'?1^ has a Const. 'b'^'H- 6. In kand i, the reduplication of the final letter, in case of acces- sion, is prevented by the Gutturals. (§ 45.) The Pattahh in k with a Resh, is lengthened before the Suffixes, &.c ; but in /, it remains before the n. (Vide } 46. 1.) 7. In m, the form is conformed to the common principles of the Declension. 8. There are several nouns, which are occasionally declined as if they belonged here, and occasionally appear in the forms of other De- clensions. E.g. riN, D'^nij and c^ns* ; 1233, Q-iaDi and ""na^s. §146. JVouns : IX. Declension. 1. To this belong the derivates of »17, which end in iTiT- § 147. NOUNS FEMININE. 253 2. The changes are, (a) Const. Sing, makes ITI" (§ 135. 2.) Id a few cases Seghol remains ; as ^V."^.!^ f^?-'"?. the friend of the king. {b) Accession removes the n~ of the ground-form. § 147. JVouns Feminine: Formation from the masc. {Comp. § 132. 2.) 1. The Masculine suffers the same change when it re- ceives the feminine ending n~, as when it receives a Hght Suffix, (e. g. "^ — , or 1 — ;) because the tone is moved in both cases, only one place. ' Paradigm of the changes made in JVoims^ by the addition of a Feminine ending-. I. masc. DID lem. ■jinnn riDinnn II. is nn-]6^ 1012 nijPiia y^ ri::??. n t:n n^n y?. nsD 1? nD3 pn ^^►Ef^ ?3 n-T2 )^- nD5 yo TT n*«.-i:Q n&^"iX3 33 254 § 147. NOUNS FEMININE. 2. In regard to the fiem. endings n~ and n=— , they are less frequent in common nouns than fl^^, and generally occur in such nouns only in the Const, state. But in fern. Part, and Fem. Infinitives, the endings n— and n— are by far the most frequent. 3. The Fem. ending Ht-^ (fl =^) occurs not as a de- rivative of Masculine Nouns, of the 6th, (8th,) and 9th declensions. But in the cases where these fem. endings are appended ; (a) The last mutable Qamets or Tseri of the mas- culine form goes into Seghol, as Cn'in, D'Criiri; ^^1p» n!rbip ; or Tseri frequently remains, ast^^Pl, DDtin. In case of Gutturals, Pattahh is put in the room of Seghol^ as yii», nni^ ; ^^ ^Vi' (§ 60. 3.) (6) In case of a final impure vowel, it is commonly changed into its corresponding pure and mutable one; as tr)\v, n*dw>5; DiVd, n-j?d; n^n^, nnn^; nui^riD, (c) Words ending with a Quiescent omit the furtive vowel, i. e. contract ; as i^Ilin , ri&r\byy Segholales ill the Construct state. (/) rohm * zn^. r ^.^ *^p^h)2p_ (.g) mtm nn|i23t; ^nnstqt) (A) nDN?^ '^n^wy^ti (a) 111. ,Dec. Sing. ^r\i)h)2 (4) n^^;^ ^rkp-s!) (0 ^^in J^^:in ■^nsnn (<2) ■r • "T nsnn •'nsSri W !1"!?3 n"l?^3 ''niya (/) IV. , Dec. Sing. («) n-)5Dt; nnBoiq ^n-)?o». (4) nn2.n nnna •^n-ina (0 rdj ^?^ ''^^^. (d) ^^h '^tE)^f '^ntsft^ U) nans npns •Tians (/) nbria - snujri: ''ntiina * Instead of nsbaa, TilD^j/aa , &c. § 148. PARADIGM OF NOUNS PEM. 257 grave Suff. Plur. Plur. Const. Suffix. I. Dec. Plur, t]Dn^_ina ni^'^nn niVl^ns nD^ni^-^nn 11. Dec , Plur. nsn]^ niDD ni3ti3 C:D\ni]D fi^n:;!) niDtD niDHJ tiw'Diri fiSnp.^s nip'32 nip'TS ^-lipT^ Q^.n^Dn ni^sn niasn ^r\ii2^n fiDn!::\5? nfej? ni^53? ^r\wy DDnsVti 111. Dec. mbl2 Plur. ■^niD^ti DDnb^ia nib»":3 ni^t)";!) "^ni'^tiia t25n£in nis^n nisnn ^niSDnn t::Dns-in nin-in ninin '^ninnn ^^.ni??.^- mn?^: '^niTii n^m^D^ IV. Dec. Plur. !r)n;!3i^ (and ^T\m) ''ninsD^ 258 § 148. PARADIGM OF NOUNS FEM. Const. light Sutr. grave Suff. (^) Feminine inf. Segholate forms. Various Plural forms. Sing. abs. Plur. ih) (0 (i) rij?.5n^ nip^n^ a) ^ih^^ ni-inis (0 thbm nftiDj?,^ (m) n:s?2'j ni:p3D («) ^"1.™? ninrii2:> (o) n.NLon (i'or nvs^n) ni>ii:Dn Paradigm of J\^ouns Dual and Feminine. Sing. abs. Dual abs. Dual Const. Dec. I. T tzi^mii Dec. II. T T CD^ns\a nnsia riijS) tz^riijD "inwNtD Dec. Hi. • T • — iD'^riap") 'r'.^i- Dec. IV. nrdhD czi^ntrinD There are but few feminine nouns, which have a dual form. This form has more analogy throughout with the Sing. Suffix state, than with the Plural form ; and in this respect differs from the Dual of the masc. The formation of it is so obvious, as to render partic- ular illustration unnecessary. §§ 149, 150. FEM. NOUNS : I. AND II. DEC. 259 § 149. Fern. JVouns : I. Declension. 1. To this belong fern, nouns, that have Immutable vow- els; except merely the fern, ending STIt— , which in the Const, state, and with Suffixes, becomes n=— and ri— ; in the plural Dl • (Vide Paradigm.) § 150. Fein. JVouns : II. Declension. 1. To this belong nouns which have Qamets or Tseri pure in their penult syllable, and in the final one ?!-_ mu- table, as in Dec. I. In the Const, state, and with Suff, the penult syllable falls away. (Vide Paradigm.) JVotes. 1. In the case c, as Qamets falls away in the Const. &c, the two Shevas cannot stand together, at the beginning of a syllable, but (as usual) the first goes into short Hhireq. (§ 59. 1.) 2. The cases d and e are of the same kind ; only, the first letter being Guttural, Pattahh or Seghol is taken instead of short Hhireq. 3. The cases/, g",and /t, are examples of fem. nouns of this declension, which have a Segholate form in the Sing. Construct state and before Suffixes, but in other respects conform to the model. There are a considerable number of nouns which conform to this usage. (Comp. Dec. iv. V. Masc.) 4. A considerable number of fem. nouns, apparently belonging to thisDeclen., have an immutable Qamets or Tseri in the penult sylla- ble ; e. g. Ti'^ii , "^riba , in^N , and so ?iNbn , nb^'n, &c, belonging to Dec. I. With Tseri, tibn , Sn^t^i , !^^";^2 &c. In fact, there are more feminine nouns of this form that have an immutable Tseri, than there are which have a mutable one ; so that the greater number of these nouns belong to the first Declension. 5. There are a few nouns with penult (■^ ) and ( .. ), which are treated, in declension, both as mutable and immutable in respect to these vowels. E. g. jnc , Const. riD';' , with Suif. "^no^ , rtbn: ; Const. p'?n3 , with Suff. TiVan" 260 §§ 151. 152. FEM. NOUNS : m. and iv. dec. § 151. Fern. JVouns : III. Declension. To this belong only the feminines derived from the masc. Segholates of Dec. VI, which are derivates of reg- ular form; and these are declined as nouns in Dec. I, in regard to the feminine ending, but form their Plural like the masculine Segholates. (Vide Paradigm.) J^otes. 1. Nouns like a, belong to the A Class of Segholates, (Vide § 143. Notes ;) b and c belong to the E Class, and d to the O class ; e is an example of nouns with middle Guttural. (Comp § 143. 2.) 2. The classy, have a moveable Vowel letter in the Singular, which becomes quiescent in the plural, and thus occasions the anom- alous appearance of the plurals. 3. Caution. There are many fern, nouns, which apparently be- long to this Declension, but which do not really belong here. Such are 1ii:i.'a , fi53"i73 , &c, which form their Plural after the model of Dec. I. E. g. Piur. miiETa , m»^73 , &c, and not as Dec. III. mT:£?3 , i^V2^l2 . The Plural form and not the Singular is the distinctive trait which separates this Dec. from Dec. I. Only those nouns which are derived from masc. Segholates are inflected agreeably to the laws of this declension. § 152. Fern. JVouns : IV. Declension. 1. To this belong all feminine nouns, whose ground- form is Scgholated ; i. e. the final vowels of which are n,-T. (n=-^), n,7T., or n.;.^'. 2. The changes by inflection are, (a) Before a Suffix sing, the furtive vowel is dropped, and the penult, in the A class, receives Pattahh ; in the E class, short Hhireq (sometimes Seghol) ; and in the O class, Qamets Hhateph or Qibbuts. ( Vid. Note 1. and Par.) § 153. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 261 JVotes. 1. These nouns, resembling masculine Segholates, have the Jl form as in a ; the E form as in 6, c, d ; anJ the O form as in e and /. The short vowels in the Suflf. forms are various, as in Dec. VI. of Masc. Nouns ; anddevelope themselves when a Suffix is received, as may be seen in the Paradigm. 2. In ^, we have an example of the Const, fem. Infinitives of Verbs ''D and "jd. They all belong to the E class of feminine Segho- lates. 3. The classes h o, exemplify the different modes in which the Plurals of fem. Segholates are formed ; some iji^ ?", j,) contract- ing the Plural ; and some, (.&, Z, m, n, o,) forming it as the masculines in Dec. VI. The Lexicon must be consulted for each noun ; as the appearance of the Singular will not determine the mode of forming the plural. 4. In a very few cases, nouns of this class, with a Suffix, take a short vowel which is not homogeneous with their original root. E. g. nj?.a.n'» , inpsT", from masc. pav ; n5">y , ""nia-ij, from Inf. n'^a = aiii'' . § 153. Irregular JVouns. 1. Most of these are primitives, but are treated in the same manner as Verbals. As many of them are of fre- quent occurrence, a list is subjoined, with a view of the principal changes. 2. The cardinal numbers present a variety of anoma- lies. For these, see App. A. and for the laws of usage, Syntax, § 177. 34 262 § 153. PARAD. OF IRREG, NOUNS. Ground form. Const. statp. Light Si.ff. Plnr. P!ur. Const. father n^^ X ''=!^'?, '^D'^niJ brother riwNj ^riws iD'^hij s^niK *^m sister ninsj nrni^ man t!:\^^ Q^d5^? ■^td^wy maid n^fij nin^.i^ woman ^?^ ndi< ^^5^ • X house r\% n^3 fi^-in son 1?. 1?.'*P. ^^ t]^3n • X ^33 daughter rin in^ niD3 niD3 valley ' \n, wV^5 father-in- ■law cin • * i^an day "cr^ ^""^^ vessel '^.^: fi^^S water c^a •^5, "^ri^ti^ part ^5^. dwelling r;i3 m "^J^l? ni^J3 city -IV c en:? people T • -r ~: ^m:^ mouth ns ^2 rs £:^s,ni'2 governor nrjs nins niinD head ^IJwN"! c^ip.N-j lamh nil? n? i^-^a *Aiso "32: 123 t Also nii<;4 i Also &•»»» . § 154. ADJECTIVES. 263 § 154. Adjectives. 1. Adjectives in Hebrew have no peculiar and appro- priate forms; but only such as are common to nouns. Their etymology and inflections have, of course, been con- sidered in the preceding Sections which respect nouns; making simply the exception, that adjectives have no dual number. For the manner in which Comparison is made by them, see Syn- tax §§ 175. 176. For the manner in which the fera is formed from the masculine, see § 147. §155. Particles : General Remarks. 1. Under these are comprehended Adverbs, Preposi- tions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. 2. Like Nouns, some of these are Primitive ; but most of them, Derivative. Of the derivatives, some have an ending appropriated solely to the form of Particles, (as DDttX truly^hom "jtJj^ truth y) while most re- tain the form of Verbs, Nouns, or Pronouns. f Composition of words is more frequent here, than in the lead- ing parts of speech. Apocope is also more common. E. g. all pre- positions, &c, which consist of only one letter, are doubtless apoco- pated words ; as b for bit ; 12 for "jTa , &c. The older Grammarians have, for the most part, considered all the Particles as derivate Nouns ; but this is not probable, as Prim- itives are found in all other parts of Speech. It is, however, very difficult to draw the exact line between the Primitives and Deriv- atives, as the etymology is often much obscured, by the changes which the particles have undergone. 264 §§ 156. 157. adverbs, prepositions. § 156. Adverbs. 1. Primitives. Jl interrog. ne, an ? (for punctua- tion, see § 61. V;) Ti« then; \S, \N5 where? X'}^ (l^!^?.) whence; ^H whither ; C^{ an, nonne ? tl3, il!D, HDS //«-?/«; irp not ; *^1XI2 when ? n'S , IS , N3 here ; Gffl //icre. 2. Derivatives, with appropriate endings. (a) In d— ; as fisajj irwZ?/, from "JTSN ^"7" ? towards ; as M^lp towards Sodom. For punctuation of Prepositions, see § 61. III. IV. Prepositions Sutfixes, § 70. § 158. Conjunctions. 1. Rrimitives. 7DNI 6m^ ; i^J or; '?j5i on/^; ^^ that not; vl5^\«/5o; DJ< z/*; "^ jf; "jS/es/; iSi^^ now, then, as expletives; 1 awe?. 2. Conjunctions have mostly the forms, (a) Of Pronouns; as "nVJi* (^) because, that, {b) Of Pronouns preceded by Prepositions ; as T^iN"]^^ because ; ^\;JN~n5 until, (c) Sometimes several Conjunctions are used as one ; as "'3 Da although ; Bit "^3 unless. For pointing of "> and, see § 61. II. ; and for Suffixes, see § 70. § 159. Interjections. 1. Most of these, being simple exclamations occasioned by joy or sorrow, are Primitives. 2. A few Imperative forms seem to be used as In- terjections. E. g. J^Sti , !ii^i age, give, come then, up then ! D^I , ^D!l , whist, be still! inJJT idov, ecce, lo ! 3. The forms of nouns have, **iJN feene, success to him ! 'rib'^^T far from, God forbid I "'a, hear, I pray you ; i'^ , jam satis, hold ! SYNTAX. §160. In the etymological part of the preceding pages, it was thought proper to follow the natural order of the Hebrew language, and consider, First, the pronouns w^hose ground forms are all primitives ; Secondly, the Verbs, which for the most part are primitive ; and Thirdly, Nouns and other parts of speech, which are mostly derivatives. But in the Syntax, as the subject of a sentence (Nom. case) naturally comes first in order, it seems more proper here, first to consider the Noun, Pronoun, &c, and then the Verb and other constituent parts of a sentence. § 161. JVouns used as Adjectives. The number of adjectives in the Hebrew, in compar- ison with the same part of speech in the occidental lai> guages, is very limited. The consequence of this is, that nouns themselves are very commonly employed as adjec- tives. The place of adjectives is supplied, 1. By nouns in the Genitive. E. g- f[ph, ''i'S vessels of silver, i. e. silver vessels ; DbiS* flTfTN possession of eternity, i. e. everlasting possession ; Uijj'^rt '^Tlb priest of the head, i. e. high priest; 'I2p73 ""riJo.TWcn of number, i.e. which can be numbered = few men. 2. By adjectives used in a neuter or abstract sense i. e. as nouns. § 161. NOUNS USED AS ADJECTIVES. 267 E. g. S'^n riUJN a woman of evil, i. e. an evil woman ; H^p "^IQ wa- ters of fullness, i. e. full streams. 3. By the noun, which precedes the Genitive. E. g. T'T'lN n^'^p ih^ tallness of his cedars, i. e. his tall cedars ; i*^il5a ^JyipIS the fatness of his flesh, i. e. his fat flesh. So V3 (proper- ly generality, universality,) is used, as DINfl-b^ ^'^^ universality of men, i. e. all men ; or n!?3 bN'niD') Israel, alt of it, i. e. all Israel. The emploj'ment of a noun before the Gen. as an adjective, is rather un- frequent, except in respect to ^3. 4. By simple nouns following the verb of existence, this verb being either expressed or implied. E. g. The earth was :) rtl'' ^irin desolation and emptiness, i. e. deso- late and empty; Gen. i. 2. 'TJ"'l3^^5:2 Q^'^'n highness [are] thy judgments, i. e. thy judgments are high. This rule, of course, must be understood of nouns, which are de- signed to qualify the subject of the proposition or affirmation. 5. By nouns with prepositions prefixed. E. g. ^3'T^ "'^iFr? In holiness [is] thy way, i. e. thy way is holy. (Not very common.) 6. Several words are frequently employed in connec- tion with others, so as to compensate by circumlocution for the want of adjectives, which might simply designate quality. E. g. (a) ilj'N man ; as Q ""^^S" TB'^N a man of words, i. e. an elo- quent man ; ion vlJ'^N a man of piety, i. e. a pious man. ib) D^n!^ men \ e. g. niC'l ''rilQ men of hunger, i. e. hungry men, starvelings. (c) '^'s'llord, possessor ; e.g. "nj-'lij b^a possessor of hair, i. e. hairy; rT'ia ""bya possessors of a covenant, i. e. covenanted, bound together by covenant. (rf) "ig son and na daughter ; e. g. b^n~"j3 son of strenqth, i. e. a hero; ni^-]3 son of death, i. e. condemned, uorthy of death; -j:^ n2UJ the son of a year, i. e. a yearling. So"Y^'il3n m3a the daughters of song, i. e. the singing birds ; Ecc. xii. 4. 268 § 162. ADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS. But 'J2 son is not always employed with the like significancy. E. g. Sons of the ^oor means the poor ; sons of foreigners =^ foreigners ; son of man = man ; son of nobles = a nobleman : so in Homer, vUg Ay^aibw^ Sac. The nature of the passage, therefore, must determine the mean- ing of the term son. NoTK. The first noun is sometimes omitted, and can be supplied, only from the sense of the passage ; as iniN way^ for n'lN "ja son of the way, i. e. wanderer; Job xxxi. 32. *np;jj falsehood, for a man of false- hood, i. e. a liar; Prov. xvii. 4. So pips'i for son of Damascus, i. e. a Damascene. §162. Adjectives used as nouns. 1. This takes place, whenever the adjective has a neuter or abstract sense ; just as in Greek, to xaAov for goodness, to oojcpov for wisdom, (fee. In some words, that are adjectives in regard to derivation and form, the abstract sense is the only one that prevails, as 121^123 peace or joy, properly, peaceful, joy fid. In other cases, the abstract use is only occasioned. Thus Q"^?Dn integrity, lit. innocent, not punishable, Jos. xxiv. 14. "^72$ trouble, lit. troublesome, Job. xx. 2t. Ti'^^W brass, lit. brazen, Job. xl. 18. (Vide§ 161. 2.) 2. Several words, which appropriately are adjectives, are constantly employed by usage as epithets of persons or things, i. e. as nouns. E. g. T'SN strong, for God ; T'aN strong, for bull, horse ; )f^ ma- jestic, for prince ; !i73n hot, for the sun ; ln:i^ white, for the moon, &c. By poetic epithets chosen in this way, the 500 names for lion, of which the Arabic boasts, are constructed. Thus, in English, we say the Mighty One, the OmnipQtent, the .Ihnighty, &c, for God ; in French, UEternel, kc. § 163. INSERTION OF THE ARTICLE. 269 §163. Insertion of the Article. 1. The Hebrews have but one article, (viz. 'H § 61.); which, for the most part, corresponds to our definite article the, or to the sense ol* the Greek 6^ ij, ro • but not without some exceptions. 2. In general, the article is used in speaking of a rfe- finite, before mentioned, well known, or monadic subject. So ^b^.;n the king ; and Gen. ii. 7, D'lNln the man, (i. e. before mentionedj; "iL73^n the sun ; '^'nfi 'y^VI^ the f^reat city; ^i1^»"^ Dip52n this place. The very few instances of exception to this, may be regarded as comprised under the following rules. 2. When the adjective is the predicate of a sentence, however, it rejects the article ; as DTl^iXn niCJ God [is] i£Ood ; nirp QUJn ^\\y3, blessed [be] the name of Jehovah. 3. In a few cases, the adjective has an article, and the noun is without one ; as pi'^^^^ h^T\ the great host. In these cases, however, the art. may be regarded as a pronoun, (§ 163. 4.) and we may translate, great host, or, host which [is] great. 4. But when Suffix pronouns, or Genitive cases follow the noun, and prevent the prefixing of the article which is required, (§ 164, 2, 3.) the adjective may take the article ; as i:i15n Tj'ap thy great name ; Vl^iyi niiT] timp_p_ the great work of the Lord. 5. When two nouns come together in regimen, and de- signate an idea which requires the article, it is then placed beforie the second noun, i. e. the Genitive; as UDDri ^^3 the silver vessels, 1 Chron. xxviii. 14. Q'^'D'^tl d'^i^ thou man of blood, or murderer, 2 Sam. xvi. 7. So in respect to^S all; as DT'^lr|~b'3 all the day ; but 1S':j-b3 a7iy matter; 1!-J3:i73ri~b3 any image ; i. e. the expression is indefinite, with- out the article before the second noun. But this is not always ob- served in poetry. 272 § 166. GENDER OP NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. § 166. Gender of JVouns and Adjectives. 1. The Hebrew having no neuter gender, commonly employs i\\e feminine to express it. E. g. nnN one thing have I asked^ Ps. xxvii. 4. nTi>*ia great things', FlWp hard things. But sometimes the masc. ; as b'^'I'^^S noble things. 2. Specially is the fern, employed in a collective sense, (tiomen multitudinis.) E. g. nl'^JT^ inhabitresS, i. e. inhabitants j ys^ a tree, ln2£i> a grove of trees, fee, (The Pluralis fr actus, used as a Collective ia Arabic, il- lustrates this usage, as it often has a fem. form.) § 167. Nouns : Number. 1. Many nouns have no plural form, (§ 133. 7.) or very seldom exhibit one, but still are often used in a collective, or generic sense. E. g. Tniffowl, ?1D3 silver, &c. Specially is this the case, with national names, as ^3y33n the Canaanite. On the other hand, some have no Sing, form, where we might expect one ; as Q'^'^n life, D'^'SSpfi^ sandal-wood, &c. (§ 133. 6.) 2. Several Nouns designating the idea of Lord or God, are used in the Plural, with the sense of the Singular. (tt) E. g. 'jiiij Lord, Const. ''3nN , ^"'piiNt , &c, and so perpetually, if it have a Suffix, it is in the plur. form, when the meaning is that of the Singular; and sometimes it is in the plur. form when absolute, as n"ijj5 d"'DlN a cruel master ; Is. xix. 4. (6) Innbi* God, nearly always of the plur. form in prose, when it has the sense of the Singular number ; as D"^ln>Jt H^z God created ; Gen. i. 1. §168. nouns: apposition. 273 (c) ^5'3 lord. Both the Sing, and Plur. are used in the sense of the Siugulur. {d) D'^'^inp The most Holy one., plural in Hos. xii. 1. Prov. ix. 10. XXX. 3. Jos. xxiv. 19. (e) "^tiui the Almighty, is probably in the plural, (/■) D"'S"in household god, Sing, in 1 Sam. xix. 13, 16. Note. This is called Pluralis excellentiae^ or Pluralis majestaticus. In some other words, besides those just mentioned, it is used concern- ing God ; as Job xxxv. 10, God "UJS my Makers [maker] ; Ecc. xii. 1 '^''N'na thy Creators [Creator] ; Ps. cxxi. 5, Jehovah is '^'"1!d{z3 thy keepers [keeper,] Sic. Vide etiam, Is. liv. 5. xxii. 11. xlii. 5. Ixii. 5. Ps. cxlix. 2. 3. The Plural, especially in poetry, is not unfrequently used instead of the Singular. E. g. Job vi. 3, the sand ti'^1^2 'if '^^ *^^*? [sea]. Even in cases where only one can possibly be meant, is this the case ; as Jud. xii. 7, He was buried "^"lya in the towns [in a town] of Gilead. Gen. viii. 4, The ark rested '^'^'ntia on the mountains, [on a mountain] of Armenia. Job xxi. 32, ni'llp the graves [the grave.] § 168. Nouns : Apposition. 1. As in other languages, two nouns designating the same thing are placed in apposition. 2. In Hebrew, not unfrequently apposition is found, in cases where the second noun is a Genitive in other lan- guages. E. g. n^.l* Q'^^'SN words [which are] truth, i. e. words of truth ; fi''7Dri3 D'^'mi words [which are] consolations, i. e. words of consola- tion j Q^JabUJ CnaT offerings [which are] peace-o^erin^*. Specially is this the case, in designating weights, mea- sures, time, &c. E. g. nbb inNp a Seah [of] fine meal; ?|C!5 D'^'n33 two talents [of] silver: Q-^a^ Q'^OS^ two years [of] time-, Di3'«5-j n''")lU "^I'P twe rows [o(] pomegranates ; ;|03 O'^^D dross [of] silver. 274 § 169. nouns: repetition. Note, These last instances may be explained, also, by supposing the latter noun to be in the Ace, and used adverbially, as it is in Arabic ; or which amounts to the same thing, we may say that the latter noun is in the Ace. governed by a preposition understood ; e. g. two talents [in] silver, k,c. 3. Sometimes apposition is used, where the latter noun designates a whole or genus, of which the former designates only a part or species; as Q^ d'^l'^ii^ the nobles [of, or among] the people. 4. Some examples occur of apparent apposition, in Avhich there probably is an ellipsis of a noun. E. g. niNai ini'n. Jehovah [■'^.rN God o/] hosts. So, probably, ytlc O"!^ water [""a water of] trouble ; TSN Inain the glow [n^n the glow of\ his anger ; Is. xxx. 20. The Hebrew noun, which probably is omitted in these phrases, is supplied in the brackets. § 1G9. J^ouns : Repetition. 1. Repetition without the Copula 1 and denotes, (a) Multitude ; as ni"liSl!Il ^\^'^!^'2, pits, pits, i. e. many pits. (6) Distribution; as i'^Dp "l^.? I^i^ flock, Jlock by itself, i.e. each flock by itself; Gen. xxxii. 17. (c) Repetition is used to denote all, every. E. g. Mr>a Tfifli year, year, i. e. every year ; also with a copula as '^^T1 *^il generation and generation, i. e. all generations. (^d) Intensity. E. g. pby p^5> deep, deep, i. e. very deep. So earnestness in warning, threatening, in grief, joy, &c, expresses itself usually by re- petition. Intensity is also expressed, by using a word of similar sound and signification after another word. E. g. rrfijb:^^ n^^b wasting and destruction^ i, e. great wasting. § 170. nouns: genitive case. 275 Or by using Synonymes. E.g. "Jl'lrt D""!: clay of mire, i.e. the deepest mire. (See § 116.) 2. With a Copula, repetition generally denotes diversity. E. g. ]3NT IIN stone and stone, i. e. different stones or weights; Deut. XXV. 13. § 170. JYouns : formation of the Genitive case. 1. Most commonly the Genitive case is known, by the construct state of the preceding noun. (§ 135.) The noun itself, which is in the Gen., undergoes no change. But, 2. Besides the method just noted, the Genitive is made by circumlocution ; viz, («) By 7 Itp^ ' '^^hich [belongs, is] to. E. g. The overseer of the herds b^NHJb T>yi< which [belonged] to Saul, i. e. of the herds of Saul. The breadth of the wall 5?^ab *Ti?3n ■which [belonged] to the side,\.e. of the side-wall. (More frequent in the later Hebrew, and common, with little variation, in all the kin- dred dialects.) This mode of making the Genitive is most commonly used, when two or more Genitives follow each other in succession. Cant. i. 1. (6) By 7 simply; as '^Ip']^^ "jlB the son of Jesse; n'^d Y"l^i^ the shrub of the earth. Specially in the measure of time ; In the six hundredth year n*D '^^'^n^^ of the life of Noah ; Gen. vii. 11. Also in designating an author ; as 111^ li53T52 a psalm of David. Or in describing the materials of a thing ; as C'p^ "^V^y? vessels of gold ; Ezra i. 11. The cases in b are common in the kindred dialects, and not un- frequent in Hebrew. All of them resemble the case a, where the full phrase would be ■>uj';b [n;;rT 1'^N] "jz the son [which is] to Jesse ; so ths shrub [which belongs] to the earth ; the 600th year [which be- longed] to the life of JYoah, kc. 276 § 171. nouns: genitive case. (c) By 1 53, denoting on^m; as DSt) TVD^n the reproof of you, i. e. which originates from you. (Not frequent.) 3. The Genitive is generally placed immediatelj after the Noun, &c, which governs it or causes it to be put in the Genitive ; but in a very few cases, a Avord that has a close connexion Avith the clause stands between the Geni- tive and its antecedent. E. g. Gen. vii. 6, d'^» Tll'n Vl2ti a Jiood of waters was, Heb. a flood was of waters. Hop. xiv. 3, "JlV Niyri~b3 forgive all transgres- sion, Heb. all forgive transgression. Is. xl. 12. xix. 8. Job xv. 10. § 171. Nouns: use of the Genitive case. 1. The Genitive marks a great variety of relations and dependencies, in Hebrew, which can be better exhib- ited by examples, than taught by rule. E. g. ^5>3'^'^ ""DS D^n the violence of [towards] the sons of Jerub- baal ; Judg. ix. 24. ^!:73 M^^i* the terror of the king, i. e. which he causes ; Prov, xx. 2. Jiin"^ f^^l^ the fear of Jehovah, i. e. reverence towards him ; Prov. i. 7. d^JlVi* fT^^n the terror of God, i.e. that which God hath sent; 1 Sam. xiv. 13. D^ T'\ii^_p jealousy of [Cor] the people; Is. xxvi. 11. C"^;n'"i2J^^ n'^'^2 covenant of [with] the elders; Lev. xxvi. 45. 3,^^)2 ^^^b mockers of [for] dainties, i. e. to obtain them; Ps. xxxv. 16. Dnb S^oH the ass of bread, i.e. which carries bread; 1 Sam. xvi. 20. yp "jTiS? the sinofihe end,i.e. which brings consummation ; Ezek. xxxv. 5. ''72~\n UV the people of my curse, i. e. whom 1 have cursed ; Isa. xxxiv. 5. ini "^Ta the waters of Noah, i, e. of the time of Noah ; Is. liv. 9. In short, the connexion and nature of the case, must decide the shade of meaning which the Gen. designates; as is evident from the above examples. Instances of this nature might easily be multiplied. 2. In Hebrew, the Genitive frequently stands where we might naturally expect apposition. E. g. rr^B "nil: the river of Euphrates, i. e. the river Euphrates. D'^'nnii '^^3^ the men of the merchants, i. e. the merchantmen. § 172. nouns: const, state. 277 3. The Genitive is often put after adjectives, which designate qualities belonging to the Genitive noun. E. g. d^^^"! In33 lame offeet^ i. e. in his feet, d'^cS ""S^ pure of hands^ i. e. of pure hands, ab. 'nDH deficient of [inj understanding. So in Latin, Integer vitae, scelerisque purus, 4. Not unfrequently the Genitive, which follows an adjective, is used as a noun of multitude, and the adjective then denotes a part of this multitude. E. g. dni< b^pS the foolish of men, i. e. the foolish among men, those who are fools. Five CpN ■^iP'lVn smooth of stones., i. e. smooth stones. '^^."'S^. D'S^73 the strong of shields, i. e. some strong shields. § 172. JVouns : Construct state without a Genitive following it. 1. The reason why the vowels of a word, which is in the Construct state, are shortened, is the close connexion in which such word stands with the Genitive that usually follows. But such a connexion, or as close an one, may exist in other forms of expression, and produce the same effect upon the vowel of the former noun. Accordingly, the Const, state appears, sometimes, (a) Before a; as 'T^2£jv2 nnttUJ the joy in [of] harvest. ia'^3;2J» ?lp 22 "who rise early in the morning ; Is. v. 1 1 . (6) Before ^ ; as Disb "^y^iii loving to slumber. (c) Before bN ; as "^tii "'jnN bN "'11 V going down to the sto7ies of the pit. (d) Before riN ; as The Levites ^DN '^n'^UJa who served me. (e) Before 'J73 ; as 1T"1JP73 '^Jn'bN a God near at hand ; Jer. xxiii. 23, (/) Before b? ; as ^*\"7 V? ""Sbh 'who go oh the way ; Judg. v. 10. {g) Before *\*j:N! ; as "^ibN Qnp73 the place which ; Lev. iv. 24. — even if only implied ; as Ti-j nsn n;;'lp, the city [where 'mUN] David ^ n^'np being in Const, form j Is. xxj. 1 . .16 278 § 173. nouns: op marking the dative, etc. (A) Before T copulative ; as nyni n??:)!! wisdom and knowledge ; Is. xxxiii. 6. Even where i is omitted; Is. xxviii. 16. (i) Sometimes before adjectives ; as 1PN "ji'^N one (or a) coffer. Q'^rjOi^D "^ru: pleasant plants ; Is. xvii. 6. 2. In a very few cases, the Const, form seems to stand for the absolute ; or rather there is an ellipsis of the sec- ond Noun. E. g. 2 K. ix. 17, 1 see nys'iJ a multitude i. e. the multitude of Jehu, as the preceding part of the verse shows. Give not rijjn^ to the beasts^ i. e. to the beasts of the forest ("ly^ln) or wild beast. Note. The Construct state or Regimen has refer- ence solely to the relation of two nouns to each other, and not to the Case in which the former of these nouns is. For the antecedent noun i. e. the noim in the Const, state, in the case of regimeti, may be in the Nom. Gen. Dative, Accus. Voc. or Ablative; just as the other part of the sentence demands. E. g. Nom. • as d'^ln^Nln ^i1 the word of God came to Shemaiah, 1 Kings xii. 22. Genitive; as yiNln-d^ "'"■J^N"^ ab the heart of the princes of the people of the land., Job xii. 24, where "''^N'^ is in the Gen. in regard to ab, but in the Const. State as it respects n? ; and 132? is in the Gen. in regard to "^iliNl , but in the Const. State as it re- spects y^Nn . Dative ; as UiD; ^"173^ to those who are grieved in spir- it, Job iii. 20, where the former word is in the Dative and in the con- struct state. Accusative ; as That I may show thee 'D^n^H 15'^-nJ« the word of God, 1 Sam. ix. 27, where li'i is Ace. and in the Const. State. Vocative ; as D'^rr'bNil "iJ'^N O man of God, 2 Kings, i. 13. Ab- lative; as "^"^nst? 1513 by the word of thy lips, Ps. xvii. 4, where the lirst noun is in the Abi. and also in the Const. State. §173. JVouns : mode of marking the Dative, Ace. Foe. and Ablative. 1. The Dative is marked by 7 , signifying to or for. 2. The Accusative by riJjU, (T1J< ) in certain cases; otherwise it is without any distinctive sign. § 174. nouns: acc. case. 279 3. The Voc. sometimes (not always) has the article. 4. The Ablative takes *l12 Jrom, out of; 3 in, by ; UV with, &LC. Note. 1. In a few cases, by a kind of soloecism, b stands before the Nom.; as, The third was dibllJtlNb Msalom^ I Chron. iii. 2. Some- times before the Accusative ; as, / sent 'nty'^bNb Eliezer, &,c ; Ezra viii. 16. (Syriasm.) Note. 2. The use of riN with the Accusative is limited to (a) Nouns with the Article. (6) Nouns having a Gen. or Suffix after them, (c) Proper names. Consequently it is used only in case of a definite idea conveyed by the noun. The particle DN is much more frequent in prose than in poetry. Note 3. But riN is sometimes used before the Nom. ; asbT'ia-DNI and the iron fell into the water ; 2 Kings vi. 5. Specially, before the Nom. o( passive Verbs ; as Tt^JTlJ"!!}? thy name shall no more be called Ahram ; Gen. xvii. 5. Sometimes before the Nom. of neuter Verbs; as ?iTfn "^n^nTiN Let not this matter displease thee ; 2 Sam. xi. 25. fi'^iain '^p'i2J~nN The two nations are mine ; Ezek. xxxv. 10. Note 4. It is most probable, that originally nN was a pronoun, sig- nifying this, the, the same. So the Rabbinic Hebrew uses it, as imi<2 Di'sfl on the same day. (Vid. Gesen. p. 684.) Allowing it to be a pronoun, we can easily account for its being placed before the Nom- inative, &.C. §174. JVouns : Accusative case. 1. The Accusative commonly, as in other languages, denotes the object of a transitive Verb. 2. It forms, in a great number of Cases, adverbial de- signations of time, place, measure, &c ; and is also used in such cases as those, where the Greeks understand xara, and the Latins, secundum, quoad. In the Accusative are commonly placed, (a) Place whither ; as \23'^;2:'nn nii.b^b to go to Tarshish. (6) Place where ; as blrti?^ nns at the door of the tent ; Gen. xviii. 1. 280 § 175. adjectives: comparison. (c) Time when ; as i'ly in the evening ; 'ipa in the morning. (fO Measure ; as, the waters rose fifteen fi?2i>t cubits; Gen.vii. 20. (e) Cases where xctza would be implied, ia Greek; as. Lame 1^^a'n~nN as to his feet; 1 Kings xv. 23. Thou hast smitten all thine enemies "^nb as to fonl the cheek bone ; Ps. III. 8. It is also used to ex- press mere adverbs ; as nTlll: voluntarily. 3. Verbals not unfrequently govern the same case of the Nouns which follow them, as the Verbs, from which they are derived, would govern, i. e. the Accusative. E. ff. nilT'-nN NT' fearins Jehovah; JliST'-nN Jiyi the knowl- edge of the Lord ; Is. xi. 9. Note. By verbals is to be understood nouns which have a Part, or Inf. form, specially conformed to those in common use. § 175. Adjectives : Comparison. 1. The Comparative degree is made by using I^Q prcB, before, in comparison of, after the Adjective and be- fore the Noun with which the comparison is made ; as ffiS'l^ pin^ sweeter than honey. 2. In the same manner, also, after Nouns or Verbs signifying condition or quality, '\)2 is used to make com- parison. E.g. His visage ''li''ii'l2 tltTiil^ was marred more than any man's; Is. lii. 14. Til^li !?2^J< I will be greater than you ; Gen. xli. 40. 3. The particle of comparison, (^) before the Infini- tive mood implies a negative, and may be translated so that not, or than that, accordingly as the sentence is constructed. E. g. i^TiDi^ '^3iS; bi"W my iniquity is great, so that it cannot be pardoned, or greater than that it can be pardoned; Gen. iv. 13. Sometimes the adjective necessary to make out the comparison is omitted ; as, Their gods ^'ii^'^'^n were [more powerful] than those of Jerusalem', Is. x. 10. Note. In the Rabbinic, comparison is made by "ini"' more. In § 176. adjectives: superlative. 281 Arabic, by prefixing N, both for Compar. and Super, degrees. In the New Test, not unfrequently, is the positive degree used for both the others, in imitation of the Hebrew adjectives, which suffer no change to indicate comparison. § 176. Adjectives : Superlative degree. 1. The Hebrew has no appropriate ^orm to express the Superlative. It is expressed, therefore, by circumlo- cution in various ways ; E. g. (a) By the article prefixed to the adjective ; as David was 'Jl3p!^ the smallest ; 1 Sam. xvii. 14. So the Arabian makes his Super, by prefixing the article to the comp. form. (6) By a Genitive or Suffix following the adjective ; as •^•«22 '•''Up the smallest of his sons ; 2 Chron. xxi. 17. filTtO the best of them ; Micah vii. 4. (c) A special or intense Superlative is formed, when a word is repeated and put in the Genitive plural ; as D'^ti'ltJii "il.p hohj of holies, i. e. most holy place ; 'D''''^'2'ri/by!^. vanity of vanities, i.e. ex- ceedingly vain. So heaven of heavens, i. e. the highest heaven ; ser- vant of servants, a most abject servant; God of gods, the supreme God, &c. Job i. 3. {d) The Comparative sometimes necessarily expresses the sense of the Superlative ; as, Aoay the serpent became n^n 'S'ZJ2 d^'^i? cun- ning above all the beasts of the field^ i.e. the most cunning of all; Gen. III. 1. (e) Some nouns necessarily imply a Superlative; as (1) U5N'n head ; '^nniaTp Uifti'^ the head of my joy, i. e. my highest joy. (2) '^i^s first born ; as D^^'2 "^iSa first born of the wretched, i. e. most wretch- ed ; Is. xiv. 30. ni73 'nina the first born of death, i. e. the most ter- rible death ; Job xviii. 13. 2. Besides the proper Superlative; the Hebrew ex- hibits a variety of methods, in which intensity of meaning is expressed. (a) E. g. by nt^a very ; or nsa '^\m very, very. 282 § 177. CARDINAL NUMBERS. (b) By repeating the same word ; as pa:^ p53y deep, deep. (c) Or a synonymous one ; as iil^'LIS"^ J^^'^^IJ , -iHasting and de- struction, i. e. great destruction; Ezek. vi. 14. (rf) By repeating the same word, and putting either this or a sy- nonymous word in the Genitive, when repeated ; as DSny'^ ny'^ the evil of your evil, i.e. your base wickedness; Hos, x. 15. (e) The name of God placed after a noun, is intensitive ; as, Jl great city DTl ?i]^.i< a thousand [shekels] of silver; d"^")i>U3 '^p six [measures] of barley ; Dlnb ''Pip two [loaves] of bread. Ells are commonly designated thus ; in72Nl HN73 one hundred in ells^ i. e. 100 ells. §178. Ordinal Numbers. 1. Beyond 10, Cardinals are used for Ordinals ; and they either precede the noun, being in apposition ; or fol- low it, being in the Genitive; as Qi"^ TdDJ' iTIi^DldS on the seventeenth day; yntpl Qn/fflS?, riDIlia in the year of 21. 2. In designating years and days of the month, the Cardinals below 10 are employed as Ordinals ; as HJILJ TDIO the sixth year, literally, the year of six. § 179. Numerals used Distributively and Adverbially. 1. Distributives are made by the repetition of the Car- dinals without the Copula ; as C^DIS Q'^Dtd two and two, or two by two. 2. The answer to the question, How often? is made, (a) By a Cardinal joined with 0^© s/ep, time ; as nnN d?S 07i.ce ; 5|^N D'^TSJ'S a thousand times. {b) By Cardinal numbers, in the Feminine ; as nt^J< once ; 'oyrm twice ; 1^y2'^^ fi'^^Ja'iJ 77 times. 3. Fractions of numbers are expressed by T' part, portion ; as Jlll'^ri "^rilTJ two parts, i. e. |; riiT^il y^")"^ f- § 180. ADJECTIVES AS EPITHETS OP NOUNS. 285 §180. Mjectives as Epithets of Nouns. 1. Adjectives simply qualifying nouns, i. e. used as epi- thets^ (to speak technically,) generally agree with the noun in gender and number. What is said here respecting the adjective, is applicable, almost universally, to Participles anA pronominal adjectives^']o'meA with nouns. 2. The Pluralis excellentiae (§ 167. 2.) commonly takes an adjective singular, but not always. E. g. lni;:p D'':nJ< « hard master^ Is. xix. 4 j but also, iD'^lplj? fl'^?l'l:i*. a holy God^ Jos. xxiv. 19. 3. Nouns of multitude in the Singular, commonly (not always) require a plural adjective ; as rii^!2N Ti^S a wan- dering flock. When the concord is directed by the sense, (as in Nos, 2, 3,) ra- ther than by the grammatical form of the noun, it is called Constructio ad sensum. 4. There being no Dual of adjectives, Dual nouns take plural Adjectives; as rilSn D"*^*^ weak hands. 5. Nouns of common gender having more than one adjective, admit both the inasc. and fem. forms in the Ad- jectives ; as pTHI H^'l'lS tV\1 ct great and strong wind ; 1 Kings xix. 11. 6. The regular place for Adjectives that are epithets^ is after the nouns, which they qualify. The number of apparent exceptions to this is so very small, and some of them so equivocal, that it appears dubious whether real exceptions are to be admitted. See, however, Ps. Ixxxix. 51, 'Q'>-Q'J_ D'^2'^~b3 all the numerous people ; also Is. liii. 11. Jer. iii. 7, 10. XVI. 16. The pronom. adj. rtt this^ not unfrequently precedes the noun with which it agrees. 37 286 § 181. ADJECTIVES AS PREDICATES. §181. Adjectives as Predicates. 1. When an Adjective is the predicate of a sentence, and the Verb of existence is omitted, the Adjective stands regularly before the Noun, and without the Article ; as ''Di!? 7115 great [is] my iniquity ; Gen. iv. 13. In a very few cases, it stands after the noun ; as in Gen. xix. 20. I Sam. xii. 17. 2. In case an Adjective is a predicate of a sentence, its agreement in gender and number, with the noun to which it relates, is common. But the apparent exceptions to this general principle of con- cord between the adjective and its noun, are quite numerous. Per- haps, however, every apparent exception of this nature, (certainly, almost every one,) may be explained on the principle, that when adjectives are used as predicatet, they are often used as nouns of the neuter gender. E. g. lnN"''ll i-^NQ his food [is]/a^, where the noun is Sing. Masc. and the adj. sing, feminine ; but the construction is easi- ly explained, by translating it, His food [is] fatness, i. e. a fat thing. So, iit: niiT' ri!5"lp approach to Jehovah [h] delightful., i. e. a pleas- ant or delightful thing; here the noun is sing, fern., and the adj. sing, masculine. Again, b^'SN riT72T^ the fields [of Hesbon] /an^fmA, i. e. are what is languid, ro languidum., the noun being fem. plur. and the part. masc. Singular. Also, 'nriiN 'l'^"?."\.i< those that curse thee (the cursers of thee) are cursed, i. e. an accursed thing ; for the latter part, or adj. is sing, masc, and the preceding noun masc. piural. So in Latin, Varium et mutabile semper fa nina ; Virgil. Blandnm poiestas ; Statins, lo Greek, noprjQov f.iii> yvvrj ; Achill. Tat. To tkxv the universe, rational or material ; t« tiuvtu all men, all rational beings. In all such cases, a generic idea of quality lies at the foundation of the adjective ; and this may be expressed by any number or gender, in the Hebrew language. Of course, concord of gender and num- ber, in such cases, is not at all necessary ; and departures from it are very frequent. 2. An Adjective employed as a predicate, is common- § 182. CASE ABSOLUTE OF NOUNS. 287 ly without the article ; but when the expression of the ar- ticle becomes necessary, then the substantive Verb JlTI , or its equivalent the Pronoun iX'^n (§ 192.) is expressed. E. g. "jUpin a^'n TT^ David was the smallest, i. e. the youngest; 1 Sam. xvii. 13, 14. In cases of this kind, the adjective is placed after the noun to which it relates. 4. Participles, used for the present tense of Verbs, sometimes stand as predicates after the Noun, and take the Article', as niiXin '^y^'^,, thine eyes see; Deut. iii. 21. 5. Two or more Nouns, having an adjective agreeing with them, require the Adjective to follow them ; and the gender of it may be either masculine, (as the more worthy,) or the same as the gender of the last noun. E.g. Q'^laiQ ril2£ai C^jpn good laws and statutes; Neh. ix. 13. riTT^S DtT'DriD'l dlri'^3D their faces and wings were separated ; Ezek. I. 1 1. Here DiT^Q a participial adj. is fern., as is the noun which pre- cedes it. § 182. Case absolute of JVouns. 1. By case absolute is meant, the case of a noun which stands in the beginning of a sentence, syntactically unconnected with any following predicate. 2. The case absolute is commonly the JVominative ; and it is sometimes connected with what follows, (a) By Vav copulative ; as njp.ln N^T T'^^ '^r'?'^ [^^ to] the num- ber of his years, surely it is not to be computed ; Job xxxvi. 26. (6) But often the Nom. absolute is used where the sense requires an oblique case , and then the oblique case is most commonly made by a pronoun; as i3^T D'^^n ^Nirt God — perfect [is] his way, instead of, The way of God is perfect. So for the Ace. ; as dn'n^'] innft 5]'^nT "p.p summer and xmnter — thou hast made them; Psalm Ixxiv. 18. For the Ablative; "^niin ni nDN^a"^! my law — they have ahhored it ; Jer. vi. 19. 288 §§ 183. 184. verbal nouns, pronouns, etc. (c) Sometimes a participle is joined with the Nominative, which makes it like the English case absolute ; as Jilt nit u;'^Jt~^3 any man offering a sacrifice, the servant of the priest caiue, kc. ; 1 bam. ii. 13. Note. Pronouns stand in the case absolute, as well as nouns, 3. The case absolute is sometimes made by the ob- lique cases. E. g. (a) By the Accusative; as Gen. xlvii. 21, Dyn~nJ?. The peo- ple — he led them from one town to another. (6) The Dative ; Ps. xvi. 3, D'^'^pTpb as to the saints, who are in the land, — all my delight is in them. (c) The Ablative ; as Gen. ii. 17, 5>'n"i iiU ri^'lfl yS72 of the tree of knowledge of good and evil — thou shalt not eat of it, &c. § 183. Verbal JVouns used instead of Verbs. According to our present punctuation, this occurs in a few cases, where the composition is poetic. E. g. Reuben my first born, D'^733 TIlS boils o'uer, lit. a boiling over as water. See also, Is. viii. 6. Jud. v. 8. Job. xxxvi. 18. Numbers xxiii. 10. § 184. Pronouns : oblique cases made by the groundform. 1. We have seen (§ 67.) that the ground-forms of Pro- nouns mark the Nominative. But this usage is not without some exceptions ; for 2. When a Pronoun is repeated for emphasis' sake, the ground-form is repeated, and may be construed as being in any case, that the nature of the occasion requires. E.g. lrtnj< 03 "rjtD^-ni* thy blood, even thine ; 1 Kings xxi. 19. nSN !l73lrt miiT the memory of them, of them, has perished; Ps. ix. 7. fiDb finjj for you, for you', Hag. i. 4. Dat. "^DN DS "^^iD^^a bless me, even me; Gen. xxvii. 34. Accus. "jiyji '^3JJ ''a on me, me, be your punish- ment ; 1 Sam. xxv. 24. Ablative. Sometimes the ground form of the Pronouns stands first ; as Ju- dah, '^'^tlN 'Jj^'li'' nnN thee, thee shall thy brethren praise : Gen. xlix. 8. §§ 185. 186. OF PRONOUNS. 289 3. So a Noun may be substantially repeated, by using the ground-form of a Pronoun for it, in a similar way. E-g. 'iV.'^ i<1H Di» ri'^b^ and to Seth, even to hiin^ were born ; Gen. iv. 26. " Note. The usage adverted to in the above Section, is very com- mon in Arabic ; although, in Hebrew, it has been in a great measure overlooked, until the publication of Gesenius"' Hebrew Grammar. § 185. Siiffix Pronouns found in various cases. 1. We have seen that the Suffixes of Verbs mark the Accus. case (§ 68.) ; those of Nouns the Genitive, (§ 69.) Such is the general rule ; but to this are found excep tions. E. g. 2. In respect to Verbs ; verbal Suffixes are sometimes, (a) In the Dative ; as '^;nnD thou hast given to me ; Josh. xv. 19. ^pN '^3riJ3ii:tl have ye fasted for me, for me, i. e. on my account ; Zac. vii. 5. if I sin, ■'SniTDTUn then thou watchest it for me, i. e. on my ac- count ; Job X. 14. ^D^73 inr'ij he seeks for him correction ; Prov. xiii. 24. ^"jltT) it is bound to thee ; Ps. xeiv. 20. (fe) Relations expressed usually by particles, are sometimes ex- pressed by Suffixes only ; as '^'^n'ii'np / am more holy than thou ; Isa. Ixv. 5. ^iniy'^T and make them testify AGAifSST him ; 1 Kings xxi. 10, ^11^. ^ inoved along with them; Ps. xlii. 5. Note. This usage is more frequent in Arabic. 3. In respect to Nouns; their Suffixes are sometimes used, (a) As Datives; e.g. Ps. cxv. 7. DJi'^'n'^ — JDin'^^S'n , they have hands — they have feet, for din':' h^^^ •, &c. (6) Instead of the preposition b?; as Tj'^Mp those that rise up against thee, instead of 'rj'^^ry WJZp ; Ex. xv. 7. § 186. Pronouns : Neuter 'gender. 1. As Adjectives, both masc. and fern., are used for the i90 §§ 187. 188. 189. op pronouns. neuter gender, so are pronouns also of the third person, either Sin^. or Plural. E. Sf. T>pN N^n Nni: ''^for a terrible thing is it,, which ; Ex. xxxiv. 10. "^^nD N'T! i^i'n 'S it lint written ? Jos. x. 13. He hoards up treu' xures,) and knows not D-DDJ* "^72 who zvill take them away ; Ps. xxxix. 7. § 187. Pronouns : Anomalies in respect to gender. 1. Most probably these anomalies were introduced in- to written language, from the incorrect language of com- mon life. They consist in using, (a) Masc. pronouns instead of Fern, ones ; as DPN Ezech. xiii. 20; Jl73!n Ruth i. 22. So also Suffixes ; And God made niibfor them, i. e. the midwives, Ex. i. 21. Jud. xix. 24, xxi. 22. Is. iii. 16. (6) The fetn. form, in reference to a masc. noun ; as!n3lr|, 2 Sam. iv. 6. Jer. I. 5. nN as masc. Deut. v. 24. Ezech. xxviii. 17. Note. Such anomalies are very common in the Arabic. § 188. Pronouns : Suffixes to JVouns in Regimen. 1. Two Nouns in regimen, so that they designate one idea or subject, commonly (not without a few exceptions) place the Suffix pronoun after the latter, Avhich belongs, as to the sense, to the former. Thus, '^Tp'lJ^ 'T'5' thy holy city, literally, the city of thy holiness ; Dan. ix. 24. isDD ""p."^^^. ^"* silver idols, lit. the idols of his silver ; Is. ii. 20. ^n"li<5 "T^y thy proud exulters, lit. the exulters of thy pride ; Zeph. iii. 11. In a few cases the Suffix stands before the Co7is. noun ; as i^ ''Dri'3 my mighty refuge, lit. my refuge of might ; Ps. Ixxi. 7. § 189. Passive and Active meaning of Suffix Pronouns. 1. It has been shown (§ 171.) that the Genitive of nouns has a great variety of meanings, according to the §§ 190. 191. OF PRONOUNS. 291 exigency of the passage. Such is the case in regard to Suffix Pronouns, as they are really in the Gen. case. Thus, E. g. Passive ; ■'Da)n my violence^ i. e. violence done upon me ; Jer li. 35. "irUfT* hisfear^ i.e. fear, or reverence towards him ; Ex. XX. 20. TiVsn my prayer^ i. e. prayer to me ; Is. Ivi. 7. '^"''l']? thy vows^ i. 6. voivs made to thee ; Ps. Ivi. 13. rtntliN her sighing, i. e. sighing over her ; Is. xxi. 2. But the active sense is the common one ; as '''0J2'n my violence, i. e. that which I do ; "'^SD my book, i. e. that which I possess, &;c. § 190. Ellipsis of Personal Pronouns. 1. In Hebrew, as in most other languages, the Ellipsis of them is not unfrequent, when it does not occasion any obscurity of meaning. Particularly is Ellipsis to be found, 2- In the Accusative after Verbs. E. g. God looked upon the children of Israel ; and God J'^'l observed [them], for U^^'IH ; Ex. ii. 25. Lei my right hand n^Uim/oro-ei [me]; Ps. cxxxvii. 5. 3. In the Genitive, after the Infinitive mood or after a Noun. E. g. nvlnlnb instead of dnvninb to preserve [them] alive, &.c; Gen. vi. 19, Jehovah is my strength, n^73T"] for Ti'nT:'?') and [my] song ; Ex. XV. 2. § 191. Pleonasm of personal Pronouns. 1. Suffix Pronouns to Verbs are not unfrequently pleo- nastic, being immediately followed by the Noun to which they have relation. E. g. nlr'n-njjt llnN'^ni she saw him, the child ; Ex. ii. 6. Tr>iJ'^T ''\J2^J'a~nii, he changed it, his understanding ; 1 Sam. xxi. 14. in:D^pn'"n Qnb; His soul abhors it, bread ; Job xxxiii. 20. Such is the predominant construction, in the Syriac and Chaldee. 292 § 192. OF PRONOUNS. 2. Suffixes to Nouns are sometimes pleonastic, in a sim- ilar manner. E. g. rr^ns Jl'^Q'^rpa in the twigs of it^ the fruit tree ; Is xvii. 6. Ti'nyyp 'nTV'\ni< the end of it^ joy^ is trouble ; Prov. xiv. 13. ^>3'n3 ■^^'i; my vineyard^ which is to me ; Cant. i. 6. Note. Such is the general usage of the Chald. and Syriac. 3. The Dative case of Pronouns after Verbs, (specially verbs of motion,) is often pleonastic. E. g. '^b"']^. go for thyself i. e. go ; Gen. xii. 1. S^ ^^M it has gone for itself i. e. has gone; Cant. ii. 10. "^b Mna flee for thyself i. e. flee; Gen. xxvii. 43. ib 03 he has fled for himself i. e. fled ; Is xxxi. 8. ittb :iauj jib they turned not back for themselves, i. e. turn- ed not back ; Job xxxix. 4. So also, 'rjb in'OT compare for thyself i. e. compare ; Cant. ii. 17. The palate ib DMD"^ relishes for itself i. e. relishes, yboc^ ; Job. xii. 11. Houses^ which T?3b nl*3'» isb they do not inhabit for themselves, i. e. which no one inhabits ; Job xv. 28. ^b blH^. he shall perish for himself i. e. shall perish; Prov. xiii. 13. DDr ^"^^ii, fear for yourselves, i. e. fear ye ; Job xix. 29. Note. The Arabic has the same idiom ; and it is very common in Syriac. 4. After Participles and Adjectives, the Dative pleo- nastic occurs, but more seldom than after Verbs. E.g. A wild ass hb Tia lonely for itself i. e. alone, or lonely ; Hos. viii. 9. nb inxbxi/uW /or itse//, i. e. full; Amos ii. 13. "'i: '^tDbsa my deliverer for me, i. e. my deliverer j Ps. cxliv. 2. § 192. Personal Pronoun for the Verb of existence. 1. When the personal pronoun is the subject of a sentence, it involves the designation of the Verb of exist- ence. E. g. IsriDi* D^33 righteous [are] we; Gen. xlii. 11. ani< ]'^«a whence [are] ye ? Gen. xxix. 4. "DDN Dh''?. / [am] naked ; Gen. iii. 10. § 193. OF PRONOUNS. 293 2. Pronouns of the 3d pers. singular and plural, some- times stand simply lor the verb of existence, and are so to be translated. E.g. Every tiling which inoves^^t\ N^Jl "^'C^ which is living ; Gen. ix. o. The saints initiri VMi^ '^•::n zdIio are in the land; Ps. xvi. 3. irsb^, tl/an IMO -vhai these are ; Zech. i. 9. More plainly still is such a sense of the pronoun of the third per- son exhihited, when the subject of the proposition is the first or sec- ond person ; as. Ye Cushites ! victims of my sword n73lrt are ye ; Zeph. ii. 12. D'^rt'iriX J<:in nn^ thoa art God ; 2 Sam. vii. 28. The servants o/Got ijan NDrt3i< are zue ; Ez. v. 11. (i/^H is Chald. for the He- brew TtTZT}^ ) Note. In Syriac and Arabic, the above use of the personal pro- noun is very common. §193. Separation of the Pronoun from the JVoun to which it relates. 1. The Noun that is related to the Pronoun, is some- times mentioned immediately after the Pronoun ; sometimes several verses afterward ; and sometimes is to be supplied by the reader, only from the general sense of the passage. E. g. im^D'' Its \ Zion's ] foundation is on the holy mount ; Ps. Ixxxvii. 1, where verse second gives the related Noun. See Is. viii. 2i,comp. with verse 22. Ps. ix. 13. Is. xiii. 2, comp. 1. Ps. Ixv. 10. ixviii. 15. xviii. 15, comp. 18. Job xxxvii. 4, After it [light- ning] roars the thunder^ D^p.^-''^ fii-n52i ; Ecc. i. 9, iii. 15, 22, vi. 10, &c. § 204. Every one, every thing. 1. Every person ; by l^^iA man, or HD'^i^^ cd'^iJ , or i'Z all, every. 2. In relation to persons or things. (a) By b's every, all, the whole. (6) By repetition ; as 'npab "^P.a? etjcri/ morning ; 1 Chron. ix. 27. (c) By the plural ; as fi''^j?3b every morning; Ps. Ixxiii. 14. (d) By the Sing, only; as ^pib cuer?/ morning ; DTb daily. § 205. »i3n?/ one, cnj/ thing, <^c. 1. .y^wi/ owe, as a person, is expressed, (a) By yi'^N man ; Ex. xvi. 29. (fe) By iDnN man ; Lev. i. 2, (c) B}' 'yiies sowZ ; as PF/ten "ijs: any ong sijis/ Lev. iv. 2. W) By ^a (§ 201. 2.) Ex. xxiv. 14. (e) Sometimes implied, not expressed; Job xxvii. 6. 2. Jlny thing, any thing whatever. (a) By '-\'y^ thing; or '^S'^-bS any thing ; Gen. xviii. 4. Ruth iv. 7. (6) By nttlNXD awj/ thing. (c) By ln)3; Job xiii. 13. {d) Sometimes merely implied ; Dan. ii. 33. 3. A meaning opposite to that of Nos. 1, and 2, (i. e. no one, no thing,^ is expressed by adding the negatives j>i^ not, and ^i^ there is not,io the words there employed ; as 1^7 123'' i^ no one ; Q^^^ 'J'^fii wo person, &c. §§ 206. 207. 208. syntax of verbs. 299 4. Some^ some persons, is expressed, (a) By D'^lhN; Gen. xxvii. 44. xxix. 20. (5) By *Ti;3n— ij.; there are some, sunt qui. (c) By the plural merely ; as D^J2'^ some days ; D''3«U some years, {d) By 'J73 of, before a noun ; as b^'liU'' "^ipT/a [some] of the elders of Israel ; Ex. xvii. 5. § 206. The self same, the same, self, 1. These are expressed, in regard to persons, by i^'^n and N'^n . E. g. N!iJi "iJ'^Nln the very same man. S^^Tl "'ailN the Lord himself, 2. In regard to things ; (a) By il -whence earnest thou? \2:pin""!n^ what seekest thou? This is a very common use of the Future Tense. 3. The Future is often used in general propositions, where the hmitation of time is not intended. Prov. XV. 12, A wise son HailJ'^ makes [will make] glad his father^ i. e. it is a general fact that he does, at all times. 4. The Future tense expresses all the varieties of the Opt. and Subj. moods ; and this is effected whether the Futurum Jlguratum* the Future preceded hj appropriate Particles, or simply the common Future is used. E. g. (a) The Optative, specially when the Particle N3 is sub- joined ; as Ps, vii. 10, N3-'n73a'^ that it might end! Cant. vii. 9. N3"!)'';n^ that they might be! 1 Kings xvii. 21. Is. xix. 12. xlvii. 13. For the Optative use of Fut. jiguratum,, see § 91. (6) The Subjunctive, specially after particles signifying, that, so that., in order that, in that, for that, since that, that not, Sac. The Fu- ture often follows such particles, even when the Subjunctive sense is not required. E. g. (1) After 'n'^JN that ; as Gen. xi. 7, 1W25'', 5«b 'n'^iN that they may not understand, &LC. (2) ^r\^^2 that ', Gen. xxvii. 4. '?i5*\ln 'n^SS'S * Futurum Figuratum means the apocopated Future of the 3d and 2d persons, smd the lengthened Future of the 1st person, } 91. 304 § 210. FUTURE TENSE. ''"lUSa that my soul [I] may bless thee. (3) T that ; Diy^t that he may die. (4) ■'s that ; Gen. xxxviii. 16, JVhat wilt thou give me., Niin ^D that ihoumayest come into me ? (5) b that', 1 Kings vi. 19, "jnnb that thou mayest place. (6) *^^JiA_ ^y^b in order that ; Ezech. xx 26, "^T^iN "jy'^b iiyi)] m orfZer tAa^ f^e;/ may hioiv. (7) Vn ^/lai not; ti~\''r) Vn 6e not afraid., or t/m< f^ow fee not afraid. (8) Va t^a« not ; Ps. x. 18, 5]"^DV !:2 ^jiy ^/iaf one may no more continue., he. (9) "JD t/ia< noi ; Lev. x. 7. Inipn "jC that ye may not die. (c) The Future expresses all those shades of the Sub- junctive or Conditional mood, which we express by the auxiliaries, may., can., must, might, could, should, woidd, &;c. E.g. Gen. iii. 2, bSN2 •a-e may eat ; xxx. 31, ^^ "jriN'^llD tf/tai shall (or must) I give thee ? Judg. xiv. 16, My parents have I not told, T^-jN Tjbn and should I tell thee? Prov. xx. 9, 'l^X'' ''tt t Do this and live, i. e. On condition ye do this, ye shall live ; Gen. xlii. 18. Prov. iii. 3, 4, 7. iv. 4. vii. 2, ix. 6. Isa. viii. 9. 3. An Imperative following a Future often has a Fu- ture sense. E. g. Jehovah will bless (fut.) thee out of Zion^ SHN^l^) and thou shali see (Imp. lit. see thou) the happiness of Zion ; Ps. cxxviii. 5, 4. So also, the Imperative has a Future sense, (a) Before the Future ; as ''j^bN'ip will ye inquire (Imp.) of me as to future things, and will ye prescribe? (Fut.); Is. xlv. 11. (6) Without connexion with a Future tense ; E. g. yi«i2J ^i^a'ij ye shall hear, ('f^P') ^"^ shall not understand; Is. vi. 9. Perhaps in Psalm viii. 2, Si2n is Imp. viz. spread i. e. mayest thou spread thy glory, Sac. § 212. Infinitive Absolute. It has been shown (§ 87. 1 .) that, for the most part, the Inf. has two forms, the Absolute and Construct, differing from each other in respect to the vowels which they receive. Of these, the absolute Inf. is used, 1. When the Infinitive has an Adverbial sense. E. g. ita"^^. bene ; so inblD"' V^l'^ beginning and ending, i. e. from the beginning to the end; 1 Sam. iii. 12, 2. When the Infinitive is connected with a finite Verb. In this case it marks, (o) Intensity of meaning ; as 1 Sam. xxiii. 22, N!ilri l3'n2?^ tH$ very subtilely will he deal. 1 Sam. xx. 6, 'bi^p- bN^2 he has urgently request' ed. Amos ix. 8, T^a'iJN T^XjUJln ttb / will not xUterly destroy, SiC. Gen. xliii. 3. xxxi. 30. § 212. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 307 (i) Assurance, certainty ; as Gen. iii. 4, 'j'lnan ni73 Nb ye shall not surely die. Gen. xxxvii. 33, pj'ib Jii"lt3 he is surely torn in pieces. Jud. XV. 2, ■'n'l^J? HaN stirely I thought, or said. (c) Continuance of action; Is. xxx. 19, ri35n i'i: S^iT'il could we indeed know? Gen. xxxvii. 8, tjb^n '^b'Ol^_ shalt thou indeed reign ? Gen. xix. 9, uievy Da liE\p^1 and now he would fain act even as a judge among us. (e) In general, the Inf. absolute added to a finite Verb gives en- ergy, animation, vivacity, or some coloring of this nature, to the ex- pression ; although it is difl&cult always to express it, in an English Version. In a similar manner, the intensitive particles e. g. of the Greek, German, &c, cannot be well expressed in any translation. Note 1. In regard to the choice of Conjugations from which the Inf. absolute is taken, it may be remarked, that commonly it is of the same Conj. as the finite Verb, with which it is joined. Sometimes, however, of a different Conjugation; as bpiD"^ b^pii^i Inf- abs. Kal, but finite Verb in Niphal. Note 2. Neither is the Inf. absolute always derived from the same root as the form of the finite Verb coupled with it ; it is suffi- cient if the meaning is s^'nonymous ; as Is. xxviii. 28, ^SUJIT^ yiilN he zvill thoroughly thresh him., verbs derived from ttj'lit and u;nT both signifying to thresh. Note 3. In Arabic, the Inf. absolute is put after the finite Verb ; in Syriac, before it ; but in Hebrew, either before or after, though most commonly before. Note 4. Between the Inf. abs. and the finite Verb, may be plac- ed a particle of negation, as jib; or some affirmative or expletive Particle, as na ; or even a preposition, as Ezek. vii. 14, ^ipna n^'pn. 3. The Inf. absolute is employed, when the Inf. mood is used instead of a finite mood. E. g. 308 § 213. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. (a) For the Praeter, when the Praeter precedes ; as Dan. ix. 5, •nTDT ^3'1'^!a 'cwe have rebelled^ and apostatized. Est. ix. 6. Jer. xiv. 6. Gen. xli. 43. Jud. vii. 19. Ecc. viii. 9. ix. 11. So without a preceding Praeter; as Ezek. i. 14, The living crea- tures ii^lJT NT2£'^ ran and returned. Ecc. iv. 2. (b) For the Future, when the Future precedes, as Jer. xxxii. 4, Fields shall they buy (Fut.) iinSI and they shall write bills of sale^ l^^l^l — DtdTTI and they shall seal them — and take witnesses, Sic. Numb. XV. 35, Deut. xiv. 21. Is. v. 5. So without a preceding Future ; as Ezek. xi. 7, You N'^itiln will I bring out, &c. 1 Kings xxii. 30. 2 Chron. xviii. 29. (c) The Infin. absolute stands also for the Imperative ; as Deut. v. 12, 'littiu keep. Jer. ii. 2, '^^'^'Ti go. xiii. 1. xvii. 19. Deut. i. 16. Numb. XXV. 17. Note 1. The Inf. abs. is used, in a few cases, where the const. Inf. might be expected ; and vice versa. Is. Ix. 14. Hab, ii. 10. Is. xxii. 13. So in Num. xxiii. 25, ^Slpn i the time of collecting ; Gen. ii. 4. niiyy DT'^2 in the day of making, kc. Ps. cxxvii, 2 ; et passim. 3. In the Accusative. E. g. 1 Kings iii. 7, / knew not i>?im DNS the going oiit^ or coming ill. Jer. V. 3. Gen. xxi. 6. Note. The Accusative here commonly has ^ before it ; Gen. xi. 8. Ex. ii. 15. Gen. xxiv. 25. 4. In the Ablative. E. g. Ps. xxxix. 2, I will guard my way H^'O'nnfrom sinning. 5. The Infinitive construct takes Prepositions before it, and Suffixes after it, in the same manner as Nouns. But in translating it, we must for the most part give it, in such cases, ?i finite sense. E. ^. (a) With a ; as Gen. ii. 4, ON'naJna when they were created^ lit. in the being created of them. Ex. xvi. 7, ijr'jizja because he heard. Is. i. 15. (b) With 3; as Gen. xliv. 30, "«ii33 when I come. Gen. xxxix. 18, ^a'^nns when I lifted up. (c) With b ; Gen. ii. 3, nituyb when he made. Is. vii. 15, inSflb until he hnoiv. 1 Kings xvi. 7, to pro- voke him by his doinvs., r\^^Tl\ >n that he was., &.c. id) With ']72 ; Deut. vii. 7. DDni< nirr^ n3nN73 "^3 because Jehovah loves you, lit. because of the loving of .Jehovah you. "jTa has often a negative sense, in such cas- es ; as Gen. xxvii 1, His eyes were dim T)'Mi'M3 so that he could not see, lit. from seeing, xvi. 2. Ex. xiv. 5. (e) With ly; Jud. vi. 18, 15 flas'ij until thou returnest. Jud. iii. 26. (/) With b? ; Jer. ii. 35, by ^l^aK because thou sayest. Job x. 7. (g) With 'jS^b ; Gen. xxxvii. 22, b'^iC'i ')y^b/fl''Tl girded [with] an Ephod. (6) Or takes the Genitive; as Ezek. ix. 11, n^'T? UJnib clothed [with, of, by,] linen garments ,* Joel i. 8, p;2J n'!].^'!'. girded [with, of, by] sackcloth. Note I. When there is but one form of the Participle, (e. g. n?3 from T)'^72 to die.,) this form is capable of all the meanings and construc- tions of both the active and passive participles. Note 2. The Part, passive has frequently the sense of Latin part. in dus ; as N'^T3 metuendus ; "^fji^ eligendns ; b^intt laiidandus. 312 § 217. PARTICIPLES USED AS VERBS. § 217. Participles used as V^erbs. 1. Participles are very frequently used for the present tense of Verbs. E. g. Ecc. i. 4, One generation ^bh passeth away, and another gen- eration N2 Cometh, i. 7, 8. Ps. i. 6. iii. 2. iv, 7. Is, i, 7. In this manner, participles are used with pronouns of any person, instead of verbs, in order to express the present tense ; as "'DiN N'l'' I fear ; irtnN N'n'^ thou fear est ; ^jlniN 13'^i*'^.'^ we fear, &,c. In intrans- itive verbs, this use is very common. 2. For the past tense, in all its gradations. As Gen. ii. 10, And a river ^^.^ issued from Eden, &c. Deut. ir. 3, Your eyes n'isi'^ln have seen, &c. Gen. xlii. 43. xli. 17. 3. For the Future, in all its varieties. Gen. xvii. 19, Sarah r\ib,''' shall bear a son, kc. xix. 13, ffie D^n"'n\lJa are about to destroy the city. Gen. vi. 17, Behold, I WiXJ will cause to come aflood. xlviii. 4. Ex. ix. 18. 1 Kings xi. 31. xiv. 10. 4. When the Verb H^H to be is added to the Partici- ple, an Imperfect tense descriptive of continued action or condition is designated. Job i. 14, The cattle DVtli'in ^"^^l "siiere ploughing. Neh. i. 4, i'Vcria^ DiZ •'SriNI I was fasting and praying, ii. 13, 15. 2 Chron. xxiv. 14. xxxvi. 16. Gen. iv. 17. Deut. ix. 22, 24. 5. The auxiliaries or substantive Verbs, ffi*^ there is and 'j'^ii there is not, are, not unfrequently, with or without Suffix pronouns, prefixed to Participles, in order to desig- nate the present tense. As Jud. vi. 36, If y^pifs '^'ij?. thou savest. Gen. xliii. 5, If '^z'^Si riV.">ii!^ thou dost not send away. Ex. v. 16, Straw in? ^''N is not given. Lev. xxvi. 6. Note. In a few cases, the Part, seems to supply the place of an Infinitive : as in Gen. xxxviii. 29, IT' ^"'UJttb ''JT'1 and when he drew back hia hand. Jer. ii. 17. x. 23. §§ 218. 219. IMPERSONAL VERBS, ETC. 313 § 218. Impersonal Verbs, 1. These are made by the third person, masculine or feminine, and in the Praeter or Future tense. E. g. ■'^i^T audit happened; i^ "^^S. , or i^ ^i?.^.!! ^^ '^''^* grevious to him ; ^"b IIO it is bitter to me ; "^^ H!):^ lam quiet., lit. it is quiet to me. in^ 'l^.ril and it was grievous to David. Jud. xi. 39, jpfi "'Inril and it became a statute. Job iv. 5, and now Nlin it comes upon thee. Ps. xviii. 7. Ixvi. 14. § 219. Verbs with indefinite subjects j i. e. the JVominaiive of which is one, they, men, mankind, {in French., on, tout le monde, 4"C.) These are expressed by the 3d person sing, or plural, and may have a Nominative expressed, as 'ilj''&t, Q1&{ &c, §205; but commonly the Nominative is understood and not expressed. E.g. Gen. xi.9, a'y^^ one called. Gen. xlviii. 1, "nttj^ilant^ 07ie told. 1 Sam. xxvi. 20, As ^l"]"] one pursues a partridge, xvi. 23. Job xxvii. 19. Is. ix. 5. Is. Ixiv. 3, From everlasting i\Sl2'ii ^'':!one has not heard, xlvii, 1, 'il ^^^.p.l i^b one (lit. they) shall not call thee., &c. Dan. i. 1?. Neh. ii. 7, Job vi. 2. Hosea ii. 9. Note. 1. When a Norn, is expressed, it is sometimes •i5''N, &c, and sometimes the active Part, of the Verb. E. g. Is. xvi. 10, 'Ti-)']'' ^'l.'iln the treader shall tread, i. e. one shall tread. Is. xxviii. 4, inJ*'^'' n^'nin the seer sees., i. e. one sees. 2 Sam. xvii; 9. Deut. xxii. 8. So in the Plural; Jer. xxxi. 5, D'^yipiiSl ^J^BD the planters shall plant., i.e. one shall plant. Neh. ii. 3. Note 2. The 3 person plur. is frequently to be rendered passive- ly, in such cases, in order to represent the meaning in English ; as Job xxxiv. 30, ^''aS* I'^^O'^ the mighty one is removed, not by the hands of men, lit. they remove the mighty one. Prov. ix. 11, For by me ^13'^'^ are increased (lit. they increase) thy days, and years tiS'^Oi"' are adtierf (lit. they add) io fAee. Hag. i. 10. Job xxxii. 15. xix. 26. vii. 3. iv. 19. xvii, 12. 314 § 220. CONST. OF VERBS WITH CASES. Sometimes, perhaps, the third pers, sing, may be rendered passive- ly; as Is. xxviii. 2. Job, xxxviii. 11. The idiom of Note 2. is not unfrequent in the N. Testament. See Luke xii. 20. 2. Sometimes the Passive Voice is used, to express the indefinite Nominatives in question. As Gen. iv. 26, Then ^hlln one began (lit. was begun) to call upon the name of the Lord. Job. vi. 2. 3. The 2d person of the Active voice is occasionally used, to express the indefinite Nominative. Is. vii. 25, !i73;b Niin i*i|| Jtb unexpect- edly. Prov. V. 6. Cant. vi. 12. Job iv. 20, ti'^XJZ '^'bp2 no one con- sidering, i. e. suddenly, unexpectedly. * Most commonly the Infinitive form of the Verb is used, in such cases. 320 §§ 226. 227. concord op verbs, etc. § 226. Concord of Verbs with A''o77iinatives. The general Rule of Concord is, that the Verb agrees with its Nominative or Subject, in number, gender, and per- son. § 227. Anomalies in Concord : Kumber. From this general rule, however, there are a great many exceptions in Hebrew, in regard to the Concord of number, and gender. In respect to number, 1. The Pluralis excellentiae (§ 167. 2) takes, for the most part (there are very few exceptions) a Verb in the singular. E. ff. Gen. i. 1, h^Ti^a N'la God created. Ex. xxi. 29, »»!)"' v):^z his owner is dead. Cases where the plural verb is joined with the Pluralis excellen- tiae, maybe found in Gen. xx. 13. xxxi. 53. Ex. xxxv. 7. xxxii. 4, 8. 2 Sam. vii, 23. Note. Nouns that have no sin^. form, like D^TSTIJ heavens, fi'^ss face, &c, generally have a plural verb, but occasionally a singular one. Gen. ix. 15. Prov. xv. 14, in Kethib. Numb. xx. 2. xxiv. 7. xxxiii. 14. 2. Generic Nouns of the singular number, designating a class or species, i. e. nouns of multitude, often take a plural verb ; (^constructto ad sensum.^ This case is too obvious and common to need examples. Such nouns as 135> a people, "tin a nation, JTISJ^ an assembly, "Ji^Jt a herd, n^a a house (family,) ttJ'^N mankind, yii'^'n the wicked, &c, in every language, admit a plural as well as a sing, verb. Sometimes the singular only is used with nouns of multitude ; and sometimes a sentence begins with a verb in the singular, and proceeds with the plural ; as Ex. xxxiii. 4. i. 20. Gen. vi. I. Is. ii. 20. Ps.xiv. 1. § 227. ANOMALIES IN CONCORD. 321 3. When a plural has a distributive sense, (i. e. means what would be equivalent to saying, each one of the sub- jects in question, or every one of them,) it is often coupled with a Verb in the singular. E.g. Prov. iii. 18, ^"ylJNlTa 'n'^^'Dn every one who takes hold of her, (lit. they who take hold,) shall be made happy. Gen, xlvii. 3, n^h 'n'^'liS? 'jNiS a shepherd is every one of thy servants, lit. is thy servants. Prov. xxviii. 1. Ex. xxxi. 14. Prov. xxvii. 16. 4. When the Verb precedes its Nom. plural, not tin- frequently it is put in the singular ; being used here, in a kind of impersonal way, like the French il vienf des hommes, there comes some men. E. g. 1 Sam. i. 2, ai^b"^ !l35Sb "'tT^.l ttnd there was to Pennina children, i. e. Pennina had children. Is. xiii. 22, d'^^N ?13S? the jackals shall howl. 2 Sam. xxi. 6. Jud. xiii. 12. Ps. cxxiv. 5. Isai. xxx. 25. Deut. v. 7. Note. A sentence often begins with a verb sing., in this manner, and proceeds by using a plural verb; Numb. ix. 6. Ezek. xiv. 1. Est. ix. 23. Gen. i. 14. 5. Vice versa, when the Nom. plur. precedes the Verb, in a very few cases only, the Verb is singular. E. g. Ecc. ii. 7, ''}: Ti'^Tl n";! "'33 slaves belonged tome. Gen. xlvi. 22, These were the sons of Rachel 1i\2 'T'^^N which were [was] born to Jacob. Gen. XXXV. 26. Dan. ix. 24. Is. Ixiv. 10. 6. Nouns plural feminine, relating to beasts or things, (and not to persons,) frequently take a singular Verb ; and this, whether the Verb precedes or follows the Noun. {Technically, this is called Pluralis inhumanus.)* Ezek. xxvi. 2, riin^T !Tn3'4J3 broken is [are] the gates. Joel i. 20^ ahy.n nittlns the beasts cry, (lit. cries.) Jer. xlviii. 41. iv. 14. li. 29, 56. Job xxvii. 20. Ps. xviii. 35. cxix. 98. Gen. xlix. 22. Note. The 2d pers. plur. fern, of the Put. seems to be used in some cases for the 2d pers. sing. fem. of the same; as Ex. i. 10. Job xvii. 16. xxxvi. 13. Jud. v. 26. * Compare neuter Plurals, in Greek. 322 §§ 228. 229. anomalies in concord. 7. The Dual of Nouns being considered simply as a plural, in respect to concord with Verbs (Verbs have no Dual,) the same anomalies take place, in regard to the Verb connected with the Dual number, as in respect to the Plural. § 228. Anomalies in Concord : Pronouns. Pronouns not unfrequently differ in respect to number or o-cnder, or in regard to both number and gender, from the antecedent to which they relate. (a) In regard to number. E. g. Deut. xxi. 10, When thou goest forth against ^^"^^^in thine enemies, (Plur.) and God i:n3 gives him, (Sing. Pron.f inio thine hand, &ic. Deut. xxviii. 48. Jos. ii. 4, And the woman took the two men i32^ni and secreted him (Sing, him, for Plur. them.) (6) In reg:ird to gender. For examples, see § 187. (c) In regard to gender and number. E. g. Job xxxix. 14, iT^n in^i:^2 Her eggs does she leave, tbe antecedent is 0^:3"^ the storks, plur. masculine. Is. xxxv. 7, In the dwelling place of the jackals, (o^sn mas. plur.) and n^n") in her couching place, pron. fern, singular. Job xiv. 19. vi. 20.' NoTF.. In cases of such a nature as those which are comprised in this Section, the Pronoun is sometimes to be regarded as used in a collective sense or a distributive sense (§ 227. 2, 3,) and sometimes as a neuter pronominal adjective. Comp. § 181. 2. §229. Anomalies in Concord : Gender. 1. The General Rule is, that a Verb agrees with its Nominative in Gender; but from this rule, are to be found many exceptions : For, 2. Feminine Nouns, singular or plural, sometimes take a Verb masculine, whether it precede or follow them. E. g. 1 Sam. XXV. 27, '^nncuj N^art thine handmaid brought. 1 Chro. ii. 48, nb"' "-y?.^."'© ihe concubine bore. Jud.xxi.21, riaa ^J32 i her towns ascended (into the 6re.) 1 Kings xi. 3. Mic. ii. 6. vi. 16. Ps. Ivii. 2. Is. xvii. 6. Job xxii. 9. Hab. iii. 17. Ex. xiii. 7. §231. Concord of the Verb with composite Nominatives. 1. Two Nouns in regimen often constitute the subject or Nom. of the Verb, and are often considered as making but one subject^ § 135 ; {constructio ad sensmn.) The Verb, consequently, may accord with either the first Noun, (which is the usual concord,) or with the second Noun, in respect to number and gender. E. g. Gen. iv. 10, Uys)l '^i'^JliJ ^izyt bip lit. the voice of the bloods of thy brother cry / the Part, here agrees in number, with the latter of the two nouns in regimen. Job xxxii. 7, ri^'^ni'' h'^i'i!) d*i the mul- titude of years shall reveal^ (Verb plur.) Is. xxii. 7, ^^jJJaS^ 'nnia Hiiby^ the select part of thy vallies, (thy choice vallies) shall be filled, (verb plur.) Jobxv. 34. xxix. 10. xxxviii. 21. 2Sam. x. 9. Is. ii. 11. Jer. X.21. 2. When the Verb of existence, expressed or implied, stands between the subject and predicate of a sentence, it may accord with either of them. E. g. Gen. xxvii. 39, ^n":Jn:o rT'tT' V^lNSn "'Sa'iJa rich countries shall be thine abode, xxxi. 8. Ezek. xxxv. 15. Num. iii. 1. xxv. 33. 3. Several Nominatives connected, either all masculine, § 232. CHANGE OF CONSTRUCTION. 325 or of different genders, usually take a Verb in the plural masculine ; but often, (a) The Verb conforms to the Noun which stands next to it. As Num. xii.l, 'TT'^^INT C'^^ '^2'inT Then spake Miriam and Aaron. .ler. vii. 20, DDn: TlQnT '^■j{< mij anger and my fury is poured out. Est. ix. 29. Num. XX. 11. 1 Kings xvii. 15. Gen. vii. 7. (6) Or the masculine gender, as the more worthy, is preferred. E. g-. Prov. xxvii. 9, ab Mya'^i"^. n''\L>p_^ )iy^ ointment and perfume makes glad the heart. Hos. ix. 2. Note. Where there are several subjects connected, and the sen- tence begins with a verb singular, it cotnmonlj^ proceeds with a verb plural. Gen, xxi.32. xxiv.Gl. xxxi. 14. xxxiii. 7. § 232. Change of Construction in the same sentence. Uniformity of construction in the same sentence, is by no means a property of the Hebrew style. Changes are common, as it respects several particulars. 1. Sentences often begin with an Infinitive mood, (hav- ing a prefix preposition and being used in n. finite sense, § 213. 5) and proceed with a Verb in a Jinite mood. E. g. Ps. Ix. 2, a'i'^ — "iri^^a when he strove and returned. Gen. xxxix. 18, N'npN'l "'^rip "'J3'^nrt3 when I raised my voice and cried. Is. xviii. 5. xlix. 5. xxx. 12. Amosi.ll. ii. 4. Gen. xxvii. 45. Jobxxviii. 25. xxix. 6. xxxviii. 7. 2. Sentences often begin with a Participle, and then proceed with d, Jinite Verb. E. g. Prov. xix. 26, DN H'''^^^ iN"*T7.lii'3 He who abuses his father^ [and] chases away his mother. Prov. ii. 14. Is. v. 11. Ivii. 3. xlviii. 1. Gen. xxvii. 33. Ps. xv. 2, 3, kc. 3. The most remarkable changes are those in respect, 42 326 § 234. ADVERBS. to the person of Verbs ; which, however, are hmited chietly to poetry. These are (a) A transition, in the same sentence, from the third 'person to the second ; and vice versa. Is. i. 29, For THEY shall be ashamed of the groves^ •which ye have loved. Gen. xlix. 4, (poetic) Thou wentest up to thy father's bed — he went up to my couch. Mic. vii. 18. Mai. ii. 15. {!)) A transition from the Jirst person to the third ; which however is unfrequent, and for the most part is al- tered in the Qeri. E. g. Is. xlii. 24. xliv. 24, 25, / am Jehovah who made the universe, HE frustrates the signs, Sac. § 233. Constructio elliptica* of Verbs. This occurs when a Verb is used, which implies some noun after it that is not expressed. This happens in phrases which often occur. E. g. inTiT" ''"iHi* a^p to complete after Jehovah, the full phrase would be tlifr) ''-}X!'.^ riD^b nVX3 completely to follow Jehovah. So ^N T^n, or ^N ins he feared to, fully, he turned trembling to [some one. J So ni.Ta 'ju;"^ he slept death, fully, he slept the sleep of death. § 234. Adverbs. ]. In Hebrew, Adverbs frequently supply the place of Nouns or Adjectives, and consequently admit of a simi- lar construction. They stand, therefore, (a) In apposition with nouns, which they qualify. E. g. a-;?? Dya a little water ; t3i';a D'^^li^N./etw men ; !nl");n iD'^iZy much wood. (Jj) Or as the Genitive af er Nouns. E.g. lD:n '^m innocent blood; tDi'53 "^ritt/etiy men; tily^^ '^'^'i daily persecutors. * This is commonly named by grammarians, Constructio praegnans. § 235. PARTICLES OF NEGATION. 327 2. Adverbs sometimes receive prefix prepositions, in the same manner as Nouns. E. g. DiH !:N gratis ; DNDSa suddenly ; irisa so, lit. in the so. 3. Repetition of them denotes intensity. E g. "JNJa nxa very much; TfQli lrtlS» deeper and deeper ; i^2^: nsm here and there. 4. The word '^^ is properly an Adverb, meaning there, extant ; but is used as the Verb of existence, with Suffixes of all genders, persons, and numbers. 5. The Hebrews have no Adverb corresponding to our affirmative. Yes. Instead of such a word, they use, (a) A personal pronoun ; as Gen. xxvii. 24, Jlrt thou my son Esau? and he said, ^jN 1=1 am he., or yes. (6) A periphrasis of a personal pronoun ; as 2 Sam. ix. 6, Art thou Mcphibosheth ? And he said. 'H'lS^ fiSfl behold, thy servant I § 235. Particles of Negation. 1. ^^b not., is used in all cases of negation, and with verbs of any mood or tense. 2. I^N , ■j'^iNt (the opposite of 'ij^^ ) means not there., nothingness, not extant ; and is used more commonly with Participles, and Suffix pro- nouns, like 'cj^ ; as "jns "{"N is not given ; '^SI'^N I [am] not. 3. l:i< not, commonly placed before the Future, in prohibitions, or warnings ; rarely a mere word of negation. 4. !r2 not, (poetic) before Futures, and in different forms ; as ''ba , '^bab , '^riba -, ''^b^b , not, that not, without, kc. 5. bs N^ , b's ']^i<. means absolute negation, no one, none at all, kc. 6. Two negatives only strengthen the negation ; as 1 Kings x. 21, 31Un3 i]N Is it so then^ instead of "^3 >|Nlr! . 1 Sam. xxvii. 10. Jobxl. 25. 2 Sam. xviii. 29. Ex. viii. 22. 1 Sam. xvi. 4. xxx. 8. Specially when N^ is used, the sign of interrogation is omitted ; as Job ii. 10. Jonah iv. 11. Lam. i. 12. iii, 36. 2 Kings v. 26. Ex. viii. 22. Jobxiv. 16. 3. As in English, interrogation frequently implies a negative. In this way several interrogative particles come to imply a negative sense. E. g. (o) !n ; 2 Sam. vii. 5, mriNln noill thou build me an house ? i. e. thou shalt not; see 1 Chron. xvii. 4. Is. xxvii. 7. Prov. xxiv. 28. (6) M73 what ? negative in Job xvi. 6. Cant. viii. 4. Prov. xx. 24. Dan. i, lo' (c) DN ne ; Hos. xii. 12. Job. xxxix. 13. xvii. 13, 16. xix. 5. But fiN usually implies a negative question, not a simple negation. 4. i^VlTj (compounded of ?i and J the writer in Chron. uses asin ecce ilia ! ecce ! In the same manner, the Arabians use ^ ^f ^J^ ^j^ , &;c, for idov, ecce ! § 237. Of Prepositions. 1. Composite Prepositions, in some cases, do not differ m sense from the simple forms. Thus ■^inN»='''nnjJ i.e. after; bytt=b» on, upon; )nb = )'q from^of. '"'^ '" § 238. CONJUNCTIONS. 329 2. Vice versa, the simple Prepositions sometimes have the same sense as the composite ones. E. o^. nnn=nnn?3 from under; Num. v. 20. Ezek. xxiii. 5. a:!f=ny^, Hos, xii. 1. The Preposition S has, not unfrequently, a pecuHar use, in which it appears to us to be pleonastic. E.g. Ps. cxviii. 7, "^^ti^a ^^ IniTl^ Jehovah is my helper, lit. in, among mj helpers. So Ps. liv. 6. xcix. 6. Jud.xi. 35. Job xxiv. 13. Ex. xxxii. 22, Thou knozvest this people Nflin Jj'na that they are evil, lit. that it is in evil. Note. Beth thns used is technically called by Grammarians, Beth essentine, or Beth pleonastic. As mere pleonasm, it appears in Hos.xiii. 9, '!|*lty3 "^in "^^ because my help is in thee, lit. because for me in thy help. So Ps. Ixviii. 5. Is. xxvi. 4. Prov. iii. 26. Is. xlv. 14. Job xviii. 8. Ez. iii. 3. In the three last cases, it stands even before tne subject of a sentence. Note 2. Beth is used still more extensively in this pleonastic man- ner, in Arabic. See De Sacy. Gram. Arab. I. p. 356. 4. "1^3 is pleonastic in a similar manner, Deut. xv. 17. Lev. iv. 2. comp. v. 13. Ezech. xviii. 10. So often in Arabic. 5. S is used in the same sense as 3 , in some cases ; as Ps. xxxvii. 20, "^73 "J'jliJ?!!!. "^173 they vanish away, like (lit. with, in) smoke they vanish, xxxix. 7. cii. 4. Job xxxiv. 36. § 238. Conjunctions. 1. The Hebrew language has but few Conjunctions, on which account some of them, (specially 1 ) have a great variety of signification. These, however, are best learned from the Lexicon and practice. 2. The Conjunction Qi^ ^/J in the beginning of an oath or adjuration, is a negative ; as Cant« ii. 7, / adjure yon. 330 §§ 239. 240. interjections, ellipses. daughters of Jerusalem, Tl'^J^n D5^ that ye wake not. So Greek «, Heb. ili. 11. But ^b Q&5, in such a connexion, is affirmative; Jos. xiv. 9, Jldd Moses sware fi(7 fi&{ surely the land shall he thine. Probably there is an Ellipsis, in such a formula of an oath. See the formula in exienso, 1 Sam. iii. 17. 2Sara. iii. 35. xix. 14. 2K. vi. 31. 3. The Conjunction 1 , besides having the usual sense of a copulative, means also, that, in order that, then, name' ly, indeed, and indeed, as (between comparative proposi- tions,) when, nor, but, § 240. 13. note. § 239. Interjections, 1. Interjections indicative of threatening commonly (not always) take a preposition after them, which governs the Dative ; as yh "^ix wo to us ! 2. in nDH governs the Accusative ; sometimes, how- ever, it stands merely for C>i if, as is common in Chaldee. § 240. Ellipses. These are numerous in Hebrew, as indeed they are in all languages. The design of this section is, to mention those which are most deserving of notice. 1. The Verb of existence, t\^T\ , is commonly omitted between a subject and predicate ; specially when the pre- dicate stands first ; as Snirt"] !?i15 Great [is] Jehovah. 2. When the words of any speaker are cited, yery of- ten the sign of quotation ("I'D^i he said, or saith,) is omitted, and must be supplied from the sense of the passage. § 240. ELLIPSES. 331 See Ps. viii. 4, 5. x. 4. Job viii. 18. ix. 19, Numb, xxiii. 9. Ps. lii. 9. lix. 8. 3. Several Ellipses of Verbs and other parts of speech arc occasionally found, specially in poetry, which are too various to be the subject of limitation by Syntax. See Job xxxix. 24. Is. Ixvi. 6. Ps. vi. 4, iii. 9. iv. 3. vii. 8. Jer. xi. 15. 1 K. xi. 25. 2 K. vi. 33. 2 Sam. xxiii. 17. Hos. viii, 1. Prov. vi. 26. 4. The Accusative case, after certain Verbs which are of frequent usage, is often omitted, as being unnecessa- ry to render the language intelligible. Thus fTiV she bore. i. e. children ; n"l3 he concluded, i. e. n'''^2 T -.IT ' - X • : an agreement / t~\i^'i he inclined, i. e. "jtit the ear ; NiU3 he lifted up, i. e. b^p the voice ; Ti-^V he arranged, i. e. n"^^?3 words, (i. e. he prayed, spoke, Sac.) These must be learned by practice. 5. Sometimes the Nominative case is omitted. As ib '^n'^.2 it was hot to him, i. e. pjN anger, = his anger was hot, or he was angry, '^'^b^ DlnnT and it pitied thee, i. e. mine eye pitied. Note. The word nnln'} is not unfrequentiy omitted, in cases where the sense requires it as the subject of a sentence. See Prov, x. 24. xii, 12, xiii. 21. Job iii, 20, Eccl, ix. 9. 6. When the subject of a proposition is required by the sense to be repeated in the predicate, with some ad- dition, the actual repetition of it rarely takes place. Cant, i, 15, 'D''Z^'^ T-'^? thi7ie eyes [are the eyes] of doves. Ps, xviii. • 34. xlviii. 7, Iv, 7. Is, lii. 14. 7. In the designation of weights and measures, the or- dinary words which express the standard of them, are commonly omitted. Afs p]p3 Pi^j« a thousand [shekels] of silver ; iJlT m^ip? ten [shek- els] of gold ; n''-jJ>\p '£i2i six [ephas] of barley ; tan?, "^n^li two [loaves '^33] of bread. 33-2 § 240. ELLIPSES. 8. In expressing the day of the month, the word day is commonly omitted. Gen. viii. 13. 9. Prepositions are sometimes omitted, where the sense requires them. (a) s; as Ps. Ixvi. 17, ^B [with] my mouth I cried. (6) b; as Prov. xxvii. 7, ^liy'n UJD?. [To] the hungry soul^ any bitter morsel is szveet. xiii. 18. xiv. 22. (c) 'jy ; Ecc. ii. 24, JVotking is better }:'2i<'^'^ [than] to eat. (d) 3 commonly excludes a ; as Db^^ '^^,'^3 as [in] the days of old, for "^Q'^ab . 10. In poetic parallelism, a preposition expressed be- fore a word in the first member is not unfrequently omitted before the corresponding word in the second member. As Job xii. 12;, D'"^"'',2:'^3 With the aged is wisdom., C'tt'^ ^"\i asses'' colts, and had thirty D""T^5'. cities. Jud. xv. 16, With the jaw bone 'ni^nln of an ass have I slain D'jn'Tl'Qrt "^i^aH one heap, two heaps. 1 Sam. i. 24, And "n^S *l?3i^ i^^^ '«c< was yet a lad. Jer. i. 11, What seest thou, Jeremiah ? Ans. A rod "IpU) of the almond tree. Then God said, Well ; for I IpuJ watch over, Sac. (/) Proper names are frequently made the occasion of parono- masia. Thus, Mic, i. 10, ^Slan bN I'Sa In Acco weep not ; JTlB^V n''Sa in Beth Leaphra, roll thyself "icy in the dust. Mic. i. 14, the house i"^TDJ< of Achzib ^"fD^h are liars. Zcph. ii. 4, InilTSi; inT? Gaza is forsaken. Gen. ix. 27, God nC?.b ^S^ "odHI enlarge Japhet. Gen.xlix. 8, im^ln^ O Judah, thy brethren "nni^ shall praise thee. xlix. 16, "1"^^^ 'j'l Dan shall judge his people, xlix. 19, flj'ijli'^ TITS ^^ Gad, a host shall press upon him. Ruth i. 20. Neh. ix. 24, Num. xviii.2. Is.xxi.2. Jer. vi. 1. xlviii. 2. Ezek. XXV. 16. Hos. ii.25. ix. 16. Amos v. 5. Note. In the New Testament, Paronomasia is a very common fig- ure ; e. g. Let the dead bury their dead, &c. From the sacred writers it passed into the language of ecclesiastics ; and the monks of the middle ages, and the older English Divines, abound to excess in this figure. It was so much overdone, indeed, by some of the older wri- ters, that a general disgust with it succeeded ; and the modern rhet- 338 § 246. PARONOMASIA. oric of the west, (I might add, some of the more ancient rhetoric of Greece and Rome,) has almost entirely excluded the use o( paronom- asia, in a dignified style. We call it, by wa}' of expressing disappro- bation, punning or quibbling, and admit it only in ephemeral publica- tions, and low poetry. Such is the difference of taste, between the East and the West. But in passing sentence upon the paronomasia of the Old and New Testament writers, we should always remember, that those writers only indulged in what was regarded as a beauty of style, in their age and country. We may indeed believe that our taste is more correct than theirs, in regard to the figure in question ; but still every considerate man will acknowledge, that there are not a few subjects within the province of taste, about which the best judges of style among us are not agreed. De gxislibus non disputan- dum is a maxim, which, though it may have limits, is not without some real meaning. How shall we demonstrate that the Orien- tal nations, {for paronomasia is by no means confined to the writings of the Hebrews,) had a depraved and childish taste, in regard to the figure in question ? And even if it could be demonstrated, it would form no objection of consequence against the style of the Scriptures. When God speaks to men, he speaks in language which the men of that age and nation use, to whom he speaks. Did Paronomasia abound in Palestine, when the Scriptures were written ; and was it regarded as a graceful ornament of style ; who could expect that the sacred writers would not adopt it ? And who can be offended at it with any more justice, than he can at the thousand peculiarities of the Hebrew language itself, in which it differs from the languages of the West. The capiatur Capua, and creinetur Cremona, of the Latins are well known; and what shall we say, concerning the prince of Orators and Rhetoricians, who in his oration against Verves, asks, " who has ever heard of such an everriculum (as Verres) in any province whatever .^" In spite of all the arguments of rhetoricians, (who no doubt are in the right here, as a mere matter of correct taste,) orators at the bar, and in the pulpit ; speakers in common conversation, specially where wit is displayed ; and many writers of no small degree of excellence, not unfrequently resort to Paronomasia : and they always find it grateful to the minds of unlettered men. APPENDIX. [A.] p. 28. Paradigm of the Hebrew Signs of JVwnbcrs^ and of the Cardinals and Ordinals. No. I. From 1 to 10. Signs. J^os. Masc. abs. Const. Fern. abs. Const. Ordinali. i« 1 '^^njj. ^ni^ ^r\m_ T\m mi 2 t^3l23. •^pd 'Xiyim nr,d ^Dd y 3 T J ndV"^^ •6h'6 d^q ^^'^^! 1 4 n3?^")i^ ^^nnsi iijnq-) n 5 u'mn nbm dm dm '^v^XDH 1 6 r\'^^ ^^■^' dd *idd T 7 n:^nd 5>nii ynd ^^.^^p. n 8 HDb;!) nD^tJ riDrid n^i^qd D 9 n:?i2:n nipdn ^pn >"dn ''y^dn 1 10 ^'i^y.. '"i"^^. i-)V^;? ^^■1 11 ir 12 No. II. Cardinals from 11 ;-.tp 12 40 • T • £) 80 t3^Dbm D 50 D^ptjn s 90 iD''^;©:) No. IV. Hundreds. p 100 nxri 1 200 D'^nN^ C3 300 nhNti^ ti:^;ri n 400 niN5 ynnws ph(or'^)5oo n^^iti^ Mn nh (0) 600 niiiti do bh (1) 700 nivv^, :^2_m T\h (ti) 800 nvvt)_ riDbd prin (y) 900 mN5:^ 5?an No. V. Thousands. jsf 1,000 ?|V.^^. 30,000 n'lsn "iS^m 5 2,000 t]']!!:^^ 40,000 ft^'ian :?3-]i< 5 3,000 D'^lb^f nujbffi&c. 120,000 isn nn\Dy a*^™ 10,000 nnn"! (inn , j^isi) i. e. 12 times 10,000. 20,000 nin-) '^M 600,000 t\bh rii^a td^i APPENDIX [b.] alphabets. 341 J\''otes. No. 1. ThJt is used as an adjective; and sometimes in the Plural, as c^nnN . Froiu 3 to 10, the Dual form of the Cardinals is used adverbially ; as d'^ny^d sevenfold, D"'r!anN fourfold, &,c. No, H. Ten has both a uiasc. and fem, form, and the units before it are of a diflferent gender from it. Some of the units are in the Const, form, but are not to be translated differently from those in the abs. form. There is no Const. State of these composite numbers. No. III. The numbers in this division, are the Plural forms of the corresponding- units. When intermediate numbers are expressed, the unit amy either precede or follovv; as 77, D'^^lUil yillJ , or ^^'^JT d"'J|T*J. No. IV. In expressing a sum of hundreds, tens, and units, ibe smaller numbers may either precede or follow the hundreds. No. V. In expressing thousands united with smaller numbers, the smaller must precede the thousands. Ordinals, There are no ordinals beyond 10; the Cardinals therefore are used instead of them ; and sometimes also when the number is below ten. The fem. ordinals in lri'<__ and n'^-— denote part ; as iTj'l'^il!^ and n'^")'^\2:5' the tenth part. In the designation of composite numbers by the Consonants or Alphabet, the larger numbers are placed lirst ; as t:3n 429 ; Hiif^'l 48LI9 ; 3;ii< 1820. [B.] p. 29. Hebreni) and Greek Alphabets. 1. The common assertion of writers on the old Greek Alphabet has been, that it consisted originally of only 16 letters. The infer- ence has been drawn from this, that when Cadmus left Phenicia, the alphabet of his country comprised only this number of letters. But, (a) The assertion in respect to the original number of Greek let- ters, is built upon no definite and certain testimony. The oldest wri- ters, Herodotus and Diodorus Siculus, (Herod. 5. 58. Diodor. 5. 24,) who relate the story of Cadmus, say nothing of the number of letters : and the accounts of later times disagree. Aristotle makes 18, (Pliny, Hist. Nat. 7. 56.) Another account 17, (Plut, Sympos. 8. quaest. 3. Is- idor. Orig. 1. 3. Potter's Gr, Antiq. P, III. 8, 237, &c.) ib) A comparison of the Heb. and Greek alphabets will make the subject plainer. This may be thus made, with the greatest probability; 44 342 APPENDIX [c] VOWELS. A B rJE{*f)ZH e IKA 31 N 2,0 IK**) (t) P(U')r Upsilon and Omega seem to have been added later; and (Sav, Konnu, and Havixv to have been rejected from the common alphabet, as being supertluous, and retained merely as numeral signs. In the Latin alphabet, taken from the old Greek, §uv went over into F, and /i'oTTTToc, into Q,. In the place o[ 2!iyiAu, the corresponding com- posite letter CS") was introduced. 2. As the Grreeks adopted a different mode of writing and read- ing from that of the Phenicians, beginning at the right hand and pro- ceeding towards the left ; so the old Phenician characters, (see Alpha- bet, first column in § 10) seem to have been reversed by them. Thus D of the Phenicians, in Greek is written E ; *T the Phenician R, is written P in Greek, &c. The four Gutturals, N, in. Jl, 2>, passed into vowels of easier sound, and were written as the consonants, and in a line with them. This fact renders it probable, that the strong guttural sounds given by many grammarians to V are incorrect, and that n itself in certain positions had a mild sound. Jerome calls n a vowel. 3. A comparison of the Greek and Hebrew Alphabets in respect to the Names of the letters, furnishes demonstration that they are of common origin. There can scarcely be a doubt, that the Greeks re- ceived their alphabet from the Phenicians. [C] p. 44. The names of the vowels are, no doubt, significant ; but the ex- planation is attended with some difficulty. The following exhibits the best view, 1 am able to furnish, of this subject. V')y^ signifies collection or contraction^ i. e. of the mouth in ut- tering it. nri3 openings i. e of the mouth. 1-^i; fractio^ breaking, or dividing, i. e. of the mouth. ^■i:;0 cluster of grapes, (from the shape ••• ) p*T'n a creaking sound. oHh fullness, completeness or strength, i. e- of sound. ;]ntl yi^p ;:^nn means short, hastened. p'^.^'iU hissing. y^Sp compression, i.e. of the mouth. * EniarjfAOv (Sav ; Dtgamma F ; Latin F. ** Eniat^^iov J^avm. t EmGrjfiov Konna; Latia Q. | ^Juv, an old Greek S, Herod. 1. 139. APPENDIX [d.] vowels. 343 [D.] p. 43. 1. It is now generally admitted, that prosodial quantity, such as ex- ists in Greek and Latin poetry, is not to be found in the Hebrew. The quantity of a syllable, therefore, is characterised by the more or less extended tone of the vowels. 2. In respect to Qarnets^ Tseri^ and Hholem^ though they are al- ways long, it may be observed, that this length is increased when a quiescent follows them, either expressed or implied. E.g. More extended long vowels. Less extended long vowels. 1. 2. 3. dp or DNp ans b?n or VsTi '-\zq bpp or Irp/p Irup-i In column No. 1, the long vowels are defectively written, the Ma- tres lectionis (§ 20. 3.) really belonging to the word. The quantity is the same, therefore, as in No. 2. — In No. 3, the vowels have no Quiescents attached to them; and though the Matres lectionis are sometimes written even in such cases, (as HtSp"' instead of Vtip") yet as they do not really belong here, the quantity of the vowei is not increased. In No. 3, the vowels are mutable ; in Nos. 1 and 2, immutable. 3. Hhireq and Shureq are nearly always long, (see notes under § 21,) and immutable, having always a Mater lectionis {Yodh or Vav) implied. 4. (a) In regard to Pattahh, the position in § 21 that it is long and short, has not been generally admitted. Gesenius inlimates that it may perhaps, be so. (§ 9. 2. large Gram.) But in Mii'ip!: , the ^ loses its sound by a coalescence with the Pattahh ; of course the Pattahh must be lengthened. (6) In another case, where Pattahh is in a pure syllable, there is similar reason for regarding it as long. E. g. in 'itX2'' yibhd-hhen, in n the sign of doubling Ci. e. Daghesh) is omitted, which being in- serted would be 'irO,'] ^'jritil"; • In 'jni'; , then, the first n becomes assimilated to the preceding vowel, coalesces with it, and of course lengthens it. (§57. 2.) (c) In such cases as niyy^ , Sjbn^ , the Pattahh may, perhaps, be admitted to be short, at least in theory. In fact, however, it has a sound somewhat prolonged, of necessity ; and this the Methegh after it seems to indicate, it being added here, as it is after long vowels 344 APPENDIX [e.] accents. before a Sheva, and shewing probably the opinion of the Punctators, that the sound is to be protracted. Moreover, a part of the regular syllable, (the second letter of the word,) is taken away, and the com- pensation seems to be naturally made, as in other cases, by length- ening the vowel. Compare V i ''T^ > "^Rl ' "^^pri &c, where the vowel is lengthened, agreeably to rule, when the succeeding letter is removed from the syllable to which it belongs. 5. Seghol may be proved to be long, in a similar way. In the cases, C§ 21. 2. rf,) it is either vicarious for a long vowel, (^), or has a quiescent after it. In such a case as 'T^h, , it is said by Gesenius to be short. It may be so, in theory ; for lu theory the second Seghol here is no real vowel, but merely a furtive one. But in fact, the second Seghol is sounded. The first Seghol, then, in fact, stands in a pure syllable, instead of the mixed one in which it would stand, if it were written "^^73 melkh. Is not the first vowel naturally lengthened (§ 56. 1^ by this? And is there any practical difference, between the soimd of 'ii):h me-lekh and ^DD se-pher, as it respects the first syl- lable of each ? [E.] p. 68. Accents. 1. The table of the Accents is repeated here, for further expla- nations, and to save trouble to the learner. _^ Pause Accents. No. J3 plVo i. e. stop, or end.* 1 '2. ^:^l^t respiration. 2 t i Nn^r^p dove, (from the shape,) postpos. 3 * a ^sna iO'^a annexing, inversion : (a composite accent.) 4 Greater distinctives : {sometimes as Pause Accents.) S, 5"^^"^ resting. 5 * h' uina y'^3T Geresh means, expulsion ; (a composite accent.) 6 t i ^I'^R/' '^i?.'' suspender, (minus.) 7 t 3 C^in^) >1)?T (majus.) 8 Lesser Distinctives. i fllncn flat hand ; (from the shape.) 9 * 3. nnDn (initiate) praepositive. 10 t 13 '^'^^n interruption. 1 1 * The letter ^ ia used merely to show the position of the Accent. APPENDIX [e.] accents. 345 t S 'i^lA expulsion. 12 t a Q*]".::"^!! i. e. double Geresh. 13 t 2 rrns '^p.'np the horns of a heifer ; (from the shape.) 14 ^ *^1p divider. 15 t i i"^n"^ stopping ; praepositive. 16 t 2 Nn'ilis cadence; postpositive. 17 S JipnT division; postpositive. 18 t '2. (nbil-V' ?T'::''^n buckler (majus.) praepositive. 19 iD p'^DS separation. 20 2 n"^73 joined [trumpet,] (from the shape.) Above and below the line in poetry. 21 i ^sri?3 inversion. Both above and below the line in poetry. 22 a i<3n73 annexing. 23 3 NTanp 6e/ore. 24 a m" .'/ioo/i ; alias T73T'^ la n^'' <^c moow a day old. 25 t 2 (n^^2D) ie ; also 'n'l;'' 'IDUJ i < \ Athnahh Clause. Merka Mahpakh Clause. Rebhia Geresh Clause. .Rebhia Clause: the same Consecution as in the Athnahh, 45 350 APPENDIX [e.] accents. 12. Explanations. (a) In following the Consecution, it is most convenient to begin at Silliiq^ and go backwarfls. The Tables are arranged, so that they may be read in either way ; but it will be found much more conveni- ent to begin at Silluq. For exphination of the language employed in the Table, it should be observed, that Silluq., heiag first in rank, governs the whole verse, having the other Pause Accents in subordination to it, as in Table 1 ; that besides this government., it governs the Division belonging to it, as the other Pause-Accents do in Table II ; it has also Clause-gov- ernment., in common with that of the other Pause-Accents and great- er Distinctives, as exhibited in Table III. Besides this, every Disjunc- tive., of all the three Classes, has a Section government., which is also exhibited in Table III, and is commensurate with the lines ( v ) there exhibited, and consists of the Accents placed over and under those lines. Silluq then may be considered either as governing gen- era//^, partially., or locally ; the other Pause-accents as governing partially., but (so to speak) over whole province.^ of the empire, and also Zoca//^, or over particular parts of their respective provinces; the Greater Distinctives as governing locally., i. e. particular parts of pro- vinces ; and all of the Disjunctives in common, as ruling their own household, i.e. the Conjunctives. Table III, exhibits both the local and the household dominion., of all the Disjunctives. (6) It has been already intimated, (note 1 1,) thai the train of Accents admitted into any Division., consists of more or less, according to the number of words in such Division. Nearly every verse in the Bi- ble has at least two Divisions ; the number of Clauses and Sections depends, of course, on the length of the verse. (c) In dividing the verse, the attention should be first directed to the distinctions, which the Pause Accents require. These being made, the Clauses in each of their divisions are then apportioned, (with a reference to the sense of the verse, in general, but not al- ways ;) and then if the length of the Clauses admit, the Seaions are made. (d) In Prose., the reader may trace the order of the Pause-Ac- cents, in Tab. I. Tab. II, will enable him to trace the Consecution of the greater Distinctives, in each Division made bj' the Pause Accents. Tab. Ill, exhibits the full con«secution of Pause- Accents, and Great- er Distinctives, in the order of Tab. II, and as governing Clauses ; APPENDIX [e.] accents. 351 of the Lesser Distinctives arranged under them respectively ; and lastly of the Conjunctives, which belong to each Disjunctive. Tables IV, V, and VI exhibit the same in Poetry, i. e. the books of Job, Psalms, and Proverbs. (e) To explain more definitely : in Tab. HI (and VI) beginning at Sitluq, you will trace the accents in the order presented, until a Pause-Accent, or a Greater Distinctive intervene. Then you begin with the Consecution of that Pause-Accent, or Distinctive, and fol- low that, until a second intervene ; then pursue this in the same man- ner ; and so continue until you come to the beginning of the verse. The Accent on the left hand in the sign — v of the Table, is the Disjunctive ; the one, or more, on the right side, are its appro- priate Conjunctives. Of these, you will commonly lind but one before a Disjunctive, (sometimes one, and sometimes another, of those which belong to it ;) at other times you may find two or even all of its Conjunctives, arranged before a Disjunctive. I have put the Conjunctives together, which are appropriate to each, in order to save the trouble of consulting another Table for them. (/) In most of the Divisions and Clauses, the reader will perceive, that different Consecutions are presented. The first in order, is the most common ; but the others are frequent. Thus, in Tab. Ill, Sil- luq Division, the first line is the common Consecution. But mstead of this, the Consecution in the second line may be introduced, from the place where it begins, aad that of the first line omitted -^ and so of the rest. (g) If all the verses were long enough, you would have the whole train of accents in order, for the most part, as exhibited successively in Tab. I, II, III ; and IV, V, VI. But no verse is of suflicient length for this ; and most verses admit but a small part of the train. The next question that occurs then is, In what manner or order are these several Consecutions abridged, so as to accommodate the respective length of verses ? 13. The answer to this lies in the following Canons. Can. I. Accents are repeated. But not the Pause-Accents, i. e. the first Class, in the Tables I, & IV. The Greater and Lesser Distinctives are repeated often, with their respective trains and Conjunctives, \n the same Verse, or same Divi- sion of a Verse : or so much of any traia is repeated, as the nature of the case admits. The Conjunctives, we have seen, are often re- 352 APPENDIX [e.] accents. peated.^ especially in Poetry. In this way, a verse of any assignable length, can be furnished with Accents. Can. II. Accents are omitted. This of course is necessary to accommodate the different length of Divisions, Clauses, &.c. But the omission is in some regular order, in general. E.g. in Tab. Ill, beginning with Silluq ; suppose its Di- vision has 6 words only, then the word a( the end of the verse has a Silluq ; the penultimate word takes its Conjunctive, if the relation re- quire it; if not, then it takes the next minor Distinctive (~ ); then the Conjunctive of this is placed on the next word to Tiphha, if the re- lation requires it ; if not, then (~ ) or its Conjunctive comes next. Any Disjunctive alone may represent both parts of a v or Section in a train: or any Conjunctive, in the same manner, may represent both parts ; i, e. a Disjunctive may stand for the whole of a v , or a Conjunctive for the same ; or both may stand in full order, as is usual ; or the Disjunctive, and several of the Conjunctives re- peated : but this takes place, in the regular order of the Table. Such a diversity is necessary, to accommodate the sense of differ- ent words, connexions, and relations. Can. III. Accents are Inducted. This differs from repetition only in this, viz, that amj greater or lesser Distinctive, whether in the regular order or not, with its train, may be brought into any Division, to help out any Consecution. (See Gen. i. 12.) The reason of such induction is beyond our reach. Whether it is grounded in conceit, or the nature of melody, or some- thing else, no one can now determine. Can. IV. Accents are promoted. E.g. Paser ( — ) in Tab. Ill, Silluq Division, might be placed where Tebhir (7~) is, the intervening accents being omitted ; or one or two only might be omitted, and Pazer brought forward, &,c. When the greater Distinctives are promoted to the place of Pause Accents, (Vid. Table II), then they are commonly furnished with the train of Pause-Accents, i. e. they govern in their room. Can. V. Acccents are transposed. In the Silluq Divison, specially in Poetry, Tiphha is sometimes transposed with Munahh, the latter standing in the place usually oc- cupied by Tiphha. In the Rebhia Clause, Merka is sometimes transposed in the same way with Tiphha. APPENDIX [e.] accents. 363 Can. VI. Accents have a hetefogeneons Consecution. That is, a greater Distinctive sometimes governs a train, or part of a train, that does not belong to it. This heterogeneous train is sometimes mixed with the usual train, and sometimes excludes it. (See Gen. i. 12.) 14. The reader will see, that no irregularity in the accents can occur, which some of these Canons do not reach. Irregularities, however,are not very common. Canons I. and II. are the principal ones to which the student will be obliged to resort. 15. The extraordinary accents Qarne Phara {—)•, Merka duplex {j)~). and Shalsheleth (-L) occur in no certain and established con- nexion ; and therefore are not inserted in the Tables. The two former are very unfrequent. 16. When the same word has two accents, the train goes on, in the same way as if they were upon two different words. 17. Exemplification of the Accents. Gen. i. 12. Beginning at the close; you have (~r), then Maqqeph which removes the Conjunctive of Silluq from (""'S) ; then Tiphha, Merka in order ; and with these the Silluq Division ends. Then come Athnahh, Tiphha (Canon II,) [JVlaqqeph] Merka, Te- bhir, [Maqqeph] Dar^u, which ends the Athnahh train. Zaqeph minus succeeds, then Pashta, Can. II, (which is repeated on the first syllable, in order to mark the tone, the word '^'^ T being pen- acuted,) Mahpakh, Munahh (in the place of Geresli Can. II,) Telisha majus, (Can. II.) Geresh, Kadma, (Can. III. and VI.) Poetry. Psalm i. 1 . Silluq, Munahh, which ends the Silluq train. Rehhi"- Geresh, Merka, which ends this train, Athnahh, Merka, Tiphha initiale, Munahh, end. Merka Mahpakh, Yerah, Zarqa, Merka, Pesiq, Mahpakh, end. Rebhia, Munahh. Thus any part of the accentuation in the Bible may easily be trac- ed, by the aid of the table and Canons above. 18. Exemplification of the distinctive power of the Accents, by corresponding English punctuation, (') representing a sub-comma or half comma, occasionally answering to the smaller Distinctives. Com- pare Table in § 35. Grammar. Gen. I. 1. " In the beginning, created*-God ; the-heavens, and the * The hyphen shows that a Conjuactive or a Maqqeph, is od the first of the two words thus joiDed, in Hebrew. 354 Ai^PENDix [e.] accents. -earth. (2) And the earth ; was-without form, and void ; and dark- ness [was] upon-the face of-the deep ; and the Spirit of-God ; moved, upon-the face of-the waters. (3) And God-said, let there be-light ; and there was-light." Psalm i. (1.) ''Blessed-[is] the raan; who^ not-walketh, in the coun- sel of-the ungodly : and in the way of-sinners, not-standeth : and in the seat of-the scornful, not-sitteth. (2) But, surely, in the law of- Jehovah ; [is] his delight : and on his law-will he meditate ; by day- and by night." N. B. The Heb. order is followed in this Version. The reader can easily pursue this, and punctuate for himself. 19. Original design of the Accents. The way is now open for the student to judge of this subject. We have seen, (Gram, § 34,) that about one quarter of the accents do not at all, (except by mere accident,) mark the tone-syllable of words. They were not originally designed, then, as the signs of acuted syl- lables. Besides, in a great multitude of cases, there are two accents (two Disjunctives even) on the same word ; yet there is never but one tone syllable. The improbability of such an original use, then, for- ces itself upon every attentive observer. But further. The original use of the Accents as signs of inter- punction, (the grand use which Buxtorf, Boston, Wasmuth, and the multitude of writers, who have copied their works, would assign to them,) is highly improbable. Compare the punctuation, as exhib- ited above in English marks. Translate the second Psalm, and punc- tuate it after the Accents. Specially, compare the eighteenth Psalm, with the same composition in 2 Sam. xxii. The xviii. Ps. has the poet- ic consecution ; 2 Sam. xxii, the prosaic one. Is the same Psalm prose in one place, and poetry in another? But this is not all. In some cases, the very same words, in this Psalm, have a Conjunctive in one case, and a Disjunctive in the other. Can the sense of the same words, in the same connexion and composition, be different, merely because they are written or printed in different places ? In short, there is not a single case in which the Conjunctives are applied to any relation, (such as a verb to its Nominative; a verb to its Accusative ; two nouns in Regimen ; a verb and its qualifying ad- verb ; &c,) but you may find continual departures from it, and Dis- junctives applied to the very same relation, and to the same words. By what magic power, shall the very same relations and words be at once Conjunctive and Disjunctive ? APPENDIX [e.] accents. 355 There is not a chapter, scarcely a verse of any great lensrth, in all the Bible, that would bear an English punctuation, corresponding with the Hebrew Accents. Besides ; what mean the numerous instances of a Conjunctive and Disjunctive both on the same word ; or of two Conjunctives, or two Disjunctives, on the same word ? How is it possible, that the Accents, if originally designed as signs of Interpunction, should be so entirely inconsistent with themselves, and so widely depart from all probabil- ity and possibility, as to an interpunction that respects the sense ? The reason was not, that the Masorites, who added them to the text, did not know the meaning of the Hebrew Scriptures, grammatically considered, well enough for the common purposes of interpretation. There is abundant evidence that they did. The result seems to be, that to regulate the recitation or cantillation of the Scriptures, was the iirst and original object of the Accents ; the interpunction and accentuation were only a secondary object, and therefore (as the fact shows) imperfectly accomplished. 20. Importance of the Accents. After what has been said, the student may be readj'^ to conclude that the study of the Accents is fruitless. This is far, however, from being the case. Twenty three of them invariably designate the tone syllable. They often serve (as the accents in Greek) to distinguish words of a different sense, that are written alike ; as :i*:3 they built^ :1j3 in us ; :i3"^ they led captive^ ^iUJ they turned hack ; fnN he caught, «nN I shall see, &c. In both of these respects, therefore, they are in a greater or less degree useful to the student. Although the Accents cannot be received as correct signs of inter- punctioti, in any chapter throughout, or scarcely in any verse ; yet the Pause Accents, and greater Distinctives do serve, in innumerable in- stances, specially in the poetical books, for a general guide, as to the larger signs of Interpunction. They separate, (generally with a good degree of accuracy,) the poetical parallelisms from each other. And although the Punctators have judged so very erroneously, as to the extent of Hebrew poetry, (making only Job, Ps. and Prov. poeti- cal, while the songs of Moses, of Deborah and Barak, of Solomon, and the poetical works of Isaiah and other prophets are furnished with prose accents,) yet the prosaic Pause-accents have the same ra- tionale, in general, as the poetic ones, and consequently are of equal utility to the student. 356 APPENDIX [e.] accents. Besides ; the Accents, in such a multitude of instances, affect the Vowels by lengthening or shortening them, that to neglect them, is very much to embarrass and perplex the way of the student. The study of them has, indeed, generally proved unsatisfactory ; and the reason is, that the claims set up for them by most writers cannot be substantiated, and the student finds himself deluded, and vexed with disappointment, and therefore abandons the pursuit as disgusting and fruitless. But let him wait until the common grammatical difficulties of the Hebrew are overcome, and then begin first with the Pause Accents alone, tracing them through several chapters ; next proceed with the greater Distinctives, as connected with them, in a similar way ; then advance to the lesser Distinctives; and lastly to the Conjunctives. In so doing, he will find that a very moderate portion of labor will intro- duce him to an acquaintance with them, and that he can proceed in the exercise of tracing them out, with no small degree of satisfaction. It is too late to maintain that they are to be followed as authorita- tive ; but that they are coeval with the Vowel-points is nearly cer- tain : and that they are a useful index to the Rabbinic exegesis of the Scriptures, and often render assistance in the proper division of the Hebrew text, and in guiding the reader when words of doubtful form occur, must be conceded by every impartial critic. Shall we refuse or neglect the aid which they proffer us, rather than make a little exertion to avail ourselves of it ? The Heb. student, who does not love ease better than knowledge, will know how to answer this question. PRAXIS. In the following Praxis, when reference is made, for the sake of illustration, to any part of the Grammar, the first number or figures which occur, indicate the § or Section of the Grammar, to which ref- erence is made ; the second, divisions of that Section ; other succeeding references mark the subdivisions, &c, when uninterrupted by any inter- vening word. But if a word be inserted, as and, also, or any other words, then the number which next follows the inserted word, desig- nates a Section (§) of the Grammar, &,c, as before. When the dash — is used, it is employed either to separate a He- brew word which is the subject of praxis, from what follows ; or to separate intervening words or parts of words, from what precedes, in the same No. A reference, to which No. is prefixed, is a reference to the Num- ber in the Praxis itself. Whenever Dec. stands to indicate declension of nouns, it means of nouns declined as the masc. forms are. The fem. Dec. is marked by the epithetyem. Genesis I. Verse 1. 1. n^'iJN^ja — 3 a prefix Prep, primitive, 157 ; for punctuation see 61. III. The student should note, that all the Particles, which con- sist of only one letter, (or of two letters with one of them assimilated,) are combined with the word to which they have a special relation, as in the present instance. A little practice will enable any one easily to distinguish the Particles, and separate them from the words with which they are connected. ir^'^iN"^, n. fem. root obsolete, but probably was "^N^ , Inf ^ziN'n , contracted uiN'^, , 47. 2, fem. ending t\'^-r- added to the Inf form, 129. 16; Dec. I, because the vowels are immutable, 138 ; Abl. Case, 173. 4.* 2. N'na — Verb j — ibid. Class; forms, 129. 11 ; probaidy Primitives, 128. A. 35. inN — adj. numeral, for 'iJiN = nnN ; the Seghol comes into the place of Pattahh, by 60. 1. Verse 6, 36. y-^j^^ _ Dec. Ill ; Pattahh furtive, 27. 2; Part, form, 129. 5; Root i?j?'^ . 37. ^"ina — 2 preposition ; — ?]"in Const, state from ^in, Dec. VI. e; form, 129. u! I'y. 38. b'^'^.i)? — Part, in Hiphil ; vide No. 25. — For tJ^lob , see Nos, 30 and 17. ■ Verse 7. 39. i»)y*5 — Fut. with Vav conversive, 93 ; Root intoy , verb Hb and s Guttural ; form in 123. I. d; the final Pattahh is furtive, and stands in the room of Seghol, 59. 4 ; the Pattahh under the Prae- foimative arises from the Verb d Guttural, 102. 1. 40. S>^^p'^^'n — n article, 61.1. 2 — in the same verse, S^V'lb , b re- ceiving the vowel of the article elided ; see No. 32. PRAXIS, GENESIS I. 361 41. ayilj — not d'^Jail, as in No. 17, because the word has no Pause Accent upon it. Comp. 55. 4. — T^N Nom. to ln"'ln understood, 240. 1. 42. nnna — '73 prep, with ] assimilated, 61. iv. 1 ; nnn as a noun Seghol. 129. 11 ; lit. under part. — In ^''p'lbj the b forms aGen- itive case, see Syntax, 170. 2. b. 43. b?:??. — 55 Prep., for pointing, 61 . iv. 2.— ^i', No. 12, but here used as a noun = upper part., and followed by a Genitive, as in No. 42. — "jr) , for form see No. 26. Verse 8 . 44. D;^!!? — with Qamets under 73, instead of Pattahh, because of the Pause accent; comp. No. 17. — ""t'"?? » ^PP- A. Ordinals. Verse 9. 45. ^IJD*] yiq-qa-vu^ with middle Vav moveable, 23. 4. a ; root, nil?. 12:ii and Par. XIV. Fut. Niphal ; comp. 124. 1. \\&. m'p73 — Root nip, form 129. 14. I's?; Dec. III. ^Fl. ^!J§'ini — •; Conj ; root mJJ'n , verb hh and sResh ; Niph. fut. 122 and Par.; so written instead of iriN'nr], because the Resh rejects Daghesh, and the preceding vowel is therefore prolonged, 46. 1. 48. i-iuja'irt — rt article ; — 'n'^z'' fera. form, 129. 6 ; Dec. II. feminine. Verse 10. 49. lrt«^2*V — b has the vowelof the article which is elided, No.32. 50. i-iip73bl— 1 Conj,, vowel 61. 11. 3. — bprep. ib. III. — Tilpp^ from nip ; form, 129. 14. nb; Dec. IX, 146. 51. 0*^72;;; — Dec. VIII. a; probably primitive, 128. A. — N'^^1 , No. 22. Verse 1 1 . 52. Nmn — Hiph. Fut. apoc. 91.3, comp. 91. 4. — N'JJ^Dec. VI. — aipy Dec. VI. g. 58. ^'^-^ra — Part. Hiphil, comp. No. 38 ; Root^J'iJ; Pattahh furtive, 27. — y'^t Dec. VI. d. 54. yy — Dec. VII. /; primitive. — ""iq, Dec. VI. Z, and 143. note 9. 55 fnilis? — Part, active, see No.39. and 122, with Paradigm ; de- fectively written, 90. 6, and 24. 3. 56. i3"'73b — b prep. — i Suff. Pronoun, 69. 2. II. — 'j"'5g, Dec. I; form as if from ^■'a, 129. 11. '•V. 362 PRAXIS, GENESIS 1. 57. TIJN — qualifies in, Syntax 196 ; literally, tjj/nc/t, the seed of it^ [is] in ity i. e. whose seed is in it. 58. i:/-nT — n Pron. Suff. 69. !s!. — y^t, Comp in No. 53. 59. in — nprep., iPron. Suff. 70. 3, n, qualified by -^'^ni No. 57. Verse 12. ' 60. Nl«:in2 — Vav conversive, 93 ; N52in Fut. fem. apoc. Hiph. 91.3; rooi N:^'^ , verb 'Band Nb, 110 and 120 ; see Par, VI, p. 191. 61. n^?."'ab — ^rt Suff. pronoun, 69. 2. II. Comp. No. 56. where i Pron. Suff. IS used with the same noun ; instead of riln. Either can be used at pleasure, when the noun ends with a consonant; but iis commonly preferred. — in-ir^t 1U:N , vide No. 57. N"i'l see No. 22. Verse 14. 62. •'•iJ''r-Pi ^^PP- A, and 130. 3. Note. Verse 14. 63. nhi^a (plene ni^ii. — p|Diy';' denom. verb; root S^ny; in Polel; Syntax 210. 5. a- Verse. 21. 75. &:'^in!r[ — "in article ; DJ/sn, Yodh in the plur. ending omit- ted, 24.3; Part, form, 129.7; Dec. I. — "^3 ^6/ from Vg, the Hholem shortened before Maqqeph, 32. 3 ; properly a noun Dec, I. in regimen with "iiD3. — iH'nin, rt article, for insertion here, see 163. 4. — niipahn , 7\ article, pointing 6 1 . I. 2, Syntax 163. 4. ; DUJttn ac- tive Part. Seghol. from iutti 127- Par. XVI. Syntax 217. 1. — TiiN Ace. governed by ^>£'i'ib. — ^Z'z Dec. IV.; Inf. form, 129. 12; used here in the Gen. after p]iy, and as an adjective, 161. 1. Verse 22. 76. ^"na*] — verb from 'ryy^ in fut. Piel ; the Daghesh in Yodh omitted after Vav conversive, 93. 1 ; Qamets under i instead of Pat- tahh, 46. 1 ; Seghol under '^ instead of Tseri because the accent 15 364 PRAXIS, GENESIS 1, thrown off upon the preceding syllable by Vav conversive, 54. 2. and 62. Ill.t/. — S»Nb, contracted from ^?3^{b., comp. 47. 2, (for the > would regularly have a Sheva here ;) b prep, with an irregular punctuation, Khich is thus made ; the Inf. is'nttN, and the Sheva falling away, because N becomes quiescent, the word would then be written HWNb ; but as this Seghol is lengthened by the quiescent a, it becomes Tseri, as in the text ; Syntax, 214. — ^-^s verb, Ti'b from in'^D, Imper. — ^a"):i, ^ Conj. 61. II. 2. r\^') as 1-^3. — 1X^X31, !) Conj.; ^Nb'q Imp. from N^ a. — Q'^73^2, 2 with the vowel of the arti- cle, CI. I. 6; tJia^seeNo. 51. — n-\1 Fut. apoc. Kal from niai, 127. Par. XIV. Fut. apoc, also 91. " Verse 24. 77. Nliin — No. 60. — inaina , fem. noun prim. Dec. II. 6, Const. n"^^3 , Suff. in73r!S, &c; Part, form as in 129. 2. — ^T)in, n. Const. Dec. I. fem. from 1i'>^';\ with Paragogici, 50. 3. c. et seq. ; the Parag. i seems to be a compensation for the Daghesh omitted in the Yodh of the noun. In verse 25, the regular const, form n*n occurs. Verse 25. 78. lnJ31N!i — in article — 'nJZ'Mi fem. Dec. II; Inf. form as in 129. 12. Verse 26. 79. !ni!;?'5 — 1st pers. plur. fut. from Irtt^y , No. 39.— d^N Dec. IV; Part, form as in 129. 1. — !i:tt"7^2, 72b2£ n. Const, from n^S VI. a; ID— Suff. Pron. 69. 2. II; Inf. form as in 129. 1 1.— nsmTO'lS, 3 Conjunction, pointing see No. 64 ; n^WT n. fem. as Dec. I. of the masculine, 132. 2. d; Inf. form as in 129. ll.'nb- d ; ^D^rr- ut supra. — n-^^'T, Fut. Kal with Vav, from JTin , 93; Syntax 210. 5. a — ni^a , a Preposition, pointing No. 64 ; n^l n. fem, from M5'^ Dec. II. Const. ; prim., but Inf. form 129.12. rib- — InTsnaaa, n Conj., a Prep, with the vowel of the article which is elided, 61. 1.6. — toJahfl y rt art. as pronoun, see No. 75 under nuJ?3"in . Verse 27. 80. ^3t Dec. IV. Part, form 129. 1— nij:.: fem. Dec. II; Part. form, 129. 2. Verse 28. 81. ^la^l — See No. 76. — artb, 70. 3. col. b.— nmsi — 1 Conj. — ipaD for tnras , 24. 3 and page 44, (n, o,) ; Imp. from u;a3 ; rt pron. Suff. Accus. 68. 2. No. I. 3 fem. — siTnq, Imp. of nn'i , see in No. 79. PRAXIS, GENESIS 11. 365 Ferse 29. 82. fiSrt ecce ! as much as to say, Take notice. "^nna for ^n3n3 from 702, 1 14. IV. 6. — Tii< Noni. to n*'n understood, Syn. 240. 1. — ia-'lUJNt iw TiyAic^, 196. — '1-5D in No. 54. — n:.!ri'^, fut.from rT^n. — nbSNb , 1? prep., n^5N fem. Dec. I ; Inf. form, 1 s:'9. 1 1 ; Syntax, 223. Verse 31. 83. fitoy. Pluperfect, 209. 2 — lait:, Syntax, 240, 1. — nj<». Syn- tax, I7(j. 2. — '^•ipuj!n, article, 165. 3. In similar cases, verses 5, 8, 13, 19, 23, the Ordinal adjective is without the Article. Chap, II. Verse 1, 84. :i^5';T,Fut. Pual withVav, 93; Rootn^s; Daghesh omit- ted in the t^raeform. ') because it has Sheva under it, see 93. I, and Nos. 76, 81, ^-\niT; the present verb should doubtless be read vd- yskhid-lu ; the others, vd-yebha-rekh, as the want of Daghesh lene ia the Aspirates following the first syllable demonstrates ; see 2'J. 3, (4.) — fiNii? • d-r- Suff. pron. 69. 2. column II ; NiiS, masc. Dec, IV. g. in Sufhx state; Inf. form 129. 12. Verse 2. 85. ^5"^5 — fut. apoc. Piel with Vav, from iibs ; for omission of the Daghesh in Yodh Praeform. see No. 84 ; so written instead of V5'?l , 41. 2 an!! 45. 3, comp, also 123. III. c. — -inOJ^ba, fem, Dec, II. h ; for the proper form of the word, see 47. 3. note 2. — niUS' Plu- perfect, see No. 83. Verse 3. 86. 12J~.jP';2 — Fut. Piel from UJ^p^ ; pointing in No 84. — ^t\\^ pron. Ace. 70. 3. col. nJ<. — i'2. ibid. col. 3. — N'na, Pluperfect, No. 83. — rrfuJSi'b, b prep., pointing 61. Ill, 2; niu;^ luf. Cons. Kal, from Jltoy, Syntax, 213- 5. c. Verse 4, 87. riVj< — pron. 71. — n'i'nWn, fem. PUir. Const, Dec, IV, Inf. form as in 129. 22. ^e, deriv, of l^i; Syn. 240. 1. — aN")atl3 , 3 prep.; h^r- Suff- pron; Niph. Inf, from N"12, with Suff. 213. 5, a; the Tseri under ^ in the regular form N"}3n falls away on account of the Suff D;^, comp. 126. VI. in regard to the dropping of the Tse- ri. For retaining the Praeformative in after 2, see 97. 4 ; the subject of the Verb is made by the Suff. in the Genitive, 215. 2. — niu^S; Inf. const, used as a noua in the Genitive ; the agent to nliZJ? is JnjtT' 47 366 PRAXIS, GENESIS II. D'^i^V'N, which is in the Gen. after nr^y , Syntax, 215. 2 ; and the Ace. after this verb, is Q'^^^'.U'] y"\N , the object of the action express- ed by the verb, Syntax 215. 3. Verse 5. 88. rf'to — form as in 129. 11. ''y: Dec. I. — nniDln , form as 129. 2. mb, Dec. IX. — 'rt'','n''' d^p. before it was, ¥Mt. made Praeter by b'nu, 210. 6. a. (2) — so Htti:'; D'l.p. in same verse ; tiai:'; instead of ri:g^1 because of the Athnahh (Pause-Accent,) verb ^ Gutt. fut. Kal. — 'i"'t5S:ln, Hiph. from 'nt^'a , Pluper. 209-2. — "}■;«, Syntax 235. 2. na^b , b prep., pointing 61. III. 2; na? Inf. Kal of 1^^ ; Inf. Const, as a Dat. case, 213. Fierce 6. 89. liSf — prim., form as in 129. 2, IS?. — 'n\^_'^ , s'Gut. fut., Syntax 210. 6. 6. — nj5"vprt , Hiph. of Jip'ij. Fer^e 7. 90. 'nl?^':!, Fut. Kal of ■?BlI. Class, 111. 2; the Tseri of the final syllable goes into Seghol, because the accent is drawn back by the Vav. — *iBy, Syntax 222. 3. — "ja makes a Gen. 170. c. — Hs'^}, Fut. Kal from n23 , verb I'sand b'Gut. — T'ENS, Dec. Vlli, from PlN=5]:i< 45. 3 ; I"*— Pron. Plur. SuflF. 69. 6. — n^'4J3, I. Dec. fern, const, and also Accusative after ns' , Syntax 172. 2. Note. — D'^'.n, Dec. VIII j form 129. 1. /a? ; see also 133. 6. — u3B3b , Syntax 223. 2. Verse 8. 91. Sra^n — Fut. with Vav from yaa. — "J^ Dec.VIII, form 129. 1 1. i'y. — DiijflT , Fut. apoc. Hiph. from d^ii), the final Tseri of the apoc. form goes into Seghol, because the accent is retracted by the Vav. — Q'jj adverb. — "lit"', Qamets under S because of the Pause Accent ; Syn- tax, 209. 2. Verse 9. 92. nas^} — Fut. apoc. Hiph. — lan?., Part. Niph. from n^n. — ini<")ab , Dec. IX, form 129. 14. tiV a.— b3N73b , Dec. II, form l"29. 14. NS. — a"'';nin, for the use of the article. Syntax 165. 5. — ^"ina. No. 37. — 'jati , Qamets probably on account of the Pause Accent. — ny'in, Fem. Inf. fromS''!'^ instead of n?;'^, because of the Guttural, 59. 4; Gen. case, 213. 2, and has the article like a common noun. — ^11 ISTD, Accus. after ni"i, 221. Verse 10. 93. Np, Act. Participle of n::*; , "d and Nb ; Syntax, 217. 2. — •jnya , Tseri under a, 61. IV. 2.— nip'^Jnb, Hiph. Inf. with Prep.b; PRAXIS, GENESIS II. 367 as a Dative case, 213. 5. — '1*}2';, Fut. Niph. as Praet., Syntax 210. 6. b. — D'^u;}*"^ anomalous Plur. of 'j;fi«T , page 262 ; Syntax of Sn^a'-iN^ ia'^b«n, n"?. 2,4. Verse 11. 94. min this is, Syntax 192. 1. — SSiDri, "ri art. as pronoun = that which, Syntax 163. 4 ; and Synt. of Part. 217. 1. — Mb'^inn, art. ri, 164. 1. — t3iD n-43N, 196. 1. 6. — nmri, article, 163.2. Verse 12. 95. aSiTi — !|, 61.II.-5; SnT Const. Dec. IV. — Ninin , n article 165. 1 ; j^ 194. (1.) — nnn^b , n— Suff.; ni:^, inf. Const, in Suff. state. Par. XV. 127, and Dec. VI. Syr. Seghol. — rn'at^^, ut supra. Verse 16,17. 97. IJ^*;}, Piel apoc. from riliS, 123. III. c ; for the omission of the Daghesh in the Yodh, 93. 1. — S^Nb. in No. 76. ' — bstin H^N, Tnf. abs. with a finite verb, 212. 2. — yni aiu ny"lrt. No. 92. — ■^t'2'a. 70. 3; Syntax in reference to what precedes, 182. 3. c. — '^b^N, Inf. SufiF. 127. Par. XV, used as the Suff. state of nouns, 213. 2". -- ni73 n^»n,212. 2. T ' Verse 18. 98. m'la predicate of the sentence, 181. 1. — nvn, Const. Inf. of n^il, as Const. Noun before CnNM, lit. the being of the man in his soli- tude, i^lb being used however as prep., but properly it is a noun of Dec. VIII. in Suff. state. — ib-n^UyN , Syn. 223. 2. — 'i'1^53 ? as a noun in Reg., but ^a5 is commonly used as a Prep. Comp. 157. 2. a. Verses 19, 20. 99. '^IT'I — quiescent Yodh omitted, comp. No. 90. — «i^2, apoc. fut. Hiph. from Mia. — m'N'nb, Inf. Const, as a noun in the Da- tive. — lb-J<^J?^, Syntax, 220, & 223. 2.— n^n "-IJp.:, in apposition with ib which follows H'yp.l (ut supra) but the prep, b is omitted, 368 PRAXIS, GENESIS 111. Syntax 240. 9, comp. 240. 10 ; or the case may be solved by Syntax 191. 1. — N^n that was, 192. l.— -iJ2t from D'iJ, Dec. VII. e. — "b^S &c, the b here and after constitutes a Gen. 170. 2. b. — d^i^"^'.!! i ^^om yji"^ verb "'cl. class, as 'ii'^'^l ; the Qamets under '3 comes from Pattahh lengthened by the Pause Accent — I^n'ybifc^a, 73 prep., V^— Suff. to plur. notin, 69. 6 ; noun is from S^:*; Dec.IV.with plur. of the fem. form, 133.5. — Jijnnn , nnn a prep- with Suff., as a Seghol. noun it takes the form nJin , ^iS-y- Verbal Suff. 68. 2. Col. IV, occasionally united with Prepositions, 70. 2. note. — 1^!^ fipoc. fut. Kal from !nD3. — JTi^N^ • • • yb^.ri-nj< li'l , Syn- tax 223. 2. — SlJjfi'il , ^T— Suff. Proo., which shifting the accent makes the usual Hiph. form N''i;j go into NS"; = 4<''S';' , i. e. the Qa- mets under the Praeform. Yodh necessarily fails away, and then, by 93.1, iConversive must be written without the Daghesh in the Yodh. — OS'S?! , !l art. as pron. this ; tJ^D time; this time = now ; Synt. 174. 2. — i»i:i;;9_, Plur. with Suff. from Di:?! . — l^siiat. N■^J?^ 219. 2. — Jnlnj^.b Pual 98^ ill. — -nty^ , vvith Qamets Hhateph under T, 32. 4.— I^IN page 119. — i73N> Dec. VIII. from DN- — pini, fut. sense, 209. 5. 6. — Jl-^rjT ibid. — 'n^^b, 223. 2. — Drt"^:^, 177. 3. a. — D''72'n5 , Shureq followed by Dagh. forte, page 44, note ; from DT'iyiDec. Ill, form as in 129. 28. — ^;^->^inri"; , Hithpalel from miz\ Syntax 210. 6. h ; Qamets under ttj is Pattahh lengthened by the Accent ; and for Pat- tahh, see 100. 1. W. Chap. III. Verses 1 — 5. 101. Intoy, Pluperf. 209. 2. — "S"?];^ , Interrog. ^ omitted before y)N 236. 2.— ':il:3Nn i5D. — la-Jiyan, Synt. 223. 1.— •jiinMn , fut. kal from nn», usual form :im?3n, but the Nun parag. draws down the accent (62. 3. 6.) and, of course, the Qamets under the Praeform. falls away ; the n in the ground-form is here written with (-.), page 44. (n, o.) (4) 'J^n^n m'a i«b, 212. 2. 6. — (5) yn^ Part, act., 217. 1. — DS^SN, Suff. Inf. const., 126. note 8, also Dec. VI. w. — ^npD21, 94. — - ni'^s'^i;, Dual Const, of ';*;y , page 240. Dec. VI. — D'^rilpNS) *= a"'n'i:4<3, 47, 2, but the Seghol is lengthened by PRAXIS, GENESIS III. 369 the quiescence of the N, in the first of these forms. — 3it3 ^i;'}'', Part. Act. Const, state, 216. 2. Verses 6 — 10, 102. N'ln], apoc. fut. fem. from ntj'i, as bvtm 123. I. d. No. 3. — yyfl niu, 24U, 1. — niNn, fem. Dec. I ; form as in J 29. 22; used as an adjective, 161.4. — i<:itT^1ii{n , Synt. 240. 1. — D'^pS'b , ^ 61. I. 6, comp. 2. — nttn: , 103. II. Part. Niph. ; Synt. 240. 1 . — b'^SUJlib. 99. J. c. Inf Const. — pSi^ni, 108. 1, or 55. 4. — -{nni? f^m- F"t. with Vav, from 'jn: . — r!722f, 70. 3. fiy. (7) injnii?^]!, Fut. fem. plur. in Niphal, with Vav. — O'^l^yv^ Dec. VIII. Adj. ~ tincn'l, fut. Vav of '^sn . — nb?, Const, of in^.^ i Dec. IX. — n^Nri , fem. Dec. II. — n-i:»n , fem. i. Dec. from JT^ian. (8) ^V.tintt, Part. Hith. agreeing with D'^Hbj^ , 167. 2. b and note ; for the sense of Hith. here, 80. 3. d. — Ni:nn'"2 , Fut. Vav. in Hith. ; sense of Hith. in 80. 3. b. ; Syntax 231 . b. (9) 'ris^N , n3~ Suff. Pron. 68. 2. IV, Comp. 70. 1 ; -^Jt adverb, in a separate state "'ij, with Suff. "^i^, and as a noun of Dec. VIII, here, with Yodh Daghesh'd. Vide 156.3.6.— N^Wi, second form of ^C Class I, Qamets under Vav, 93. 1 ; Q.amets under ^, 120. 1. — NSHN], Vav ut supra, NinN fut. Niph. 46. 1 ; for the reflexive meaning, 77. 2. c. Verses 11 — 15. 103. Tail , Hiph. of na; . — nm , 67. 2. — ^Jjri , in Interrogative. — Tj^n^^^it, Piel of iilir with Suff. 123. III. a. — ^nbnS , 235. 4, here used like a noun in the Dative with ^ and in the construct state be- fore b!3i< . — bs&it Inf used as Noun, with final Hholem shortened, because of the Maqqeph, 213. — rkpti a-khal-td, Qamets under 3 is a Pattahh prolonged by the accent, 65. 4, and the syllable still re- mains mixed, because the accent remains on it, 25. 1. a. note 3. (12) nrin; , 114. IV. 6. — ■''I7a3> , this form only with SufF, pron. Yodh ; in alf other cases, it is d:5?. — VSN], 107. 2. — "'3N">uiii , "^3 — Suff., H'^-ciiTl Hiph, oi'at^ (14) ilON 'n^nN, Synt. 240. 1. -b373 , Synt. 175. 2. — 'rjsina , Dec. III. Suff. state. — '^^ri , Fut. of ^'^^ . — r^^^n , '^■' — Plur.' Suff.; in Plural Const, of D^'.n . (15.) tlW-j , fem. Dec. II. — ri'''i5N, fut. Kal of verb ^s, n'^UJ, 119. — '^2'^3? 157. 2. a. — ^B!1UJ'^ , fut. Kal from ;]^u3, the Q,amets under Yodh praeform. falls away, because the accent is shifted. — 'Xi^"^, Syntax 174. 2, — ^iSluin, nS.— Suff. 68. 2. IV. — aj?y, Dec. V ; form 129. 2, Synt. as UJ4<-1. ' Verses 16—24. 104. na^.N S^a^ili 212. 2, Comp. 225. 1. Note.— ':jaiai22>, ^-rr fem. Suff. ;'form."l29. 15; Dec. III. d.— rj2i-in, form 129. 15, i^b ; 370 PRAXIS, GENESIS IV. Dec. I. — "^I'^ri, fut- fem. 2d pers. from nlb"> . — D'^si, page 262. — ^nplUJn.Dec. 1. fern., ^-rr- fem. SufF. ; form 129. 22. — -V,:;:^"', Qamets Hbateph, 32.— ^2 , fern. pron. 70. 3. (17) ':j*\.^n?.s, Prep.'with Suff. as nouD, 70. 2.— nsb^Nn , JlS— Suff. 68. 2. IV ; the Tseri under D falls away, as io 126. note 15. (18) yip, form as in 129. 11. -^y. — '^'21'^! ■) ^'^^^ ^^^- ^^- ^^- — ^' instead of ^b , 70. 3. ^. — n?T, fem. II. i)ec., form 129. 10. '?D, or 129. 2. ni'.— ^nw— jy , inuj Inf. Suff., as a noun governed by Prep., 213. 5. — ns'^'a , 70.2. "ja. — J^npri Pual, np for np , No. 103, n^SN. (20) Ji^nJ 129. 6. ^'v, = j^,^, [.e. livings and as intensitive, the mother of all living. — '^H in Pause for '^T\ . (21) niDnS , fem. IV. Dec. e. — DUiaV^I , a -^ Suffix ; verb future Hiph. with T . — (22) "]© that not, nb^J"]~'jS that he may not thrust forth^ npbl nor take, 209. 5. b. — iJlT , Part, of i^n , contracted "'Jl , 129. 1. is); Synt. 217. 3. (23) ^rinV*?;";';; , nn — Suff.— '0-^72 T^iijt w/ience, 196. (24) i:3'l.3';i , Seghol instead of Tseri under the '^, because the accent is thrown upon the preceding syllable. — C"tp.Q i ^ to- 7mrds. — d'^i^S^ from ii'nS), Dec. I. — nSSi^nTari, Seghol. Part. fem. Hithpael, from ^Dri , 'in Art. as a pronoun, 163. 4 ; Hith. sense, 80. 3. 6. Chap. IV. Verses 1 — 5. 105. 'i^ni, fut. apoc. of rt'irr. — "ik'rn, fut. apoc. of ^b'^; for the manner in which this verse is constructed, see Syntax 209. 3. note. — ns* lit. with Jehovah, i. e. ope Jehovae. (2) >]D*rT = PlOin"! , Fut. Apoc. Hiph. from p]D'^ ; final Tseri goes into Seghol, because the ac- cent is drawn back, 62.3. rf. — nnbb, Inf fem. of npfc, b prep. 61.111. 4. a ; Synt. 213.3. note, and 225. 1.— ITli* , page 262.--r7yh, Const, of ns;S, Dec. IX. (3) Nl'^] , Hiph. apoc. from tiia. — !n^rt"']b, has the points of "'DTIN Lord, which the Jews use instead of JiitT* Jeho- vah, wherever this latter word occurs single. Adverting to this, the vowel points are easily explained, viz, '^3'ilNb , contracted "'i'i'ij^b , 47. 1, 4, with the same points as MirT^b- (4) niS^aKi, from "niria Dec. I, form 129. 10. — -jNiS, Dec. 1. for 'y\^'2. , 47. 6 ; form ut supra. — ■jrtabrt:';:), ibn with Suff. and preposition ; Syntax 242. — 5."\2:'^1, Fut. apoc. of n^'^ . (5) 'nn^l, Fut. apoc. of rs'nn . — V3D sibc^l , 227. 1. note. Verses 6 — 10. 106. -Tj}: n^n ,218. (7) S^t:\-! , II. Class 's.— niJ\U , fem. Inf. of NU53 , put for DNil), 60.4. — DNtan = nNOn , 60. 4. also 147. 3. e ; PRAXIS, GENESIS IV. 371 form 129. 6. — ytlH, Syntax, 229. 2; but may not nNtsJl be masc. here, as the Suff. "i, in inp^'aJn and is, refer to it ? (8) Dni'^ria , Inf. Suff. of Ji;;n , with Prep. 2.13. 5. a. — Dp'2 vdy-ya-qum^ the commoa apoc. form is Dp"^ , but with the accent drawn back by the t , the Hho- lem shortens into Qamets Hhateph, 118. I. 4. — ^^^.^limii ^!T^ SufF. ; for the points of the Verb, 59. 3. (9) bl^. "^N, Syn't. 240. 1.— "^ni-n*^ pres. time 209. 4. — "i;?.i5tl, Interog. ti, ittji: as Noun, Dec. VII. Const. — ••D:N, Syntax 240. 1. '(10) a^.^lS. . • bip, 231. 1. Verses 1 1 — 15. 107. -ja, 175. 2. — rt^D, page 262. riQ — nnpb , Inf. fern, with Prep. 114. iv. a. — ^^V,a, ^7" Suff.; -j; Dec. II. Phir. light Suflf. — (12) i:|t)h, Fut, apoc. Hiph. from P]d;j and = p|Din; Syntax. 225. 1. note. — nn = n?n fem. Inf. of iri2, 41. 2. a and 42. 1. c, also 114. IV. h. — n3T 3>3, 246. a; forms in 129. 1, h. — '^3'i3> biia, 181. 1. — Nii253»ri75. 3. (14) nuj^.n , Piel 104. 4. — ni'Jii 163^4. — ^nS}«, 1st. pers. Fut. Niph.— ' ""itlSa, Suff. state of N2C73. (15) d'^m-iuJ, App. A. p. 341. under No. I. — dp.';' = dp.';' the form without Pause, fut. Hophal of dp3 . — diiJ^] , see in No. 91. — "^nblb , 234. 2, comp. 235. 4. — m*3in , Const. Inf. Hiph. from ln33 ; as the Genitive after ■»nblb . — "inji. Ace. after nisfl ; and ^^?^^73-b^ Gen. after nis^ , and the subject of this Inf. Verb, Synt. 215. 3. and Note 1. — ii<:£72 in Suff. state, but still the subject of the Verb, 172. 2. Note. Verses 16 — 20. 108. S12;?.5, accent retracted, and final Tseri shortened, 54,2.-- ni^np Const. Ace. 174. 2. b. (17) ^'nr\'], fem. fut. apoc. from in^n, with Fattahh because wthe Guttural. — n^.^!! ^^^ ^>P?.2- ~' ^?.^? P^rt Noun, Dec. IX. Const., see 146. 2. a. — 133 , Dec. VII. ^. Two Accusatives, (U'D and ^isH) are here governed by the verb of naming, Nip";, Synt. 222. 3. under E. g. (18) "ly^?, form as in 129. 27. — bi<;;^nJ3, Dec. V, Compos. Noun, 131. 2, and so of other names which follow. (20) fT^ln m^'n, UMl'iS not merely a pronoun, (as then the Verb of ex- istence would be omitted, 192. 1,) but a pronoun demonstrative, or used for the sake of asserting identity, 206. 1. — "^iN , page 262. — blrt>, Dec. VI, O Class ; Ace. after s-ii"^, 221. 3. b. (3) rj3p7a , Gen. after "^IN; implied. Verses 21 — 26. 109. '11*53, form 129. 9.— aanyi, form 129. 27. (22) Ntn Qa , 206.— baw, form 129. 22. -^'d. — "n">^n3,fem. Dec. IV. /. — bHl? Dec. VIU. g. — niriN , page 262. (23) vh^b , Suff, Plur. of tr^N , page 372 PRAXIS, GENESIS VI. 26?. — in^^iT iTTiy, Voc. case; according to some, in apposition with 1"".D2b., 240, 9. — y^yyii-, for !i:2?a\p, imp. fem. plural, fromyaui, a kind of Apoc. Imper., wtiich however does not come under any particular rule, and occurs but very seldom. — ln3ti , 223. 3. (4) Tn"«bin, Inf. vvith buff, and governed by Prepo- sition, 213. 5. — rTiis:q inpbui , 177. 4. — n:*^ , 177. 8. — rTi:a, page 262, na , and 41. 2. a. (5) "^n for "^^fji as 3D for MD , verb jjy. — Jirij nii7373, from JnipyXJ , Dec. IX. with Suff. and Preposition ; the ^! final is dropped because of the Suffix, 146. 2. b. — rrnnN, Piel of ^"iN , 104, 4; TtT- Suff. Pronoun; Comp. 126. note 15; the pron. Ti^iN which precedes, qualifies the Piv-i 196. Chapter VI. Verses 1 — 5. 113. bnri fromb^n,in Hiphil.— d-.':^ , Hoph. of i^^ , Syn. 229. 2. (2) riiD=niait3 fem. PRAXIS, GENESIS VI. 373 plur. of sits. — ^ nj"^2 = 'I np. '.1 , 45. 4, also 114, IV. a. (3) -j-iV probably Iron. 'jT^ , in dislmclion ficm "J'^T which is "'y. — i3a'v?32 , one Djode of explanation is, 2 piep., auj inf. with Pattahh (I Ib.l. 6 Inf.) from a:;UJ, and Sutf. 'a7~, translated because of their errors ; another mode IS, 2 prep., •'tb foi "^UJN (72) the Resh being assimilated with the following a, and oa = DA also^ even, &.c, the Pattahh being pro- longed by the Distinctive Accent. Both modes are attended with difficulty, either in regard to the sense, or the form of the word ; and neither is satisfactory. (4) C^irSiJi , root uncertain, form as in 129. 5. — nriil D"*^^? , 2 with the vowel of the Art, 61. 1. 6 ; n Art. 61. I. 2 ; Dnn , S)'ii. Itib. I ; comp. 206, firt plur. being used, as N^lnthe Sinap;lar is. — ■JD-'^nnx , 157. 2. /, lit. after [it was] so ^T^jN that, 1iiJlA_ being a Conj. here, 158 2. a. — nxS'' , fut. of N'i2use(' ns Prae- ter, 210. 6. 6. — DnJn , form 12;). 10. yy. = ^s;-! , Qamets immut. 51. 3, Dec. I. fem. — ri2U;n73 , from nnu:n73, Dec. IV. fem. — t"2V, from a^,, Dec. VIII. —p"^ , form 129. I. yV. — CJI'rr-Vs , 174. 2. Femes 6—12. 114. rriyy, 209. 2. — aizyn'^i Hith. passive sense, 80. 3. a. or perhaps reflex, as also Niph. DHi'l , in the former part of the verse, is used. Niph. and Hith. often unite in sense. (7) •»nN"^2 T^iiNt, latter pronoun omitted, 199. 1. c. — "'nXsn: , 104. 4. — Dn"'9y= D'^n'^ipy, §6, under 1st pers. Sing., comp. 24. 3 ; D is a Suff. 127'. Par. XV. 3 plur. m. (8) ^n , form 129. 2. yy; Dec. VIII. b. (9) p"'-::*, form in 129. 7 ; Dec. I. — d'^^n, form 129. 5; Deo. III. (11) D73n, Syn. 221. 3. 6. 2. (12) !inn\y3, Qamets under the n because of the Pause-Accent, which restores the original Vowel here and lengthens it. See Mdenda, § 60. Verses 13—16. 115. yp , Dec. VllI; form in 129. 2. — D?3n, see in verse 12. — n!7.''3E?3 hy ihem. — '':Dni = ''-.\^. 1 45. 5 ; see also 70. 1 . — Dn'Tl'iJa , d,- Suff., rr^n'^tt Hiph."Part.,* Synt. 217. 3. — DN ~ivith, (u") rrby, Imp. of ntjy . — Tjb nupy , either translate, make for thyself, and then 'ab is the Dative of the person to or for, Sjc, according to the com- mon rules of Syntax ; or translate simply, make, according to 191. 3. — nan, const, form of nan ; Dec. I. fem., because the Tseri is immu- table; form as in 129. 13. '^B. — *nE)j-''12y mn, 172. 2. Note. — 48 " "^^ 374 PRAXIS, GENESIS VII. fi'^SP rooms^ plur. of "jp^ , Dec. VllI ; form 129. 2. yj?. — riN in. (15) rT2n> ^'"O"^ nriT, t5eg. of O class. (16) ns^Sn, fut. Piel from nbs , with SufT. riiT- which is fern., while ^nil its antecedent is masculine, 187 and :^28. The whole phrase, which is very obscure, may perhaps be rendered, A window shalt thou make in the ark, and to a cubit shalt thou complete (reduce, curtail, limit,) it on the upper part^ viz. the deck of the ark. — rriiCa , Dec. Vlll.y. from ^2£^ form 129. 10. 2?2?. — n'»iun , fut. Kal. from D'^t), page 199. — Q'.J^nn , plur. of ^nnn, 133. l ; Sjnt. 222.3. Verses 17 — 22. 116. b^253, Dec. I, form 129. 14. '^'s. 3d class — nn;4J?, Inf Piel, 104. 4. — il-nTliN, 196. l.Note. — S'l^';, from yia , 118. V. 1. com- mon fut. ylA"; , in Pause yji*; . (18) '^nnj:!! , 24. 6. — ^iPiN in Pause, comp. ni< in 70. 3, which is a different preposition, however, from the one in question, see 157. I. (19) ri'^Jl^rb = ni'^rin^, Inf. Const. Hiph. from n^tl. (21) nji , 114. 4. a. — '^'d^H^ may be eaten, 210. 4. c— nSDNT , 209. 6. — ln:;rT1 , 209. 5. and note. — mbsiji: , 223. 2. Chap. VII. Verses 1 — 23. 117. (2) in^^na, without the article here, (l 81. l.) though in the case preceding it has it, by 165. 1. — Mirr .... "T^yN which, 196. (3) JiynUJ rt5>i'ij, seven and seven, 240. 12. — ni'^pb. Piel Inf. of JT'tn. (4) D"'a;ib, &c, lit. " For in days yet seven,'''' &c — "I'^tiJJlD ,217 3. — *'n"'nan, 209.5. c. — 'D^p'^TS, In Art. 61. 4 ; d^p^ form as 129. 38. li?, Dec.L (6)D-:73r!';ribna72r!, 170. 3. (10) n?W:?, 177. 3. a. (11) nS'iJa, Const, of n*UJ , and the Gen. which follows it is ""^nb , the in- tervening words being perhaps parenthetic; comp. 172, and 244. — Uinnbi Genitive, 170. 2. b. — m';';2.'73, from 'j"'^'?3, Dec. II. but irregu- lar in some of its cases ; Plur. as fem. Dec. IV. — n■ia"^^5, Dec. VIIl, form 129. 28. (13) dliya, 206. 2. b. — rr^iN, Const, ferii. Dec. IV. d. — (16) Cl"'N2ini, r\ Art. as pronoun, 163. 4 ; C\\2 Act. Part, of Ni2, 217. 2. — i-ii^a, connected with "iap";, 220. (17) :)i<-i;^;|=:iN^'_l, 45. 4, Fut. Kal ol Nti:3. — W~\V\\,vat-ta-rbm, Fut. Kal, from Dnn,ai>oc. fut. DT", and Hholem shortened by retracted accent makes D'^^ ya-rom. It may be made from QJ2'-\ also, (19) Hnto SiNTS. comp. 169. 1. d. — 1D?";2, Pual of !nD3. (20) inbi'73^», ba composite prep., 237. 1. — D'^'^lTiri, in Art., for vowel, see 60. 1. (22) n'^^r nni n?Op:. 172. 2. note. — T»SN3 . . . 'H^pN!, 1 96. 1 . c, and note. — nn-iUS 2 with the vowel of the Article, 61. I. 6, which must be Stghol here, 60. 1; ili'^n = JlS'^n, 129. 6, see 46. 1. — nna, from nna, 118. I. 1. (23) PRAXIS, 6ENESIS VIII. 375 riTS';] instead of n^'J, 46. 3, apoc. Fut. Niph. of lnn73. — d:ip^r|-!:3-nJ< Nona, case here, 173. 4. note 3. Chap. VIII. Verses 1— 10. 118. ^^':i^J)^ vdy-ya-shok-ku^ fut. Kal from ^f^TD. (3) ^ISX^T == niV>i;'<1, from nr>IJ. — Si'-lJI 'lib!^ continually retreaung,22b ; see aiso, 212. 2. c. and comp. note 2. — n^.p^'Oi from IniC;? , Dec. IX, Daghesh omitted after Jz, 61. IV. 3. (4) P^ni, fut. Kal of n^i:, 118. 1. 4, Fut. Apoc. — 'd;-inb,Gen. after fir. — inn, 167. 3. (5) -rion"] 1j^^^^- see in verse 3. — ^^N3, 240. 8. — ^J<"!3, Niph. of !iN-j. (6) ii":rn, form 129. 15. yy, Dec. 1. (7; iViJl iXTii"' , see in verse 3. — n'^i"^ Fem. Inf. of "il;^'' Fut. O, 110. 2, used as a noun. (8) Inii'tl, form iiiij, 4. 'rh. — ^Vj^V: , in Interrogative ; :i>i? , Praet. Kal of ^^j5. (9) S^IJni, Fut. apoc. with retracted accent, frcm inuJ. — i^njv'^^, ?!— Verb. buff, rij?'^ instead of njp';', 55. 1. (10) ^H'^}, penacuted,* Kal Fut. apoc. from V-^n, fut. b'^n", apoc. bri''. — ^0^2, penacuted, fut. Hiph. of ;]D\ — nV'^,Inf. Piel,l[05, 3. Verses 11 — 22. 119. V\'^'ofresh^ adj. agreeing with !-l^.5>, which is in the construct state, but this does not affect the form of the adjective ; comp. 172. 2. note. (12) ^n^^'J, Niph. penacuted, 1 10. li. 2, see also 77. 2. b. — SiuJ !lSp^, 225. (13) 'nD'^1, with Fattahh final because of the Resh. (16) n:!2, Imp. of n::£^, 110. 3. (17) Nriiri , in the margin or QfiH, N^'^ri, 111. 8. — ^2£-iU;'l, 209. 6. h ; the same in respect to n-i5!i, &c. (19) ntl'^nnsttJ'sb, iV'om nncuilq, fem. Dec. II ; form, 129. 1 i. (20) JliT^, Dec. Vl'l. d; form 12y.' 14. — Pii^ == ni^y, from rrbb. (21) n-j'^l, final Fattahh because of the Guttural. — nrT'Sin, form 129.27 ; root nn3, Dec. I. — ^t^m = Pj'^DiN, fut. Hiph. from !:iD"j ; see 225. — 1'^^3?:a, 133. 6. — nisnir, Inf. Hiph. from ?iS3. ('>2)i.-iT. 240 — •np, form 129. 13. ■'D. — dm , form as in 129. 10. i?2>. — ^n's-iJ^, the Silluq restores the Hholem of the ground-form rii'iJ'^ , otherwise the i would take Sheva. Chap. IX. Yerses 2—27. 120. (2) dSN'nia, from N'l'i^, Dec. II. — O^nn, from nn Dec. VIII ; form 129. 2. h. — ^^.1, ^Dec. II, from :iT — C:=n;2^ 60. 2. — 5i:n3, see Addenda, § 60. (3) V21 , in apposition with ri;3:2. Prep, omitted, 240. 9. (5) Dp;3T, 139. note 1. — DnTiiDQDV, Genitive af- ter DT implied. — vni< Ui'^N , from the hand of any one (205) [from * The word penacuted is designed to express the idea, here, and in the sequel, that the accent has been removed from the ultimate, and the vowel shortened in consequence of this. 376 PRAXIS, GENESIS XI. the hand) of his brother, i. e. from anii maii's brother^ or from any per' 5071, &c. (12) Dbiy, 161. 1. (14) "^^rya, Inf. with prep, and suff., from 'j35>, Inf. '^2^_, 116 \.b. Inf., comp. 115. 1 ; the composite Shova under the Nun, 26. 5. See 221. 3. c. — lnnN-\3, Niph. fem, frona Tliiy (18) Nnr: was, 192. 2. (20) bt1*T , apoc. fiit. Hiph. from bbn. — Wy^ in Pause, for D'^3. (21) Pi'JB^T , apoc. fut. of Sini^, without the furtive vowel, see in 123. 1. d. — "i3U;iT , in Pause, for "nsiy'l , fut. Pattahh. — ^^fl'T , apoc. fut. in Hith. from !iba ; comp. 123. 111. c. (23) tapTU. Dpc. VI. s. — n'^S'^hN. adv., D^v- an adverbial ending; de- rived from "J^riN. (25) Q"''iny lla?, 176. 1. c. (21) rc^ , apoc. fut. Hiph. from JiMS , and without the furtive vowel ; comp. verse 21. — n?.;b . . . ris: , 246./. —■^^'^1 , 61. II. 2. small print. Chap. X. Verses 9 — 25. 121. T^IS Saa , lit. a hero of the chase, vide 176. 2. c. — "naN;; , instead of "n^Jj;; ; because of the Resh. (10) "inD^Wig , fem. Dec. II. /. (16) Comp. 130. 3. (l8) n2£b3 , Niph. Praet.' of i::iB. (19) !^:D^{3, Inf with Suff. rtlD = '^ (p. 115.) lit. in thy co7ning, i. e. as thou earnest, or as one comes, 219. 3 ; prefix prep. 3 omitted, 240. 9. — trn'na , ln;r- prep. Sutfixed, meaning towards, 157. 2. g. (25) 'i^^ with a Plur. Nominative, 227. 4. Chap. XI. Verses 1 — 6. 122. d'^'inwN;, page 341. No. I. (2) D^pja , Inf. with prep, and Suff., from yD3 , Inf. 5?bD , 105. 2. a, small print; see Inf with Suff. in Par. XV, page 205. '(3) ^rt^i'^-bN •i3"'N , 207. d. — nnri , parag. Imp. (§ 192.) from in'J , Imp. lari ; Comp. 159. 2. — ^JiV: ,'fut. par- agogic 91 ; and for the construction of this and the following words, 221. 3. c. — ^^S^b 1 Q,nmets made out of Seghol, by pause-accent ; Syn. 223. 2. (4) i'jbNT] , and its head [shall be] &c, 240. 11. — iE^s: , 1 pars, plur, fut. Kal, from itns . (5) Tn^.1 , apoc. fut. of rt'l'n . — riN'ni; = niN^b , Inf of mi"^^; as a noun in the Dative, 213^ (6) D"^5^ , a — Suif., Vs Suff State of bb, and as a noun of Dec. VIII. d. — DSrtrt, Inf Hiph. with Suff. from b^n , Inf. bnrr , in Suff. state the (garnets is shortened, because the accent is moved forward ; the Tseri in the mixed syllable is also shortened, because the accent is taken off; and in the Suff. state, the second b of the ground-form de- velopes itself in the Daghesh, 115. 2, small print. — rfiiayb, Geni- tive, i. e. This is the coinm,encemcnt of their operation. — b^ tib nothing, 235. 5. — ;iar fut, from D53T , put for 5iar , 116. IV. 5. PRAXIS, GENESIS XII. 377 Verses 7 — 31. 123, iriTn?, , parag. Fut. 1. plur., from Ti"* 91. — H!:^:*] , parag. Fut. from !:i^2 , put for lnV33 , 116. IV. 5. (8) ^5^} , penacuted, Hiph. fut. from yno. — siV'^m^i, 103. I. 3. Fut. O. (9) M-jJ? , one called, 219.-- n^'^Dil , U ^r- ^"ff- which removes the Tseri under the In, by drawing down the accent. (12) "^n for "»;;;rt , as iD for Sao • (28) 'in^^i?3, fern. IV. Dec. from rTi^.-i^a. (30) "•riri} , fut. fem. apoc. from tT'lrt . — "lln with moveable T, which shews the original Root; Dec. iV"; form"l29. 1. (31) in>?, from nbs I. Fem., form 129. 1. h. Chap. XII. Verses 1—20. 124. ^b"^\ , for ^\ , from ^b^ , 32. 4. 191.3. — '^ij^N , '7— Suff. page 115,'Fut. Miph. with Suff/l26. VIII. (2) ^"IJ^iN ', for^'owels, see 59. 3. — bini •'tab , Synt. 223. 2. — in^-^iNl, parag. Fut. in Piel, 91. — ^^'^TU, "r^— the Pause form of the buff., on page 117, and is here a light Suff., removing the accent only one place ; the form of the noun is, therefore, the light Suff. form, Dec. VII. c. — il'^iT), , 1 in 61. II. 5. small ; Imp. for Fut., 211. 3. (3) ^bV.)5»1, Part.'Piel", Tseri shortened because the accent is drawn down upon ^; in the Singular number. — "^NN , fut. Kal of "rij*. (4) 'IS'l , 98. I. 1. — inN2£2, Inf. with prep, and Suff, from NX'' , common Inf. riNi? ,but veith Suff., regji/aW«/, iriNlJ; , which, by 47. 1, must go into iriNSt . (5) fliljb'n , Rebhia, as a pause accent, brings back the Pattahh of the ground-form >i;D'^ , and lengthens it; p. 381. (7) N'l^.T , apoc. fut. Niph., from riNn'. (8) Tiytn , 174. 2. o, 157. 2. g-. — D^".!, fut. apoc. of nt22, 124. 3. 6. — ri^rtN, o-ho-lo, Suff. form ofVjnN, Dec. VI. «, XT t; T ' ' "^ — ' 7 n— Suff. for "j , see on page 87. (9) 51031 ']'ibn , 212. 2 ; also 225. — naasfn , from aa?. , with m— local, 167. 2. g. (11) Minb ^'^'ip.'rt , 225. — nD-^., from rtD^ , 171.3. — ni* in Pause, for nN . (14) Nias, 213. 5. 6. (15) !)bc.^!?!! = l''^!l'!l7 see 45. 5, and 4; the composite Sheva here is used as a kind of compensation for Daghesh omitted, (17) D'^ya? ya^-)] , 221. 3. c (20) i^^-ji, 123. III. c. Chap. XIII. Verses 2—16. 125. 1'«yD?3 , form 129. 14. from root 5?D5 . — nVnna , a vvith the T T ~ ~T T • : ~ — vowel of the Article; inVnn , form 129. 22, origmal root bbh ; 1. Dec. fem. (5) D''b!nN, page 248. 15, comp. 60. 6. (9) Ni:rt/236. 4. — T^ElTj Imp. Niph., Separate thyself, 71.2. c. — "^jJtaiDn , noun 378 PRAXIS, GENESIS XV. with article, 174. 2. — !l3'2'^i< i fut. Parag. Hiph. from 'j'^a;^ , Denom. Verb, 83. 11. Class -^a. — "J^Ja^rj , noun, 174. 2. — n^-iNteipN"! , future Hiph. parag. from ]:\\53U}rT , Denom. Verb, from bNttia. (10) rrp;::??, a watered place or country. — n>7.'4? i &-C, Synt. 215. 2, 3. (13) fi'^NBH niST'b, 176. 2. e. (16) irS^-" , Hoph. of Hs;;, 79. 3. Chap. XIV. Verses 5 — 24. 126. !i3^}, fut. Hiph. of 5153 . (10) nhNi nhNi/, Synt. 169. 1. «. — n^^^t , n— local ; ^n instead of -in ,60. 1. (il) ^n|?';T , 45. 4- (12) '2,'<2i'^ HVl"^ , and in the next verse, "j^tJ M^JT] ; such tbrms very commonly designate the Imperfect of the Latin, habitabat ; commora- batur ; he was dwelling ; he habitually, usually resided; 217.2. (13) n'^^.a "'^ya , 161. 6. c. (14) p^^^n , fut. apoc. either of Kal or Hiph., from p'^'l . (15) pi.ri^.T , And they (lit. he) divided themselves (him- self) against them, [the enemy,] &c ; foi the reflexive meaning of Niph., 77. 2. c ; for the Sing, number in this and the two following verbs, see 231- 3. a, and corap. 227. 4 ; or perhaps here the Sing, is appropriated to Abraham, because he was the leader in this assault. (17) inN-jpV , fern, inf of N'^p, 121. I. 2, comp. 47. 3. note 2; Qa- mets under the *i, because the Suff. makes it a pure syllable, 55. 1. (20) "ib"")!?."^! 1 193. 2, and Abraham gave to Melchisedek. (21) ''):-]r\ , without Maqqeph "jn , Imp. of "jriS . (22) '^n72")t^ , Praet. Hiph. from fi!)-!, defectively written. (23) Di< not, 238. 2 ; Jij^it is implied here, (see the following clause,) so that ni< is to be rendered, / will not take from a thread to a shoe htchet, i. e. the least thing of any value. (24) ■^l^ba 1 compounded of ba nothing, not, and iy , Plur. '^'il\ , with Suff. of 1 pers. I'ly , lit. then, Nothing [is] to me, (i. e. I will have no- thing,) p^l except, &c. ^np": , 45. 4. Chap. XV. 127. Irja^ri , 156. 3. d. (2) ■^'l'^^?'. , 130. 3. — p'^tt-ll^j, and the Son of possession, (i. e. the possessor, 161. 6. d,) of my house will be this Damascene, Eliezer. (3) ''n'^2~1!3 , domesticus, servant, slave. — Tli^i', 217. 3. (4) Dw^-' '3 but, 158. 2. c. — ^TTiS:. , he who, 197. (5)~l33n , Hiph. Imp. from t213 , final Tseri shortened by Maqqeph. — na'^Ta'sari , plur. with il— local (6) rTlU;n:;T , 103. 3 ; Synt. 222. (7) nnr/, 114. IV. 6. — Jin^pnb , fern. Inf! of "i;"!^ , with Suff., 110. 2; Dec. VI. .r. (9) Sinp instead of np , 92. and 114. IV. a. — MUJV.'iiT: , fem. Seghol Part, in Pual, of the Denom. Verb 'ii\x^ . (10) •■ij'^Vf: PRAXIS, GENESIS XVII. 379 tllnS'n, 207. d. (11) n^:;T, apoc. Hiph, of ^-^3 . (12) NinV , 214. 1.— n^B:, fem. Segh. Part., 217. 2. (13) 5!"]n ?n;; , 212. 2.— fi!l133?2 , i. e. the foreign land or country shall reduce them, (the Is- raelites) to a state of servitude ; 193. 2. (14) "iDbN p , from 'j"'n , 217. 3. (17) nssbl, 41. I.e. Chap. XVI. Ferses 1—14. 128. n^^S73 , 147. 3. c. — nnb.TS , 213. 5. (/. (3) nmb "iV, 223. 2. (4) bjinl , fut. in Niph , from b^)5 , see 1 15. 5. small, word ^12^ , which is in Niph. fut., and comp. 116. II, forms in a and 6, which show that the short Hhireq under the Praeforni. here, is often pro- longed, i. e. becomes Tseri, as a compensation for the Daghesh omit- ted in the first Radical. Comp. 46. 1. (6) !rj"'?ym, fut. of Piel, with Yodh retained before the Suff., 126. VIII. 2, T-;— being the equiva- lent here of ''_- noted there. (7) lni<:i£a'",T instead of lriNit»'^ , 57. 2 ; Comp. 126, Note 6. (8) nnn2=:nn-i.3, Act. Part. Seghol. ofn'^a, and having Pattahh because of the Guttural. (11) ri'ib'2=n'i!r''; it is an unusual and apoc. form of present fem. Seghol. Participle. (13) ■'itl bi< , the God of vision. — Qain , &.c, Do I yet see (live, or perhaps, retain my vision, Comp. Judg. xiii. 22.) here, after my vision. — ''Mh , from ■'i^'n , as above, but with Hholem on account of the Pause-ac- cent, which lengthens here, (as often elsewhere,) the preceding com- posite Sheva, page 381. (14) H^p , one called, 219. — "^i^h "'nb , of the life of vision, i.e. of living, after a vision of God ; b has the Pat- tahh of the article before "^li life. Chap. XVII. Verses 2—26. 129. nsriN"] , 1 pers. fut. Parag. from "jn: . [5] '^ia^iJ-nN , 173. 4. note 3. [7[ b-TjbNb. ^b, 223. 2. [9] nnij/, 182. 2. ['lO] bl'73Jl , Inf Niph., probably Inf abs. as there is no difference between the forms here, 212. 3. b ; and being passive here, the agent is designated by Dp.b , 224. 1 ; lit. to be circumcised by you, i.e. you must circumcise, &c. [11] crib^arn from b^3 . [12] biTa"; , fut. Niph. from b^Ta; QDb, ut supra. — '-i3:-]2 bs'a ^ from [or of J every [any] stranger, p. 268. top. [13] bi73^ bijan , 212. 2. [14] ^to2-nN , 173. 4. note 3.— •nen, Hiph. from -^:is, 118. III. 1 ; ^cri is changed to "nsri by 55. 4, which here applies to the Praeter. See page 381. [17] "J lb in , ri Interrog, pointed as the Article, 61. V. 6 ; To the son of a hundred years shall [a son] be born ? (Comp. 240. 4.) bit'! , And Sarah too ? 380 PRAXIS, GENESIS XVIII. f)'2'n, , Shall the daughter of ninety years bear a so7i 1 240. 4 : the !ri be- fore n5 is the Interrogative. [23] b»^T , from b^a, 1J8. 1. 4. Fut. apoc. [24] i^Tana, Inf with Suff. in T^iph. ; comp. 77. 2. e. [26] V*i733 , Praet. Niph. from ^^3 ,114. II. a j and for the sing, number of the Verb, 231. 3. 1. Chap. XVIII. Verses 2—33. 130. ^nn'^\^ , 47. 3. 6, also 123. VI, comp. 80. 2.o. [4] llS^iari, Niph. 77. 2. c, recline yourselves. [5j nrip.N") , 45. 4. [6] '^rtttlT , Piel, 104. 4. [10] n§^-l5, fem. Segh. p'art.'with Guttural. [12] ■'n'ba , Inf Const, with Suff., from M^2 . [1"^] V\^r\ , In Interrogative. — "l^JJ , 1 pers. fut. of ^b'^ , Shall I indeed hear children (240. 4.) '':i<"l WHEN lam old? 238. 3. [14] Jliln'^Sj , Is any thing wonderful, (or tlifficult,) compared with Jehovah ? Synt. 175. 2. [15] fiJ<-\i=;^N'^'i without a Pause-accent. [17] rtDS^iri , n Interrog., 61. V. 4; Part. Piel, from SlDS , used as Fut. tense, 217. 3. — !n"^i>. 217. 3. [18] i"»n, Inf. abs. of n^rj, 123. 1. h ; Synt. 212. 2. fe. — ^-^ia, pUne, from "^1*1 . [19] 1*i»^7 , so THAT they will keep^ Sic ; 240. 11. — N•«nJ^ , Inf const, of i^ia, with prep, before it, and followed by subject and ob- ject, 21 5. 2, 3. — 12^ , 98. 1. [20] nan , in Pause, for Jia-^ , 3 fem. Praet of aa^ . [21 ] rrni.N , fut. parag. from Ti;;, 9 1 . 2. — nnpy^iS^i, rt Interrog. 61. V. 5 ; 3 , as, 158; — tl^^r- Suff. pronoun; ground- form iipyi? , fem. Dec. H. — ?^i<3ri , rt Art. as pron., 163. 4. — JiVs , altogether., entirely., adv., from the verb Jn^S , to complete. — nyiN , fl__ parag. 91.2; yiN in pause, 1 pers. sing. fut. from S-"!"^, instead of ^1^.1 [22] n3"li2!', -Ji:!', a Particle ; ns.— Suff., 70. 1 ; lit. still he, or yet he was standing, &c. [23] S^NH , T: Interrog. 61. V. 2. [25] Tlbbti . or !ib''bf^ 1 derived from Vbn , but used as a Particle to ex- press abhorrence ; far be it from thee, or detested let it be to thee , m'uJS'ia so that thou mayest not do, &c ; 213. b. d. [27] ■'nbj^'in, Hiph. of bNV — -iSNI -iDy, 246. a. [30] "nn^, fut. apoc. bfnnn. [32] nycrt, 179. 2. o. [33] '^^yNS, whe}i, 193. 2. ADDENDA. §. 12. To Daleth is here assigned the sound of dh = th in that ; but in the Alphabet, § 10, it is represented as = d. This appears to be inconsistent. In the Alphabet § 10, however, my design was to mark the sound which Hebrew scholars generally give to *i; in § 12, 1 have marked the sound, which appears to have been given to it by the Hebrews. The reason why Hebrew scholars on the continent of Europe sound it as cZ, is because they cannot sound dh ; which the English can easily do. § 55. By mistake, Pesiq (|) is omitted in the table of the Accents here. See page 345. § 45. 5. Note. The omission of Daghesh in such cases is marked, in some instances, by the use of a composite Sheva instead of a. simple one, under the letter that might have a Daghesh ; e.g. nrjpb instead of nnp^, Gen. ii. 23. § 60. Pause-Accents. These make many changes in the vowels, and may be placed either on the ultimate or penult syllable, even though the natural tone-syllable is changed thereby ; page 106. k. The changes occasioned by a Pause Accent may be divided into two classes; viz. I. When it falls upon the usual tone-syllable. Here it produces different effects, (a) It changes Pattahh into Q^amets ; as D";^ , D'^a ; Vbf? , btSj?. Seghol (standing for Pattahh) is changed in the same way ; as *Tb 73 , Ttb'a '■ and thus of ail nouns be- longing to the A class of Segholates in Dec. VI. (6) On the other hand, when it falls upon Tseri in the ultimate syllable of verbs, it of- ten changes it to Pattahh ; as 'isn . *i5n ; ):hp^ , Ir^j? ; ba.^'^ , hm^ ; n?"' , 'lb"; with Suff. as n?"'73i< , Db'^^N ; 'jh'^n"' , i.i''V. II, When it falls upon a syllable.^ which is not the usual tone-syllable. 1. On the penult, (a) When the ultimate syllable begins with a single consonant, and there is a vowel already belonging to the letter next preceding, if it be Pattahh, it is lengthened ; as Inn^ , lnni< ; Snriy, 1ir\y ■ if a long vowel, it remains unchanged, as "^D'ajt, "^sbN. 382 ADDENDA, (b) But if the last syllable begin with two consonants, (and of course with a Sheva vocal,) then the Pause Accent (being penultimate) oc- casions a proper vowel to be placed in the room of the Sheva. This vowel is various, according to the nature of the case. N. In verbs, the original vowel of the ground form is restored ; as MN'n,;j, InNn^ from j<^^ ; ^273l2, n3)3D from ^!;3D ; Future, ^i'^Di?'', ^irt^p"; iVom 3d. pers. Vup'^ ; ny^'^") , nWi^"" from y"3l2J"; . In the sec- ond and last cases, the Fattahh of the ground form is restored and lengthened ; which is the usual fact, in all cases of this nature. Even silent Sheva, in some cases, is changed by the Pause Accent, and the previous syllable removed ; as !ny73">p with in parag., Mi;52;p in Pause. a. In verbs inb, the Pattahh of the ground form is not only restor- ed and lengthened, but the Yodh of the Root also is restored, in cas- es where it usually falls out; as ^^2 , ^""t:: from ft'oz = ''tss ; VfZ. ^I'^i'a, Imper. from Tt^yi: = "^^-'2. i,. In nouns, and other parts of speech, [I] Simple Sheva goes into Seghol; as Dp;2j, &3"«2; ; '^sbtt , 'rjsba. [2] Composite Sheva into the corresponding vowel; as">:M, "iiN , i. e. Pattahh is lengthened; bn;, "'bn. No instance of ii/?a«c///i .Se^Ao/ occurs. Note. A {ew anomalies occur here; as "^"iJ-; , '"IS'.; "^^H , '^^n. 2. On the ultimate. Here it prolongs the vowel, if it be short; as nX3*''T with Qamets Hhateph in the ultimate, but in Pause ri/D'l with Bholem. Note. The effect of Pause-Accents is iiot uniform. In a great number of cases, no change is occasioned by them. On the other hand, the Disjunctives, and even several of the Conjunctives occa- sionally produce the same effect in prolonging syllables, as the Pause- Accents. It is sufficiently evident from this, that the changes above are merely euphonic and arbitrary. § 91. Note on No. 3. The fern, form of the third person of the future, is the subject of Apocope., in the same manner as the mascu- line forms there exhibited. But the fern, of the second person sing- ular, and all plur. 2 and 3. persons do not suffer any Apocope, be- cause they do not end with the radical letter of the verb, and Apoco- pe would interfere with their afformative syllables. Comp. No. 3. Apocope here then is limited to the singular number, and to the 3 persons masc. and feminine, and the 2. pers. masculine. 4 ';'2. Note. If any exception is to be made from this, it is, that ADDENDA. 803 a very few forms in the 2 pi. fern, appear to suffer a kind of Apocope ; e.g. "jya'iJ for n35;73"»p ; )i^.'^p^ fornjN^P § 126. Note 15. What is said of the Tseri in Fie/ here, applies to Tseri in the ending of any Conjugation or Class of Verbs, when placed in the same circumstances ; e. g. ini!?.DNn, without Suff. i'Dftin, Gen. iii. 17. The comp. Sheva here is anomalous. § 177. Note on Nos. 1 and 2. What is said here has respect merely to the appearance of the Cardinal forms. In reality, the forms apparently masculine Sive feminine^ and vice versa., as may be seen in Appendix A. § 213. The Infinitive Construct is used in all the Cases, just as a noun, so far as the construction, position, government, and even phase of the word is concerned ; only it has, from the nature of the case, no Plural, and no absolute state. At the same time, it may and does, whenever the construction requires it, govern the same Case after it, as any form in the Indicative mood of the same verb would govern. By mistake, an instance to illustrate the Dative case of the Infinitive is omitted in the Syntax, The Inf is often put in this Case. § 218. Impersonal Verbs commonly take the Dative after them, with the Preposition V . If we translate them as personal verbs, the subject of the Verb is to be made, by rendering this Dative case as a Nominative. E. g. *5d 1^ , lam grieved., lit. it is grievous to me. ERRATA. [The following table o[ Errata is the result of the joint labours of a Class con- sisting of near forty young men, who have used the Grammar for two months in their studies. Those marked * are found only in some of the copies of the Grammar, and result from the breaking of the types, or other accidental causes. Many others might have been spared, according to common usage in such cases ; but for the sake of liberating the student from any embarrass- ment, every error in the Hebrew, however trifling, which has been discover- ed, has been noted.] §. 10. Alphabet ir, for Tsade read Tsadhe. § 20. 3. 1. 5, and ,— and \ § 21. 2. 6. 1. 3, liqrath — llqrath. § 23. 6. I. 3, ado-nay — adho nay. § 24. 4.1. 3. mTjb-; — niai:':* § 25.1. a. note 1, 1. 7, § 31. 3. 6. — § 31. 3. a. § 27. 2.' 1. 5, ga boah — ga-bhoah. §31.2. c. 1. 2, d-i^^na — D'^'n/lHa. § 36. 4. less. Distinc. add (i) Pesiq to them ; see p. 345. § 38. Exemplification 22. 1. 1, § 48. 4. a — § 23. 4. a. 23. 1. 2. "'in'^ — ^i^\ 28. 1. 2, ha-ho-shekh—ha-hhoshekh. 29. 1. 5,e-hadh — e-hhadh. V. 7. 1. 3. meal — me-'ai. v. 9. 1. 1, mit-ta-hath — mit-ta hhath. 1.2, e-hadh — e-hhadh. § 41. GvllafiSaivM — GvllafiSavM^ bis. § 44. b. 1. 2. rtiy — inbl? * c. 1. 10. GOQikoi — GVQi^oi. § 47. 4. 1.3, aip — Dip. § 51.3. Note 2. larger vowel — longer vowel. § 53. 2. 1. 2, § 140, note 3. a — § 140. 2. and Par. e. § 55. 4. 1. 3, Hiphal — Hiphil. § 60. 3. 1. 7, instead of — which is usually written. § 61. II. 5. note 1. anN5 — •'jnN:.* § 69. 8. 1. 3, Dli^n-inst — dtn-^nini*. 10. Par. 1. 1, i, tl-'O^O — D-'DlO. § 77. 2. e. 1. 2, DJl!:.: — onbV § 80. 2. a. 1. 4, i^llt — bSD.* 1. 5, ^72n"i:ri — -iTanTuri.* 1. 6. n^inuJri — ianlp;^.* §87^ 2. a. 1. 4, Hophal — Pual. § 93. i. 1. 5, irtD.i? .1 — baj?":}. §99.1. c, for a second id) — (/) and for fe) — {g). § 102. After division 1. insert before the next par. 2. § 103. 3. 1. 4, i?nn^— Hanv* § 105. 3. 1. 4, 5?aia — y^'"^.* § 108. VI. "•D'^Tn — ■'3'i.Tn. § i lo. 3. 1. 4, nuiiD — a-ij-iD.* 1. 5, Fut. — Inf. § iii.3. 1. 8, at:^— nur* §113.4.1.3, UJa — ttja. § 114. I. 6. 1. 1, «^;j, ':ja — uja, Ja. § 117. 7. note 6. 1. 6, fi^p^— aip\* § 126. note 6. 1. 7, tilnN^Ta": — WN;i£72\ § 127. Par. , I. Kal Part. act. 1113 — nas and dele iriaa. Niph.Fut. 2. m. sing. !?r|j?n — bC!|?n. Pual Praet. 1. pi. ID^np. — ^^^J3p.- ^"f- const, bnp — itap.. Hith. Praet. 2. f. pi. 'jribrii?rir| — 'jnbtaj^m". Par. V. Kal.'lmp. 386 ERRATA. 2./. plural, riiBoN — InDb'^N. Par. VI. Niph. Fut. 1. sing. nyjJifi* — nyjnfit. Imp./- s. ■'l-'^piri — ■'n-'UJir:. Par. VII. Hiph. Imp. /.'sing. ^i^q-'Sn — ■'i^b"»r[. pi. ri3ib-»n — tnsib^rt. Par. VI ll. Hoph. Fut. 2. /. pi. n3riSPi — >i:nkn. Par. IX. Niph. fut. 3 m. pi. W^^^ — TO5i"i.* Hoph. Pr. 1. sing. Ti'^j^^i — '^n"4:\^7. Fut. 3. m. sing. 'X/^"^ — •cia"'. Par. X. Niph. Imp. m. pi. sisbri — ^asri. /. pi. nraorj — npa.Dn. Par. XI. Niph. Imp./, pi. inSttpri — ^DTspi-f Par. Xll. Kal. Pr. 2. m. sing, nira — ni^a. l pi. n:'i3''n— nsi^a. Par. XIII. Niph. Fut. 2. / pl.ln:N^73n — n3N2£72n. Hith. Fut, 2./. pi. ?i3i— . § 137. 1. Dec.' a, O^^O^D — DS'^d^d! 6, Di'^'niaa — D5"'*:\'iaa. II. Dec. 6, d:3"'SDi3 — diD-aais. III. Dec. ti, 3i-)DT — '^D'i'iqT.* VI. Dec. ^, d^-iso — D^'nDp. ' k, fi'^'^^n — Q^l^n- ' VII. Dec. a, ''a'^fi^ — '^a'^N.* 6,''^^D'ip — ""^aip.* D3"'buip — QD-'btqip.* c, ■'bDp;o — ""bapT^.* "'bapTa — "^btspa.* a^'^bapa — nD''V.^p'3* Dual Nouns, Dec. IV, C^o^is — ta^ljS-* § 144. i.'l. 6, D^n?3 — D^n72. § 147. Dec. VI. 1. 1, rip^trj — npfrj.* VII. 1. 1, m^ — niit.* vill. 1. 4, ^pn — np^rr. § I48.'ll. Dec.'j, nasri — rt?33n.* § 151. note 3. 1. 4,'nTi:i:73 — m'niS:^.* §166.3. e. 1. 2, aiD — aiD.* 1. 3, n"!N-ii3 — niN-ii:.* § 162. i. 1. 3, awfjoov — 009)01/. §168.4. 1.3, Jiin — n]h\* § 172. i.g. 1. 1, mp^: — Dipa.* 1. 1. 1, nnN — nm. ' § 179." 1. 1. 2, d^:"«23 — D^a-ij. § 192. 1, 1. 4, l^jta — 'j^s^..* § 216. 4. 6. 1. 6,^;)55.-a ~ -in^a. 7. 1. 9, n;:i7n_ — rt!l-|m.* § 212. 3. c. 1. 2, '^ibin — ^ibn.* § 213. 6. 1. 7, ^Nas — ''N33.* App. [A] No. I. I. 2, D";n\lj — Wrp. No. 111. 1. I, d""^Tp3> — a^iU?.* Page 341. No. Ill, ^^ti — i'a'ijn. Praxis 50, 61. II. 3. — 61. II. 2. 68. id. Before 62, verse 14 — verse 13. \\ K ' / -• ^ i Q Qj L / 7 i *« i^?^ ^Wf w«r r^: ^■'^fl /W^\ '-l-\ W:'^